<<

NEW DIRECTIONS IN HISTORY

The Rise and Fall of the Victorian Three- Troy J. Bassett

[email protected] New Directions in

Series Editors Shafquat Towheed Faculty of Arts Open University , UK

Jonathan Rose Department of History Drew University Madison, NJ, USA

[email protected] As a vital field of scholarship, book history has now reached a stage of maturity where its early work can be reassessed and built upon. That is the goal of New Directions in Book History. This series will publish mono- graphs in English that employ advanced methods and open up new fron- tiers in research, written by younger, mid-career, and senior scholars. Its scope is global, extending to the Western and non-Western worlds and to all historical periods from antiquity to the twenty-first century, including studies of script, print, and post-print cultures. New Directions in Book History, then, will be broadly inclusive but always in the vanguard. It will experiment with inventive methodologies, explore unexplored archives, debate overlooked issues, challenge prevailing theories, study neglected subjects, and demonstrate the relevance of book history to other academic fields. Every title in this series will address the evolution of the historiog- raphy of the book, and every one will point to new directions in book scholarship. New Directions in Book History will be published in three formats: single- ; edited collections of essays in sin- gle or multiple volumes; and shorter works produced through Palgrave’s e-book (EPUB2) ‘Pivot’ stream. Book proposals should emphasize the innovative aspects of the work, and should be sent to either of the two series editors.

Editorial Board Marcia Abreu, University of Campinas, Brazil Cynthia Brokaw, Brown University, USA Matt Cohen, University of Texas at Austin, USA Archie Dick, University of Pretoria, South Africa Martyn Lyons, University of New South Wales, Australia

More information about this series at http://www.palgrave.com/gp/series/14749

[email protected] Troy J. Bassett The Rise and Fall of the Victorian Three-Volume Novel

[email protected] Troy J. Bassett Purdue University Fort Wayne Fort Wayne, IN, USA

New Directions in Book History ISBN 978-3-030-31925-0 ISBN 978-3-030-31926-7 () https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-030-31926-7

© The Editor(s) (if applicable) and The Author(s), under exclusive license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2020 This work is subject to copyright. All rights are solely and exclusively licensed by the Publisher, whether the whole or part of the material is concerned, specifically the rights of , reprinting, reuse of illustrations, recitation, broadcasting, reproduction on microfilms or in any other physical way, and transmission or information storage and retrieval, electronic adaptation, computer software, or by similar or dissimilar methodology now known or hereafter developed. The use of general descriptive names, registered names, trademarks, service marks, etc. in this publication does not imply, even in the absence of a specific statement, that such names are exempt from the relevant protective laws and regulations and therefore free for general use. The publisher, the and the editors are safe to assume that the advice and informa- tion in this book are believed to be true and accurate at the date of publication. Neither the publisher nor the authors or the editors give a warranty, expressed or implied, with respect to the material contained herein or for any errors or omissions that may have been made. The publisher remains neutral with regard to jurisdictional claims in published maps and institutional affiliations.

Cover credit: “A Visit to Mudie’s,” Society, vol. 16, November 1869, p. 448

This Palgrave Macmillan imprint is published by the registered company Springer Nature Switzerland AG The registered company address is: Gewerbestrasse 11, 6330 Cham, Switzerland

[email protected] Epigraph

As a consequence, the magazine in particular and the circulating in general do not foster the growth of the novel which reflects and reveals life. They directly tend to exterminate it by monopolizing all liter- ary space. —, “Candour in English Fiction” (1890)

v

[email protected] Acknowledgements

Isaac Newton once wrote, “If I have seen further it is by standing on the shoulders of giants.” After over fifteen years of working on this book, I think I have some idea of what he meant. At every turn of my research—whether Victorian , library business practices, book economics, or quantitative book history—I found works by John Sutherland and Simon Eliot had preceded me. For a large part, my work continues and expands their original lines of inquiry. In addition, they both have unfailingly encouraged and supported my work through their generous advice over the years. So, in honor of their example, I ded- icate this work to them. But they were not the only shoulders I stood upon. I have been fortu- nate to receive the help and support of many generous scholars during my labors for which I am thoroughly grateful, including Stephen Colclough, David Finkelstein, Katherine Harris, Leslie Howsam, Linda K. Hughes, Andrew King, Graham Law, Patrick Leary, Kirsten Macleod, Anthony Mandal, Richard Menke, Robert L. Patten, Linda H. Peterson, Jennifer Phegley, Allen Riddell, Matthew Rubery, and Cheryl A. Wilson. Over the last two decades, I received helpful feedback from presenting my work at several Eighteenth- and Nineteenth-Century British Women Writers Asso- ciation, Midwest Victorian Studies Association, North American Victorian Studies Association, Research Society for Victorian Periodicals, and Soci- ety for the History of Authorship, , and Publishing conferences.

vii

[email protected] viii ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

At the University of Kansas, my dissertation director Dorice Williams Elliott along with Peter Casagrande, Richard Hardin, and George Worth well deserve my gratitude for both piquing my interest in Victorian lit- erature and shepherding my dissertation (which formed the basis for 4) to completion. At Purdue University Fort Wayne, I have been blessed with supportive department and college colleagues including Hardin Aasand, Carl Drummond, Damian Fleming, Rachel Hile, Debo- rah Huffman, Andrew Kopec, Lewis Roberts, and Michael Stapleton. The people at Palgrave Macmillan have been a joy to work with on this project—it is a personal thrill to be published by one of the Victorian publishers discussed in this book. I would like to thank the series editors Jonathan Rose and Shafquat Towheed as well as the manuscript referee Andrew Nash, the managing editors, and production editors. The digital humanities project underlying this book, At the Circulat- ing Library: A Database of Victorian Fiction, 1837–1901, has received generous support from a variety of sources including a Summer Fac- ulty Research Grant and a Faculty Course Release Grant from Purdue University Fort Wayne; the Fredson Bowers Award from The Bibliograph- ical Society; a Summer Stipend from the National Endowment for the Humanities; a Summer Faculty Research Grant from the Purdue Research Foundation; and a Curran Fellowship from the Research Society for Vic- torian Periodicals. For their confidences in my research, I thank them. Two sections of Chapter 1 originally appeared as articles: “The Production of Three-Volume , 1863–1897” in Papers of the Biblio- graphical Society of America, volume 102 (2008), revised and republished with permission of the University of Chicago Press; and “The Victorian Four-Volume Novel” in The Library: The Transactions of the Bibliographi- cal Society volume 17 (2016), revised and republished with permission of University Press. A shorter version of Chapter 2 was published as “Living on the Margin: George Bentley and the Economics of the Three- Volume Novel, 1865–70” in Book History, volume 13 (2010). Two sec- tions of Chapter 4 also originally appeared as articles: “Circulating Morals: George Moore’s Attack on Late-Victorian Literary Censorship” in Pacific Coast Philology, volume 40 (2005), revised and republished with permis- sion of Penn State University Press; and “T. Fisher Unwin’s Pseudonym Library: Literary Marketing and Authorial Identity” in in Transition, 1880–1920, volume 47 (2004), revised and republished with permission of the ELT Press. I would like to thank all

[email protected] ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS ix the journal editors and their presses for allowing me to revise and re-use these works as parts of this book. And last, but certainly not least, I would like to acknowledge the unwavering support of my family: my parents Jim and Linda, my wife Jen, and my children Joseph and Helen. They have collectively and patiently endured numerous research trips and long monologues on Victorian pub- lishing with loving grace.

[email protected] Contents

1 Introduction 1

2 The Production of Multi-volume Fiction, 1837–1898 19 At the Circulating Library: A Database of Victorian Fiction, 1837–1901 20 General Production of Multi-volume Fiction, 1837–1898 23 Format and Price 31 Authors 40 Publishers 55 Serialization 69 Conclusion 94

3 Publishing the Three-Volume Novel: The Experience of Richard Bentley and Son 101 Richard Bentley, 1865–1870 103 Richard Bentley and Son, 1885 126 Richard Bentley and Son, 1890 134 Conclusion 141

4 Buying, Renting, and Selling the Multi-volume Novel: The Economics of W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library 147 The Operation of W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library 151

xi

[email protected] xii CONTENTS

The Accounts of W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library 157 The ’ Ultimatum of 1894 171 Coda: Reactions to the Libraries’ Ultimatum 177

5 De-monopolizing Literary Space: Alternatives to the Three-Volume Novel 183 and the New Romance 186 George Moore and Literary Censorship 195 J. W. Arrowsmith, T. Fisher Unwin, and Series Publication 210 Conclusion 228

Bibliography 237

Index 247

[email protected] List of Figures

Fig. 2.1 Multi-volume titles published, 1837–1898 24 Fig. 2.2 Multi-volume titles published by gender, 1837–1898 47 Fig. 2.3 Serialization of multi-volume fiction, 1837–1898 78 Fig. 2.4 Serialization of multi-volume fiction and author gender, 1837–1898 91 Fig. 4.1 Label for Mudie’s Select Library 1880 150 Fig. 4.2 Label for W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library 1879 150

xiii

[email protected] List of Tables

Table 2.1 Multi-volume titles published, 1837–1840 24 Table 2.2 Multi-volume titles published, 1841–1850 24 Table 2.3 Multi-volume titles published, 1851–1860 25 Table 2.4 Multi-volume titles published, 1861–1870 25 Table 2.5 Multi-volume titles published, 1871–1880 26 Table 2.6 Multi-volume titles published, 1881–1890 26 Table 2.7 Multi-volume titles published, 1891–1898 27 Table 2.8 Multi-volume titles and overall titles published, 1840–1898 28 Table 2.9 Multi-volume titles and overall fiction titles published, 1870–1894 29 Table 2.10 Four-volume novels, 1837–1878 34 Table 2.11 Most prolific authors of multi-volume fiction, 1837–1898 42 Table 2.12 Multi-volume titles published by gender, 1837–1840 44 Table 2.13 Multi-volume titles published by gender, 1841–1850 44 Table 2.14 Multi-volume titles published by gender, 1851–1860 45 Table 2.15 Multi-volume titles published by gender, 1861–1870 45 Table 2.16 Multi-volume titles published by gender, 1871–1880 46 Table 2.17 Multi-volume titles published by gender, 1881–1890 46 Table 2.18 Multi-volume titles published by gender, 1891–1898 47 Table 2.19 Most prolific Irish, Scottish, Welsh, and colonial authors, 1837–1898 51 Table 2.20 Irish-, Scottish-, Welsh-, and colonial-authored multi-volume fiction titles published, 1837–1898 52 Table 2.21 Most prolific foreign authors, 1837–1898 54

xv

[email protected] xvi LIST OF TABLES

Table 2.22 Foreign-authored multi-volume fiction titles published, 1837–1898 54 Table 2.23 Twenty most prolific publishers, 1837–1898 57 Table 2.24 Most prolific publishers, 1837–1840 58 Table 2.25 Most prolific publishers, 1841–1850 58 Table 2.26 Most prolific publisher, 1851–1860 59 Table 2.27 Most prolific publishers, 1861–1870 59 Table 2.28 Most prolific publishers, 1871–1880 60 Table 2.29 Most prolific publishers, 1881–1890 60 Table 2.30 Most prolific publishers, 1891–1898 61 Table 2.31 Twenty most prolific publishers and gender of authors, 1837–1898 68 Table 2.32 Periodicals carrying multi-volume fiction titles, 1837–1898 71 Table 2.33 Serialization of multi-volume fiction, 1837–1898 76 Table 2.34 Multi-volume fiction titles serialized by periodical type, 1837–1898 79 Table 2.35 Most prolific periodicals, 1837–1898 86 Table 2.36 Multi-volume fiction titles serialized by authorship, 1837–1898 89 Table 2.37 Most prolific serial authors, 1837–1898 92 Table 3.1 Three-volume novel titles published by Bentley, 1865–1870 105 Table 3.2 Bentley’s account for Florence Marryat’s Too Good for Him (1865) 114 Table 3.3 Bentley’s average costs of production for three-volume novels, 1865–1870 115 Table 3.4 Three-volume novels published by Bentley, 1885 127 Table 3.5 Bentley’s average costs of production for three-volume novels, 1885 130 Table 3.6 Three-volume novels published by Bentley, 1890 135 Table 3.7 Bentley’s average costs of production for three-volume novels, 1890 138 Table 3.8 Tinsley Brothers’ account for Hardy’s Desperate Remedies (1871) 142 Table 4.1 Fiction holdings of Mudie’s Select Library, 1857–1894 155 Table 4.2 W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library accounts, 1860–1865 158 Table 4.3 W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library accounts, 1876–1890 161 Table 4.4 W. H. Smith net profits, 1870–1892 165

[email protected] LIST OF TABLES xvii

Table 4.5 W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library accounts, 1892–1896 167 Table 4.6 One-volume reprints of three-volume novels, 1870–1893 175 Table 5.1 Late-Victorian publishers’ series featuring new fiction 212

[email protected] CHAPTER 1

Introduction

For many students of Victorian fiction, the term “three-volume novel” conjures up the image of bulky and expensive native only to the British Isles and the overly wordy and subplot laden texts they contained. The format served a large reading audience through the hundreds of cir- culating libraries which bought, rented, and sold fiction. Nearly, every canonical author of the period appeared in the ubiquitous format of three volumes priced at one-and-a-half guineas, including first editions of Charlotte Brontë, , George Eliot, Thomas Hardy, Mar- garet Oliphant, William Makepeace Thackeray, and Anthony Trollope. Several hundreds more obscure authors wrote the remaining novels, and another few hundred publishers sold them. The synergistic commercial and literary connections between the publishing format and circulating libraries, especially the largest Mudie’s Select Library and W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library, have become popular wisdom in liter- ary studies. Yet, the publishing format itself remains curiously under- examined. Even relatively basic questions are still unanswered, such as: how many three-volume novels were published, who wrote and published them, what were the economics of the format for both publishers and cir- culating libraries, why did the format last so long, and why did it end when it did? The latter question, at least, has one simple answer: the joint ultimatum from the two largest Victorian circulating libraries, Mudie’s and W. H. Smith, addressed to publishers in June 1894 calling for the end of the format. However, even the ultimatum does not completely

© The Author(s) 2020 1 T. J. Bassett, The Rise and Fall of the Victorian Three-Volume Novel, New Directions in Book History, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-030-31926-7_1

[email protected] 2 T. J. BASSETT explain the long history or final end of the format. This study aims to address these questions and give a general cultural and economic history of the three-volume novel during the Victorian period. When Scottish publisher Archibald Constable (1774–1827) published Sir Walter Scott’s novel Kenilworth in an of three octavo volumes at the eye-catching price of one-and-a-half guineas (£1.11.6) in January 1821, he could have little dreamed that he would set a publishing stan- dard which would last three-quarters of a century. The publishing format of the three-volume novel or triple-decker began as one publisher’s cal- culated gamble but was eventually adopted by his rivals as the prestige format for new fiction aimed at middle-class readers. Prior to the 1820s, publishers issued novels in formats ranging anywhere from one to seven (and sometimes more) volumes in a set based mostly on the convenience or whim of the publisher. For instance, in the eighteenth century, canoni- cal novels such as Henry Fielding’s The History of Tom Jones, a Foundling (1749) appeared in four or six volumes, Samuel Richardson’s The History of Sir Charles Grandison (1764) appeared in seven volumes and Frances Burney’s Cecilia: or, The Memoirs of a Heiress (1782) appeared in five vol- umes. Even by the end of the century, novels still frequently appeared in editions of five or more volumes in a set.1 As Peter Garside and Rainer Schöwerling show in The English Novel 1770–1829 (2000), the early years of the nineteenth century witness a gradual shift toward three volumes as the most common set size for the novel.2 In the first decade of the 1800s, a novel was just as likely to appear in an edition of two, three, or four volumes. By the 1820s, nearly half of all novels appeared in an edi- tion of three volumes, with corresponding declines in novels published in two, four, or more volumes. Of the 81 total new fiction titles published in 1829, 48 titles first appeared in a three-volume edition (59.3%). The shift did not escape the notice of readers: as novelist and reviewer Henry Mackenzie observed in 1821, “The mystical Number 3 seems in mod- ern times to be worshipped… that being the common standard for the Number of Vols in which most of the favorite Fictions of the day are set forth.”3 Garside and Schöwerling attribute the rise of the three-volume novel to three factors. First, commercial considerations motivated publishers to curb larger set sizes for editions since their larger prices prevented individ- ual sales—the price of the three-volume novel, in the view of publishers, was the maximum purchasers would pay, around 5s or 6s per volume—for instance, ’s first novel Sense and Sensibility (3 volumes; 1811)

[email protected] 1 INTRODUCTION 3 cost 15s for the set.4 Second, the shift to octavo volumes (with 8 leaves per gathering) from duodecimo volumes (12 leaves per gathering) pro- gressed unevenly over the course of these years: novels overwhelmingly appeared in the latter format and more serious works (e.g., history or biography) utilized the former. The octavo format led to more imposing- looking volumes compared to the daintier-looking duodecimo volumes.5 Visually, at least, fiction and nonfiction looked noticeably different on the bookshelf of libraries, perhaps reinforcing the low critical regard for fiction during the Romantic period best illustrated by the Gothic fiction pub- lished by the Minerva Press in the smaller format. Last, the unprecedented success of Scott and his Waverley novels gave the three-volume format a cultural prestige that other authors and publishers quickly exploited. As many scholars have established, when Scott turned to fiction writing, he gave the novel genre a considerable critical and economic boost. Consta- ble published each of his first four novels—Waverley (1814), Guy Man- nering (1815), The Antiquary (1816), and Rob Roy (1818)—in three duodecimo volumes with prices ranging from 21s to 24s per set, a higher price but still the familiar format.6 With Ivanhoe,publishedon20Decem- ber 1819, Constable used three octavo volumes priced at 30s per set (or 10s per volume, twice the usual price), a format and price in line with works of history and biography, with higher-quality paper and type, and generally out of line for fiction.7 All of Scott’s subsequent novels came out in the octavo format and other novel publishers gradually shifted to the octavo format. A year later, Constable published Kenilworth, thereby setting a standard for new fiction—octavo volumes at 10s 6d per vol- ume—which would stubbornly persist to nearly the end of the Victorian period. A few short years later, nearly a third of the three-volume novels published in 1826 listed at this higher price and nearly all of the 45 triple- deckers published in 1829 did as well.8 John Sutherland, in his biography of Scott, rightly calls Kenilworth “one of the most influential novels ever published in English,” a lasting cultural influence for an otherwise forgot- ten novel.9 By the 1840s, the three-volume novel became an established staple of British publishing with half as many two-volume novels produced and a score of four-volume novels. Despite periodic complaints from authors, publishers, libraries, critics, and readers, the format enjoyed continu- ous literary and financial success throughout the century. In fact, little outwardly changed in the appearance of a triple-decker between Scott’s Kenilworth and the last three-volume novel, G. A. Henty’s The Queen’s

[email protected] 4 T. J. BASSETT

Cup (1897). The conventional story of the three-volume novel gener- ally blames the circulating libraries—in particular Mudie’s and Smith—for encouraging their production. In economic terms, these large libraries exercised a monopsony control over the production of new fiction and created a negative feedback loop: because of high prices, only libraries could afford multi-volume novels; and because only libraries bought multi-volume novels, the prices remained stubbornly high. Accordingly, the developments of part-publication, cheap reprints, and serialization, for instance, have been seen as a means by which publishers worked around the libraries to directly reach the reading public. Throughout the nineteenth century, many critics lamented the fact that was a book borrowing not a book buying society, for which the three-volume novel became the convenient symbol or target of their attacks. Other critics, such as George Moore, blamed the three-volume novel and the libraries for exerting an undue influence over the development and con- tents of English fiction—some scholars even laud Moore’s personal cru- sade against Mudie as partially responsible for ending the format. For these reasons and others, the three-volume novel has often been seen as a format perpetually under attack and in decline during the Victorian period, hounded by competitors, critics, and challenges from all sides. In this light, the libraries’ ultimatum in 1894 often gets presented as a qui- etistic act of acknowledgment by the libraries that the format had finally had its day. While this conventional story of the three-volume novel has some truth to it, as we shall see, the reality was much more complicated. Though often mentioned in passing in literary histories or criticism of Victorian fiction, the three-volume novel format rarely garners scholarly attention on its own. In a 1957 article in The Papers of the Bibliograph- ical Society of America, Charles E. Lauterbach and Edward S. Lauter- bach examined 105 Victorian three-volume novels in order to determine the typical word count, number of chapters, number of pages, and other statistics and found a broad range in text length: on average, the typical length of a three-volume novel ranged from 158 000 to 200 000 words with a few examples considerably shorter or longer.10 If anything, their analysis shows the flexibility of the three-volume format: short texts could be (and often were) padded out to fill the volumes (e.g., excessive chapter breaks, large margins, heavy leading), whereas longer texts could be shoe- horned into its three volumes (e.g., smaller type, additional pages). Their work represents one of a handful of descriptive bibliographical treatments of the format which however do not address the marketplace conditions

[email protected] 1 INTRODUCTION 5 for its existence. The three-volume novel figures largely in two literary his- tories published in the 1960s. Royal Gettmann’s A Victorian Publisher: A Study of the Bentley Papers (1960) dedicates a chapter to the three-decker in his history of the prolific and longtime publisher Richard Bentley and his son George Bentley. (As we shall see in Chapter 2, Bentley was the second-most prolific publisher of multi-volume fiction during the period.) Gettmann finds in Bentley’s agreements with authors that the publisher encouraged them to produce manuscripts to fit three octavo volumes of about 300 pages each with 25 lines of text per page.11 Some authors, he finds, struggled to meet such requirements. Gettmann observes that “a novel in three volumes commanded a substantially higher price than a shorter one” from Bentley which he attributes (without proof) to “pres- sure from the circulating libraries,” Mudie’s in particular, to produce them.12 He later undercuts this observation when examining some corre- spondence between Charles Edward Mudie and Bentley from the 1880s in which the former complains about the short circulating life of many of Bentley’s novels and pleads for a slowdown in the production of them.13 When Arthur Mudie took over from his father in the 1890s, he took a harder line with publishers such as Bentley culminating with the ultima- tum in 1894. While Gettmann’s study is groundbreaking for its time, it relies primarily on anecdotes rather than larger quantitative data to sup- port its argument. Guinevere L. Griest’s Mudie’s Circulating Library and the Victorian Novel (1970) devotes more space to the discussion of the three-volume novel in her study of the largest of Victorian circulating libraries. She observes, “Novels in three volumes were naturally good business for the circulating library” since at the rates of one guinea to borrow one volume at a time and two guineas to borrow three,

Mudie could circulate one three-decker to three separate subscribers, pay- ing a total of three guineas a year, or an entire novel for two guineas to families or to those readers who were impatient for news of the outcome of the proposal to wait until the volume could be exchanged. Works in three volumes enabled the librarian to double or triple the profit he would have from a single-decker.14

Because the business records of Mudie’s do not exist, she is unable to substantiate these claims that a three-volume novel bought for a discount produced a greater profit for the library than a corresponding one-volume novel.15 Griest spends more attention on the format’s effect on English

[email protected] 6 T. J. BASSETT

fiction: the libraries, as one of if not the chief distributors of fiction, served as de facto censors of literature, hence the “select” in Mudie’s Select Library. Thus, the three-volume novel format also imposed moral or content-based constraints on authors, especially in terms of sexual rela- tions, that some authors such as Rhoda Broughton, Moore, and Ouida chaffed against. These attacks, in her view, contributed to the collapse of the three-volume novel culminating in the admission by Mudie that the format no longer paid its way.16 Both Gettmann and Griest, by each focusing on a single player in the three-volume fiction system, necessar- ily miss the larger dynamics of the publishing marketplace.17 Regrettably, both also lack any substantive quantitative data to support their claims. In the subsequent decades, several scholars have discussed the three- volume novel from a cultural materialist or economic point of view which later became the vanguard for the new History of the Book field. But even within this broad field, approaches range from the empirical to the theoretical. Chief among the former approach, John Sutherland produced several works examining the Victorian fiction marketplace based on sig- nificant archival work. His book Victorian Novelists and Publishers (1976) examines the publishing history of several novels by exploring the inter- actions between the authors (Ainsworth, Dickens, Eliot, Hardy, Kingsley, Lever, Thackeray, and Trollope) and their publishers (Bentley, Blackwood, Chapman and Hall, Longman, Macmillan, and Smith, Elder) to show how their novels were “materially influenced by the publishing system, for good or ill” which includes contracts, , format, and serialization practices.18 Several of the books he considers appeared as two-, three-, or four-volume novels, and he traces how the influence of the publishing format pervaded the chain of production from libraries to publishers to authors. In a short article from the same period, Sutherland’s “The Eco- nomics of the Victorian Three-Volume Novel” considers the economics of the format based a handful of publishers’ accounts and argues that the three-volume novel persisted because it was “commercially safe.”19 His investigations culminated in The Stanford Companion to Victorian Fiction (1989; revised 2014): though mainly intended as a reference book, its 1606 author, genre, periodical, publisher, and title entries create a thor- ough economic, literary, and sociological literary history of the Victorian novel. As he writes elsewhere, “Despite fifty years of intense, academically- sponsored research into the form [of Victorian fiction], we still make do with only the sketchiest sense of the infrastructure of Victorian fiction— how the bulk of it was produced; who originated, reproduced, distributed

[email protected] 1 INTRODUCTION 7 and consumed the product.”20 Following his lead, the research into Vic- torian publishing history has increased significantly.21 Eschewing the archival work of Sutherland, N. N. Feltes’s Modes of Production of Victorian Novels (1986) takes a much more theoretical approach to “understand historically the material conditions for the pro- duction of Victorian novels generally.”22 His five chapters, spaced at roughly twenty-year intervals, each examine one novel and one mode of production (part-publication, three-volume novel, magazine serialization, bi-monthly publication, and one-volume novel, respectively) in order to argue for “the importance of such details as format as being the con- crete mediations of the historical in the production of novels, determin- ing in complex ways the actual production of a particular novel and trac- ing themselves in its text and its own production of ideology.”23 The chapter on the publication of Thackeray’s Henry Esmond (1852) consid- ers the three-volume novel. Compared to the part issue of Dickens’s Pick- wick Papers, the publication of Esmond represents a pre-capitalist, petty commodity mode of production where “the dominant ideology of mid- Victorian publishing was that of the ‘commodity-book.’ The commod- ity which this whole system [e.g., publishers, libraries] was constructed to produce was the book rather than the text.”24 Whereas Dickens and his publisher anticipated the fully capitalist mode of production (produc- ing what Feltes calls the “commodity-text”), Thackeray and Smith, Elder persist in continuing with the older, traditional format. Feltes pairs his discussion of Thackeray’s novel with a consideration of the Booksellers’ Question of 1852, an episode which pitted the major publishing houses (including Smith, Elder) against “free traders,” the two sides represent- ing the pre-capitalist and fully capitalist ideologies, respectively. Feltes’s approach serves as a reminder of the myriad of ways Victorian fiction appeared; however, his five case studies focus on rather atypical exam- ples despite his claim that “the canonicity of the novels [] is irrele- vant to [his] study of their production.”25 Inadvertently, his five chapters present a stately transition from the commodity-book (e.g., the three- volume novel) to the commodity-text (e.g., the 6s one-volume novel). His final chapter considers the end of the three-volume novel in the 1890s as “a radical transformation of the literary mode of production” in favor of the “capitalist publishers” without exactly explaining why it happened when it did and not earlier as may have been expected.26 In his follow-up study Literary Capital and the Late Victorian Novel (1993), Feltes considers the 1880s and 1890s in more detail as a tension between

[email protected] 8 T. J. BASSETT traditional publishers (e.g., Bentley) and entrepreneurial publishers (e.g., William ) through an examination of several case studies such as the rivalry between romance and realist writers. But again, his theo- retical level of analysis based on case studies (“moments”) precludes any quantitative considerations or support for his claims. Continuing in the theoretical approach, Lee Erickson’s The Economy of Literary Form (1996) argues that economic considerations, such as marginal utility, help explain the prevalence and popularity of certain gen- res of literature at certain times:

It would appear that when the cost of books is high, readers will prefer a work in a literary form which will provide the most pleasure upon reread- ing and has the most satisfying verbal texture. Conversely, when the cost of books is low, readers will care less about the pleasure of prospective rereadings and prefer a work in a genre that gives the most immediate pleasure.27

As an example of the former situation, the sales of poetry flourished in the early years of the 1800s, a time of expensive books due to the war with France, since poetry bears rereading (that is, it continues to yield posi- tive marginal utility) due to its relatively higher literary complexity. In a chapter considering Austen and the economics of novel reading, Erick- son argues that circulating libraries and the three-volume novel “reflected the relatively low marginal utility of rereading novels for contemporary readers, the general view that novel reading was a luxury” available only to wealthy readers who could afford to buy or subscribe.28 In his view, libraries “effectively pooled the demand of many people for books only a few could afford” and thus facilitated the consumption of otherwise expensive fiction by middle-class readers, especially women.29 Fiction, due to its format and distribution, gained a reputation as ephemeral: books to be borrowed, read once, and returned. In another chapter on market- ing the novel, Erickson considers the use of part-publication, cheap edi- tions, inexpensive one-volume editions, and serialization as attempts by publishers to sell fiction directly to readers by opening up new markets and audiences. That most of these attempts to lower the cost of fiction only succeeded with already popular novelists or outright failed confirms his claim about the low marginal utility of fiction—readers preferred the steady stream of new novels from the libraries rather than buying or own- ing them. Erickson’s study helps explain the Victorian view that England

[email protected] 1 INTRODUCTION 9 was a book borrowing country: why should readers buy an expensive (or even less expensive) novel to be read only once? However, despite the economic focus of his approach, he utilized little to no actual economic data to support his claims, whether publisher or library records, that fic- tion was produced and consumed in such a way.30 In the last twenty-five years, most research on Victorian publishing his- tory generally and the novel in particular has heeded Sutherland’s call for more empirical research in the writing, publishing, distribution, and con- sumption of fiction. Broadly speaking, the development of the History of the Book as an academic field has fueled the attention paid to the Victo- rian production of fiction. Robert L. Patten’s Charles Dickens and his Pub- lishers (1978) uses contracts, correspondence, and publishers’ ledgers to trace the market forces shaping the production and consumption of Dick- ens’s works in the Victorian period from serials to first issue to reprints to collected editions. Simon Eliot has produced a number of works uti- lizing a quantitative approach to Victorian publishing, chief among which is Some Patterns and Trends in British Publishing, 1800–1919 (1994). In it, using statistics from the Publishers’ Circular and other contemporary sources, he traces the steady, if not exponential, growth in the number of books published in the British Isles over the long nineteenth century. Additionally, he tracks the simultaneous rise of fiction as the dominant genre in British publishing and general decrease in the price of books in the marketplace. Such data confirm the anecdotal observations of many Victorians themselves and later scholars. Following his lead, Alexis Wee- don’s Victorian Publishing: The Economics of Book Production for a Mass Market, 1836–1916 (2003) examines the publishing records of a dozen publishers to trace the growth of publishing and the diversity of books produced during the period. In particular, she concentrates on the devel- opment of a mass market—selling a large number of inexpensively priced books—in the shadow of the expensive three-volume novel and library system. As her chapters on Wilkie Collins and Ouida show, many of these cheap books were reprints of library novels. The business practices of the circulating libraries have garnered more attention since Griest’s study of Mudie’s. Eliot, in three articles, has him- self addressed several interrelated issues relating to the libraries’ financial success. In “The Three-Decker Novel and its First Cheap Reprint, 1862– 94” (1985) and “ by the Backdoor: Circulating Libraries, Booksellers and Book Clubs 1876–1966” (1995), he considers the chief complaints of the libraries toward publishers in their ultimatum: that is,

[email protected] 10 T. J. BASSETT the appearance of cheap reprints of three-volume novels affecting their circulation profits and re-sale market. In the former article, Eliot samples a number of titles to find that the first reprints of three-volume novels varied widely in price (ranging from 2s to 6s) and time of issue (from a few months to a few years) but generally the “premature issue of cheap first reprints” of the popular authors he examines (for instance, Braddon, Ouida, and Wood) had become “commonplace” by the 1890s.31 Eliot’s second article considers the business model of Mudie’s Select Library and W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library (whose records partial sur- vive) and argues the libraries depended significantly on sales of no longer needed copies of three-volume novels to bolster their bottom lines, “an activity which frequently determined the difference between a profit and a loss.”32 This re-sale business depended on the initial (and lasting) pop- ularity of the title and the potential competition with cheap reprint edi- tions. Tellingly, Smith’s library posted a loss in 1893–1894, the period immediately preceding the ultimatum—more than a coincidence in Eliot’s view—which serves as an immediate motivation for the libraries’ ultima- tum. A third article by Eliot, “Fiction and Non-Fiction: One- and Three- volume Novels in Some Mudie Catalogues, 1857–94,” finds that the library’s stock depended heavily on fiction and on the three-volume for- mat in particular, thus adding evidence to the close relationship between the libraries and this particular publishing format.33 Stephen Colclough’s article “‘A Larger Outlay than any Return’: The Library of W. H. Smith and Son, 1860–1873” (2003) also examines the Smith records to track the development of the library to its establishment as a profitable enter- prise by the 1870s. In particular, he untangles the details surrounding a potential partnership between Mudie and Smith that floundered before Smith decided to start his own independent library.34 David Finkelstein’s article “‘The Secret’: British Publishers and Mudie’s Struggle for Eco- nomic Survival 1861–64” (1993) uncovers the details of how several major publishers—including Blackwood, Hurst and Blackett, Longman, John Murray, and Smith, Elder—combined to financially prop up Mudie’s after “over-expansion and private extravagance led to near-bankruptcy.”35 Ultimately, self-interest motivated the publishers to keep Mudie’s in busi- ness, both to recover the monies owed to them and to ensure the con- tinued existence of their chief means of book distribution. These works and others on the circulating libraries build significantly on Griest’s work and illustrate complex inter-connections between publishers and libraries in the Victorian period.36

[email protected] 1 INTRODUCTION 11

Utilizing publishers’ archives when existing, scholars have furthered our understanding of the Victorian publishing business, especially as it relates to the fiction marketplace. Several recent studies have focused on Victorian publishers. Leslie Howsam’s Kegan Paul, A Victorian Imprint (1998) chronicles the development of the specialist publisher which began as the minor publisher Henry S. King. Peter Newbolt’s William Tins- ley (1831–1902): “Speculative Publisher” (2001) focuses on one of the major fiction publishers of the mid-Victorian period: though Tinsley’s records sadly do not survive, Newbolt marshals numerous contempo- rary sources in his history. Finkelstein’s The of Blackwood: Author- Publisher Relations in the Victorian Era (2002) draws on the largely com- plete Blackwood archives to trace authorial contracts and sales.37 These works and others show, to use Sutherland’s words, the shaping influence of contracts in the production of fiction. In addition, some scholars have concentrated on a single author or novel, such as Patten’s Charles Dick- ens and His Publishers mentioned above. Peter L. Shillingsburg’s Pega- sus in Harness: Victorian Publishing and W. M. Thackeray (1992) exam- ines Thackeray’s career from literary dilettante to hack to professional through his interactions with his publishers in order to determine the how the market shapes an author (or vice versa). Linda H. Peterson’s Becoming a Woman of Letters (2009) shows through the careers of several women authors, notably Charlotte Brontë, , and Char- lotte Riddell, how they navigated the literary marketplace, especially how they achieved both financial and critical success. This work reminds us that gender and class also affect the production of literature. More recently, several works discuss the impact of the three-volume format on individual authors, including Pierre Coustillas’s The Heroic Life of (3 parts, 2011–2012), Graham Law and Andrew Maunder’s Wilkie Collins: A Literary Life (2008), and Andrew Nash’s William Clark Russell and the Victorian Nautical Novel (2014). All three authors—Collins, Gissing, and Russell—proved prolific authors of three-volume fiction and all had marked success with the format, though Gissing is perhaps best known for his criticism of the format in his (three-volume) novel New Grub Street (1890). Several edited collections of essays also attest to the interest in Victorian publishing history, such as John O. Jordan and Robert Patten’s Literature in the Marketplace Nineteenth-Century British Pub- lishing and Reading Practices (1995), Elizabeth James’s Macmillan: A Publishing Tradition from 1843 (2002), and Finkelstein’s Print Culture and the Blackwood Tradition 1805–1930 (2006). All of these works (and

[email protected] 12 T. J. BASSETT many more not mentioned here) take both the literary and the economic as determinatives of value and see the production of books as a part of a larger cultural production. This study of the history of the three-volume novel builds on these ear- lier works. Whereas some have examined the literary form of the triple- decker, none have attempted a comprehensive study of the format as a literary and economic product. To that end, this study begins with a general bibliometric overview of the format before turning to the eco- nomics undergirding their existence, from both the publishers’ side and the libraries’ side. Then, it will turn to the end of the three-volume novel, especially the development of alternatives deliberately positioned in the marketplace to serve as direct rivals to the library novel. In particular, the new romance and series publication will be considered as key to establish- ing England as a book buying instead of book borrowing market. Chapter 2 takes a quantitative approach to the three-volume format to determine statistics for their overall production during the Victorian period. Based on the data collected in the digital humanities project At the Circulating Library: A Database of Victorian Fiction, 1837 –1901 (2007– present), basic questions can now be answered about the format, includ- ing how many multi-volume novels were produced, who wrote them, and who published them. Continuing the bibliographical work of Gar- side, Shöwerling, and Anthony Mandal, the data show a steady increase in the overall number of two- and three-volume titles published during the century, up to and including the year of the libraries’ ultimatum. On the surface, then, the expensive format seems much more successful than many previous scholars have thought—perhaps representing a quarter of all fiction titles published during the years of its existence. Looking fur- ther into the numbers, the data show at any one time a relatively small number of publishers dominate the production of multi-volume fiction, even though some 200 publishers produced at least one title. Some 2200 identifiable authors wrote at least one multi-volume title, but a smaller number of authors, about 400, wrote the majority of titles. Margaret Oliphant herself contributes 10 two-volume novels and 61 three-volume novels during her long career. As we shall see, such prolificacy extended to both men and women authors, but women authors did pen the major- ity of multi-volume titles, dominating the last quarter of the nineteenth century, giving some credence to Gettmann’s droll definition of a three- decker as “a novel written by Mrs. Henry Wood, Mary Elizabeth Brad- don, Rhoda Broughton, or Ouida.”38 In addition, the data show nearly

[email protected] 1 INTRODUCTION 13

1500 of these multi-volume titles were serialized at some point, the vast majority before book publication. The strong connection between peri- odical serialization and book publication underscores the high degree of marketplace coordination between these (on the surface at least) different modes of literary production. Though the data provide numerous insights itself, it also serves as a foundation to the later discussions. Building on the works of Gettmann, Sutherland, and others, Chapter 3 examines the publishing accounts of over 100 three-volume novels pub- lished by Richard Bentley between 1865 and 1890 in order to assess the costs of production and financial success of the format for Victorian pub- lishers. As the second chapter shows, Bentley was the second-largest pro- ducer of multi-volume fiction during the period so his experience with the format speaks to the wider publishing marketplace. Whereas other scholars have examined a handful of accounts, this chapter draws on a substantial sample (nearly 15% of the triple-deckers Bentley published in the Victorian period) for its conclusions. What the numbers show, in gen- eral, is very few three-volume novels lost money for the publisher, rein- forcing the view that the format was commercially safe. In fact, the vast majority of the titles examined here made money for Bentley in their first and later editions: thus, the format was a substantial profit-making sector for Bentley. Going further, this financial success of the format for Bentley extends over several decades, even until the 1890s. Women authors wrote most of his multi-volume fiction, but Bentley did not underpay them, actually quite the reverse. In fact, the profitability of the format can be attributed to predictable sales to the libraries not to exploiting authors. For Bentley and other publishers, then, the financial incentives to produce multi-volume fiction seem to have been considerable and long-lasting. Chapter 4 considers the business model of the circulating library through an examination of the accounts of W. H. Smith and Son’s Sub- scription Library, the second-largest circulating library of the Victorian period. The chapter draws on and continues the work of Eliot and Col- clough discussed above to give a comprehensive financial history of the library operation from its beginnings in 1860 to the end of the century. In particular, as one of the chief purchasers of multi-volume fiction, the experiences of Smith speak potentially to the effect three-volume novels had on all libraries. The records show that after a few rough years Smith entered a long period of sustained profits based on a growing subscrip- tion base and second-hand sales which also corresponded to the peaks of multi-volume novel production. Though existing library catalogues attest

[email protected] 14 T. J. BASSETT

Smith relied less on three-volume novels, the library continued to make annual profits despite (or because of?) the hundreds of multi-volume titles publisher per year. As Eliot points out, cheap reprints became common- place—however, the data show both an increase in the number of titles being reprinted and a decrease in the delay between the first edition and the cheap reprint. The library recorded a loss in 1893–1894, how- ever assessing the accounts finds several plausible explanations for the loss other than the three-volume novel or its cheap reprints. The end of the chapter reconsiders the libraries’ ultimate in light of this data and suggests other motivating factors at in calling for the end of the three-volume novel. The last chapter looks at several marketplace challengers to the three- volume novel system in the 1880s and 1890s. Cheap reprints challenged the library monopoly on new fiction—that is, a three-volume novel could only be accessed via a library—but inexpensive one-volume fiction devel- oped unevenly as publishers attempted to gage and create a buying pub- lic for new fiction. The publication of Robert Louis Stevenson’s Trea- sure Island (1883) created an entry position for the “New Romance” in the fiction marketplace: intended as a “boys’ book” for juvenile readers, Stevenson’s friends (especially the editor W. E. Henley) lauded the book as suitable for men readers. Later authors, such as H. Rider Haggard, imitated Stevenson’s book and many critics, such as , used the publication of the New Romance as a means to attack the domestic realism of library fiction. The censorship of George Moore’s triple-decker A Modern Lover (1883) by Mudie’s Select Library led to his one-man crusade against the library system. Enlisting the minor publisher Henry Vizetelly, Moore advocated the inexpensive one-volume novel as a means to break the power of the libraries. The success of Moore and Vizetelly was short-lived since the libraries did not themselves censor literature but served as the mechanism for larger cultural forces. The pioneering efforts of J. W. Arrowsmith and T. Fisher Unwin with series publication established a means for marketing new fiction to readers for purchase. Such series as Arrowsmith’s Bristol Library and the Pseudonym Library proved the existence of readers willing to buy inexpensive book by new or unknown authors. As at least two of these challenges illustrate, gender played a crucial role in these arguments through the denigration of three- volume fiction as feminine. These were not the only challenges to the three-volume format and the libraries, but they underscore the changing dynamics of the fiction marketplace in late Victorian Britain.

[email protected] 1 INTRODUCTION 15

Taken together, the data show the three-volume novel enjoyed a long reign as the dominant format for new fiction in England, with other for- mats such as reprints and serializations largely subservient to it. A handful of publishers, in particular Hurst and Blackett and Bentley, are responsible for keeping the format alive due to their large profit margins and financial influence over (at least) Mudie’s Select Library. No one action led to the end of the three-volume novel: instead, new competition from the one- volume novel, the change in reprint practices, and a new willingness from the libraries to confront the publishers combined to end the format long associated with Victorian literature.

Notes

1. James Raven and Antonia Forster, The English Novel 1770–1829, volume I: 1770–1799 (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2000), p. 96. One reason for the prevalence of novels published in editions of three or more vol- umes was publishers’ preference for the duodecimo format over octavo— the former produced smaller pages hence required more pages per book and the corresponding volumes to hold them. In the 1790s, according to Raven, three-quarters of novels were published in duodecimo (ibid., p. 97). 2. The English Novel 1770–1829, volume II: 1800–1829 (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2000), pp. 90ff. 3. Quoted in Garside and Shöwering, pp. 91–92. 4. Ibid., p. 91. 5. Duodecimo volumes measured 5 inches by 7.375 inches and octavo vol- umes measured 6 inches by 9 inches. A considerable and noticeable size difference. 6. Bibliographic details of Scott’s publications come from William B. Todd and Ann Bowden’s, Sir Walter Scott: A Bibliographical History 1796–1832 (New Castle, DE: Oak Knoll Press, 1998). For the purposes of this dis- cussion, I have left out Scott’s three collections of Tales of my Landlord (1816, 1818, 1819). 7. Garside and Shöwerling, op. cit., p. 92; and Jane Millgate, “Making It New: Scott, Constable, Ballantyne, and the Publication of Ivanhoe,” Stud- ies in English Literature 34 (1994), pp. 795–811. 8. Ibid., p. 94. 9. The Life of Walter Scott: A Critical Biography (Oxford: Blackwell, 1995), p. 247. 10. “The Nineteenth Century Three-Volume Novel,” Papers of the Biblio- graphical Society of America 51.4 (1957), pp. 263–302. Their work, while interesting bibliographically, does not address any of the questions about

[email protected] 16 T. J. BASSETT

the production or economics of the format. Another article (based on a talk), Douglas C. Ewing’s, “The Three-Volume Novel,” The Papers of the of America 61.3 (1967), pp. 201–7, gives a short overview history of the format from Scott’s Kenilworth to the library ultimatum. It likewise does not add much fresh insight into the history of the format. More recently, Richard Menke’s, “The End of the Three-Volume Novel System, 27 June 1894” (available through BRANCH: Britain, Representation and Nineteenth-Century History,ed. Dino Franco Felluga, 2013) gives a good and thorough overview of the format, in particular focusing on the reaction of authors and publishers to its end in the 1890s. 11. Royal Gettmann, A Victorian Publisher: A Study of the Bentley Papers (Oxford University Press, 1960), p. 232. 12. Ibid., pp. 239, 240. 13. Ibid., pp. 258–59. 14. Guinevere L. Griest, Mudie’s Circulating Library and the Victorian Novel (Indiana University Press, 1970), pp. 38, 39–40. 15. On the face of it, the circulation of an expensive three-volume novel or three copies of a less expensive one-volume novel would generate similar income to the library. The economics of the libraries will be discussed in Chapter 4. 16. Ibid., p. 174. Notably, Griest uses Gettmann as her chief source. 17. Several other studies from the period should also be mentioned, though they do not add much more about the three-volume novel than Gettmann and Griest: Richard D. Altick’s, The English Common Reader (Columbus: Ohio University Press, 1959); Charles Morgan’s The House of Macmillan, 1843–1943 (London: Macmillan, 1943); Kathleen Tillotson’s, Novels of the Eighteen Forties (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1954); and F. D. Tredrey’s, The House of Blackwood, 1804–1954 (: Blackwood, 1954). 18. John Sutherland, Victorian Novelists and Publishers (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1976), p. 6. 19. John Sutherland, “The Economics of the Victorian Three-Volume Novel,” Business Archives 41 (1976), p. 25. His conclusions and the profitability of the three-volume novel will be considered in more detail in Chapter 3. 20. John Sutherland, Victorian Fiction: Writers, Publishers, Readers (New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1995), p. 151. 21. He writes a persuasive argument for this type of work in “Publishing His- tory: A Hole in the Centre of Literary Sociology,” Critical Inquiry 14.3 (1988), pp. 574–89. Two other Sutherland works deserve mention: he considers literary contracts in “The Fiction Earning Patterns of Thack- eray, Dickens, George Eliot and Trollope,” Browning Institute Studies 7

[email protected] 1 INTRODUCTION 17

(1979), pp. 71–92, and publishing history in the essays collected in Vic- torian Fiction: Writers, Publishers, Readers (1995). 22. N. N. Feltes, Modes of Production of Victorian Novels (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1986), p. ix. 23. Ibid., p. x. 24. Ibid., p. 26. Emphasis in original. Petty commodity production is defined as a form of economic production in which the producer himself or her- self owns and controls the means of production and the product (e.g., commodity) of his or her labor. 25. Ibid., p. xi. As we shall see, few novels appeared in part-serialization such as Pickwick Papers and even fewer appeared in four volumes such as Mid- dlemarch. 26. Ibid., p. 80. 27. Lee Erickson, The Economy of Literary Form: English Literature and the Industrialization of Publishing, 1800–1850 (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1996), pp. 9–10. Marginal utility measures the addi- tional satisfaction a consumer receives from acquiring or consuming one more unit of a good or service. Erickson takes as an unexamined assump- tion that rereading poetry and essays naturally have greater marginal utility than rereading fiction, an assumption that sounds true but is ultimately impossible to substantiate. 28. Ibid., p. 126. 29. Ibid., p. 131. 30. One additional theoretical study deserves mention: Peter D. Macdonald’s British Literary Culture and Publishing Practice, 1880–1914 (London: Cambridge University Press, 1997) takes a Bourdieuian approach to the changes in fiction production at the turn of the century where the new mass market created a divide between economic and literary success. 31. Simon Eliot, “The Three-Decker Novel and Its First Cheap Reprint, 1862–94,” Library (1985), p. 51. This question will be examined in more detail in Chapter 4. 32. Simon Eliot, “Bookselling by the Backdoor: Circulating Libraries, Book- sellers and Book Clubs 1876–1966,” in A Genius for Letters, ed. Robin Myers and Michael Harris (New Castle, DE: Oak Knoll Press, 1995), p. 160. 33. Simon Eliot, “Fiction and Non-Fiction: One- and Three-Volume Nov- els in Some Mudie Catalogues, 1857–94,” Publishing History 66 (2009), pp. 31–47. The finances of Smith’s Library will be examined in Chapter 4. 34. Stephen Colclough, “‘A Larger Outlay Than Any Return’: The Library of W. H. Smith and Son, 1860–1873,” Publishing History 54 (2003), pp. 67–72. 35. David Finkelstein, “‘The Secret’: British Publishers and Mudie’s Struggle for Economic Survival 1861–64,” Publishing History 34 (1993), p. 21.

[email protected] 18 T. J. BASSETT

36. Other notable works discussing library practices include Colclough’s chapter “Station to Station: The LNWR and the Emergence of the Rail- way Bookstall, 1840–1875,” Places: Locations of Book Production and Distribution Since 1500, ed. John Hinks and Catherine Armstrong (New Castle, DE: Oak Knoll Press, 2005), pp. 169–84; Lewis Robert- s’s chapter “Trafficking in Literary Authority: Mudie’s Select Library and the Commodification of the Victorian Novel,” Victorian Literature and Culture 34 (2006), pp. 1–25. 37. The House of Blackwood: Author-Publisher Relations in the Victorian Era (University Park: Pennsylvania State University Press, 2002). 38. Op. cit., p. 249.

[email protected] CHAPTER 2

The Production of Multi-volume Fiction, 1837–1898

The purpose of this chapter is to present a quantitative analysis of the production of Victorian multi-volume fiction in order to address some basic questions about the format: how many multi-volume fiction titles were produced? who published them? who wrote them? how many were serialized before publication? Though multi-volume fiction was a signif- icant subset of all Victorian fiction, the format has inspired little-to-no scholarship, in particular bibliographical treatments or cultural history. For the Romantic era, the literary period immediately preceding the Victorian, three recent works by Peter Garside, James Raven, Antonia Forster, Rainer Schöwerling, and Anthony Mandal have created a com- prehensive bibliography of fiction: the book The English Novel 1770– 1829: A Bibliographical Survey of Prose Fiction Published in the British Isles (2 volumes, 2000), the affiliated Web site British Fiction 1800–1829: A Database of Production, Circulation and Reception (2004), and the appendix Web site The English Novel, 1830–1836: A Bibliographical Survey of Fiction Published in the British Isles (2006). In all, the authors identify 1421 fiction titles published from 1770 to 1799 (averaging 47.4 titles per year); 2272 fiction titles published from 1800 to 1829 (averaging 75.7 titles per year); and 610 fiction titles published from 1830 to 1836 (averaging 87.1 titles per year). As their numbers suggest, the production of fiction increased remarkably from the late eighteenth century up to the Victorian period.

© The Author(s) 2020 19 T. J. Bassett, The Rise and Fall of the Victorian Three-Volume Novel, New Directions in Book History, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-030-31926-7_2

[email protected] 20 T. J. BASSETT

But to date no such bibliographical work exists for the Victorian period. An early attempt to come to terms with the Victorian novel includes Andrew Block’s enumerative bibliography The English Novel, 1740–1850 (1939; revised 1961), which only covers the first thirteen years of the sixty-four-year period and has proved woefully unreliable in its entries.1 Volume four (covering the years 1800–1900) of the revised The Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (3rd ed., 1999) covers the whole century but focuses mainly on first- and second-rank novelists, some 200 in total, which is less than 3% of the 7000 nineteenth-century novelists as estimated by John Sutherland.2 As such, it is far from com- prehensive. The ongoing online database Nineteenth-Century Short Title Catalogue (NSTC) is a union list of holdings of eight research libraries around the world including the Bodleian Library, the , Harvard University Library, the , the Library of Trin- ity College, , and the National Library of . The strength of the NSTC is the scope of the listing—some 1.2 million titles—and the ability to find the libraries that hold copies. But the drawbacks are sin- gling out fiction from the mass of titles, assuming that the holdings of these particular eight libraries are comprehensive. In lieu of comprehen- sive , scholars have relied on Michael Sadleir’s XIX Cen- tury Fiction: A Bibliographical Record Based on His Own (2 volumes, 1951) and Robert Lee Wolff’s Nineteenth-Century Fiction: A Bibliographical Catalogue Based on the Collection Formed by Robert Lee Wolff (5 volumes, 1981–1986). Neither collection is exhaustive: Sadleir’s collection (housed at UCLA) consists of over 3000 volumes and Wolff’s collection (housed at the University of Texas) consists of over 6000 vol- umes, and both collections contain multiple editions of some titles. So, at best, Sadleir’s and Wolff’s collections represent a small, though significant, fraction of Victorian fiction.

At the Circulating Library: A Database of Victorian Fiction, 1837--1901

With this in mind, I created At the Circulating Library: A Database of Victorian Fiction, 1837–1901 (ATCL) to fill this need for a comprehensive bibliographical resource for nineteenth-century fiction. Begun in 2007, the database currently contains entries for 16,374 titles, 3438 authors, and 508 publishers as well as information about 2588 novel serializa- tions in 229 periodicals.3 Significantly, the database accounts for all of the two-, three-, and four-volume novels published between 1837 and 1901 in Great Britain.

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 21

Titles To be included in the database, a prose fiction title, whether novel or collection, needed to be published in English in Great Britain between 1837 and 1901. As we shall see, nearly all titles were published in London or Edinburgh. In rare cases, a few Dublin-area publishers are included in the database: for instance, the Irish publisher William J. Curry partnered with London publishers to print and distribute his books in England (however, such arrangements were rare). Furthermore, works clearly aimed at children (i.e., under 12 years of age) and works with less than 100 pages of text were omitted. Only first book publication infor- mation is included: thus, information about reprints or later editions is not included. Works by foreign authors, including American authors, are included if the title was published in a British edition. For example, James Fenimore Cooper’s The Deerslayer: or, The First War-Path was first pub- lished by Lea and Blanchard in Philadelphia in 1841 and later that year by Richard Bentley in London. Hence, only the latter edition is included in ATCL. Likewise, of foreign works are included if published in English in Great Britain. For example, Emilie Flygare-Carlén’s The Her- mit was first published in the author’s native Swedish in Stockholm in 1846 and later published in English translation by T. Cautley Newby in 1853. Hence, only the latter edition is included in ATCL. In general, only fiction written or published in the English language is considered. Multiple sources were consulted in creating the database. First, The English Catalogue of Books (ECB) (7 volumes, 1863–1906) served as the foundation for the database: based on lists of newly published books appearing in the weekly trade magazine the Publishers’ Circular,theedi- tors compiled and published an annual list which was then combined into the volumes of the catalogue every few years beginning in the 1860s. The ECB lists entries alphabetically by author (if named) or title with informa- tion about format (e.g., crown octavo), price, publisher, and date. Since the ECB relies on self-reporting by publishers and the combination of secondary listings, the catalogues on first blush cannot be trusted to be comprehensive or accurate. As they themselves note in the prefaces to The English Catalogue of Books, the compilers took great care to present accu- rate lists; however, some errors and omissions still occur and can be seen when compared to other bibliographies. But overall, despite these occa- sional lapses, the ECB proved to be a fairly reliable and comprehensive source for bibliographical information as compared to other sources.

[email protected] 22 T. J. BASSETT

The scale of the project—well into several thousands of books—fore- stalled any attempt to examine each title individually.4 So the data from the ECB were then compared to various library catalogues and print bib- liographies. In particular, the British Library and the University of Oxford online catalogues were consulted for each title: as deposit libraries for the , one or both libraries typically owned a physical copy so their entries could be used to correct errors in the ECB. In addition, each library was searched for titles missed by the ECB (relatively few titles as it turned out). In rare cases, the search expanded to other libraries in order to locate a physical copy of each title. Next, print bibliographies were consulted, such as Sadleir, Wolff, and Margaret Harris’s A Check- list of the “Three-Decker” Collection in the Fisher Library, University of Sydney (1980), in order to verify bibliographical details. Another recent bibliography proved extremely helpful: Rolf Loeber and Magda Loeber’s A Guide to Irish Fiction 1650–1900 (2006) overlapped considerably with ATCL and contained a significant number of relevant titles. More rarely, author or publisher bibliographies were used: for instance, R. W. Stew- art’s Benjamin Disraeli: A List of Writings by Him (1972), John Stock Clarke’s Margaret Oliphant: A Bibliography (1986), and publisher Bent- ley’s A List of the Principal Publications (8 volumes, 1893–1920). Thus, all titles in the database were verified in at least two sources. Lastly, when possible, books were examined in either physical or digitized copies (e.g., or HathiTrust). At a minimum, the database includes each book’s complete title, author, publisher, publication year (as stated on the title page), format (number of volumes and size), and price.

Authors Every attempt has been made to identify authors when possible through publisher’s records or other means. At a minimum, the database aims to include an author’s legal, maiden, married, and pen names, birth and death dates, nationality, and occupations. A large number of authors, about a thousand, already appear in standard reference sources such as the Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, Frederick Boase’s Mod- ern English Biography, the Loebers’ A Guide to Irish Fiction 1650–1900, and Sutherland’s Companion to Victorian Fiction. However, the major- ity of authors require much more work to uncover. Digital genealogical resources have proved a boon in this regard: authors often can be traced

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 23 in English census records, probate records, and vital records via Ances- try.com or similar sites. The digitization of newspapers and periodicals (especially Digital Archive) has served as a fruitful source for tracing authors. At times, anonymous and pseudonymous authors proved the most vexing to trace. Attributions in ATCL were made only if there was a high degree of confidence in the identifications.

Serializations In order to trace the serializations of multi-volume fiction, over 200 mag- azines and newspapers were examined either directly or through pub- lished bibliographies. Of them, 164 periodicals serialized multi-volume fiction (for a complete list of periodicals, see Table 2.32). When pos- sible, the start and end dates and the frequency of appearance (weekly or monthly) of the serialization are recorded. The chief bibliographies consulted include J. Don Vann’s Victorian Novels in Serial,theVicto- rian Fiction Research Guides series (7 volumes), The Wellesley Index to Victorian Periodicals, 1824–1900, and Graham Law’s Serializing Fiction in the Victorian Press. Digital archives of periodicals proved especially fruitful: in particular, Chadwyck-Healey’s British Periodicals collection, the British Newspaper Archive collection, the Welsh Newspapers Online collection, and Thomson-Gale’s Nineteenth-Century UK Periodicals col- lection. Print copies of several dozen periodicals were examined at the British Library, Cambridge University Library, Indiana University, and the National Library of Scotland. Serials in parts, though relatively few in number, were identified in several sources, most notably in Vann’s work and Sutherland’s article “Dickens’s Serializing Imitators.”5

General Production of Multi-volume Fiction, 1837--1898

From 1837 to 1898, the Victorians produced 7272 multi-volume fiction titles. As Fig. 2.1 and Tables 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6,and2.7 show, from 1837 to 1860, the number of multi-volume fiction titles gradually increased from an average of 60.0 titles per year in the later 1830s to 71.1 titles per year in the 1840s to 80.4 titles per year in the 1850s. For these first twenty-six years, annual production ranges between a low of 51 multi-volume titles published in 1838 and a high of 94 multi-volume titles published in 1860. The general economic turmoil of the 1840s may

[email protected] 24 T. J. BASSETT

200

150

100

50

0 1837 1838 1848 1849 1850 1857 1876 1877 1889 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1858 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1872 1873 1874 1875 1878 1879 1880 1881 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1890 1891 1892 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 1868 1869 1870 1871 1882 1883

Multi-Volume Titles Published 3-Year Moving Average

Fig. 2.1 Multi-volume titles published, 1837–1898

Table 2.1 Multi-volume titles published, 1837–1840

Year 2-volume titles 3-volume titles 4-volume titles Total

1837 13 45 0 58 1838 10 41 0 51 1839 8 52 0 60 1840 8 63 0 71 Total 39 201 0 240

Table 2.2 Multi-volume titles published, 1841–1850

Year 2-volume titles 3-volume titles 4-volume titles Total

1841 11 63 1 75 1842 10 55 0 65 1843 6 63 1 70 1844 18 68 1 87 1845 17 62 1 80 1846 8 54 1 63 1847 11 45 1 57 1848 15 48 0 63 1849 24 51 0 75 1850 17 59 0 76 Total 137 568 6 711

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 25

Table 2.3 Multi-volume titles published, 1851–1860

Year 2-volume titles 3-volume titles 4-volume titles Total

1851 22 59 0 81 1852 21 65 0 86 1853 23 48 2 73 1854 32 52 0 84 1855 12 48 0 60 1856 29 53 0 82 1857 29 60 0 89 1858 34 45 0 79 1859 30 45 1 76 1860 41 53 0 94 Total 273 528 3 804

Table 2.4 Multi-volume titles published, 1861–1870

Year 2-volume titles 3-volume titles 4-volume titles Total

1861 34 47 1 82 1862 38 53 0 91 1863 45 72 0 117 1864 61 99 1 161 1865 40 110 0 150 1866 42 86 0 128 1867 47 112 1 160 1868 41 109 0 150 1869 28 85 0 113 1870 31 95 0 126 Total 407 868 3 1278 explain the slow growth in the number of multi-volume titles produced during these years. Regardless, the annual number of multi-volume fic- tion titles continues a fairly slow growth during the first third of Victori- a’s reign. After 1860, however, the number of multi-volume fiction titles increases rapidly, reaching 161 titles published in 1864 and 150 titles pub- lished in 1865 and, after a brief decline to 128 titles publishing in 1866, reaching 160 titles published in 1867 and 150 titles published in 1868. These twin peaks in the 1860s represent a doubling in the number of multi-volume titles produced annually compared to the previous quarter

[email protected] 26 T. J. BASSETT

Table 2.5 Multi-volume titles published, 1871–1880

Year 2-volume titles 3-volume titles 4-volume titles Total

1871 26 95 0 121 1872 41 102 2 145 1873 48 118 1 167 1874 41 112 1 154 1875 35 134 0 169 1876 37 134 2 173 1877 35 130 0 165 1878 51 119 1 171 1879 55 136 0 191 1880 44 149 0 193 Total 413 1229 7 1649

Table 2.6 Multi-volume titles published, 1881–1890

Year 2-volume titles 3-volume titles 4-volume titles Total

1881 38 123 0 161 1882 43 130 0 173 1883 45 161 0 206 1884 49 139 0 188 1885 55 135 0 190 1886 57 124 0 181 1887 54 116 0 170 1888 57 107 0 164 1889 61 97 0 158 1890 49 120 0 169 Total 508 1252 0 1760 century. The establishment of W. H. Smith’s circulating library in 1860 may explain the sudden jump in production as publishers recognized a potentially larger market for library novels and increased the production of titles to meet it. After a brief three-year lull from 1869 to 1871, the next eight years see exceptional growth from 145 multi-volume titles pub- lished in 1872 to 193 multi-volume titles published in 1880 (an increase of over a third). In the 1860s, an average of 127.8 titles per year appeared; in the 1870s, an average of 164.9 titles per year appeared—nearly a 30%

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 27

Table 2.7 Multi-volume titles published, 1891–1898

Year 2-volume titles 3-volume titles 4-volume titles Total

1891 63 106 0 169 1892 54 110 0 164 1893 53 132 0 185 1894 79 113 0 192 1895 32 39 0 71 1896 25 13 0 38 1897 6 2 0 8 1898 3 0 0 3 Total 315 515 0 830 Total 1837–1898 2092 5161 19 7272 rise in production between the 1860s and 1870s. The early 1880s con- tinued these gains, peaking at 206 multi-volume titles published in 1883. The late 1880s reversed these gains, enduring a gradual slide down to the 158 multi-volume titles published in 1889. Despite these ups and downs, the 1880s still averaged 176.0 multi-volume titles per year. Contrary, perhaps, to expectations, the 1890s witness another rise in the production of multi-volume titles from 169 titles in 1890 up to 192 titles in 1894, the year of the libraries’ ultimatum. In spite of the con- ditions demanded by the libraries, multi-volume fiction continued to be published for four years after their ultimatum, though the decline was dramatic: 192 new titles in 1894 followed by 71 titles in 1895, 38 titles in 1896, 8 titles in 1897, and 3 titles in 1898. Effectively, the last two three-volume novels were G. A. Henty’s The Queen’s Cup (published by Chatto and Windus) and Algernon Gissing’s The Scholar of Bygate (pub- lished by Hutchinson), both appearing in early 1897. The following year, 1898, witnessed the end of the Victorian multi-volume novel altogether with the publication of three two-volume novels: Grace Keith Johnston’s The Mischief Maker, John Kirkwood Leys’s Under a Mask (both issued by Bentley in his final year of business) and J. C. Philpots’s Stephen Brent (published by Archibald Constable). Thus, the practice of publishing new fiction in multiple volumes which stretched back to the early eighteenth century ended on the cusp of the twentieth century. Overall, the Victorian period shows new multi-volume fiction titles as numerous on the eve of its demise as it was ten years or twenty years

[email protected] 28 T. J. BASSETT earlier. This is rather surprising, perhaps, to many who thought the three- volume novel “old fashioned” or a relic of an earlier time. The three- volume novel, rather than fading away as the century wore on, actually reached its peak of production in the late 1870s and early 1880s. Seem- ingly, given the overall number of titles produced, multi-volume fiction appears to have enjoyed continued success up to the very end. However, when compared to overall new book and fiction production, the data paint another picture. Table 2.8 shows the number of multi- volume fiction titles compared to the number of new editions (both fic- tion and nonfiction) produced decade by decade. (The latter numbers come from the Publishers’ Circular as presented in Simon Eliot’s Some Patterns and Trends in British Publishing 1800–1919.6) First, the data show that multi-volume fiction was a tiny fraction of overall book pro- duction, well less than 5% of total titles in any year between 1841 and 1898. That said, the percentage of multi-volume fiction titles to all titles nearly doubled between the 1850s and the 1870s, suggesting that the increase in multi-volume fiction titles produced in the 1870s was greater than just the increase in the overall production of books. In one year, in particular 1874, multi-volume fiction represented 3.6% of all titles pro- duced (154 of 4312 titles). In the 1880s, multi-volume fiction maintained a similar percentage of overall book production (3.0%), peaking in 1886 when multi-volume fiction represented 3.5% of all titles produced (181 of 5210 titles). The dramatic decline in the 1890s belies the fact that the production of multi-volume titles in the early 1890s remained remark- ably stable: 3.0% of all books in 1891 (169 of 5706 titles) and 3.0% of all books in 1894 (192 of 6458 titles). Hence, not only did the raw number

Table 2.8 Multi-volume titles and Years Multi-volume All editions Percentage overall titles published, titles 1840–1898 1841–1850 711 35,599 2.0 1851–1860 804 46,066 1.7 1861–1870 1278 43,069 3.0 1871–1880 1649 50,201 3.3 1881–1890 1760 57,977 3.0 1891–1898 830 53,331 1.6

Source Simon Eliot, Some Patterns and Trends in British Publishing 1800–1919

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 29

Table 2.9 Multi-volume titles and Year Multi-volume All fiction titles Percentage overall fiction titles titles published, 1870–1894 1870 126 200 63.0 1871 121 155 78.1 1872 145 132 109.8 1873 167 507 32.9 1874 154 516 29.8 1875 169 644 26.2 1876 173 452 38.3 1877 165 446 37.0 1878 171 447 38.3 1879 191 607 31.5 1880 193 380 50.8 1881 161 446 36.1 1882 173 306 56.5 1883 206 349 59.0 1884 188 408 46.1 1885 190 455 41.8 1886 181 755 24.0 1887 170 762 22.3 1888 164 929 17.7 1889 158 1040 15.2 1890 169 881 19.2 1891 169 896 18.9 1892 164 1147 14.3 1893 185 935 19.8 1894 192 1315 14.6 Total 4245 15,110 28.1

Source: Publishers’ Circular of multi-volume fiction titles peak in the 1870s and 1880s, but the over- all market share of multi-volume fiction to all titles fiction and nonfiction also peaked then as well. The figures from the 1890s again point to the robust production of multi-volume fiction up to the end. Compared to the overall number of new fiction titles, however, the situation appears much less rosy. In 1870, the Publishers’ Circular began publishing statistics on book production annually in a feature called the “Analytical Table of Books Published” which included broad subject clas- sifications. Table 2.9 shows the number of multi-volume fiction titles compared to the number of new fiction titles published in the years 1870– 1894.7 Ignoring the first three years of the data (which look suspiciously

[email protected] 30 T. J. BASSETT small), the 1870s saw multi-volume fiction titles account for on average 34.6% of all fiction titles per year (1383 of 3999 titles), ranging from 26.2% of titles in 1875 to 50.8% of titles in 1880. As a share of fiction production, the multi-volume novel was fully a third of all new fiction titles published during the late 1870s. New multi-volume fiction maintains this market share during the first years of the 1880s. In the following five years (1881–1885), the period of peak production, multi-volume fiction titles represent 46.7% of all new fiction titles, reaching 56.5% of titles in 1882 and 59.0% of titles in 1883. Thus, not only did the number of multi-volume fiction titles published reach a maximum in 1883, but this maximum corresponded to the largest fraction of new fiction titles published that year. The early 1880s, then, witness multi-volume fiction not only reaching peak production in raw number of titles but also attaining a majority share of the fiction market. Quite clearly, during this mid-Victorian period, multi-volume fiction is the dominant format for new fiction in Britain—more new fiction appeared in multiple-volume editions than one-volume editions. However, from 1886 to 1894, the situation changes dramatically. While the number of multi-fiction titles published remains relatively sta- ble or even increases slightly, the number of new fiction titles published increases rapidly: from 455 titles in 1885 to 755 titles in 1886 (a 66.0% increase), to 1040 titles in 1889, to 1315 titles in 1894 (a 189.0% increase over 1885). During the years 1886 to 1894, multi-volume fiction titles account for 17.9% of new fiction titles, sliding steadily from 41.8% of titles in 1885 to 14.6% of titles in 1894. In the space of ten years, multi-volume fiction went from being a leading publishing format to an increasingly marginalized format. Beginning in the mid-1880s, then, the production of multi-volume novels stopped keeping pace with the overall produc- tion of new fiction and became a much smaller segment of overall fiction production. As Eliot shows, fiction as a category accounted for 23% of books in the 1870s, 26% of books in the 1880s, and 31% of books in the 1890s.8 Thus, at a time when more and more new fiction titles were being published, fewer and fewer of them originally appeared in multi- volume formats. These data confirm what many long suspected: begin- ning in the 1880s, more publishers by-passed the three-volume format in favor of inexpensive one-volume fiction. Many publishers, such as Arrow- smith, Cassells, Longmans, T. Fisher Unwin, and Vizetelly, for example, avoided or curtailed the production of multi-volume fiction in favor of novels in single volumes. (Several of these publishers will be discussed in

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 31

Chapter 5.) As Simon Eliot observes in Some Patterns and Trends,“The period 1870–1890 witnessed the emergence of the cheap book… These changes were almost certainly associated with the collapse of the three- decker novel, the development of the Net Book system and the extensive re-publication of both copyright and non-copyright fiction in extremely cheap formats.”9 The data presented here certainly confirm his view. By the 1880s, though the three-volume format was still economically viable, alternative formats clearly began to make steady and substantial inroads in the market for three-volume novels. Overall, the data point to some general conclusions. First, the number of multi-volume fiction titles produced during the Victorian period gener- ally increased annually up to and including 1894, the year of the libraries’ ultimatum. In this light, multi-volume fiction appears to be a thriving for- mat for new fiction during most of the nineteenth century. (As Chapter 3 will show, the publisher Bentley for one had long-continued success with three-volume novels.) Notably, the ultimatum does not kill the format immediately—instead it lingers on in decline for another four years. Sec- ond, compared to overall book and new fiction publishing, the multi- volume novel maintains a steady market share from the late 1830s until the 1870s, somewhere around 3% of all books published and a third of all new fiction. The early 1880s see multi-volume fiction reach its peak pro- duction, representing over half of all new fiction published. Thereafter, though the number of titles remains high, the market share of multi- volume fiction falls dramatically in the early 1890s. Arguably, the three- volume novel enjoyed its greatest moment in the 1870s and 1880s.

Format and Price

Overall, for the Victorian period, new novels typically appeared in formats of one, two, three, or four volumes. As Tables 2.1–2.7 show, the Victori- ans produced 2092 two-volume fiction titles, 5161 three-volume fiction titles, and 19 four-volume fiction titles between 1837 and 1898. Hence, overall, novels in three volumes represented 71.0% of all multi-volume fiction titles produced, more than double the novels in two volumes pro- duced (28.8%) and far eclipsing the novels in four volumes produced (0.3%) (more on the latter format below). The price for multi- volume fiction generally ran 10s 6d per volume, determined by the iconic one-and-a-half guinea (31s 6d) price for the three-volume novel.10 As a later chapter will show, circulating libraries never paid these full prices

[email protected] 32 T. J. BASSETT for multi-volume novels. Judging by the prices listed in The English Cat- alogue of Books, publishers rarely deviated from these traditional prices, with one notable exception. Beginning in the 1870s, Blackwood inexpli- cably lowered their prices of multi-volume novels from 10s 6d per volume to 8s 6d per volume and they routinely listed two-volume novels at 17s and three-volume novels at 25s 6d. The Scottish publisher continued this pricing practice until the end of multi-volume fiction. The reason why Blackwood chose this price remains a mystery, though additional ship- ping costs from Edinburgh to London may have figured into the change. Otherwise, throughout the Victorian period, the retail prices of multi- volume fiction remained fixed at 21s for novels in two volumes, 31s 6d for novels in three volumes, and 42s for novels in four volumes. In most years, publishers produced roughly twice as many new nov- els in three volumes than in two volumes. Decade by decade, the data show novels in two volumes become somewhat more common as the century progresses: novels in two volumes account for 16.3% of multi- volume titles in the late 1830s, 19.3% of multi-volume titles in the 1840s, and 34.0% of multi-volume titles in the 1850s. Beginning in the 1850s, then, novels in two volumes became twice as common than previously and more acceptable for publishers—in fact, some publishers decidedly favored novels in two volumes over three, such as Sampson Low (9 two- volume novels and 2 three-volume novels in the 1850s), John W. Parker (25 two-volume novels and no three-volume novels in the 1850s), and Saunders and Otley (19 two-volume novels and 16 three-volume nov- els in the 1850s). The late 1850s, in particular, witnessed quite a tide of novels in two volumes: 34 titles in 1858 (43.0% of multi-volume titles), 30 titles in 1859 (39.5%), and 41 titles in 1860 (43.6%). However, the increase in the number of novels published in two volumes never seriously threatened the dominance of novels published in three volumes which always enjoyed the majority share during the Victorian period. The next three decades witness a slight decline in the relative propor- tion of two- and three-volume novels: novels in two novels account for 31.8% of multi-volume titles in the 1860s, 25.0% of multi-volume titles in the 1870s, and 28.9% of multi-volume titles in the 1880s. So, during the years of peak multi-volume fiction production, novels in three volumes predominated by a large two-to-one margin.11 Entering the 1890s, the proportion of novels in two volumes continued to be about a third of all multi-volume titles until 1894. In the year of the libraries’ ultimatum, 1894, publishers produced 79 novels in two volumes (41.1%) and 113

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 33 novels in three volumes (58.9%), a decided change from the previous year 1893 of 53 novels in two volumes (28.6%) and 132 novels in three vol- umes (71.4%). Thereafter, as the number of multi-volume titles decline, the proportion of novels in two volumes actually grew: 45.1% of titles in 1895 (32 of 71 titles), 65.8% of titles in 1896 (25 of 38 titles), 75.0% of titles in 1897 (6 of 8 titles), and all three titles in 1898. Perhaps briefly, the novel in two volumes may have been an acceptable alternative to the novel in three volumes. However, this surge of novels in two volumes did not last as the format joined the triple-decker in extinction. Overwhelm- ingly, publishers favored the three-volume format over the two-volume format by publishing more than twice as many of the former than the latter. Though infrequently used, the four-volume novel did appear occasion- ally over the course of the Victorian period—the most notable example of the format is George Eliot’s Middlemarch (1872). Table 2.10 lists the 19 four-volume novels published between 1837 and 1878. Prior to the Vic- torian period, the four-volume novel was much more common. A glance through the online bibliographies British Fiction 1800–1829: A Database of Production, Circulation and Reception and The English Novel, 1830– 1836: A Bibliographical Survey of Fiction Published in the British Isles shows new novels published in one-, two-, three-, four-, five-, and six- volume editions.12 However, by the late 1820s, the number of novels in four of more volumes rapidly declined as the novel in three volumes established its cultural and marketplace dominance.13 The final decline happened unevenly over the 1830s: six four-volume novels appeared in 1830; three four-volume novels and one five-volume novel appeared in 1831; six four-volume novels appeared in 1832; and two four-volume novels appeared in 1835. No four-volume novels appeared between 1836 and 1840. Of the seventeen four-volume novels published between 1830 and 1836, twelve (including the two titles in 1835) were published by A. K. Newman and Company, the successor to William Lane and the Min- erva Press, who had regularly published novels in formats ranging from one to six volumes.14 In addition, they also published the last five-volume novel, Anne Julia Kemble Hatton’s Gerald Fitzgerald (1831). Clearly, the publisher Newman represented a by-gone era: when he stopped publish- ing fiction for the adult market, the four-volume novel disappeared as a regular format for new fiction. Yet, though largely obsolete, the four-volume format made a num- ber of re-appearances during the Victorian period. Modeled on the more

[email protected] 34 T. J. BASSETT The Romance January to . 4 vols. London: T. . 4 vols. London: Paul’s . 1 vol. London: Henry . 4 vols. Edinburgh: William . 4 vols. London: Adams and September 1850 to January 1853. 4 vols. Edinburgh: William Blackwood, 1859. . 4 vols. London: Richard Bentley, 1844. . 4 vols. London: Richard Bentley, 1843–1844. . 4 vols. London: Trübner, 1861. Serialized weekly . 3 vols. London: Henry Colburn, 1846. Fortune’s Football: A Historical Tale 12 November 1843 to 15 December 1844. . 4 vols. London: Henry Colburn, 1841. June 1857 to January 1859. . 4 vols. Edinburgh: William Blackwood, 1871–1872. Serialized in Sunday Times What Will He Do With It? . 4 vols. London: T. C. Newby, 1853. Translated from the Swedish. Blackwood’s Edinburgh Magazine The Dark Falcon: A Tale of the Attruck . London: T. C. Newby, 1846. The Attaché; or, Sam Slick in England Strathern; or, Life at Home and Abroad. A Story of the Present Day . 4 vols. London: Henry S. King, 1872. Serialized monthly in “My Novel” by Pisistratus Caxton; or, Varieties in English Life De Clifford; or, The Constant Man The Hermit: A Novel Blackwood’s Edinburgh Magazine 2 July to 1 October 1859. The Cloister and the Hearth: A Tale of the Middle Ages The Queen’s Lieges The Loyalist’s Daughter: A Novel or Tale of the Revolution. By a Royalist Off the Skelligs Middlemarch: A Study of Provincial Life The Romance of War: or, The Highlanders in Spain Four-volume novels, 1837–1878 Once a Week of War: or, TheColburn, Highlanders 1847. in France and Belgium. A Sequel to The Highlanders in Spain Henry Colburn, 1845. Serialized weekly in the Serialized monthly in Blackwood, 1853. Serialized monthly in December 1872. Issued in two series under the same title, volumes 1 and 2 published in 1843 and volumes 3 and 4 in 1844. eight (bi-)monthly parts December 1871 to December 1872. in Francis, 1867. C. Newby, 1864. 5. [Anonymous.] 6. James Grant. 7. Emilie Flygare-Carlen. 4. The Countess of Blessington. 1. [Robert Plumer Ward.] 2. [Thomas Chandler Haliburton.] 8. [Edward Bulwer Lytton.] 9. Pisistratus Caxton [Edward Bulwer Lytton]. 10. Charles Reade. 3. J. B. Fraser [John Baillie Fraser]. 14. . 11. Mrs. Ogden Meeker [Caroline Josephine Meeker, née Mason]. 13. George Eliot. 12. [Anonymous.] Table 2.10

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 35 Blackwood’s 13 October to 29 The Graphic . 4 vols. London: Macmillan, 1873. Serialized . 4 vols. London: Sampson Low, 1877–1878. . 4 vols. London: Chapman and Hall, 1876. Serialized in eight monthly parts . 4 vols. Edinburgh: William Blackwood, 1873. Serialized monthly in January 1870 to December 1873. . 4 vols. Edinburgh: William Blackwood, 1876. Serialized in eight monthly parts February The Parisians October 1871 to January 1874. The Pillars of the House: or, Under Wode, Under Rode The Prime Minister Daniel Deronda The History of a Crime: The Testimony of an Eye-Witness The Monthly Packet monthly in Edinburgh Magazine Translated from the French by T. H. Joyce and Arthur Locker. Serialized weekly in November 1875 to June 1876. to September 1876. December 1877 and1878. 23 March to 22 June 1878. Volumes 1 and 2 published in 1877 and volumes 3 and 4 published in 15. Charlotte M. Yonge. 16. Edward Bulwer Lytton. 17. George Eliot. 19. Victor Hugo. 18. Anthony Trollope.

[email protected] 36 T. J. BASSETT common three-volume novel, four-volume novels comprised four octavo volumes priced at two guineas (£2 2s or 42s) for the set. Another nine- teen novels in four volumes were published irregularly between 1841 and 1878. Two of the novels, arguably, could be excluded. Thomas Chan- dler Haliburton’s The Attaché: or, Sam Slick in England (1843–1844) originally appeared as two two-volume novels six months apart with the second set labeled “second series”—however, all the volumes share the same title and the publisher Bentley issued them as a four-volume set a year later. James Grant’s The Romance of War (1846–1847), about the Napoleonic War, originally appeared in three volumes subtitled “The Highlanders in Spain” in 1846. Readers demanded a sequel, so Grant quickly wrote another volume the following year entitled The Romance of War: or, The Highlanders in France and Belgium: A Sequel to the High- landers in Spain—again, all the volumes share the same title though not the same publication year. As these unusual cases show, publishers did not always intentionally turn to the four-volume novel. Generally, the continuing appearance of the format can be divided into three somewhat overlapping uses: for silver-spoon novels, for his- torical novels, and for long serialized novels. The 1840s witnessed six four-volume novels. Two novels, Robert Plumer Ward’s De Clifford: or, The Constant Man (1841) and the Countess of Blessington’s Strathern: or, Life at Home and Abroad (1845), were silver-fork novels, a genre pop- ular from the mid-1820s until the mid-1840s which focused on the lives and loves of aristocratic society. The authors Ward and Blessington, as well as their publisher Henry Colburn, specialized in the silver-fork novel throughout the 1820s and 1830s.15 Notably, Ward’s previous silver-fork novel De Vere: or, The Man of Independence (1827) was published in four volumes by Colburn as well. Blessington’s earlier novels had all been three-volume affairs, but Strathern first appeared as a serial in the Sunday Times newspaper over fifty-seven weeks and the length necessitated the extra volume. Blessington herself made £600 on the novel but Colburn only sold some 400 copies of the novel thereby losing £40 himself by the novel.16 Colburn, with the exception of Grant’s novel discussed above, abandoned the four-volume novel thereafter. Of the other four-volume novels published in the 1840s, three titles are historical novels: John Baillie Fraser’s The Dark Falcon: A Tale of the Attruck (1844) is a highly romantic tale of Persia; the anonymous The Queen’s Lieges (1846) recounts the murder of Inez de Castro in

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 37 medieval Spain; and Grant’s The Romance of War (1847–1848). Gen- erally, the popularity of the historical novel declined by the 1840s: with the exception of Grant’s atypical example, these four-volume novels were not successful. The following two decades of the 1850s and 1860s saw fewer four- volume novels produced, six in total, suggesting the near abandonment of the format. Blackwood published two “sprawlingly panoramic” novels by Edward Bulwer-Lytton in four volumes in the 1850s: My Novel: or, Varieties of English Life (1853) and What Will He Do with It? (1859).17 Both novels appeared as serials in Blackwood’s Edinburgh Magazine,the former over the course of 29 months and the latter over 20 months— each serialization considerably longer than the typical novel serialization in twelve monthly installments. The unusual length, clearly, necessitated the extra volume, but the popularity of Bulwer-Lytton propelled the sales of the novels for his publisher. In a similar way, the length of Charles Reade’s novel The Cloister and the Hearth (1861), a historical novel of the Middle Ages, required an extra volume. Originally serialized in Once a Week in 14 weekly installments under the title “A Good Fight,” the novel was considerably shortened at the editor’s request but restored to its full length in book form by Reade. Whereas Bulwer-Lytton had a major pub- lisher to back his novel, Reade paired with the relatively minor publisher Nicholas Trübner who published the novel on commission. The choice of Trübner points to the failure of Reade either to place the novel with a higher-profile publisher or to the reluctance of publishers to take his long novel even though he was a proven and popular author. Reade’s experience exemplifies the depths the four-volume format had sunk by mid-century. With the exception of Bulwer-Lytton and - wood, the four-volume novel became a vanity project: Reade contributed to the publication of The Cloister and the Hearth as did two other authors of four-volume novels in the 1860s. Mrs. Ogden Meeker [Caroline Josephine Meeker, née Mason] placed her historical novel Fortune’s Foot- ball (1864) with Thomas Cautley Newby, well known for his unscrupu- lous use of half-profit agreements requiring pre-payment from authors. An unknown author paid the advertising agents Adams and Francis to publish his historical novel The Loyalist’s Daughter (1867).18 Neither novel made any mark with the public: perhaps the public’s desire for the historical novel had passed or the pro-Catholic themes of these novels jarred with readers. One reviewer of The Loyalist’s Daughter commented, “We were under the impression that novels in more than the orthodox

[email protected] 38 T. J. BASSETT three volumes were altogether out of date, and we must confess that the present specimen does not at all reconcile us to their revival.”19 Judging by the data, many authors, publishers, and readers joined the reviewer in his view that the four-volume novel belonged to an earlier time. All of which makes Blackwood’s and Eliot’s use of the format for Mid- dlemarch more remarkable. Granted, Blackwoods had already used the format successfully to publish Bulwer-Lytton’s novels, but that was twenty years earlier after successfully serializing them in Blackwood’s Edinburgh Magazine. But no four-volume novel of any importance had appeared in over a decade. In a letter dated 7 May 1871, George Henry Lewes, on Eliot’s behalf, mooted the idea of a four-volume novel issued in eight 5s half-volume parts since her “story must not be spoiled for want of space.”20 (They admitted copying the idea from Victor Hugo in France.) The plan appealed to Blackwood on several levels: he admired the early portions of the novel Eliot sent to him, he trusted Eliot’s literary acu- men, and he hoped to sell books directly to the public rather than to the circulating libraries. Blackwood’s decision to publish Eliot’s novel in eight 5s parts instead of the typical twenty 1s parts and the use of four vol- umes instead of three volumes clearly did not deter readers: the individual parts and four-volume sets sold over 45,000 copies and generated a profit of over £6600 for the publisher between November 1871 and Decem- ber 1873.21 Eliot and Blackwood repeated this mode of production four years later with Eliot’s final novel, Daniel Deronda, which also appeared in eight monthly 5s parts between February and September 1876 and in four volumes shortly after. If anything, the second novel was more suc- cessful than the first: the individual parts and four-volume sets sold over 59,000 copies and made a profit of over £7600 for Blackwood between January 1876 and June 1877.22 The success—both financial and critical—of Middlemarch emboldened other authors and publishers to resurrect the four-volume format. Hence, the 1870s saw a brief revival of the format when seven four-volume nov- els appeared in the space of five years, all of them after being serialized in some manner. Jean Ingelow’s Irish romance Off the Skelligs was serialized monthly in St. Paul’s Magazine from January to December 1872 and then issued in four volumes. The newly established Henry S. King pub- lished both the magazine and the novel and later became well known as the publisher of Tennyson and other poets.23 Unfortunately, no records of the author or publisher exist to explain the publication history of the novel. However, Ingelow was a well-regarded poet when her novel began

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 39 its serial run and, with the example of Eliot’s study of provincial life before him, King issued Ingelow’s novel in four volumes as a way of capitalizing on the novelty of Eliot’s novel. In fact, King stole a march on Blackwood when Off the Skelligs appeared for sale and borrowing the second week of November 1872, nearly a month before the four volumes of Middlemarch arrived in bookshops and libraries. While Eliot’s and Ingelow’s novels made their ways as serials and books, Charlotte M. Yonge’s family chronicle The Pillars of the House continued to be serialized in The Monthly Packet (which Yonge edited) from January 1870 to December 1873—an amazing 48 months or 4 full years—then published in four volumes by Macmillan in December 1873, a year after the last four-volume novel. Macmillan was a stalwart of Vic- torian publishing, issuing nearly all of Yonge’s popular religious-themed novels in her long career. The Pillars of the House shared a number of affinities with the novels of her sister authors, all three novels being long studies of provincial life. Unfortunately, no records of the author or pub- lisher remain to explain their choice of the four-volume format. Given the serialization, the decision must have been largely pragmatic since the length of the serialization (fully twice the regular length of most serialized novels) necessitated the extra volume in book form. As with his earlier works in the 1850s, Bulwer-Lytton’s last (and unfinished) novel The Parisians was serialized in Blackwood’s Edinburgh Magazine from October 1871 to January 1874 and then appeared in a four-volume edition. Once again the long length—twenty-eight monthly installments—may have necessitated an extra volume like his earlier novels rather than a conscious attempt to imitate Eliot’s work. The novel sold over 10,000 copies and made the publisher over £1400 between October 1873 and February 1876.24 The only novel to consciously imitate the serial and book format of Eliot’s novels was Anthony Trollope’s political novel The Prime Minis- ter: beginning a few months before Daniel Deronda began its serializa- tion, Trollope’s novel appeared in eight monthly 5s parts from Novem- ber 1875 to June 1876 and then was published by Chapman and Hall in four volumes. Despite Trollope’s reputation and past successes, this novel was a critical and financial failure (though the novel’s reputation has improved in more recent times). After Eliot and Trollope, no other author attempted to imitate the publishing format of Middlemarch, even though in the case of Eliot’s two novels the 8-part, four-volume format proved remunerative for Blackwood.

[email protected] 40 T. J. BASSETT

The last Victorian four-volume novel was Victor Hugo’s The Story of a Crime: The Testimony of an Eye-Witness. The serialization and book pub- lication were done in two parts: the first half of the novel was serialized in The Graphic from 13 October to 29 December 1877 and the first two volumes of the novel were published in December with publication date 1877; and the second half of the novel was serialized in The Graphic from 23 March to 22 June 1878 and the last two volumes were published in June with publication date 1878. The delay between the publishing of the two halves in Britain followed the same delay of the original French publication. Whereas the three-volume novel lasted until 1897 and the two-volume novel lasted until 1898, the four-volume novel ended over twenty years earlier. The only publisher to consistently succeed with the format was Blackwood with the works of Bulwer-Lytton (three novels) and Eliot (two novels), a quarter of all the four-volume novels published during the period. But this was the exception: most four-volume novels failed to make any mark with the public grown used to the three-volume novel.

Authors

Based on biographical and bibliographical sources, 2220 individual authors have been definitively identified as the author of at least one multi-volume novel published between 1837 and 1898. About half of these authors appear in at least one standard reference, such as the Oxford Dictionary of National Biography, Loebers’ A Guide to Irish Fic- tion (2006), or Sutherland’s Companion to Victorian Fiction (1989). An additional 227 authors can be differentiated but not traced, such as “McGauran” author of six multi-volume fiction titles; the never identi- fied author of Rare Pale Margaret (2 volumes, 1878) and four additional titles “by the author of Rare Pale Margaret”; or Noell Radecliffe author of eight titles. Then, there are the authors of the remaining 219 anony- mous titles not attributable to any one author. Thus, some 2447 distin- guishable authors and at most an additional 219 unknown authors wrote the multi-volume fiction of the Victorian period. This is well less than half of Sutherland’s “educated guess” of around 7000 Victorian novel- ists, suggesting his estimate may be an upper bound for the period.25 The identified authors range from the well known and canonical (e.g., Charlotte Brontë, Charles Dickens, George Eliot, W. M. Thackeray, and Anthony Trollope) to the contemporarily well known and still regarded

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 41

(e.g., Mary Elizabeth Braddon, G. P. R. James, J. Sheridan Le Fanu, and Margaret Oliphant) to the obscure and forgotten (e.g., Mrs. Forrester [the pseudonym of Emily Feake Bridges], Reginald Lucas, F. W. Robin- son, and Eliza Tabor Stephenson). Of these distinguishable authors, a majority of 1385 authors only wrote one multi-volume title each between 1837 and 1898, another 444 authors wrote two titles each, and a further 188 authors wrote three titles each. Collectively, these 2017 less pro- lific authors (three or fewer titles each) account for 2837 multi-volume titles produced during the period (or 39.0% of all multi-volume fiction titles). On the other hand, 430 authors published four or more multi- volume titles each, accounting for over half of all the titles produced from 1837 to 1898 (4216 of 7272 multi-volume titles or 58.0%). Over- all, then, a relatively small group of authors produced the bulk of the Victorian multi-volume novels. Going further, 143 authors published ten or more multi-volume titles each (accounting for 2642 titles or 36.3% of titles produced), 45 published twenty or more titles each (1347 titles or 18.5% of titles), and 19 published thirty or more titles each (754 titles or 10.4% of titles). Table 2.11 lists the thirty most prolific authors, each of whom wrote twenty-four or more multi-volume fiction titles each. Collec- tively, these most prolific authors account for 1031 multi-volume titles or 14.2% of the titles produced during this period—an average of 34.4 multi- volume titles each. Sutherland, in another place, observed this fact—that a core group of professional novelists produced the bulk of Victorian fic- tion.26 In this case, about four hundred authors wrote the majority of the Victorian multi-volume fiction published. Most, but maybe not all, of these prolific authors should be familiar names to students of the Victorian novel. Margaret Oliphant, familiarly known throughout the century as “Mrs. Oliphant,” leads the list by a relatively large margin. Her long career as a novelist stretches from the anonymous Passages in the Life of Mrs. Margaret Maitland (3 volumes, 1849) to A House in (2 volumes, 1894) and includes 10 two- volume novels and 61 three-volume novels. In addition, Oliphant wrote 29 fiction titles published in the one-volume format, for an amazing 232 volumes of fiction in all. During most of her working life, Oliphant pub- lished two or more fiction titles per year, an output rarely matched by the other authors of multi-volume fiction. Her closest peers included Florence Marryat (53 multi-volume titles), Mary Elizabeth Braddon (51 titles), Annie Thomas (Mrs. Pender Cudlip) (49 titles), and F. W. Robinson (48 titles). The three women authors all contributed to the sensation novel and the peak years of multi-volume fiction production in the 1870s and

[email protected] 42 T. J. BASSETT

Table 2.11 Most prolific authors of Author Multi-volume titles multi-volume fiction, Margaret Oliphant 71 1837–1898 Florence Marryat 53 M. E. Braddon 51 Annie Thomas 49 F. W. Robinson 48 G. P. R. James 46 James Payn 42 Anthony Trollope 41 W. Clark Russell 39 George Manville Fenn 33 Catherine Gore 33 Charlotte Riddell 33 James Grant 32 32 Margaret Hungerford 31 Katharine S. Macquoid 31 W. Harrison Ainsworth 30 Elizabeth Daniel 30 Frances Trollope 30 Matilda Houstoun 28 William Black 27 Walter Besant 26 Wilkie Collins 26 Hawley Smart 25 Charlotte Yonge 25 Mrs. Alexander 24 F. Marion Crawford 24 W. E. Norris 24 24 Eliza Tabor Stephenson 24 Total 1031

1880s. Anthony Trollope, noted by his contemporaries for his prodigious output, appears eighth on the list with 41 multi-volume fiction titles— certainly prolific but not the most prolific. Table 2.11 is evenly split between men and women authors—14 men authors and 16 women authors—countering to some extent the stereo- type of the prolific lady novelist. The majority of the authors specialized in a particular kind of novel. The prolific male authors tend to be historical or nautical: together G. P. R. James, James Grant, W. Clark Russell, G. Manville Fenn, and W. Harrison Ainsworth made successful careers

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 43 catering to (one assumes) male readers of adventure stories.27 The majority of the novels by Wilkie Collins and James Payn can be classified as sensational, and most of the novels of Hawley Smart depict sporting life, mainly hunting and horse racing. The other male authors on the list—F. W. Robinson, Anthony Trollope, William Black, and Walter Besant—generally specialized in domestic romance, sentimental, and religious in the case of Robinson and Scottish in the case of Black. There is much less generic diversity among the most prolific female novelists. Three female novelists worked in the earlier part of the period: Catherine Gore helped popularize the silver-fork novel, Fanny Trollope wrote silver fork and domestic romance, and Elizabeth Daniel (the widow of Robert Mackenzie Daniel) pioneered what would later become labeled the sensation novel. The majority of the other prolific female authors primarily wrote sensation fiction: Marryat, Braddon, Thomas, Charlotte Riddell, Ellen Wood, Margaret Hungerford, and Matilda Houstoun. A final observation should be made about these prolific authors of multi-volume fiction. Based on the present-day reprint series such as Oxford World’s Classics or Penguin Classics, few of the novelists listed can be considered “canonical” (in even the broadest sense of the word). As of this writing, only Braddon, Collins, Oliphant, Anthony Trollope, and Wood have fiction titles in print in these two present-day series rang- ing from a dozen titles each by both Collins and Trollope to a handful of titles each by Braddon and Oliphant to one title (East Lynne) by Wood. (No doubt, the women authors owe their renewed success entirely to the recovery work done by feminist scholars beginning in the 1970s.) On the other hand, though commercially successful in their day, a hand- ful of authors were out of print by the end of the nineteenth century, such as Daniel, Gore, Houstoun, James, and Fanny Trollope. (Of them, only Fanny Trollope has been recently recovered due to her travel narra- tive Domestic Manners of the Americans [1832] but not her fiction.) The remainder, authors such as Marryat, Riddell, and Robinson, were mostly if not entirely out of print by the early twentieth century. Thus, prolificacy did not necessarily guarantee lasting fame; in fact, just the opposite can be inferred. Of the 7272 multi-volume novel titles published from 1837 to 1898, the 1192 identifiable men authors produced 3190 titles (43.9%), the 1028 identifiable women authors produced 3566 titles (49.0%), and unknown authors produced 516 titles (7.1%) (see Tables 2.12, 2.13, 2.14, 2.15, 2.16, 2.17,and2.18). The difference in the number of identifiable men and women authors may depend on any number of factors. First,

[email protected] 44 T. J. BASSETT

Table 2.12 Multi-volume titles published by gender, 1837–1840

Year Male-authored Female-authored Unknown-authored multi-volume titles multi-volume titles multi-volume titles

1837 34 17 7 1838 32 16 3 1839 34 21 5 1840 35 27 9 Total 135 81 24 Percentage 56.3 33.8 10.0

Table 2.13 Multi-volume titles published by gender, 1841–1850

Year Male-authored Female-authored Unknown-authored multi-volume titles multi-volume titles multi-volume titles

1841 47 24 4 1842 32 27 6 1843 40 27 3 1844 45 31 11 1845 38 32 10 1846 28 28 7 1847 27 27 3 1848 30 30 3 1849 37 29 9 1850 34 36 6 Total 358 291 62 Percentage 50.4 40.9 8.7 given the nineteenth-century social constraints on women’s work, female authors in the nineteenth century may be more likely to conceal their identities through pseudonyms and anonymity as many scholars have argued.28 Second, the difference may be due to the higher professional barriers faced by women writers in the marketplace (e.g., professional networks, contacts, business experience) which kept female authors from being published.29 Third, the difference could be the fault of the archive itself since few publishers’ records survive that would identify the hun- dreds of anonymous authors who wrote multi-volume fiction. Yet, even when named, women authors are more difficult to trace in genealogical records due to English naming conventions—an author only identified

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 45

Table 2.14 Multi-volume titles published by gender, 1851–1860

Year Male-authored Female-authored Unknown-authored multi-volume titles multi-volume titles multi-volume titles

1851 30 41 10 1852 29 46 11 1853 28 40 5 1854 27 50 7 1855 25 26 9 1856 26 42 14 1857 37 44 8 1858 23 47 9 1859 30 38 8 1860 40 40 14 Total 295 414 95 Percentage 36.7 51.5 11.8

Table 2.15 Multi-volume titles published by gender, 1861–1870

Year Male-authored Female-authored Unknown-authored multi-volume titles multi-volume titles multi-volume titles

1861 36 35 11 1862 40 42 9 1863 59 47 11 1864 82 65 14 1865 65 74 11 1866 61 57 10 1867 76 70 14 1868 71 62 17 1869 50 55 8 1870 62 56 8 Total 602 563 113 Percentage 47.1 44.1 8.8 as “Mrs. Smith” is all but impossible to track (and even itself may be a pseudonym). Regardless, the difference in the number of identifiable male and female authors appears small enough to suggest that multi-volume fiction was an open field for both men and women authors. Tables 2.12–2.18 and Fig. 2.2 show the annual production of titles by men and women authors. Overall, for the sixty-one years examined,

[email protected] 46 T. J. BASSETT

Table 2.16 Multi-volume titles published by gender, 1871–1880

Year Male-authored Female-authored Unknown-authored multi-volume titles multi-volume titles multi-volume titles

1871 66 45 10 1872 72 64 9 1873 70 82 15 1874 72 72 10 1875 61 99 9 1876 82 79 12 1877 66 91 8 1878 72 87 12 1879 84 96 11 1880 81 103 9 Total 726 818 105 Percentage 44.0 49.6 6.4

Table 2.17 Multi-volume titles published by gender, 1881–1890

Year Male-authored Female-authored Unknown-authored multi-volume titles multi-volume titles multi-volume titles

1881 64 89 8 1882 63 99 11 1883 66 124 16 1884 71 102 15 1885 74 109 7 1886 75 96 10 1887 82 82 6 1888 80 79 5 1889 63 90 5 1890 76 88 5 Total 714 958 88 Percentage 40.6 54.4 5.0 men and women authors generally split the production of multi-volume titles, with women authors overall penning 376 more titles than their men counterparts. Speculation about the authors of the anonymous or unattributed titles has not been attempted here—though a popular adage claims “anonymous” was frequently a woman.30 Regardless of the gen- der distribution of the authors of the anonymous and unattributed titles,

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 47

Table 2.18 Multi-volume titles published by gender, 1891–1898

Year Male-authored Female-authored Unknown-authored multi-volume titles multi-volume titles multi-volume titles

1891 79 82 8 1892 66 95 3 1893 86 91 8 1894 74 111 7 1895 30 40 1 1896 18 18 2 1897 5 3 0 1898 2 1 0 Total 360 441 29 Percentage 43.4 53.1 3.5 Total overall 3190 3566 516 Percentage 43.9 49.0 7.1

200

150

100

50

0 1838 1843 1846 1853 1856 1859 1864 1871 1872 1874 1881 1887 1890 1893 1837 1839 1840 1841 1842 1844 1845 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1854 1855 1857 1858 1860 1861 1862 1863 1865 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1873 1875 1876 1877 1878 1879 1880 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1888 1889 1891 1892 1894 1895 1896 1897 1898 Men-authored Ɵtles Women-authored Ɵtles Unknown-authored Ɵtles

Fig. 2.2 Multi-volume titles published by gender, 1837–1898 female authors produced slightly more of the Victorian multi-volume nov- els. On average, the men authors penned 2.7 multi-volume titles each and the women authors wrote 3.5 titles each.

[email protected] 48 T. J. BASSETT

However, looking over the course of the century, the data show how the relative proportion of men- to women-authored multi-volume titles changed significantly over the course of the century. In the first fourteen years of the period (1837–1850), men authors wrote over half of the multi-volume fiction titles produced: 56.3% of titles in the late 1830s and 50.4% of titles in the 1840s. Men authors wrote more titles than women authors in most of these years. This continues the pattern observed by Garside and Schöwerling in the 1820s where men authors begin produc- ing fiction in earnest.31 In two of the years, the difference in the number of men- and women-authored titles appears quite stark. In 1837, men authors produced 17 more titles than women authors, accounting for 58.6% of titles that year. A few years later, in 1841, men authors produced 23 more titles than women authors, accounting for 62.7% of titles that year. (For both years, the number of anonymous-authored titles was small, 7 and 4 titles respectively.) Prior to 1845, men-authored titles clearly pre- dominated. That these years also corresponded to the heydays of the his- torical and nautical novels (both overwhelmingly penned by male authors) probably helps to explain this disparity. However, by the end of the 1840s, the difference in numbers of men-authored and women-authored titles reaches parity: in fact, the difference in the number of titles penned by men and women authors is collectively only 6 titles in the last five years of the 1840s. The following decade of the 1850s sees a stark reversal of the situ- ation as the number of women-authored titles decidedly outpace men- authored titles: men authors produced 295 multi-volume titles (36.7% of all titles), women authors produced 414 titles (51.5% of all titles), and unknown authors produced 95 titles (11.8% of all titles). Without excep- tion, women authors produce more multi-volume fiction titles than men authors in each year in this decade. As in the previous decades, the annual difference between the number of men- and women-authored titles some- times appears quite dramatic: for instance, in 1854, women authors pro- duced 23 more multi-volume titles (or 59.5% of titles that year) than men authors, and in 1858, women authors produced 24 more multi- volume titles (or 59.5% of titles that year) than men authors. Except for the decline of the historical and nautical novels in the previous decade (which were mostly men authored), there is no easy explanation for why women authors suddenly predominate in the production of multi-volume novels in the 1850s. But one observation may explain the predominance of women-authored titles: in the 1850s, the number of women authors

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 49 nearly doubles from 123 women authors of multi-volume fiction in the 1840s to 213 women authors in the 1850s. Comparatively, the number of men authors remains flat, 198 men authors in the 1840s and 197 men authors in the 1850s. So, in this decade, a greater number of women authors enter the literary marketplace for multi-volume fiction as com- pared to men. Nevertheless, by the end of the decade, male and female authors once again achieve parity in multi-volume fiction production. In the 1860s, the heyday of the sensation novel, the production of new multi-volume fiction swings back in favor of men authors. For this decade, men authors produced moderately more multi-volume titles than women authors: 602 titles (47.1% of all titles) to 563 titles (44.1% of all titles) with 113 titles authored by unknown authors. Generally, year by year, the difference in the number of men- and women-authored titles favored men-authored titles in most years: for instance, in 1864 the number of men-authored titles significantly outnumbered women-authored titles, a difference of 17 multi-volume titles that year. The 1860s witnessed a large increase in the number of multi-volume fiction titles, due no doubt to the popularity of the sensation novel, much of which appeared in multi- volume editions. The data suggest that men authors contributed slightly more than women authors to the increase in production of multi-volume fiction in the 1860s. The final three decades of the century witness a remarkable shift as women authors go on to dominate the production of new multi-volume fiction. In the 1870s, men authors produced 726 multi-volume titles (44.0% of all titles) and women authors produced 818 titles (49.6% of all titles). In the 1880s, men authors produced 714 multi-volume titles (40.6% of all titles) and women authors produced 958 titles (54.4% of all titles)—a rather significant increase in the number of women-authored titles. From 1891 to 1898, the decade seeing the end of the three-volume novel, men authors produced 360 multi-volume titles (43.4% of all titles) and women authors produced 441 titles (53.1% of all titles). Comparing these figures to the overall production figures discussed above reveals that women authors were primarily responsible for the surge in multi- volume fiction production in the late 1870s and early 1880s: clearly, more women authors entered the literary field and those women authors wrote comparatively more multi-volume fiction than their men peers. The data clearly show women authors predominating in this segment of the literary field, a fact at odds with earlier studies of women writers in the Victorian period such as Gaye Tuchman’s Edging Women Out (1989) which argues that women authors were continually marginalized

[email protected] 50 T. J. BASSETT by publishers in favor of men authors. If anything, it seems women edged men out of the multi-volume fiction marketplace in the 1880s. However, as we shall see in Chapter 5, men authors such as H. Rider Haggard, the author of two moderately successful three-volume novels in the 1880s, shifted to the (for them) more lucrative one-volume novel format and then being pioneered by more entrepreneurial publishers. Thus, the production statistics of multi-volume fiction show women authors successfully rivaling their male peers in the literary marketplace, at least in quantity if not quality. These numbers illustrate the rise of the professional women writer, as Peterson and others have argued. Of all the professions in the Victorian period, literature and its related field of journalism had the lowest barriers to entry. When possible, the nationalities of the authors were recorded.32 In the British Isles (excluding England itself), 139 Irish authors wrote 541 multi-volume fiction titles, 63 Scottish authors wrote 383 titles, and 17 Welsh authors wrote 59 titles. These 217 Irish, Scottish, and Welsh authors collectively wrote 981 titles (13.5% of all multi-volume fiction titles). These authors identified to varying degrees with their regions in their fictions: William Carleton set most of his works in Ireland whereas Rosina Lytton did not; William Black became known as a regional Scot- tish writer whereas Julia Chetwynd only set one of her many novels there; and Anne Beale wrote several novels set in Wales whereas Amy Dillwyn wrote a single Welsh historical novel among her five titles. In most cases, these Irish, Scottish, and Welsh authors lived and worked in England, often in the London area: as we shall see below, publishing overwhelm- ingly concentrated in London so not surprisingly these authors often grav- itated to the metropolis. Turning to the colonies—taken to be the set- tler colonies of Australia, Canada, New Zealand, South Africa, and the West Indies33—86 colonial authors collectively wrote 273 multi-volume fiction titles (3.8% of all titles): 45 authors from Australia (160 titles), 12 authors from Canada (41 titles), 8 authors from New Zealand (34 titles), 8 authors from South Africa (11 titles), and 13 authors from the West Indies (27 titles). Most of these authors moved to Great Britain where their works were published: for example, the Australian-born Rosa Campbell Praed, the Canadian-born Grant Allen, the New Zealand-born Clara Cheeseman, the South African-born Olive Schreiner, and the West Indian-born Augusta Zelia Fraser. Discounting overlaps, 289 British Isle or colonial authors wrote 1185 multi-volume fiction titles, or 16.3% of all titles.

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 51

Table 2.19 shows the twenty-six most prolific Irish, Scottish, Welsh, and colonial authors. Authors from the British Isles predominate on the list, especially Scottish and Irish authors: the Scots Margaret Oliphant (71 titles), James Grant (32 titles), and William Black (27 titles); and the Irish Charlotte Riddell (33 titles) and Mrs. Alexander (24 titles). Notably, two Welsh authors make the list: Catherine Randolph (14 titles) and Anne Beale (13 titles). Nearly all of these authors relocated to England at some time during their careers, most often to the London area. Fewer colonial authors appear on the list: a trio of Australians Benjamin L. Farjeon (20 titles), Henry Kingsley (16 titles), and Rosa Campbell Praed (14 titles).

Table 2.19 Most prolific Irish, Scottish, Author Multi-volume titles Welsh, and colonial Margaret Oliphant (Scottish) 71 authors, 1837–1898 Charlotte Riddell (Irish) 33 James Grant (Scottish) 32 Margaret Hungerford (Irish) 31 William Black (Scottish) 27 Mrs. Alexander (Irish) 24 George MacDonald (Scottish) 23 Charles Gibbon (Scottish) 22 (Scottish) 22 Eliza Booth [“Rita”] (Scottish) 21 Benjamin L. Farjeon 20 (Australian) Mayne Reid (Irish) 20 Richard Dowling (Irish) 18 Percy Fitzgerald (Irish) 17 Justin McCarthy (Irish) 17 George Whyte-Melville 17 (Scottish) Henry Kingsley (Australian) 16 J. Sheridan Le Fanu (Irish) 16 Robert Buchanan (Scottish) 14 May Crommelin (Irish) 14 Julia Kavanagh (Irish) 14 Rosa Campbell Praed 14 (Australian) Catherine Randolph (Welsh) 14 Anne Beale (Welsh) 13 Grace Johnston (Scottish) 13 Charles Lever (Irish) 13

[email protected] 52 T. J. BASSETT

The former two authors both resided for extended periods in Australia; only the latter author was non-European born. All relocated to Eng- land before beginning their writing careers in earnest. As these examples show, it bears repeating that England in general and London in particular exerted a strong pull on potential writers from outside England. Over time, authors from Ireland, Scotland, and Wales consistently accounted for over 10% of the new titles published in multiple vol- umes. As Table 2.20 shows, Irish-, Scottish-, and Welsh-authored titles initially accounted for 10.0% of titles in 1837–1840 which continued with 11.1% in the following decade. In the 1880s, Irish-, Scottish-, and Welsh-authored titles represented 16.0% of all titles (282 of 1760 titles). As the data show, these authors made a large contribution to the num- ber of multi-volume titles published, 13.5% of all titles. The number of colonial-authored titles represents a smaller fraction of overall production but one that rises over the course of the century. Before the 1870s, colo- nial authors wrote relatively few of the new multi-volume fiction titles, 74 titles published from 1837 to 1870, or nearly two titles per year. After 1870, the number of titles written by colonial authors triples to 199 titles published from 1871 to 1898 or about 8 titles per year. In the latter half of the century, many authors born in or residing in the colonies moved back to Europe where their writing careers developed: for instance, Olive Schreiner began writing her novel The Story of an African Farm (2 vol- umes, 1883) in South Africa, but moved to London before she published it. Few of these titles were “imported” (so to speak) from the colonies. Despite these increases, colonial authors only wrote 3.8% of all multi- volume fiction titles during the Victorian period.

Table 2.20 Irish-, Scottish-, Welsh-, and colonial-authored multi-volume fiction titles published, 1837–1898

Years Irish-, Scottish-, and Welsh-authored titles Colonial-authored titles

1837–1840 24 2 1841–1850 79 17 1851–1860 115 24 1861–1870 165 31 1871–1880 211 51 1881–1890 282 87 1891–1898 107 61 Total 983 273

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 53

Not including the British Isles or the colonies, 200 foreign authors wrote 443 multi-volume fiction titles. These authors come from a wide range of countries: 92 authors from the (accounting for 241 multi-volume fiction titles), 23 authors from France (46 titles), 41 authors from Germany (73 titles),34 1 author from Greece (1 title), 2 authors from Hungary (3 titles), 1 author from India (1 title), 11 authors from Italy (17 titles), 5 authors from the Netherlands (9 titles),35 3 authors from Poland (3 titles), 7 authors from Russia (10 titles), 9 authors from Scandinavia (i.e., Denmark, Finland, and Sweden) (33 titles), 3 authors from Spain (5 titles), and 2 authors from Switzerland (2 titles). Perhaps not surprising, American authors wrote over half (54.4%) of the foreign- authored titles, with Germany (16.5% of titles) and France (10.4% of titles) well behind. Collectively, these three countries account for 81.3% of the foreign-authored multi-volume fiction. Overwhelmingly, the for- eign authors come from continental Europe or North America with one exception: Lal Behari Day, an Indian convert to Christianity, who wrote a novel in English Govinda Samanta: or, The History of a Bengal Ráiyat (2 volumes, 1878). Table 2.21 shows the eighteen most prolific foreign authors of multi- volume fiction. As might be expected, four Americans lead the list: F. Marion Crawford (24 titles), Mayne Reid (20 titles), J. Fenimore Cooper (18 titles), and Henry James (15 titles). These four authors and several other American authors such as Bret Harte resided in Europe for extended periods which contributed to the number of multi-volume titles published by these authors in Great Britain. American authors had the added benefit of not needing translation, which many of the other foreign authors required. The paucity of French authors in translation may be due to the number of readers who could read French (a commonly taught foreign language among the middle and upper classes). Because Great Britain imported French-language books, in their iconic yellow covers, publishers may not have felt the need to translate many of them for English readers.36 Over time, the number of foreign-authored titles waxed and waned. As Table 2.22 shows, early in the Victorian period, foreign-authored multi- volume fiction accounted for 10.4% of titles in the late 1830s and 9.4% of titles in the 1840s. American authors wrote over half of the foreign- authored titles during this sixteen-year period: 55 of 92 multi-volume titles (59.8%). All of Cooper’s eighteen novels appear during this period: as the author of both historical and nautical fictions, his works met the

[email protected] 54 T. J. BASSETT

Table 2.21 Most prolific foreign authors, Author Multi-volume titles 1837–1898 F. Marion Crawford 24 (American) Mayne Reid (American) 20 James Fenimore Cooper 18 (American) Henry James (American) 15 Emilie Flygare Carlén 12 (Swedish) Elizabeth Werner (German) 12 Julian Hawthorne (American) 10 Georg Moritz Ebers (German) 8 Frank Benedict (American) 7 Fredrika Bremer (Swedish) 7 Paul Cushing (American) 6 Victor Hugo (French) 6 Robert Montgomery Bird 5 (American) Mrs. Augustus Craven (French) 5 Constance Fletcher (American) 5 Bret Harte (American) 5 Henry Herbert (American) 5 Hector Malot (French) 5 George Webb Appleton 4 (American) Joseph Holt Ingraham 4 (American) Maarten Maartens (Dutch) 4 (American) 4 Adeline Dutton Train Whitney 4 (American)

Table 2.22 Foreign-authored Years Number of titles Percentage of total multi-volume fiction titles titles published, 1837–1840 25 10.4 1837–1898 1841–1850 67 9.4 1851–1860 48 6.0 1861–1870 58 4.5 1871–1880 94 5.7 1881–1890 100 5.7 1891–1898 51 6.1 Total 443 6.1

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 55 popular generic demands of the times. The next two decades see foreign- authored titles fall to levels half that of previously: 6.0% of titles in the 1850s and 4.5% of titles in the 1860s. American authors still wrote nearly half of the foreign-authored titles during this twenty-year period: 50 of 106 multi-volume titles (47.2%). Nearly all of the twelve novels of Swede Emilie Flygare-Carlén appear during this period along with several other continental authors. The last three decades of the century see an increase in the number of foreign-authored multi-volume fiction titles: 5.7% of titles in the 1870s, 5.7% of titles in the 1880s, and 6.1% of titles in the 1890s. American authors wrote more than half of the foreign-authored titles from 1871 to 1898: 136 of 244 titles (55.7%). Several prolific Amer- ican novelists published multi-volume fiction during the later years of the nineteenth century, including Crawford, James, Julian Hawthorne, and Bret Harte. Though never a large percentage of the multi-volume fiction produced, foreign-authored titles represented 6.1% of all titles overall. Due to variable copyright treaties with each of these countries, pub- lishers often paid little to nothing for the right to publish these authors in Great Britain. However, except for American works, they may have incurred translation expenses. For instance, Bentley published Emilie Flygare-Carlén’s in three volumes in the summer 1865. He paid the author nothing for the copyright and paid a Mrs. Bushby £25 to translate the novel from Swedish. All told, Bentley spent half as much on acquiring this novel than one written by a fellow British citizen.37 Despite the economic incentives to pirate foreign works (especially American ones that needed no translation), only 6% of all the multi-volume fiction pub- lished from 1837 to 1898 was written by foreign authors. However, if the American authors are excluded, foreign authors from non-English- speaking countries wrote 2.8% of all the multi-volume fiction during the period. This confirms what Franco Moretti observed in Atlas of the Euro- pean Novel, 1800–1900 (1998): that England was markedly insular in its choice of literary works, generally focusing on native-born or English- language authors over foreigners.38

Publishers

Between 1837 and 1898, some 216 publishers produced at least one multi-volume novel ranging from vanity presses (e.g., the City of London Publishing Company) to small specialist publishers (e.g., William Isbister) to large established houses (e.g., Richard Bentley). Overwhelmingly, these

[email protected] 56 T. J. BASSETT publishers operated in London, with Edinburgh-based William Black- wood and Sons the chief exception. (Though, bowing to necessity, even they established a London office in 1840.39) The concentration of fiction publishing in London caps the trend Peter Garside and Rainer Schöw- erling observe in the earlier Romantic period.40 Of these two hundred and sixteen publishers, 78 published only one multi-volume fiction title each. The vast majority, some 170 publishers, produced less than ten multi-volume fiction titles each—these small producers account collec- tively for 430 of the 7272 multi-volume fiction titles published (5.9%) during the period. The other 46 publishers were responsible for pub- lishing the remaining 6842 multi-volume fiction titles (94.1%). Thus, as the data show, the production of multi-volume fiction was concentrated among a relatively small group of four dozen English publishers during the Victorian period, not all of whom were active at the same times. Table 2.23 lists the twenty most prolific publishers of multi-volume fic- tion and shows to a greater extent how concentrated the production was. Two publishers—Hurst and Blackett (1024 titles) and Richard Bentley (912 titles)—alone produced over a quarter (26.6%) of all multi-volume fiction during the Victorian period. The addition of a third publisher, Tinsley Brothers (549 titles), accounts for over a third (34.2%) of all the multi-volume fiction published. Going further: the top six publishers— adding Chapman and Hall (488 titles), T. C. Newby (483 titles), and Sampson Low (308 titles) to the three already mentioned—account for over half (51.8%) of all multi-volume fiction; and the top ten publishers— adding Smith, Elder (288 titles), Henry Colburn (271 titles), Chatto and Windus (263 titles), and F. V. (259 titles)—account for two-thirds (66.7%) of all multi-volume fiction. Going a bit further yet, the top fifteen publishers collectively produced 5732 titles (78.8%) and the top twenty 6227 titles (85.6%). Without question, fewer than twenty publishers dominated the pro- duction of the Victorian triple-decker during the period. Notably absent from or ranked lowly on Table 2.23 are some of the publishers John Sutherland deemed primarily responsible for the “literary novel”41: Black- wood (139 multi-volume titles), Bradbury and Evans (23 titles), Long- man (115 titles), and Macmillan (194 titles). Compared to a firm such as Hurst and Blackett, the output of Blackwood looks paltry indeed, especially considering that Blackwood began publishing over three decades earlier than their rival. Yet, Blackwood published George Eliot—a reminder that quantity doesn’t necessarily correlate to quality.

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 57

Table 2.23 Twenty most prolific publishers, 1837–1898

Name 2-volume titles 3-volume titles 4-volume titles Total Percentage

Hurst and 147 877 0 1024 14.1 Blackett Richard 215 695 2 912 12.5 Bentley Tinsley 73 476 0 549 7.5 Brothers Chapman and 191 296 1 488 6.7 Hall T. C. Newby 104 376 3 483 6.6 Sampson Low 118 189 1 308 4.2 Smith, Elder 104 184 0 288 4.0 Henry 24 244 3 271 3.7 Colburn Chatto and 66 197 0 263 3.6 Windus F. V. White 56 203 0 259 3.6 Macmillan 104 89 1 194 2.7 Saunders and 54 125 0 179 2.5 Otley Samuel 27 152 0 179 2.5 Tinsley Ward and 48 122 0 170 2.3 Downey Remington 98 67 0 165 2.3 Blackwood 47 87 5 139 1.9 Longman 54 61 0 115 1.6 John Maxwell 13 90 0 103 1.4 C. J. Skeet 23 60 0 83 1.1 Swan 20 35 0 55 0.8 Sonnenschein

Three of the publishers Sutherland singles out do manage to combine prolificacy with literary quality: Bentley, Chapman and Hall, and Smith, Elder. The data show, however, that the typical Victorian multi-volume novel was probably not published by the publishers considered “major” or literary during the period.42 Tables 2.24, 2.25, 2.26, 2.27, 2.28, 2.29,and2.30 show the top pub- lishers of new multi-volume fiction decade by decade. Over the course of the century, a small group of publishers survive from the beginning to the end: notably, Bentley, Blackwood, Chapman and Hall, Longman,

[email protected] 58 T. J. BASSETT

Table 2.24 Most prolific publishers, 1837–1840

Name 2-volume titles 3-volume titles 4-volume titles Total Percentage

Henry 8 59 0 67 27.9 Colburn Richard 8 57 0 65 27.1 Bentley Saunders and 5 30 0 35 14.6 Otley Longman 2 13 0 15 6.3 Edward Bull 2 7 0 9 3.8 A. K. 16072.9 Newman T. and W. 07072.9 Boone Whittaker 1 3 0 4 1.7 Smith, Elder 1 2 0 3 1.3 Other (23) 10 17 0 27 11.3 Total 39 201 0 240

Table 2.25 Most prolific publishers, 1841–1850

Name 2-volume titles 3-volume titles 4-volume titles Total Percentage

Henry 11 147 3 161 22.6 Colburn Richard 18 133 2 153 21.5 Bentley T. C. Newby 14 125 1 140 19.7 Saunders and 7 37 0 44 6.2 Otley Longman 25 16 0 41 5.8 Smith, Elder 1 21 0 22 3.1 Chapman and 12 8 0 20 2.8 Hall T. and W. 1 12 0 13 1.8 Boone John 370101.4 Mortimer Edward 17081.1 Moxon Hugh 34071.0 Cunningham Other (51) 41 51 0 92 12.9 Total 137 568 6 711

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 59

Table 2.26 Most prolific publisher, 1851–1860

Name 2-volume titles 3-volume titles 4-volume titles Total Percentage

Hurst and 30 149 0 179 22.3 Blackett T. C. Newby 21 135 1 157 19.5 Richard 35 49 0 84 10.4 Bentley Smith, Elder 21 41 0 62 7.7 Henry 5 38 0 43 5.3 Colburn Saunders and 19 16 0 35 4.4 Otley C. J. Skeet 8 24 0 32 4.0 Chapman and 8 21 0 29 3.6 Hall John W. 25 0 0 25 3.1 Parker Routledge 16 1 0 17 2.1 Hope 9 5 0 14 1.7 Other (49) 76 49 2 127 15.8 Total 273 528 3 804

Table 2.27 Most prolific publishers, 1861–1870

Name 2-volume titles 3-volume titles 4-volume titles Total Percentage

Hurst and 26 218 0 244 19.1 Blackett Tinsley 31 149 0 180 14.1 Brothers T. C. Newby 62 96 1 159 12.4 Chapman and 53 87 0 140 11.0 Hall Richard 40 84 0 124 9.7 Bentley Saunders and 23 42 0 65 5.1 Otley Sampson Low 22 34 0 56 4.4 Smith, Elder 29 26 0 55 4.3 John Maxwell 13 28 0 41 3.2 C. J. Skeet 11 24 0 35 2.7 Other (43) 97 80 2 179 14.0 Total 407 868 3 1278

[email protected] 60 T. J. BASSETT

Table 2.28 Most prolific publishers, 1871–1880

Name 2-volume titles 3-volume titles 4-volume titles Total Percentage

Tinsley 34 240 0 274 16.6 Brothers Hurst and 13 225 0 238 14.4 Blackett Richard 36 139 0 175 10.6 Bentley Samuel 26 149 0 175 10.6 Tinsley Chapman and 60 109 1 170 10.3 Hall Sampson Low 36 81 1 118 7.2 Smith, Elder 34 44 0 78 4.7 Remington 31 21 0 52 3.2 Chatto and 11 39 0 50 3.0 Windus Henry S. 24 25 1 50 3.0 King Other (58) 108 157 4 269 16.3 Total 413 1229 7 1649

Table 2.29 Most prolific publishers, 1881–1890

Name 2-volume titles 3-volume titles 4-volume titles Total Percentage

Hurst and 36 200 0 236 13.4 Blackett Richard 44 171 0 215 12.2 Bentley F. V. White 38 155 0 193 11.0 Ward and 29 95 0 124 7.0 Downey Chatto and 21 103 0 124 7.0 Windus Chapman and 44 59 0 103 5.9 Hall Remington 61 39 0 100 5.7 Tinsley 8 86 0 94 5.3 Brothers Sampson Low 33 60 0 93 5.3 Macmillan 44 40 0 84 4.8 Other (56) 150 244 0 394 22.4 Total 508 1252 0 1760

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 61

Table 2.30 Most prolific publishers, 1891–1898

Name 2-volume titles 3-volume titles 4-volume titles Total Percentage

Hurst and 42 85 0 127 15.3 Blackett Richard 34 62 0 96 11.6 Bentley Chatto and 34 55 0 89 10.7 Windus F. V. White 18 48 0 66 8.0 Ward and 19 27 0 46 5.5 Downey Hutchinson 5 37 0 42 5.1 Macmillan 16 17 0 33 4.0 William 10 22 0 32 3.9 Heinemann Sampson Low 18 12 0 30 3.6 Methuen 16 13 0 29 3.5 Other (41) 103 137 0 240 28.9 Total 315 515 0 830

John Murray, and Smith, Elder. Over two hundred other firms enter and leave the marketplace during the Victorian period—the discussion that follows attempts to track this change. The latter half of the 1830s show two publishers producing the bulk of the multi-volume novels (55.0% of all titles), former partners now rivals Henry Colburn (67 titles) and Richard Bentley (65 titles). In the second tier, they are joined by a few publishers destined to continue well into the Victorian period, Saunders and Otley, Longman, and Smith, Elder, each publishing at most a handful of new multi-volume fiction titles per year. The remaining publishers, such as Whittaker and A. K. Newman, are holdovers from the Romantic period and all will be defunct in the com- ing decade. The 1840s see the field of multi-volume fiction publishing roughly divided into three groups. The newly established T. C. Newby (140 titles) joins Colburn (161 titles) and Bentley (153 titles) as the major producers of multi-volume fiction—the three publishers account for 63.9% of the titles published during the decade. A group of four pub- lishers follow at a distance behind and account for another 17.9% of titles published: Saunders and Otley (44 titles), Longman (41 titles), Smith, Elder (22 titles), and Chapman and Hall (20 titles). Though all of the

[email protected] 62 T. J. BASSETT publishers mentioned were general publishers (i.e., each published a mix of fiction and nonfiction), Colburn, Bentley, and Newby clearly dedicated more of their energies to multi-volume fiction compared to the other publishers of multi-volume fiction. It may be illuminating to examine one year in more detail. During this initial fourteen-year period, the year 1844 saw the largest number of new multi-volume titles published: 18 novels in two volumes, 68 nov- els in three volumes, and one novel in four volumes. Seventeen pub- lishers produced these 87 titles. Of them, nine publishers only produced one multi-volume title each. Another five publishers—John Mortimer (7 titles), Longman (6 titles), Saunders and Otley (5 titles), Blackwood (2 titles), and Edward Moxon (2 titles)—produced less than ten titles each. Three publishers account for 65.5% of the multi-volume titles produced that year: Newby (20 titles), Bentley (19 titles), and Colburn (17 titles). In particular, Bentley relied on three authors for a third of his titles: G. P. R. James with the historical novels Agincourt, Arabella Stuart,andRose D’Albret: or, Troubled Times 43; James Fenimore Cooper with the nautical fiction Afloat and Ashore and its sequel Lucy Hardinge; and Katharine Thomson with two historical novels The Chevalier: A Romance of the Rebellion of 1745 and The White Mask. Newby’s output this year was rather undistinguished, authored by anonymous pens or all-but-forgotten writers such as Frederick Chamier, Robert Mackenzie Daniel, Catherine Maria Grey, and Ellen Pickering. Colburn, however, counted on a list of well-known authors, including William Carleton, Benjamin Disraeli, Catherine Gore, Charles Lever, Robert Smith Surtees, and Fanny Trol- lope. All told, the year 1844 represents the typical year of this early period: three publishers producing the bulk of the new multi-volume fiction and fourteen others producing the remaining small number of titles. By the 1850s, the trend toward a few publishing houses producing the bulk of the multi-volume fiction and a handful producing a few titles per year becomes well established, though the names of the publishers change. In 1852, Colburn sold his company to Daniel Hurst and Henry Blackett and the new publishers increased their output of new multi- volume fiction titles from Colburn’s average of 16.1 titles per year to 22.3 titles per year (a substantial 38.5% increase). So, Hurst and Black- ett/Colburn (222 titles), Newby (157 titles), and Bentley (84 titles) now account for over half of the multi-volume fiction titles (57.6%) pub- lished in the 1850s. (Bentley’s company suffered a series of financial dif- ficulties in the decade that took until the middle of the next decade to

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 63 recover.44) The next seven most prolific publishers account for 26.6% of the titles produced, with Smith, Elder averaging 6.2 titles per year during the decade leading this second tier. As noted previously, the 1860s wit- nessed a large increase of 59.0% in the number of multi-volume fiction titles produced (from 804 to 1278 titles). The entry of three publishers helps to explain this dramatic increase. Tinsley Brothers, begun in 1858, only published three multi-volume titles in 1861 but published 32 triple- deckers in 1868 (including Wilkie Collins’s The Moonstone). Thus, five publishers—Hurst and Blackett (244 titles), Tinsley Brothers (180 titles), Newby (157 titles), Chapman and Hall (140 titles), and Bentley (124 titles) (now recovered from their financial difficulties)—account for 66.3% of the new multi-volume fiction titles published in the 1860s. Notably, Chapman and Hall increased their output from an average of three titles per year in the 1850s to 14 titles per year in the 1860s, a fourfold increase. (The change in management of the company mid-decade clearly placed a stronger emphasis on fiction.) Two new publishers, Sampson Low (56 titles) and John Maxwell (41 titles), join Saunders and Otley (65 titles) and Smith, Elder (55 titles) in the second tier of multi-volume fiction producers. In the coming decades, Sampson Low will continue as a pro- lific publisher but John Maxwell will tail off dramatically as a publisher of multi-volume fiction. Again, it may be illuminating to examine one year in more detail. In 1864, one of the peak years in the decade, publishers produced 61 nov- els in two volumes, 99 novels in three volumes, and one novel in four volumes. Twenty-seven publishers account for these 161 titles. Of them, fourteen publishers only produced one multi-volume title each. Another six publishers produced between three and ten titles each: Sampson Low (8 titles), Saunders and Otley (8 titles), C. J. Skeet (6 titles), Macmil- lan (4 titles), Longman (4 titles), and Bradbury and Evans (3 titles). The remaining seven publishers produced ten or more titles each: Hurst and Blackett (26 titles), John Maxwell (18 titles), Newby (18 titles), Bent- ley (15 titles), Smith, Elder (14 titles), Chapman and Hall (12 titles), and Tinsley Brothers (11 titles). In a change from previous decades, a larger number of publishers, seven rather than two or three, account for the bulk of multi-volume titles produced this year (in this case, 70.8% or 114 of 161 titles published). In particular, Hurst and Blackett published three novels by F. W. Robinson (Mattie, Mr. Stewart’s Intentions,and Memoirs of Jane Cameron, Female Convict), two novels by Eliza Tabor Stephenson (Janita’s Cross and The Master of Marton), and one novel

[email protected] 64 T. J. BASSETT by George MacDonald (Adela Cathcart). John Maxwell filled his output this year with sensation novels, including two novels by Gustave Aimard (Beehunters and The Smuggler Chief ), two novels by his wife Mary Eliz- abeth Braddon (The Doctor’s Wife and Henry Dunbar), two novels by Charles James Collins (the brother of Wilkie) (The Man in Chains and Singed Moths), and three novels by Annie Thomas (Barry O’Byrne, Bertie Bray,andSir Victor’s Choice). Generally, the 1870s and 1880s, the decades of peak production, saw more publishers producing more multi-volume fiction titles, mitigating somewhat the hold of two or three firms dominating the rest. Newby retired from publishing in 1872, but a number of publishers step up to fill his void. Five publishers—Tinsley Brothers (274 titles), Hurst and Blackett (238 titles), Bentley (175 titles), Samuel Tinsley (175 titles), and Chapman and Hall (170 titles)—account for 62.6% of the multi-volume fiction titles published in the 1870s. Samuel Tinsley, the younger brother of William Tinsley, in particular specialized in library fiction and quickly became one of the leading producers during this decade. This decade, Bentley, Chapman and Hall, and Sampson Low increase their output of titles over the previous decade by five, three, and six titles per year respectively. Three notable firms make their appearances this decade as well: Henry S. King (later sold to Kegan Paul) (50 titles), Eden, Rem- ington and Co. (52 titles), and Chatto and Windus (50 titles). The latter two firms will continue to be prolific producers moving forward. The 1880s see a continuation of new publishers and increased production. Two major changes occurred: Samuel Tinsley sold his business to one of his former authors F. V. White in 1881, and Tinsley Brothers went out of business in 1886, yet still manage to publish 94 multi-volume fiction titles in his final six years. The loss of Tinsley Brothers partially explains the overall decline in annual production in the late 1880s—judging by the data, several years passed before other publishers compensated for the annual 20–30 new titles published by Tinsley Brothers. But once again, five publishers—Hurst and Blackett (236 titles), Bentley (215 titles), F. V. White (193 titles), Chatto and Windus (124 titles), and Ward and Downey (124 titles)—account for over half of the multi-volume fic- tion produced in the 1880s (50.7%). To single out a particular year, in the peak year of production, 1883, twenty-five publishers accounted for the 206 new multi-volume fiction titles produced that year: F. V. White (27 titles), Hurst and Blackett (25 titles), Tinsley Brothers (25 titles), Chatto and Windus (22 titles), Bentley

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 65

(21 titles), Remington (19 titles), Chapman and Hall (12 titles), Smith, Elder (9 titles), Blackwood (7 titles), Longman (7 titles), John Maxwell (7 titles), Macmillan (5 titles), Sampson Low (4 titles), W. H. Allen (3 titles), and eleven publishers with one title each. This year shows the typ- ical division between the major producers of three-volume novels—e.g., Hurst and Blackett, Tinsley Brothers, White, Chatto and Windus, and Bentley—and the other producers. On the level of the individual pub- lisher, Bentley’s six two-volume novels and fifteen three-volume novels for the year represented the works of prolific novelists such as Mrs. Alexan- der (who published two three-volume novels with Bentley in 1883, The Admiral’s Ward and The Executor), Frank Barrett (who published Honest Davie: A Novel), Sarah Doudney (who published A Woman’s Glory), and Mrs. J. H. Riddell (who published her finest novel that year, A Struggle for Fame); and anonymous novelists of such works as Dr Edith Rom- ney, Juliet: A Novel,andWinifred Power: A Novel. Bentley, like the other major producers of three-volume novels, relied heavily on a stable of nov- elists who turned out one or two novels per year. Notably, the City of London Publishing Company, a , only ever produced the sin- gle three-volume novel, Kate: A Novel by Asmodeus [pseudonym], and it was never reprinted. The 1890s, the time of the libraries’ ultimatum, represent the most dynamic period in the history of multi-volume fiction publishing. It will be better to consider the years before 1894 and the years after separately. Leading up to the ultimatum in the summer of 1894, the production of multi-volume fiction titles increased from 158 titles in 1889 to 192 titles in 1894. A handful of publishers produced the bulk of the titles during these six years: Hurst and Blackett, Bentley, F. V. White, Chatto and Win- dus, and Ward and Downey. But a dozen new publishers came into busi- ness, and though none of them produced multi-volume fiction at the rate of, say, Hurst and Blackett, they did collectively account for a large num- ber new titles: Spencer Blackett (begun 1882), T. Fisher Unwin (1882), Swan Sonnenschein (1883), Digby, Long (1888), William Heinemann (1889), Hutchinson (1889), Methuen (1889), Trischler (1889), Edward Arnold (1890), Osgood, McIlvaine (1891), and Lawrence and Bullen (1892). (Many of these publishers will go on to have long successful busi- nesses into the twentieth century.) A few already existing publishers begin producing multi-volume fiction during this period, in particular Cassell (12 titles) and Griffith and Farran (16 titles). In the year of the ultima- tum, 36 publishers produced a new multi-volume fiction title, a third of

[email protected] 66 T. J. BASSETT whom were relatively new firms (i.e., less than ten years in business). Sig- nificantly, then, new and existing publishers did not see the three-volume format as necessarily a dying form in the late 1880s and early 1890s. Rather, more individual publishers than ever were producing them. After 1894, most, but not all, publishers abandoned two- and three- volume novels. A few publishers abandoned the format immediately: Methuen, for instance, published 11 multi-volume titles in 1894 and none thereafter. Long-standing publishers Blackwood and Smith, Elder also published their last multi-volume titles in the year of the ultima- tum. William Heinemann issued Hall Caine’s novel The Manxman, orig- inally scheduled as a three-volume novel, as a 6s one-volume novel in the fall of 1894 and severely cut back on the number of multi-volume titles: from 9 titles in 1894 to two titles in 1895 and three titles in 1896. Thereafter, Heinemann abandoned the multi-volume format completely in favor of the 6s one-volume format. Thirty-six publishers produced the 192 multi-volume fiction titles published in 1894, but only twenty pub- lishers produced the 71 titles published the following year: notably, Hurst and Blackett (17 titles), Chatto and Windus (15 titles), Ward and Downey (7 titles), and Bentley (7 titles). Hutchinson and F. V. White published their last multi-volume titles that year and abandoned the format in favor of 6s one-volume fiction. Eight publishers produced the 38 titles pub- lished in 1896: in particular, Hurst and Blackett published a final fifteen multi-volume titles before giving up on the format, and Chatto and Win- dus continued seemingly unabated with eleven multi-volume titles. Only five publishers produced the 8 titles published in 1897, with Bentley pub- lishing four of them, Chatto and Windus producing a single three-volume novel (Henty’s The Queen’s Cup), and Hutchinson publishing the last three-volume novel (Algernon Gissing’s The Scholar of Bygate). Finally, Bentley Archibald Constable published the last three multi-volume titles (all two-volume novels) published in 1898. Thereafter, the triple-decker truly disappeared. Except for Bentley, Chatto and Windus, and Hurst and Blackett, these figures show nearly every publisher of three-volume novels either aban- doning the format entirely or greatly reducing production by the end of 1895. Many of those who did remain lowered the list prices of their three- volume novels down from the traditional 31s 6d, reflecting, no doubt, the demands of the libraries: Bentley to 18s, Chatto and Windus to 15s, and Hurst and Blackett to 21s. (The list price does not reveal what price the libraries actually paid; however, one publisher, Chatto and Windus, did

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 67 meet their demands for 4s per volume.45) Despite the ultimatum, then, the circulating libraries continued to buy novels in multiple-volume for- mats—it was publishers who ultimately abandoned the format, whether quickly or gradually. Bentley appears to be the most obstinate—sixteen multi-volume titles in 1894, seven in 1895, five in 1896, four in 1897, and two in 1898—but most of them were in two volumes, not three. However, the company was in serious decline: George Bentley, the son of founder Richard, had died in 1895 and his son did not wish to carry on the business. He sold the company to Macmillan in 1898.46 Chatto and Windus, strangely, continued publishing three-volume novels unabated for two more years. Andrew Chatto came out as an early supporter of the libraries’ demands and participated in a symposium of publishers who defended the format: “I have a most hearty appreciation of the three- volume novel,” he said. “Take the great works of fiction in the past; it seems to me unquestionable that they have benefited by being published in the more luxurious form.”47 Despite the turning tide against the three- volume novel from libraries, publishers, and readers, Chatto still defended the format in letters to G. A. Henty in 1896 concerning the publication of his novel The Queen’s Cup: “We are hoping that this story which seems to us to in first place address the readers of library novels, may attract more attention in the three volume form than it would if issued in the first case in a cheap edition [at 3s 6d].”48 Unsurprisingly, the novel did not succeed when published in January 1897 in three volumes instead of the one volume asked for by the author. Later in that same year, Chatto finally capitulated to the inevitable and announced they would issue their novels in one volume at 5s. Hurst and Blackett, long the chief producer of multi-volume fiction, gamely continued with 17 titles in 1895 and 15 titles in 1896. But with no multi-volume fiction titles published in 1897, even Hurst and Blackett finally accepted the end. As shown above, overall men authors wrote 44.0% of all multi-volume fiction titles, women authors wrote 49.6%, and unknown authors wrote 6.4%. However, certain publishers decidedly favored men authors over women authors or vice versa. As Table 2.31 shows, the two top producers of multi-volume titles published more fiction by women authors by a large margin: women authors wrote 671 of the 1024 new multi-volume titles published by Hurst and Blackett (65.5%) and 526 of the 912 new multi- volume titles published by Bentley (57.7%), both well above the overall percentage. In favoring women authors, these two publishers were joined by several other publishers, such as F. V. White (210 of 259 titles or

[email protected] 68 T. J. BASSETT

Table 2.31 Twenty most prolific publishers and gender of authors, 1837–1898

Name Men-authored Women-authored Unknown-authored Percentage titles titles titles men-authored

Hurst and 303 671 50 29.6 Blackett Richard 370 526 16 40.6 Bentley Tinsley 264 239 46 48.1 Brothers Chapman 282 162 44 57.8 and Hall T. C. Newby 183 224 76 37.9 Sampson 180 105 23 58.4 Low Smith, Elder 125 140 23 43.4 Henry 139 119 13 51.3 Colburn Chatto and 187 76 0 71.1 Windus F. V. White 40 210 9 15.4 Macmillan 104 86 4 53.6 Saunders and 70 73 36 39.1 Otley Samuel 71 85 23 39.7 Tinsley Ward and 95 71 4 55.9 Downey Remington 67 75 23 40.6 Blackwood 74 61 4 53.2 Longman 63 44 8 54.8 John Maxwell 37 60 6 35.9 C. J. Skeet 32 42 9 38.6 Swan 26 27 2 47.3 Sonnenschein

81.1% women authored), John Maxwell (60 of 103 titles or 58.3% women authored), and C. J. Skeet (42 of 83 titles or 50.6% women authored). On the other hand, some publishers favored men authors: in particular, Chapman and Hall (282 of 488 titles or 57.8% men authored), Sampson Low (180 of 308 titles or 58.4% men authored), Chatto and Windus (187 of 263 titles or 71.1% men authored), Macmillan (104 of 194 or 53.6% men authored), Ward and Downey (95 of 170 titles or 55.9% men

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 69 authored), Blackwood (74 of 139 titles or 53.2% men authored), and Longman (63 of 115 titles or 54.8% men authored). The differences between publishers remain difficult to explain from this vantage. For instance, why does F. V. White predominantly pub- lish women authors whereas Chatto and Windus published predomi- nantly men authors? As Tuchman claims, based on her examination of the Macmillan’s archives, cultural and social factors played a large role in the predominance of men authors at Macmillan as women authors were passed over for publication by the company’s readers.49 But clearly women authors were not passed over by other comparable publishers such as F. V. White who depended on women authors. Financial factors may also have played a part—the common wisdom being that women authors commanded lower prices for copyrights hence prolific publishers such as Hurst and Blackett may have overly relied on women novelists to maxi- mize profits. But, as shown in the next chapter, Bentley’s best paid authors were his women authors, so disparities in pay may not fully explain the difference either.

Serialization

Graham Law and Robert L. Patten in The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain posit a “serial revolution” in the nineteenth century in the number of books serialized, the types of serialization, and the networks of serialization.50 Over one-fifth of new multi-volume fiction titles (1589 titles in 164 periodicals) appeared as serializations during the Victorian period (21.9%), proof that the serialization of multi-volume fiction con- tributed mightily to this revolution. The two formats—periodical or part serialization and the multi-volume novel—seem on the surface at odds with each other: the former aiming to provide fiction at lower prices to readers and the latter maintaining higher prices for fiction necessitating library subscriptions. In fact, that is what Lee Erickson and others have argued: serialization arose to work around the high price of multi-volume fiction and hence allowed readers access to otherwise expensive fiction.51 So, serializing a three-volume novel could potentially uncut the market for the library copies—that is, why would readers subscribe to a library or buy a three-volume novel if they had already read it in a magazine, a newspaper, or parts? As the data show, publishers often serialized their own novels in their own weekly or monthly magazines which suggest a large degree of coordination between the formats for publishers. On the

[email protected] 70 T. J. BASSETT other hand, a large number of serialized three-volume novels appeared in regional newspapers or penny publications which were read by readers probably not able to afford library subscriptions or not served by libraries at all. Thus, multi-volume fiction could, and did, serve multiple poten- tial audiences during its publishing lifetime—an early example of market segmentation that developed during the Victorian period. But, a few caveats. First, whereas the number of two-, three-, and four- volume novels produced is now known with certainty, the total number of serializations of them, despite the number of periodicals examined here, is still unknown. Law estimates that hundreds of Victorian periodicals and newspapers carried fiction,52 so the 164 periodicals included here serve as a large representative sample of all Victorian periodicals, one admittedly skewed toward the periodicals deemed important enough for indexing or electronic versions (see Table 2.32).53 At best, the statistics reported here should be seen as a lower bound. Second, by examining the serialization of multi-volume fiction, the chapter ignores fiction that was serialized and not republished (of which, anecdotally speaking, there is much) and fic- tion serialized and republished in a one-volume format (such as the major- ity of Dickens’s titles). Multi-volume novels may have been more likely to be serialized due to their well-known authors, length, relative impor- tance in the literary marketplace, and audience.54 Because publishers and the circulating libraries abandoned the three-volume format in 1894, the number of multi-volume novels published (and hence serialized) falls off rapidly and ends in 1898 with the last three multi-volume novels. From 1837 to 1898, 1589 titles out of 7272 total new multi-volume fiction titles appeared at some time as a serial (21.9%), nearly all before publication as a book.55 By number of volumes, 320 out of 2092 two- volume titles appeared as serials (15.3%), 1258 out of 5161 three-volume titles appeared as serials (24.4%), and 11 out of 19 four-volume titles appeared as serials (57.9%). The serialization of over half of all four- volume novels (a relatively rare publishing format) can be attributed to authorship: the well-established authors Countess of Blessington, Edward Bulwer-Lytton (three titles), George Eliot (two titles), Victor Hugo, Jean Ingelow, Charles Reade, Anthony Trollope, and Charlotte Yonge wrote these serialized four-volume novels. The serialization rates of two- and three-volume novels show the dominance of the latter format in the lit- erary marketplace: not only were there more than twice as many three- volume novels than two-volume novels published during the period, but they were also more likely to be serialized.

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 71

Table 2.32 Periodicals carrying multi-volume Annual Arrowsmith’s Christmas Annual* fiction titles, 1837–1898 Gentleman’s Annual Quarterly Magazine New Quarterly Magazine* Monthly Magazine Ainsworth’s Magazine* Argosy* Art Amateur* Atalanta* Baily’s Magazine* Belgravia* Bentley’s * Blackwood’s Edinburgh Magazine* Britannia British Army and Navy Review* British Queen and Statesman* Broadway Burlington* Cassell’s Family Magazine* Churchman’s Family Magazine* Cornhill Magazine* Dark Blue* Douglas Jerrold’s Shilling Magazine* Dublin University Magazine* English Illustrated Magazine* Englishwoman’s Domestic Magazine* Evening Hours* Fortnightly Review* Fraser’s Magazine* Gentleman’s Magazine* Golden Hours* Good Words* ’s New Monthly Magazine Hogg’s Instructor Hood’s Magazine* Kensington* Ladies’ Treasury Leisure Hour* London Society* Longman’s Magazine* Ludgate Monthly* Macmillan’s Magazine* Metropolitan Magazine*

(continued)

[email protected] 72 T. J. BASSETT

Table 2.32 (continued) Month* Monthly Packet* Murray’s Magazine* Myra’s Journal* National Magazine* New Monthly Magazine* New Sporting Magazine* Newbery House Magazine* Pall Mall Magazine* St. James’s Magazine* St. Paul’s Magazine* Scottish Church* Sunday Magazine Sylvia’s Home Journal* Tait’s Edinburgh Magazine* Temple Bar* Time* Titan Tinsley’s Magazine* Universal Review Victoria Magazine Victorian Magazine Young Woman Weekly Magazine All the Year Round* Bow Bells* Cassell’s Illustrated Family Paper* Cassell’s Magazine* Cassell’s Saturday Journal* Chambers’s Edinburgh Journal* Day of Rest England* Every Week* Family Herald* Gentlewoman* Graphic* Halfpenny Journal Hearth and Home* Home Chimes* Home Companion Home Journal Household Words* Household Words Illustrated London News* Illustrated Times

(continued)

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 73

Table 2.32 (continued) Irish Fireside Lady’s Newspaper* Lady’s Pictorial* Life* Lloyd’s Weekly Newspaper* London Journal* London Reader Once a Week* Pearson’s Weekly Penny Illustrated Paper* People* People’s Friend People’s Magazine Pictorial World* Queen* Quiver* Reynold’s Miscellany* Robin Goodfellow Sixpenny Magazine* South London Press* Sun Twice a Week* Welcome Guest Review* World* Newspaper Aberdeen People’s Journal* Aberdeen Weekly Journal* Weekly Post Blackburn Standard* Bolton Weekly Journal* Bristol Mercury Burnley Express* Burnley Gazette* Cardiff Times* Observer* Citizen* Daily Gazette for Middlesbrough* Derbyshire Times* Dover Express* Dundee Courier* Era* Essex Newsman* Exeter and Plymouth Gazette* Herald*

(continued)

[email protected] 74 T. J. BASSETT

Table 2.32 (continued) Farnworth Weekly Journal Fife Herald* Evening Post Glasgow Weekly Herald Glasgow Weekly Mail Hampshire Telegraph* Hartlepool Mail* Hull Packet and East Riding Times* Ipswich Journal* Lancashire Evening Post* Lancaster Gazette* Leeds Mercury* Leeds Times* Leicester Chronicle* Leigh Journal and Times Lichfield Mercury* Lincolnshire Echo Weekly Courier Courier* Manchester Weekly Times* Morpeth Herald* Newcastle Weekly Chronicle Newcastle Weekly Courant* Mercury* Nottingham Evening Post* Nottinghamshire Guardian* Sheffield Daily Telegraph* Sheffield Independent* Shields Daily Gazette* Sunday Times* Tamworth Herald* Taunton Courier* Weekly Mail* York Herald*

*Denotes all years 1837–1898 consulted

The typical serialization of Victorian fiction followed a basic pattern. For instance, Ellen Wood’s novel East Lynne appeared monthly in the New Monthly Magazine from January 1860 to September 1861 before being published in three volumes by Bentley in September 1861. Wood’s second novel The Channings appeared weekly in the Quiver from 7 September 1861 to 29 March 1862 before being published in three

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 75 volumes by Bentley in April 1862. Most, but not all, serialized multi- volume titles follow this typical life span: monthly or weekly serializa- tion in a magazine or newspaper followed quickly by book publication. More rarely, additional serializations followed book publication whether the original was serialized or not. For instance, Mary Elizabeth Brad- don’s novel Aurora Floyd, first serialized in Temple Bar from January 1862 to January 1863 and published in three volumes by Tinsley Broth- ers, enjoyed two later weekly serializations in the London Journal from 30 December 1865 to 7 July 1866 and from 4 April to 7 November 1891. Julia Bosville Chetwynd’s novel Neighbours and Friends, never previously serialized and published in three volumes by Tinsley Brothers in 1868, appeared as a weekly serialization in Bow Bells from 5 April to 28 June 1889, some twenty-one years later. These later serializations, though a less frequent occurrence, speak to either the enduring popularity of the nov- els or the lower (or no) cost to the periodicals for “old” material. For the present, only titles serialized before book publication will be considered. Over the course of the century, the number of multi-volume titles seri- alized before publication increased greatly (see Table 2.33 and Fig. 2.3). From 1837 to 1860, relatively few new multi-volume titles were serial- ized prior to book publication: 5.9% of titles published during 1837–1840 (14 of 240 titles), 10% of titles published during 1841–1850 (71 of 711 titles), and 5.8% of titles published during 1851–1860 (47 of 804 titles). The short-term rise in serializations in the 1840s can be attributed to the increased use of part issues in the wake of Dickens’s Pickwick Papers;the appearance of new half-crown monthly magazines such as Bentley’s Mag- azine (established 1836) and Ainsworth’s Magazine (established 1842); and the trial use of serialization by the newspaper the Sunday Times.56 But generally, the early Victorian period is marked by a restricted num- ber of serial outlets for multi-volume fiction. However, as Andrew King observes, there was a thriving marketplace for serial fiction during these years, yet it was primarily aimed at a lower-class audience. Rarely, it seems, did circulating-library fiction first debut in the penny press as the “kitchen literature” of the 1840s,57 which strongly suggests that the penny press and the circulating libraries served distinct audiences early in the period. All told, before 1860, only 132 multi-volume titles out of 1755 (7.5%) appeared as a serial before book publication. The second half of the Victorian period from 1860 to 1898 sees a dra- matic fivefold growth in the serialization of multi-volume fiction: 22.5% of titles published during 1861–1870 (287 of 1278 titles), 23.5% of titles

[email protected] 76 T. J. BASSETT

Table 2.33 Serialization of multi-volume fiction, 1837–1898

Year Two-volume titles Three-volume Four-volume titles Total serialized titles serialized serialized multi-volume titles serialized

1837 1 1 0 2 1838 0 4 0 4 1839 1 3 0 4 1840 0 4 0 4 1841 2 10 0 12 1842 0 3 0 3 1843 1 9 0 10 1844 1 8 0 9 1845 0 4 1 5 1846 2 6 0 8 1847 1 7 0 8 1848 1 7 0 8 1849 1 2 0 3 1850 1 4 0 5 1851 1 1 0 2 1852 1 2 0 3 1853 2 1 1 4 1854 3 1 0 4 1855 3 1 0 4 1856 2 1 0 3 1857 3 4 0 7 1858 3 0 0 3 1859 3 3 1 7 1860 6 4 0 10 1861 3 12 1 16 1862 8 10 0 18 1863 6 15 0 21 1864 13 26 0 39 1865 8 22 0 30 1866 7 18 0 25 1867 12 26 0 38 1868 11 31 0 42 1869 9 18 0 27 1870 4 27 0 31 1871 3 28 0 31 1872 8 24 2 34 1873 4 31 1 36 1874 8 30 1 39 1875 5 40 0 45

(continued)

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 77

Table 2.33 (continued)

Year Two-volume titles Three-volume Four-volume titles Total serialized titles serialized serialized multi-volume titles serialized

1876 7 40 2 49 1877 5 26 0 31 1878 5 28 1 34 1879 8 31 0 39 1880 4 46 0 50 1881 6 43 0 49 1882 8 32 0 40 1883 6 57 0 63 1884 5 39 0 44 1885 8 48 0 56 1886 8 32 0 40 1887 6 35 0 41 1888 9 36 0 45 1889 15 36 0 51 1890 3 42 0 45 1891 14 38 0 52 1892 9 38 0 47 1893 8 34 0 42 1894 15 33 0 48 1895 5 11 0 16 1896 5 5 0 10 1897 0 1 0 1 Total 307 1179 11 1497 published during 1871–1880 (388 of 1649 titles), 26.9% of titles pub- lished during 1881–1890 (474 of 1760 titles), and 26.0% of titles pub- lished during 1891–1898 (216 of 830 titles). Before 1860, fewer than 10% of published multi-volume titles appeared previously as a serializa- tion; after 1860, a quarter of published multi-volume titles appeared pre- viously as a serialization. The 1880s witness the height of both the serial- ization and publication of multi-volume fiction with two years that decade representing the zenith: in 1883, fully 63 out of the 206 new multi- volume titles published that year were serialized (30.6%), and in 1889, 51 out of the 158 multi-volume titles published that year were serialized (32.3%). For the most part, these high rates of serialization continued up to and beyond the libraries’ ultimatum in 1894.

[email protected] 78 T. J. BASSETT

60

50

40

30

20

10

0 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1852 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1863 1866 1867 1868 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1877 1880 1881 1882 1883 1884 1885 1886 1887 1888 1889 1890 1893 1894 1896 1897 1837 1838 1851 1853 1861 1862 1864 1865 1878 1879 1891 1892 1895

Fig. 2.3 Serialization of multi-volume fiction, 1837–1898

Most would attribute the dramatic rise of serialization after 1860 to the influx of new shilling-monthly periodicals such as the Cornhill Magazine but, as Table 2.34 shows, the reasons are more complex. Overall, out of the 1497 multi-volume fiction titles serialized before publication, 30 titles first appeared in parts (2.0%), 830 titles appeared in monthly magazines (55.4%), 383 titles appeared in weekly magazines (25.6%), and 250 titles appeared in newspapers (16.7%).58 These statistics suggest that monthly magazines, carrying over half of all serializations, dominated the market- place for serialized fiction. However, looking at the data over time reveals three distinct periods of multi-volume title serialization during the nine- teenth century. Before 1860, the monthly magazines—led by half-crown (2s 6d) peri- odicals such as Bentley’s Miscellany, Blackwood’s Edinburgh Magazine,and the New Monthly Magazine—serialized 97 of the 132 serialized titles (73.4%). In comparison, only 15 titles (11.4%) were serialized first in weekly magazines, nearly all of which appeared in the 1850s with the advent of Household Words, Once a Week,andAll the Year Round.Least prevalent, only 14 new multi-volume fiction titles were initially issued in parts before 1860, usually in shilling-monthly parts. Most notably, two Fanny Trollope novels, Life and Adventures of Michael Armstrong, the

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 79

Table 2.34 Multi-volume fiction titles serialized by periodical type, 1837–1898

Year Titles serialized Titles serialized Titles serialized Titles serialized in parts in monthly in weekly in newspapers magazine magazine

1837 0 2 0 0 1838 0 3 0 0 1839 0 4 0 0 1840 1 2 0 0 1841 3 8 0 2 1842 0 3 0 0 1843 2 8 0 0 1844 0 8 0 1 1845 0 4 0 1 1846 1 6 0 1 1847 1 5 0 1 1848 0 7 0 1 1849 2 1 0 0 1850 1 3 1 0 1851 0 1 0 1 1852 1 2 0 0 1853 0 3 0 0 1854 1 1 1 0 1855 1 2 1 0 1856 0 2 0 0 1857 1 2 3 0 1858 0 2 0 0 1859 1 2 1 0 1860 0 5 5 0 1861 0 9 7 0 1862 3 9 7 0 1863 0 15 6 0 1864 1 24 11 1 1865 2 16 10 1 1866 1 19 5 0 1867 1 21 15 0 1868 1 31 10 0 1869 2 18 8 0 1870 0 27 3 0 1871 1 19 8 2 1872 1 21 9 1 1873 0 23 11 0 1874 0 16 19 3 1875 1 27 11 5

(continued)

[email protected] 80 T. J. BASSETT

Table 2.34 (continued)

Year Titles serialized Titles serialized Titles serialized Titles serialized in parts in monthly in weekly in newspapers magazine magazine

1876 2 20 15 21 1877 0 17 7 11 1878 0 18 10 18 1879 0 18 10 17 1880 0 28 8 21 1881 1 24 11 21 1882 1 20 9 15 1883 1 24 18 37 1884 0 17 18 23 1885 0 19 18 35 1886 0 18 18 22 1887 0 18 11 32 1888 0 23 16 26 1889 0 21 12 31 1890 0 18 17 35 1891 0 25 19 24 1892 0 21 12 34 1893 0 13 17 27 1894 0 20 14 29 1895 0 7 5 12 1896 0 3 5 2 1897 0 0 0 2 Total 35 773 422 516

Note Includes duplicate serializations

Factory Boy (1840) and Jessie Phillips (1843), and three W. M. Thack- eray novels, The History of Pendennis (1849), The Newcomes (1855), and The Virginians (1859), first appeared in this format before being pub- lished in multi-volume editions. Of the six titles serialized in newspapers, all appeared in the Sunday Times during its decade-long experiment with serialization. As these numbers show, the period before 1860 featured relatively fewer serializations of multi-volume fiction titles than later peri- ods and those serializations appeared in relatively more expensive venues, half-crown magazines, or shilling parts. During this early period, if a multi-volume novel was serialized before publication, it likely appeared in a monthly magazine associated with the publisher—nearly all of the

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 81 serials published in Bentley’s Miscellany were issued as books from Bent- ley’s press and the same goes for Blackwood’s Edinburgh Magazine and Blackwood and the New Monthly Magazine and Colburn. Clearly, these publishers felt serializing these novels before book publication created a net gain, either financial or marketing or both. From 1861 to 1875, the number of serializations increases rapidly from about five per year to over thirty per year. Of the 472 titles seri- alized during this fifteen-year period, 309 titles first appeared in monthly magazines (65.5%), 137 titles appeared in weekly magazines (29.0%), 13 titles first appeared in newspapers (2.8%), and 12 titles appeared in parts (2.5%). A large fraction of this increase can be attributed to the influx of shilling-monthly periodicals following the appearance of Macmillan’s Magazine (1859) and Cornhill Magazine (1860)—such as Temple Bar (1860), the Argosy (1865), Belgravia (1866), and Tinsley’s Magazine (1867)—most of which routinely serialized two novels simultaneously. (The database lists 21 multi-volume fiction-carrying monthlies beginning in the 1860s and a further six new monthlies in the 1870s.) As Jennifer Phegley argues, these illustrated monthly “family magazines” aimed at a general middle-class market with a mix of suitable fiction, poetry, and essays.59 The shilling monthlies joined the half-crown monthlies (many of which survived into the 1880s) as the largest outlet for serialized multi- volume fiction. Again, as the names of the monthly magazines suggest, the magazines served as organs for their publishers—not surprisingly, the vast majority of the serialized novels which appeared in the pages of these magazines were published as books under the same publishers’ imprints. As a case in point, Smith, Elder was the publisher of 36 of the 45 multi- volume fiction titles serialized in their Cornhill Magazine (80.0%) and Tinsley Brothers was the publisher of 36 of the 41 multi-volume fiction titles serialized in their Tinsley’s Magazine (87.8%). The data show a close, continuing affinity between the monthly magazines, their publishers, and the three-volume novel. During this same period, the number of serializations appearing in weekly periodicals increased as well, carrying half as many as the monthly magazines. Early pioneers—such as Chambers’s Edinburgh Jour- nal (1832), the Family Herald (1842), the Illustrated London News (1842), the London Journal (1845), Household Words (1850), and Cas- sell’s Illustrated Family Paper (1853)—serialized fiction from their begin- nings, but little initially rose to the level of multi-volume fiction until the late 1850s and 1860s. For instance, Cassell’s Family Illustrated Paper,

[email protected] 82 T. J. BASSETT widely viewed as a publication aimed at lower-class readers, begins car- rying novels destined for three volumes beginning with Harriet Maria Smythies’s Hope Evermore (serialized 1858; published 1860) and contin- uing with seven more titles in its short life. Even the Family Herald, long castigated as catering to the lowest readers, eventually served as the serial- ization venue for multi-volume fiction by Mary Cecil Hay, Frances E. M. Notley, Rita, F. W. Robinson, and Adeline Sergeant. As these examples show, the distance between the penny press and the circulating library considerably narrows and overlaps by the middle of the century.60 In the 1860s, several weekly magazines joined these earlier ones, most of whom carried multi-volume fiction from the outset: Once a Week (1859), All the Year Round (1859), the Quiver (1861), Cassell’s Magazine (1867), and the Graphic (1869). Much like the shilling monthlies, these new weekly magazines aimed at a decidedly middle-class family audience. But unlike the monthly magazines, there was no clear connection between who pub- lished the magazine and who published the multi-volume edition—for instance, none of the serialized multi-volume novels in Cassell’s Magazine or the Quiver went on to be published as books by Cassell themselves. Titles serialized in parts, while maintaining a consistent presence, actu- ally decline in proportion to magazine serialization. Anthony Trollope wrote nearly half of the novels in parts issued during this fifteen-year period: Orley Farm (1862), Can You Forgive Her? (1865), The Last Chronicle of Barset (1867), He Knew He Was Right (1869), and The Way We Live Now (1875). Though never a widely used means of serializing multi-volume fiction, parts were used by some authors with some success but by the 1870s the format had run its course, replaced no doubt by the monthly magazine. Thus, from 1861 to 1875, the expanding number of monthly and weekly magazines drives the increase in the serialization of multi-volume fiction: presumably, the demand by middle-class readers for fiction influenced both the increase of magazine and multi-volume fiction production. From 1876 to 1897, the number of serializations increases further reaching a peak in the mid- to late 1880s before the end of the three- volume novel in 1894. Of the 893 multi-volume fiction titles serialized during this twenty-two-year period, 424 titles first appeared in monthly magazines (47.5%), 231 titles appeared in weekly magazines (25.9%), and 231 appeared in newspapers (25.9%). As these statistics show, monthly magazines carry fewer than half of the serializations, weekly magazines maintain their proportion, and newspapers make considerable gains. After

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 83 the boom in monthly magazines in the 1860s, the marketplace for monthly magazines remains generally stable during this later period: few new monthlies entered the market (for instance, Cassell’s Family Maga- zine in 1874, a rebranding if not continuation of the older Cassell’s Mag- azine) whereas older monthlies (such as the Dublin University Magazine in 1882, Fraser’s Magazine in 1882, and the New Monthly Magazine in 1884) went under. On average, from 1860 to 1894, monthly magazines consistently serialized on average twenty multi-volume fiction titles per year; however, this level of serialization did not keep pace with the overall rise in the amount of serialized multi-volume titles. Thus, it appears, seri- alization of multi-volume titles in monthly magazines reached its market saturation in the 1870s and 1880s. Weekly magazines, led by All the Year Round and the Graphic, became a larger venue for the serialization of multi-volume fiction. Ranging in price from halfpence to six pence, weekly magazines considerably lowered the price for multi-volume fiction. Notably, fashionable society papers, such as the Lady’s Pictorial,theQueen,andtheWorld,aimedatwomen readers also carried serialized multi-volume fiction—perhaps an indication that readers expected fiction in weekly magazines of any type. The largest change in the period of 1876 to 1897 comes from the influx of fiction-carrying provincial newspapers. As Law has shown con- clusively, many weekly provincial newspapers, aided by syndication net- works such as William Leng and Tillotsons Fiction Bureau, began car- rying serialized fiction in the 1870s. The earliest examples of newspa- pers carrying serialized fiction are the Sunday Times in the 1840s and the Manchester Weekly Times in the 1850s. However, the data show the practice beginning in earnest in the mid-1870s with the Sheffield Inde- pendent,theBolton Weekly Journal,theSheffield Daily Telegraph,and the Cardiff Times. Another two dozen newspapers joined these fore- runners in the 1870s—notably the Newcastle Weekly Courant and the Nottinghamshire Guardian—and another two dozen newspapers began carrying fiction in the 1880s—notably the Lancashire Evening Post and the York Herald. Several cities, in the periodicals examined here, had multiple newspapers which carried serialized fiction: besides London, the list includes Aberdeen (2), Burnley (2), Cardiff (2), Glasgow (3), Lan- caster (2), Leeds (2), Manchester (2), Newcastle (2), Nottingham (2), and Sheffield (2). Though fiction-carrying newspapers range throughout England, Scotland, and Wales, the majority cluster in northern England and Scotland, especially in the Manchester area, Northumberland, and

[email protected] 84 T. J. BASSETT

Yorkshire. In fact, the increase in the serialization of multi-volume fiction that peaks in the 1880s can be attributed largely to this flood of news- papers carrying serialized fiction. Much of the fiction carried by these newspapers was not published in book form, but that a fair bulk of this fiction went on to be published in multi-volume editions may be surpris- ing. In most cases, the publishers of the book editions had no interest in the newspaper serializations—such arrangements usually pre-dated the book contracts and involved the author or his or her agent (an increasing practice). Though, in some cases, publishers who owned the copyrights of the novels made serialization arrangements with newspapers themselves.61 Arguably, the audience of these newspaper serials did not significantly overlap with the subscribers of circulating libraries; hence, this shows another example of market segmentation where the same novel served distinct readers through a discrimination in price, location, and format. Serialization in parts, largely obsolete by the late 1860s, enjoyed a brief resurgence in the 1870s with the publication of George Eliot’s Middle- march (1872) in eight five-shilling parts followed by a four-volume edi- tion, a format imitated by Eliot’s Daniel Deronda (1876) and Trollope’s The Prime Minister (1876). The appeal of these more expensive part issues and four-volume editions did not extend beyond major authors such as Eliot and Trollope. The final novels in parts appeared in the 1880s: William Black’s Sunrise (1881), John Edward Jenkins’s Jobson’s Enemies (1882), and Laurence Oliphant’s Altiora Peto (1883). What inspired these particular authors and publishers to turn to part issues remains a mystery. However, none were successful and the format Dick- ens legitimized for middle-class fiction ceased to be an outlet for fiction in any format. As the data show, over the course of the period, the connec- tion between serialization and the multi-volume novel format becomes increasing intertwined. Publishers themselves, by the creation of shilling- monthly magazines, serialized novels beginning a year before publishing the novels in two- or three-volume editions for the circulating libraries. The practice allowed publishers potentially to serve two distinct audiences and to profit twice on the same copyright. In the case of newspaper serial- ization, it was authors and some publishers who benefited from the prac- tice and it shows the extent of market segmentation in the 1870s and 1880s. For major authors, such as Mary Elizabeth Braddon and Wilkie Collins, the sale of their works to multiple outlets becomes a routine

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 85 way to maximize their authorial incomes. Publishers of multi-volume fic- tion, then, seemed largely undeterred by the previous serialization of a novel in a magazine or newspaper—Hurst and Blackett, for instance, often issued three-volume editions of novels that originally appeared in provincial newspapers or the Family Herald, perhaps a tacit acknowledg- ment that the publisher saw little overlap between the two audiences. Did monthly or weekly serialization lower the price for fiction for readers? Undoubtedly. However, the practice did little to deter expensive multi- volume editions—in fact, it may have encouraged them because publishers could re-package serialized novels for new audiences. Though numerous periodicals carried serializations of multi-volume fiction, certain periodicals exceeded the others in the amount serialized (see Table 2.35). Many of the most prolific monthly magazines were, as we might expect, the shilling monthlies born in the 1860s: Temple Bar with 76 serialized titles from 1860 to 1894; Belgravia with 65 from 1866 to 1895; Good Words with 55 from 1860 to 1895; Cornhill Magazine with 51 from 1860 to 1894; and London Society with 51 from 1862 to 1894. As these five examples show, shilling monthlies serialized on aver- age two or more multi-volume fiction titles per year and continued to carry them up to the end of the three-volume novel in 1894. Joining these shilling monthlies are a handful of the older half-crown monthly magazines: Blackwood’s Edinburgh Magazine with 57 serialized titles from 1834 to 1894; Dublin University Magazine with 34 from 1833 to 1882; the New Monthly Magazine with 34 from 1834 to 1878; and Bentley’s Miscellany with 24 from 1837 to 1868. Comparatively, the half-crown monthlies featured less serialized multi-volume fiction (on average less than one title per year) than the shilling monthlies. Of the four, only Blackwood’s survives into the latter years of the century, still resolutely priced at half-a-crown. The most prolific weekly magazines were divided into three groups based on price. The illustrated weeklies generally costed more. The long- running the Illustrated London News, priced at five pence, serialized 25 multi-volume fiction titles from 1863 to 1894, the bulk of which appeared in the 1880s, each title running a half year. Its imitator, the Graphic, priced at six pence, carried 39 serialized titles from 1873 to 1894 in a similar fashion. The family paper, modeled on the successful Household Words, cost two or three pence per week: All the Year Round serialized 79 titles from 1859 to 1895, and Once a Week serialized 23 titles from 1859 to 1880. The majority of the most prolific weekly magazines

[email protected] 86 T. J. BASSETT

Table 2.35 Most prolific periodicals, Periodical Titles 1837–1898 All the Year Round 79 Temple Bar 76 The Manchester Weekly Times 76 Belgravia 65 Blackwood’s Edinburgh Magazine 57 Good Words 55 Chambers’s Edinburgh Journal 53 The Cornhill Magazine 51 London Society 51 The Bolton Weekly Journal 49 The Cardiff Times 46 The Sheffield Daily Telegraph 45 Tinsley’s Magazine 43 Macmillan’s Magazine 40 The Graphic 39 The Argosy 39 Sheffield Independent 35 The Dublin University Magazine 34 New Monthly Magazine 34 The Nottinghamshire Guardian 33 The Daily Gazette for Middlesbrough 32 The Lancashire Evening Post 31 The London Journal 28 The Illustrated London News 25 Bentley’s Miscellany 24 The Gentleman’s Magazine 23 Once a Week 23 The Newcastle Weekly Courant 23 The Weekly Mail [Cardiff] 22

Note Includes duplicate serializations were the penny papers: Chambers’s Edinburgh Journal with 53 serialized titles from 1846 to 1896, the London Journal with 28 serialized titles from 1846 to 1897, and the Family Herald with 20 serialized titles from 1857 to 1889. More often than not, most of the fiction carried by the penny papers did not enjoy a second life as a book but a significant por- tion went on to appear in two- or three-volume editions. All told, the higher priced weekly magazines featured more multi-volume fiction, as we might expect.

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 87

The most prolific newspapers can be divided into two groups. Though many early Victorian newspapers included regional or lower-class fiction, at least one newspaper looked to serialize fiction aimed at a middle-class audience: the Manchester Weekly Times serialized 76 titles from 1850 to 1895. That they began with ’s Zoe from 5 January to 18 May 1850, a novel originally published in three volumes in 1845, speaks to perhaps the novelty of the act. (In fact, they would continue to serialize “old” novels for a time before shifting to first run material in 1880s.) However, the 1870s begin a wave of newspapers, at first sin- gularly then collectively, serializing multi-volume novels. Two Sheffield newspapers became the vanguard for what follows: the Sheffield Indepen- dent serializes 35 titles from 1869 to 1893 and the Sheffield Daily Tele- graph serialized 45 titles from 1873 to 1895. Both papers were owned by William Leng and featured their fiction in a weekly Saturday supplement, later spun off as independent papers, the Sheffield Weekly Independent and the Sheffield Weekly Telegraph, respectively. A third newspaper joins these two: W. F. Tillotson’s Bolton Weekly Journal serializes 49 titles from 1873 to 1896. From this paper, Tillotson began his Newspaper Fiction Bureau to syndicate fiction among a wide range of provincial newspapers. As Law recounted, they recruited well-established authors to their ranks, includ- ing Walter Besant, Mary Elizabeth Braddon, Wilkie Collins, and Dora Russell. A host of newspapers follow suit: the Cardiff Times serialized 46 titles from 1874 to 1895, the Nottinghamshire Guardian serialized 33 titles from 1875 to 1894, the Leicester Chronicle serialized 21 titles from 1878 to 1894, the Weekly Mail [Cardiff] serialized 22 titles from 1880 to 1893, and the York Herald serialized 18 titles from 1881 to 1895. Most of the multi-volume fiction titles serialized in newspapers appeared in multiple newspapers due to syndication, usually during the same peri- ods but not always. Many of the fiction-carrying periodicals of the Victorian period were owned by fiction-publishing firms. For example, Bentley owned or pub- lished at various times Bentley’s Miscellany, Temple Bar,andtheArgosy. Not surprisingly, many of the serialized titles in these three magazines appeared as multi-volume books published by Bentley: 14 of the 24 titles serialized in Bentley’s Miscellany (58.3%); 48 of the 76 titles serialized in Temple Bar (63.2%); and 27 of the 39 serialized titles in The Argosy (69.2%). Other periodicals of the period had equal or stronger connec- tions with their publisher: 49 of the 58 serialized multi-volume fiction titles in Blackwood’s Edinburgh Magazine were published by Blackwood

[email protected] 88 T. J. BASSETT

(84.5%); 37 of the 51 serialized multi-volume fiction titles in Cornhill Magazine were published by Smith, Elder (72.5%); and 35 of the 40 seri- alized multi-volume fiction titles in Macmillan’s Magazine were published by Macmillan (87.5%). Clearly, these monthly magazines were “house organs” meant to promote the publishers’ businesses. Other periodicals had weaker connections with individual publishers. For instance, of the 79 multi-volume fiction titles serialized in All the Year Round,Chapman and Hall published 19 titles, Tinsley Brothers published 11 titles, Chatto and Windus published 10 titles, Hurst and Blackett published 10 titles, and nine other publishers published the remaining 29 titles. The indepen- dence Dickens enjoyed as the publisher of All the Year Round appeared to be enjoyed by his authors as well. Turning to authorship, the serializations of multi-volume fiction titles show men authors comfortably leading women authors in production (see Table 2.36). Of the 1497 multi-volume fiction titles serialized from 1837 to 1897, men authors wrote 843 titles (56.3%), women authors wrote 642 titles (42.9%), and unknown authors wrote 12 titles (less than 1%). Surprisingly, these statistics run counter to the overall authorship of multi- volume fiction where men authors wrote 43.9% of titles, women authors wrote 49.0% of titles, and unknown authors wrote 7.1% of titles (as dis- cussed above). Thus, though women authors wrote more multi-volume fiction titles, women authors appear to have been less likely to be serial- ized compared to their men author peers (Fig. 2.4). Decade by decade, the data show a wide initial discrepancy between men- and women-authored serials that narrows over the course of the century. Before 1870, men authors enjoyed a marked advantage over women authors in the serialization marketplace for multi-volume fic- tion: men authors wrote 71.4% of serials from 1837 to 1840, 77.5% of serials from 1841 to 1850, 63.8% of serials from 1851 to 1860, and 59.9% of serials from 1861 to 1870. Thus, before 1870, over two-thirds of the serialized multi-volume titles were authored by men. Given that most serializations pre-1870 appeared in half-crown monthlies (mostly edited by men aimed at a male middle-class audience), these figures con- firm a gender-bias long suspected by other scholars. After 1870, women authors narrow the gap with men authors of multi-volume fiction serial- izations: men wrote 55.4% of serials from 1871 to 1880, 53.6% of serials from 1881 to 1890, and 49.8% of serials from 1891 to 1897. During nine of the years post-1870, women authors serialized more titles than men authors (1873, 1875, 1877, 1879, 1883, 1885, 1889, 1892, and

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 89

Table 2.36 Multi-volume fiction titles serialized by authorship, 1837–1898

Year Men-authored Women-authored Unknown-authored Percentage serial titles serial titles serial titles men-authored

1837 2 0 0 100.0 1838 3 1 0 75.0 1839 3 1 0 75.0 1840 2 2 0 50.0 1841 11 1 0 91.7 1842 2 1 0 66.7 1843 5 5 0 50.0 1844 9 0 0 100.0 1845 3 2 0 60.0 1846 5 3 0 62.5 1847 6 2 0 75.0 1848 8 0 0 100.0 1849 2 1 0 66.7 1850 4 1 0 80.0 1851 1 1 0 50.0 1852 3 0 0 100.0 1853 3 1 0 75.0 1854 3 1 0 75.0 1855 3 1 0 75.0 1856 1 2 0 33.3 1857 5 2 0 71.4 1858 0 2 1 0.0 1859 4 2 1 57.1 1860 7 2 1 70.0 1861 13 3 0 81.3 1862 13 5 0 72.2 1863 13 8 0 61.9 1864 22 15 2 56.4 1865 19 11 0 63.3 1866 18 7 0 72.0 1867 19 19 0 50.0 1868 28 12 2 66.7 1869 15 12 0 55.6 1870 12 18 1 38.7 1871 20 11 0 64.5 1872 19 15 0 55.9 1873 17 18 1 47.2 1874 29 10 0 74.4 1875 22 23 0 48.9 1876 29 20 0 59.2

(continued)

[email protected] 90 T. J. BASSETT

Table 2.36 (continued)

Year Men-authored Women-authored Unknown-authored Percentage serial titles serial titles serial titles men-authored

1877 14 17 0 45.2 1878 21 13 0 61.8 1879 18 21 0 46.2 1880 26 24 0 52.0 1881 27 22 0 55.1 1882 22 17 1 55.0 1883 29 33 1 46.0 1884 24 20 0 54.5 1885 27 29 0 48.2 1886 27 13 0 67.5 1887 24 17 0 58.5 1888 26 19 0 57.8 1889 24 26 1 47.1 1890 24 21 0 53.3 1891 27 25 0 51.9 1892 22 25 0 46.8 1893 21 21 0 50.0 1894 22 26 0 45.8 1895 8 8 0 50.0 1896 6 4 0 60.0 1897 1 0 0 100.0 Total 843 642 12 56.3

Note Dated as first serial appearance

1894). The rise in the number of women-authored serials corresponds to the introduction of the shilling monthlies and newspapers as venues for multi-volume fiction—perhaps the demand for serialized fiction increased opportunities for women or the rise of the women periodical editor (for instance, Braddon at Belgravia or Wood at the Argosy) leveled the playing field or both. In total, not counting truly anonymous authors, 394 identified authors wrote the 1497 serialized multi-volume fiction titles, for an average of 3.8 titles per author. However, two dozen authors proved more prolific, each writing 12 or more serialized titles (see Table 2.37). Most of the names on the list should be familiar to scholars of the Victorian period, especially the top five: Braddon wrote 49 multi-volume fiction titles serial- ized before publication, Margaret Oliphant 44 titles, James Payn 41 titles,

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 91

60

50

40

30

20

10

0 1837 1838 1840 1841 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 1859 1860 1861 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 1869 1870 1871 1872 1873 1874 1875 1876 1878 1881 1884 1885 1887 1888 1890 1891 1893 1894 1895 1896 1897 1839 1842 1862 1868 1877 1879 1880 1882 1883 1886 1889 1892 Men-authored serial titles Women-authored serial titles Unknown-authored serial titles

Fig. 2.4 Serialization of multi-volume fiction and author gender, 1837–1898

Anthony Trollope 30 titles, and Wood 27 titles. All five had long prolific careers and close associations with the periodicals that carried their fic- tion. Despite the presence of three women authors in the top five, the list of the twenty-four most prolific authors shows a decided bias in terms of men: of the top ten, 7 authors are men and 3 women; of the top twenty, 14 authors are men and 6 women. Nearly two-thirds of the top twenty- four authors are men. In addition, these authors collectively account for 509 serialized titles, meaning these 24 authors wrote over a third of all serialized multi-volume fiction titles (34.0%). In comparison, the top five authors account for 191 titles (12.8%) and the top ten authors account for 304 titles (20.3%). Hence, the serialization marketplace for multi-volume fiction titles, like the overall marketplace for multi-volume fiction, was dominated by a relatively small group of authors. The answer as to why men authors predominated in the serializa- tion marketplace lies in the periodicals themselves where many periodi- cals clearly favored men authors over women authors and, more rarely, women authors over men authors. The half-crown monthlies generally carried men authors: men authored 95.5% of the serialized fiction in Bent- ley’s Miscellany; 83.3% in Fraser’s Magazine; 66.7% in the Dublin Univer- sity Magazine; 65.5% in Blackwood’s Edinburgh Magazine; and 58.1% in the New Monthly Magazine.62 The shilling monthlies, however, appear

[email protected] 92 T. J. BASSETT

Table 2.37 Most prolific serial authors, Author Number of serialized titles 1837–1898 M. E. Braddon 49 Margaret Oliphant 44 James Payn 41 Anthony Trollope 30 Ellen Wood 27 W. Harrison Ainsworth 25 Walter Besant 24 Wilkie Collins 23 F. W. Robinson 22 W. E. Norris 19 William Black 18 Benjamin L. Farjeon 18 D. Christie Murray 16 W. Clark Russell 16 J. Sheridan Le Fanu 15 George MacDonald 15 George Manville Fenn 14 Margaret Hungerford 14 Dora Russell 14 Annie Thomas 14 Charlotte Yonge 14 Charlotte Riddell 13 Frank Barrett 12 Eliza Margaret von 12 Booth [“Rita”] more diverse. A few clearly favored men authors: the Fortnightly Review with 92.9% of serialized titles written by men, Longman’s Magazine with 78.6% of serialized titles, Cornhill Magazine with 78.0% of serialized titles, Tinsley’s Magazine with 61.0% of serialized titles, and Macmil- lan’s Magazine with 55.0% of serialized titles. A handful of others clearly favored women authors: the Monthly Packet with 100% of serialized titles written by women, the Argosy with 71.4% of serialized titles, London Soci- ety with 72.9% of serialized titles, Temple Bar with 65.3% of serialized titles, and Good Words with 59.3% of serialized titles. Of the latter mag- azines, three had long-time women editors—Florence Marryat at London Society, Wood at the Argosy, Charlotte Yonge at the Monthly Packet— who often serialized their own novels. Braddon’s Belgravia appears to be the most equitable with 28 serial titles written by men and 28 serial

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 93 titles written by women—though thirteen of the latter were written by Braddon herself. The weekly magazines, in general, show a more pronounced bias toward men authors. For instance, of the weekly magazines that carried the most serialized multi-volume fiction titles, men authored 95.5% of the serialized titles in the Illustrated London News; 87.5% of the serialized titles in Chambers’s Edinburgh Journal; 80.0% of the serialized titles in Cassell’s Saturday Journal; 84.6% of the serialized titles in Cassell’s Mag- azine; 80.6% of serialized titles in the Graphic; and 63.6% of serialized titles in Once a Week. Two weekly magazines favor women authors over men: the Leisure Hour with 85.7% of serialized titles written by women and the Family Herald with 88.9% of serialized titles written by women. Only two weekly magazines run counter to this trend: the long-running weeklies All the Year Round and the London Journal each split nearly equally between men and women serial authors. However, in the case of All the Year Round, the statistics are somewhat deceiving. While the weekly carried 35 serialized titles by men authors and 37 serialized titles by women authors during its long run, the years when Charles Dickens edited the magazine (1859–1870) favored men authors who wrote 78.3% of the serials (18 out of 23 titles). The years following Dickens’s death, edited by his son, saw All the Year Round shift to women authors who wrote 62.5% of the serials (35 of 56 titles)—clearly, a tale of two editors. With few exceptions, newspapers exhibit a more even balance between men and women serial authors. The five newspapers which carry the most serialized multi-volume fiction titles all come within a few percent- age points of equity: the Bolton Weekly Journal with 55.6% of serialized titles written by men authors; the Cardiff Times with 47.8% of titles; the Sheffield Daily Telegraph with 52.3% of titles; the Manchester Weekly Times with 58.5% of titles; and the Nottinghamshire Guardian with 48.5% of titles. A few newspapers depend more heavily on men authors, especially the Sheffield Independent (71.0% of titles), the Weekly Mail [Cardiff] (65.0% of titles), and the Leicester Chronicle (61.9% of titles), and at least two other newspapers favor women authors, namely the York Her- ald (55.6% of titles) and the Newcastle Weekly Courant (55.0% of titles). All seen above, the gender disparity between men and women authors improved over time influenced, no doubt, by the influx of magazines and newspapers more friendly to women authors. As for multi-volume fiction issued in parts, men authors overwhelm- ingly dominated the format. Of the 30 multi-volume novels originally

[email protected] 94 T. J. BASSETT issued in parts (including a few titles issued both in parts and as magazine serials), men authors wrote 25 titles (83.3% of titles) and women authors wrote 5 titles (16.7% of titles). Of the men authors, the most successful were Anthony Trollope with seven titles initially issued in parts and W. M. Thackeray with three titles. Only three women authors issue novels in parts: Fanny Trollope with two titles, Sarah Stickney Ellis with one title, and Eliot with two titles. While the part issue of novels never rivaled periodical serializations, it seems from these statistics to be as much a men-dominated format as the half-crown monthlies.

Conclusion

The data show without question that multi-volume fiction represented an important share of the marketplace for new fiction. Though the num- bers fluctuate somewhat year to year, the total number of fiction titles appearing in two, three, or four volumes generally increases as the cen- tury progresses and tends to keep pace with or outpace the overall pro- duction of fiction. Arguably, multi-volume fiction was the leading format for new fiction in the 1880s by reaching its maximums in both raw num- bers published and market share. As Edwin Reardon observes in George Gissing’s New Grub Street (3 volumes, 1890), a novel of 1880s literary life, the triple-decker was a “procrustean bed” in both literary form and publishing format, and his view is well confirmed by the data presented here. Despite its considerable expense and apparent obsolescence, multi- volume fiction did not limp along during the Victorian period but instead grew in strength as a format for new fiction. At least in terms of produc- tion, the multi-volume format proves itself successful right up through 1890. A relatively small group of authors and publishers dominated the pro- duction of multi-volume fiction. Some 400 authors wrote over half of the 7272 multi-volume titles published from 1837 to 1898 with a smaller core of two or three dozen authors characterized as the leading authors of multi-volume fiction. Though over two thousand authors wrote a multi- volume fiction title each, only about half went on to write more than two titles each. As shown in the next chapter, publishers as the arbitrator between authors and readers acted as the gatekeeper by encouraging cer- tain authors (via contracts) to continue writing more novels. Overwhelm- ingly, these authors were English, Irish, Scottish, and Welsh (i.e., from the

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 95

British Isles), with relatively few foreign or colonial authors. Ten publish- ers published over half of the multi-volume fiction with two publishers, Hurst and Blackett and Bentley, far out producing the others. So, while many publishers produced at least one title, few produced more than a dozen. Clearly then, certain publishers specialized in the multi-volume fiction, such as F. V. White, whereas others dabbled in the format, such as T. Fisher Unwin. All in all, the data show the production of multi- volume fiction concentrated in the hand of a relatively small group of authors and publishers during the Victorian period. As a mode of literary production, the data paint a picture of a divided century. Before 1860, fewer than one hundred new multi-volume fiction titles appeared each year. Men authors wrote the majority of these titles until ceding ground to women authors in the 1850s. Very few titles, well less than 10%, were serialized before publication: of those, men over- whelmingly wrote the serialized titles and half-crown monthly magazines carried most of them. The author G. P. R. James best represents this period: he published 52 multi-volume fiction titles from 1829 to 1860, most of which were historical fiction. They were published by nine dif- ferent publishers with Bentley, Longman, Newby, and Smith, Elder pro- ducing the bulk. Though prolific and popular (some called him the heir to Walter Scott), only five titles were serialized—Arrah Neil (1845), The Stepmother (1846), The Castle of Ehrenstein (1847), Beauchamp (1848), and Margaret Graham (1848)—with four of the five appearing in the half-crown monthlies Ainsworth’s Magazine,theDublin University Mag- azine,andtheNew Monthly Magazine. After 1860, more than one hundred new multi-fiction titles appeared each year; after 1873, more than 150 new titles appeared each year. Women authors equal men authors in writing these titles until women authors completely outpace men authors in the late 1870s and 1880s. Serialization rates shoot up: more than 20% of titles were serialized before publication. In spite of women authors writing the majority of titles after 1860, men authors continued to write the majority of serialized titles. The author Matilda Houstoun (better known as Mrs. Houstoun) best repre- sents this period: she published 29 multi-volume fiction titles from 1862 to 1891, half of which were sensation novels. They were published by seven publishers with F. V. White, Tinsley Brothers, Hurst and Blackett producing the most. Though she proved popular with readers, none of Houstoun’s fiction was serialized before publication.

[email protected] 96 T. J. BASSETT

The influence of gender runs throughout this discussion. Women authors, judging by the overall numbers, succeed remarkably well in the literary marketplace for multi-volume fiction. Certainly by the 1880s, they are writing the bulk of three-volume novels. This gender imbalance cor- relates with certain publishers, especially the most prolific, who clearly favor women authors over men authors. Did readers demand fiction from women authors that publishers rushed to meet? Or did publishers sim- ply employ prolific women authors in order to increase production? The answer remains unclear. On the other hand, women authors still faced challenges in the serialization marketplace: beyond a handful of women authors such as Braddon, Oliphant, and Wood, fewer women authors seri- alized their fiction before publication compared to men. Many periodicals clearly favored men authors over women authors. As with publishers, the reasons for these differences remain unclear. The data can only point out these differences; it cannot explain them.

Notes

1. See James Raven and Antonia Forster, The English Novel 1770–1829,vol- ume I: 1770–1799 (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2000), p. 2. 2. The Stanford Companion to Victorian Fiction (Stanford: Stanford Univer- sity Press, 1989), p. 1. 3. As of 1 December 2018. The database is available at: www. victorianresearch.org/atcl. 4. Garside and his co-authors working with fifteen scholars took fifteen years to individually examine the over two thousand fiction titles published from 1800 to 1829. 5. Chapter 4 in his Victorian Fiction: Writers, Publishers, Readers (London: Macmillan, 1995). 6. Simon Eliot, Some Patterns and Trends in British Publishing, 1800–1919 (London: Bibliographical Society, 1994), pp. 7–9, 111–15. 7. The “Analytical Table of Books Published” often appeared in January and summarized data for the previous year. When the feature began in 1870, it included new “novels, tales, and other fiction” and new “juvenile works and tales” as separate categories. Beginning in 1895, however, the editors combined the two categories. For my purposes, then, I have limited my comparison to the years 1870 to 1894. Note that the number of new fiction titles for 1870–1872 appears suspiciously small. I would like to thank Professor Simon Eliot for supplying me these figures. The data, in another form, appear in his Some Patterns and Trends in British Publishing, 1800–1919 (London: Bibliographical Society, 1994).

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 97

8. Ibid., pp. 46–51. 9. Ibid., p. 77. 10. Quite a few one-volume novels appeared with the 10s 6d price. That price quickly declined to 7s or 6s by the 1860s. 11. This largely confirms the view that publishers pressured authors to pro- duce novels long enough to fill three volumes as Griest’s example of Rhoda Broughton shows (Mudie’s Circulating Library and the Victorian Novel [Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1970], p. 55). 12. Found at http://www.british-fiction.cf.ac.uk/ and http://www.cf.ac.uk/ encap/journals/corvey/1830s/ respectively. 13. See Garside and Schöwerling, The English Novel 1770–1829, volume II: 1800–1829 (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2000), pp. 90ff. 14. Ann W. Engar, “The Minerva Press,” The British Literary Book Trade, 1700–1820, ed. J. K. Bracken and Joel Silver (Detroit: Gale Research, 1995), pp. 191–97. 15. For a history of the genre, see Alison Adburgham, Silver Fork Society: Fashionable Life and Literature from 1814 to 1840 (London: Constable, 1983). 16. R. R. Madden, The Literary Life and Correspondence of the Countess of Blessington, volume 1 (London: Newby, 1855), p. 260. 17. Sutherland, The Stanford Companion to Victorian Fiction, p. 454. 18. Henry John Adams and John C. Francis operated a railway and general advertising agency and published newspaper directories. This, as far as can be determined, was their only foray into fiction. 19. The United Service Magazine (May 1867), p. 123. 20. Quoted in Sutherland, op. cit., p. 102. The publication history of Middle- march has been well covered by others—such as Chapter 9 of Sutherland’s Victorian Novelists and Publishers, Chapter 3 of Feltes’s Modes of Produc- tion of Victorian Novels, and Part 1 of Simon R. Frost’s The Business of the Novel—and need not be repeated here. 21. David Finkelstein, The House of Blackwood: Author-Publisher Relations in the Victorian Era (University Park: Pennsylvania State University Press, 2002), p. 160. 22. Ibid. 23. King sold his business to Kegan Paul in 1877. For more on King’s his- tory, see Leslie Howsam’s Kegan Paul: A Victorian Imprint (Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1999). 24. Finkelstein, op. cit., p. 160. 25. The Stanford Companion to Victorian Fiction,p.1.Asof1December 2018, ATCL has 3441 author entries. 26. Victorian Fiction: Writers, Publishers, Readers (New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1995), p. 161.

[email protected] 98 T. J. BASSETT

27. Though as Andrew Nash well argues in his study of William Clark Russell, such assumptions about authorship, genre, and audience should not be seen as absolutes. See Chapters 4 and 5 of his William Clark Russell and the Victorian Nautical Novel (London: Pickering and Chatto, 2014). 28. For instance, Elaine Showalter discusses the critical double standard for women writers in A Literature of Their Own: British Women Novelists from Brontë to Lessing (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1978). Cather- ine A. Judd’s essay “Male Pseudonyms and Female Authority in Victo- rian England,” in Literature in the Marketplace Nineteenth-Century British Publishing and Reading Practices, ed. John O. Jordan and Robert L. Pat- ten (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995) challenges the gen- eral use or utility of male pseudonyms for women authors. 29. Gaye Tuchman in Edging Women Out: Victorian Novelists, Publishers and Social Change (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1989) argues for out- right sexism in the literary marketplace. More recently, however, schol- ars such as Linda Peterson in Becoming a Woman of Letters (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2009) examine the ways women authors suc- cessfully navigated the male-dominated publishing world. 30. An adaption of a quotation by Virginia Woolf from A Room of One’s Own (1929). 31. Garside and Schöwerling, op. cit., pp. 72ff. 32. For these purposes of identifying nationality, an author was either born in or resided (for an extended period) in a particular location. In some cases, authors have multiple nationalities, for instance Catherine Spence who was born in Scotland and moved to Australia. Arguably, this basis for these classifications is crude so all of these figures should be taken as somewhat approximate. 33. Numerous authors were born in or resided in India, such as W. M. Thack- eray, but reliable data were harder to find. 34. Properly speaking, “Germany” refers to German-speaking areas such as Prussia which eventually combine to form Germany in 1871. 35. This includes Maarten Maartens, a Dutch author who resided in London but wrote in English. 36. Later in the century, as we will see in Chapter 5, publisher Henry Vizetelly would make his way publishing inexpensive translations of French and Russian fiction. 37. Bentley’s experiences publishing foreign works will be further discussed in Chapter 3. 38. Franco Moretti, Atlas of the European Novel, 1800–1900 (London: Verso, 1998), pp. 151–58. 39. David Finkelstein, The House of Blackwood, p. 10. 40. Op. cit., pp. 76–77.

[email protected] 2 THE PRODUCTION OF MULTI-VOLUME FICTION, 1837–1898 99

41. As he lists in Victorian Novelists and Publishers, pp. 2–5. Keep in mind, the numbers do not include novels originally published in one-volume editions. 42. Obviously, this discussion ignores new fiction titles published in one- volume editions. 43. Mortimer published another James novel the same year, Gaston de Foix: A Romance of the Sixteenth Century. Maybe even Bentley thought four James novels in one year more than the market could bear. 44. See Royal A. Gettmann’s A Victorian Publisher (Oxford: Oxford Univer- sity Press, 1960). 45. Griest, op. cit., pp. 179–80. 46. Roger P. Wallins, “Richard Bentley,” in British Literary Publishing Houses, 1820–1880 (Detroit: Gale, 1991), p. 51. 47. Quoted in Griest, op. cit., p. 201. 48. Quoted in Peter Newbolt, G. A. Henty 1832–1902: A Bibliographic Study (New York: Scolar Press, 1996), p. 583. Nash notes similar exchanges between Chatto and Russell over the continued publication of his novels in multi-volume editions (op. cit., pp. 158–61). 49. In particular, Chapter 7 of Edging Women Out. 50. “The Serial Revolution,” in The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain, volume 6: 1830–1914, ed. David McKitterick (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2009), p. 144. 51. The Economy of Literary Form: English Literature and the Industrializa- tion of Publishing, 1800–1850 (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1996), pp. 158–68. 52. Serializing Fiction in the Victorian Press (New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2000), pp. 13–35. 53. Law lists the main Victorian monthly and weekly periodicals carrying fic- tion in his Serializing Fiction in the Victorian Press, pp. 16–17, 28–29. The database has included 31 of the 33 monthly periodicals and 22 of the 35 weekly periodicals listed: that is, the ones which carried serialized multi-volume novels. 54. As of this moment, the database contains 9180 one-volume fiction titles which represent about 10% of one-volume titles produced during the Vic- torian period. Of them, 958 appeared as serials (10.4%). 55. For the purposes of the following discussion, I have included short story collections where the title story or a majority of the stories were serialized (e.g., Le Fanu’s In a Glass Darkly). 56. Graham Law, “‘Nothing but a Newspaper’: The Contested Space of Serial Fiction in the 1840s Press,” in Encounters in the Victorian Press: Editors, Authors, Readers, ed. Laurel Brake and Julie F. Codell (New York: Pal- grave Macmillan, 2005), pp. 29–49.

[email protected] 100 T. J. BASSETT

57. “‘Literature of the Kitchen’: Cheap Serial Fiction of the 1840s and 1850s,” in A Companion to Sensation Fiction, ed. Pamela K. Gilbert (New York: Wiley-Blackwell, 2011), pp. 38–53. A recent digital humani- ties project, Price One Penny, catalogues works of this type. 58. A negligible number first appeared in an annual or quarterly magazine, 2 titles and 2 titles, respectively. 59. Educating the Proper Woman Reader: Victorian Family Literary Magazines and the Cultural Health of the Nation (Columbus: Ohio State University Press, 2004). 60. As an author, Braddon endured much criticism for converting her penny fiction into circulating library fare, notably her novel Rupert Godwin (pub- lished 1867) first serialized as “The Banker’s Secret” in The Halfpenny Journal from 21 November 1864 to 5 June 1865. 61. For examples, see Law, Serializing Fiction in the Victorian Press, pp. 93– 94; or Nash, William Clark Russell, p. 143. 62. The statistics in the case of Blackwood’s may be a bit misleading: of the 20 serial titles penned by women from 1834 to 1894, Oliphant wrote eleven and George Eliot one so without these two women authors Blackwood’s skews even more strongly toward men authors.

[email protected] CHAPTER 3

Publishing the Three-Volume Novel: The Experience of Richard Bentley and Son

This chapter and the next examine the economics of the three-volume novel through the experiences of two major businesses in the literary marketplace: the publisher Richard Bentley and Son and the circulating library W. H. Smith. The former, as the last chapter showed, produced multi-volume fiction from the 1830s until the end of the three-volume novel—in total, Bentley published 215 two-volume novels, 695 three- volumes novels, and 2 four-volume novels from 1837 to 1898. Bentley’s total of 912 multi-volume fiction titles comes second only to publisher Hurst and Blackett’s 1024 multi-volume titles. W. H. Smith, beginning in 1860, held the contract for railway bookstalls and turned that monopoly into a thriving circulating library to rival Mudie’s Select Library. Whereas many scholars have discussed Victorian publishers and libraries as cultural institutions, few have discussed them as businesses. Even when financial matters arise, they rarely go beyond the level of the individual anecdote or example. By addressing publishers and libraries as businesses, I hope to analyze the “symbiotic relationship,” in the words of Lewis Roberts, at the heart of the Victorian literary marketplace.1 Victorian publishers, such as Bentley and Hurst and Blackett, pro- duced commodities for sale—their business model, then, is fairly straight- forward: publish novels at the lowest possible cost and sell them at the highest possible price to maximize profit. By the nineteenth century, pub- lishers rarely actually “produced” the novels at all since they largely out- sourced composition, printing, binding, and distribution to third parties.

© The Author(s) 2020 101 T. J. Bassett, The Rise and Fall of the Victorian Three-Volume Novel, New Directions in Book History, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-030-31926-7_3

[email protected] 102 T. J. BASSETT

Publishers, as the holders of capital, served to organize the production of novels beginning with buying or renting a copyright from an author, pur- chasing materials (such as paper and covers), contracting with third parties such as printers and binders to produce the material object, storing the finished books, advertising, and finally selling and shipping them. The key variables for publishers include not only the individual cost of each step in the production process (e.g., copyright, printing, advertising) but also the size of the edition to produce and the price to sell it. Publishers made money when they made the right number books and sold them at the right price to satisfy demand. If the data of the last chapter prove anything, multi-volume fiction enjoyed continued publishing success throughout the Victorian period. The numbers strongly imply the three-volume novel must have been economically successful as well—otherwise, why would so many authors write them, publishers produce them, and circulating libraries buy them? But how economically successful? Examining Bentley’s experience with publishing the format, then, gives us insight into fiction marketplace for authors, publishers, and circulating libraries. This view, combined with the examination of W. H. Smith’s business in the next chapter, will help determine the relative positions of authors, publishers, and libraries in the Victorian literary marketplace. Richard Bentley (1794–1871) was one of the leading publishers of the nineteenth century. He came from a printing family (his uncle published the Gentleman’s Magazine) and he began his own printing business with a brother in 1819. In 1829, Bentley entered into a partnership with estab- lished publisher Henry Colburn (1784–1855). Following Colburn’s prac- tice, the two focused on fiction, especially multi-volume titles, aimed at the circulating library trade. They also pioneered the “cheap reprint” with their 6s one-volume Standard Novels series. The acrimonious partnership ended in 1832 and Bentley and Colburn became publishing rivals in the fiction marketplace—as shown in the last chapter, the collective outputs of Bentley and Colburn produced the most multi-volume fiction in the late 1830s and 1840s. Bentley’s son George (1828–1895) entered the busi- ness in the 1840s and took over management after his father’s injuries in a serious fall in 1867. George renamed the firm Richard Bentley and Son after his father’s death. With the death of George, the firm suffered bankruptcy before being sold to Macmillan near the end of the century.2 Symbolically, the end of publisher Bentley coincides with the end of the Victorian multi-volume novel.

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 103

In order to assess his success with multi-volume fiction, this chapter analyzes the publication accounts of over 100 three-volume titles from 1865 to 1890 to determine the typical costs of this staple of the publish- er’s list.3 For the purposes of this analysis, fiction in two or four volumes has been ignored mostly because Bentley produced relatively fewer such titles (over three-quarters of his multi-volume fiction appeared in three volumes).4 As a baseline, a large sample of 66 three-volume titles pub- lished from 1865 to 1870 will be examined. Then, two later years will be compared—17 titles from 1885 and 18 titles from 1890—to see how much of the business of publishing the three volumes changes over the course of the century for a publisher like Bentley. As will be shown, the economics and publishing of the three-volume novel remain fairly consis- tent for Bentley. The 101 novels sampled (or 13.7% of the three-volume fiction Bentley published during the period) range from notable successes (Rhoda Broughton’s as a Rose Is She [1870]) to outright failures (J. Sheridan Le Fanu’s A Lost Name [1868]), but most fall in between as modestly profitable books. These accounts allow us to better understand the relative positions of publishers in the context of the Victorian book trade, as well as the underlying economic reasons for the longevity of the three-volume novel format. John Sutherland has argued (following Royal A. Gettmann, Guinevere Griest, and others) that the three-volume novel lasted more than eighty years because it was “commercially safe.”5 More recently, Frederick Nesta has argued the opposite, that the three-volume novel did not offer “guaranteed profits.”6 These previous attempts to assess the economics of the three-volume novel, however, rely mainly on anecdotal evidence, a handful of sample accounts, individual authors’ experiences, or some combination of the three. Hence, the examination of a large sample of accounts from Bentley will give a more exact economic pic- ture, revealing that the three-volume novel was a rather predictable and profit-making format for Bentley in particular and likely for all publishers generally.

Richard Bentley, 1865--1870

The late 1860s, as we have seen in Chapter 2, begins the height of the Victorian three-volume novel. Earlier in the decade, Mudie’s sur- vived near-bankruptcy due to overexpansion and competition from the short-lived Library Company Limited. By 1864, with the help of a

[email protected] 104 T. J. BASSETT group of publishers including Bentley, Mudie’s refinanced its debts and became a limited liability company.7 Mudie’s and W. H. Smith soon after became the largest purchasers of fiction, a position they maintained for the remainder of the century. For Bentley, the 1860s proved to be good years as well. After surviving his own near-bankruptcy in the 1850s, which involved an inspectorate imposed by his creditors, Bentley reached stabil- ity by the middle of the 1860s with the publication of such popular novels as Ellen Wood’s East Lynne (1861) and Le Fanu’s Uncle Silas (1864), as well as the purchase of Temple Bar in 1866 to replace the aging Bentley’s Miscellany and serve as a house monthly to rival Smith, Elder’s Corn- hill Magazine. As Roger P. Wallins observes, Bentley “was as strong in the early 1870s as it had ever been.”8 The late 1860s, overall, begins an increase in the number of three-volume novel titles produced, peaking in the mid-1880s—an increase that Bentley helped to produce. During the period 1865–1870, Bentley produced sixty-six three- volume novels, an average of eleven per year.9 This group of sixty-six novels includes twenty-nine novels by twenty men authors and thirty- seven novels by twenty-two women (see Table 3.1).10 Amazingly, Flo- rence Marryat accounts for eight titles during the six years (including three in one year) and John Berwick Harwood six titles. Bentley’s print runs ranged from a minimum of 375 copies up to a maximum of 2250 copies for Broughton’s novel, but the most common edition sizes were 375 copies (n = 3), 500 copies (n = 31), 625 copies (n = 8), 750 copies (n = 11), 1000 copies (n = 7), and 1500 copies (n = 2) (for sixty-two out of sixty-six titles). One title combines the costs of two with- out segregating them in the account: Bentley published Mrs. Alexander’s Which Shall It Be? (1866) as an edition of 500 copies, then reprinted an additional 250 copies four months later (apparently the only three-volume novel Bentley reprinted as a three-volume novel during this period). For this analysis, Alexander’s novel has been included in the statistics for the 750-copy editions. Three titles deviate from these typical print runs: Percy Fitzgerald’s Jenny Bell (1866) in an edition of 700 copies, Wood’s Roland Yorke (1869) in an edition of 1625 copies, and Broughton’s Red as a Rose Is She (1870) in an edition of 2250 copies. Because of these anomalies, the three latter titles are not included in the later general statistics. The entry for Florence Marryat’s second novel Too Good for Him (1865) offers an example of the typical Bentley account (see Table 3.2).11 Costs and receipts were entered quarterly and totaled at the end of each calendar year, and the firm broke down production costs and receipts into

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 105 Profit or loss (£) (continued) (sales) (£) Sales Receipts Advertising (£) Binding (£) Printing (£) 30.0.0 108.12.3 29.14.0 43.12.6 391 348.10.0 115.9.3 Paper (£) + 25.0.0 300.0.0 56.0.0 79.16.0 62.12.0 110.13.3 837 486.15.7 100.16.0 300.0.0 57.0.0 104.2.0 75.19.6 57.8.3 911 756.14.10 190.8.1 and translation (£) (edition) (edition) Agreement Copyright size 1865 500 Half-profits 50.9.9 33.7.6 108.18.6 35.12.6 85.2.9 418 375.8.10 88.16.10 1865 5001865 500 Sale1865 1000 100.0.0 Sale 32.5.0 Sale 50.0.0 64.7.6 33.7.6 34.18.3 65.10.0 76.7.9 30.0.0 471 41.4.9 422.2.9 373 114.10.3 313.13.6 98.5.3 1865 5001865 None 1000 0.0.0 Sale 1865 500 Half-profits 100.0.0 34.2.0 83.8.0 37.16.0 80.11.0 460 412.8.0 75.8.6 1865 500 Half-profits 25.9.11 30.0.0 103.16.9 29.6.6 62.17.0 342 309.14.11 58.4.9 Year Edition Three-volume novel titles published by Bentley, 1865–1870 a b Florence Marryat Love’s Conflict Florence Marryat Too Good for Him John Berwick Harwood Lady Flavia John Berwick Harwood Odd Neighbours J. Sheridan Le Fanu Guy Deverell Lady Georgiana Fullerton Constance Sherwood Author Title Isabella Banks God’s Providence House Emilie Flygare-Carlen The Guardian Table 3.1

[email protected] 106 T. J. BASSETT 7.17.4 − Profit or loss (£) (sales) (£) Sales Receipts Advertising (£) Binding (£) Printing (£) Paper (£) 150.0.0 40.11.3 101.7.0 34.15.9 59.10.3 465 388.6.11 2.2.8 and translation (£) Sale 75.0.0 48.8.0 111.18.6 48.14.3 72.10.3 610 506.16.2 152.9.11 (edition) Agreement Copyright + 250 size 1866 5001866 500 Sale Sale 50.0.0 29.0.0 150.0.0 48.2.0 33.0.0 31.6.6 69.16.6 35.12.6 44.3.0 52.16.0 371 411 325.7.11 344.8.10 126.16.8 1866 5001866 700 Sale Sale 75.0.0 33.0.0 68.3.0 30.0.0 22.0.3 278 246.7.6 27.17.3 1866 500 1865 5001865 Sale 500 Half-profits 150.0.01865 37.14.2 28.0.0 500 30.0.01865 73.19.6 Half-profits 1000 68.9.0 37.16.0 28.16.8 24.3.0 36.0.0 54.0.9 Sale 92.19.6 30.15.0 458 28.2.6 250.0.0 285 404.3.8 67.4.0 255.5.6 44.9.0 60.7.5 100.12.3 68.15.10 319 63.15.0 273.14.5 67.8.3 46.19.9 753 612.11.4 66.3.10 Year Edition (continued) c John Berwick Harwood Major Peter John Berwick Harwood Plain John Orpington Frances Browne The Hidden Sin Percy H. Fitzgerald Jenny Bell Author Title Florence Marryat Woman Against Woman Catherine E. Spence Mr. Hogarth’s Will William Gayer Starbuck Latimer’s Luck Agnes Strickland How Will It End? Annie Alexander Which Shall It Be? Table 3.1

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 107 Profit or loss (£) (continued) (sales) (£) Sales Receipts Advertising (£) Binding (£) Printing (£) 33.0.0 82.13.0 24.3.0 38.11.0 259 221.5.9 17.18.9 Paper (£) + 25.0.0 250.0.0 78.0.0 89.9.6 54.3.4 103.8.0 758 583.10.9 35.4.11 150.0.0 46.17.6 110.0.0 52.19.0 68.12.3 643 526.18.8 115.0.11 and translation (£) (edition) (edition) Agreement Copyright size 1867 5001867 750 Sale 100.0.0 Sale1867 31.10.0 5001867 75.15.0 150.0.0 Half-profits 500 27.12.0 48.7.6 34.13.101867 31.10.0 61.19.6 65.8.6 750 Sale 94.7.6 37.16.0 361 32.15.6 54.5.3 Sale 60.0.0 301.19.8 73.10.0 31.18.6 722 5.0.2 200.0.0 390 68.0.6 396.18.2 47.5.0 334.19.5 31.9.0 39.11.5 102.4.3 69.6.1 52.10.0 49.7.9 89.9.9 517 329.2.4 737 543.6.11 88.16.7 73.5.1 1866 5001867 None 1000 0.0.0 Sale 1866 750 Sale Year Edition A d John Berwick Harwood Lord Ulswater John Berwick Harwood Miss Jane, the Bishop’s Daughter T. Mason Jones Old Trinity Eleanor Frances Le Fanu Never For Ever Florence Marryat Confession of Gerald Estcourt Lady Georgiana Fullerton Stormy Life Luise Mühlbach The Romance of aCourt Author Title Florence Marryat For Ever and Ever

[email protected] 108 T. J. BASSETT 138.11.4 − Profit or loss (£) (sales) (£) Sales Receipts Advertising (£) Binding (£) Printing (£) Paper (£) 200.0.0 49.10.0 106.18.6 27.12.0 57.12.9 673 302.17.11 and translation (£) (edition) Agreement Copyright size 1867 750 Half-profits 55.17.31867 1500 47.7.61867 61.10.0 Sale 500 39.12.0 Half-profit 88.15.61868 600.0.0 72.5.0 500 684 99.7.31868 35.15.0 401.11.4 116.16.9 Half-profits 104.10.5 500 81.8.0 109.9.1 0.0.0 90.19.0 Half-profit 34.19.8 33.0.0 1423 0.0.0 63.9.9 1166.2.4 83.10.0 20.14.0 473 29.9.8 158.2.8 405.0.11 49.15.1 55.6.6 117.4.6 227 24.3.0 216.1.6 16.19.6 29.2.5 223 190.9.6 70.16.3 1867 5001867 Sale 750 50.0.0 Sale 31.10.0 61.13.0 27.12.0 79.10.0 420 278.1.8 27.1.8 Year Edition (continued) e f Ellen Wood Lady Adelaide’s Oath Catherine Simpson Wynne Margaret’s Engagement S. Baring-Gould Through Flood and Flame John Moore Capes The Mosaic-Worker’s Daughter William Knox Wigram Five Hundred Pounds Reward, by a Author Title Susannah Moodie The World Before Them Frederick Walpole May and September Table 3.1

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 109 22.18.0 155.0.0 176.17.0 − − − Profit or loss (£) (continued) (sales) (£) Sales Receipts Advertising (£) Binding (£) Printing (£) 41.19.6 67.18.0 24.3.0 52.6.9 528 229.19.9 3.2.6 Paper (£) + 40.10.0 and translation (£) Agreement Copyright size 1868 625 None1868 750 0.0.0 1868 None 375 Half-profits1868 0.0.0 31.14.0 375 57.9.11 24.17.01868 109.0.0 62.5.0 500 Sale 45.17.21869 22.8.6 Unknown 39.11.0 375 20.0.0 24.14.9 0.0.0 585 Half-profits 23.13.0 252 25.18.11 464.16.3 76.17.3 32.5.0 223.1.0 25.15.0 20.14.0 219.0.8 39.0.0 57.12.0 61.4.9 33.12.0 24.3.0 22.1.0 251 68.16.3 14.16.0 232.5.6 446 287 57.9.3 253.2.3 201.0.6 89.15.6 54.17.7 1868 500 Sale 50.0.0 30.5.0 89.19.0 17.10.0 61.2.1 264 218.18.9 1868 1000 Sale 300.0.0 63.14.0 71.9.0 36.4.6 83.17.7 422 384.0.5 1868 1000 Sale 400.0.0 69.11.6 85.12.0 48.6.0 113.13.9 634 527.13.6 Year Edition h g Catherine E. Spence The Author’s Daughter John Byrne Leicester Warren Screw Loose Stephen Watson Fullom Time will Tell Anne Beale Country Courtships Author Title Anne M. Carter Smith Work-a-Day Briers J. Sheridan Le Fanu ALostName Annie Edwards Steven Lawrence, Yeoman Florence Marryat Nelly Brooke Herman Ewald John Falk

[email protected] 110 T. J. BASSETT 42.2.11 − Profit or loss (£) (sales) (£) Sales Receipts Advertising (£) Binding (£) Printing (£) 31.4.0 54.19.6 22.1.0 42.16.3 279 257.3.3 56.2.6 Paper (£) + 50.0.0 118.0.0 41.10.6 70.10.0 38.8.7 77.6.0 571 449.15.9 104.0.8 and translation (£) year) Agreement Copyright size 1869 5001869 None 7501869 500 0.0.0 Sale1869 Unknown 750 250.0.0 10.0.01869 43.6.3 31.7.2 Sale 1250 72.10.9 52.7.61869 150.0.0 44.2.0 Sale 18.18.0 625 55.6.10 85.14.8 19.10.3 72.0.0 262.10.01869 Sale 666 258 88.9.3 625 33.1.9 519.0.0 112.14.31869 197.3.0 25.0.0 119.3.6 46.4.0 625 Sale 23.5.10 65.0.1 434 39.3.1 71.18.0 Sale 432.15.1 (1 200.0.0 65.5.0 637 42.4.6 22.1.0 624.14.6 64.7.0 26.15.0 42.1.0 39.16.4 270 48.11.0 245.1.3 569 66.17.2 451.17.6 56.18.8 Year Edition (continued) i j Annie Edwards Susan Fielding Miss Fitzgerald The Story ofLove My Albany de Grenier de Fonblanque Cut Adrift Alicia Ellen Neve Little One Foot on Shore Florence Marryat Veronique John Saunders Hirell Author Title Mrs. Augustus Craven Anne Severin Lady Fullerton Mrs. Gerald’s Niece Table 3.1

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 111 Profit or loss (£) (continued) (sales) (£) Sales Receipts Advertising (£) Binding (£) Printing (£) 33.1.6 65.2.0 20.9.6 53.1.0 433 232.3.6 21.6.6 29.16.9 84.7.0 31.16.4 58.13.3 476 411.17.0 136.19.8 Paper (£) + + 50.0.0 30.0.0 and translation (£) Agreement Copyright size 1869 500 Sale 10.10.0 1870 500 Sale1870 2250 20.0.0 Sale 490.0.0 125.2.6 136.11.0 112.5.3 105.2.7 1743 1545.6.9 569.19.5 1869 10001869 Half-profits 500 140.15.51869 Half-profits 66.15.0 109.14.0 500 10.11.2 69.13.101869 Half-profits 36.0.0 148.15.6 1625 28.9.101869 76.9.0 890 31.16.0 500 Sale 753.12.4 22.1.0 59.8.10 Half-profits 222.13.1 23.1.0 63.6.7 38.0.1 630.0.0 117.0.0 58.1.6 32.10.0 318 46.10.9 79.2.6 250.17.8 319 25.4.0 97.13.0 264.10.10 41.14.5 104.7.0 64.13.8 64.4.3 1581 365 1209.4.3 280.19.6 181.0.11 74.10.5 Year Edition k l m Rhoda Broughton Red as aShe Rose is Hawley Smart Breezie Langton Sophie Veitch Wise as a Serpent John Byrne Warren Ropes of Sand Ellen Wood Roland Yorke Catherine Wynne My Insect Queen Berthold Auerbach The Country House on the Rhine Author Title Carl Henrik Scharling The Rivals

[email protected] 112 T. J. BASSETT 124.2.11 − Profit or loss (£) (sales) (£) Sales Receipts Advertising (£) Binding (£) Printing (£) Paper (£) and translation (£) Agreement Copyright size 1870 6251870 Half-profits 625 76.12.7 Half-profits 39.15.11870 65.15.0 19.12.2 750 33.2.9 37.0.0 69.5.0 Sale 60.3.6 21.9.0 392 105.0.0 391.13.3 42.6.8 43.6.3 116.4.4 273 69.0.0 248.1.6 21.12.0 56.9.9 58.8.8 349 304.14.9 9.6.9 1870 5001870 750 Sale Sale 50.0.0 28.17.2 200.0.0 59.10.0 52.17.6 25.4.0 110.3.0 28.10.0 70.1.41870 95.11.2 288 625 4221870 243.3.6 362.18.9 625 Sale 9.11.0 Half-profits 150.0.0 11.8.9 39.7.6 34.13.0 62.10.0 63.0.0 41.11.7 22.1.0 57.8.0 49.2.1 552 239 430.8.6 228.11.8 79.11.5 48.6.10 Year Edition (continued) Grapes? n Jabez n — Rev. Albert Eubule Evans The Bond of Honour Percy H. Fitzgerald Beauty Talbot Florence Marryat Petronel Edward Creasy The Old Love and the New Sarah Jane Mayne Annie Jennings Author Title John Holme Burrow Oliphant Elizabeth Eiloart From Thistles Table 3.1

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 113 Profit or loss (£) (sales) (£) Sales Receipts Advertising (£) Binding (£) Printing (£) Paper (£) 525.0.0 94.11.2 77.10.0 99.13.3 120.5.0 1459 1151.15.6 234.16.1 and translation (£) (edition) Agreement Copyright size 1870 500 Half-profits1870 0.0.0 1500 32.9.0 Sale 55.17.0 25.4.0 58.10.9 268 242.10.6 70.9.9 Year Edition o Broughton’s novel had the added expense of illustrations, £6 6s Bentley paid Marryat a £100 advance; he never calculatedMühlbach’s the novel half-profits had the added expense of translation, £25 There is no record of any payment to the author Bentley did notIn balance March these 1872, accounts; Bentley profit paid calculation Williamson is £18.7.2 an as estimate his share of half profits, which is not calculated in the original account Ewald’s novel had the added expense of translation, £40.10.0 Scharling’s novel had the added expense of translation, £30 In the account for Wigram’s novel, the clerk made an addition error Flygare-Carlen’s novel had the added expenseBentley of originally translation, published £25 a 500-copy edition of Alexander’s novel, then a later 250-copy reprint. The account combines and totals costs from both Ellen Wood Bessy Rane Author Title Harry Child Williamson ACastfora Crown The following year, Bentley paid Capes £21.16.9 as his share of half-profits, which was not calculated in the original account Craven’s novel hadBentley the sold added the expense English-language of rights translation, to £50 Auerbach’s Tauchnitz novel for had £25 the which added he expense split of with translation, the £50 author printings a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o

[email protected] 114 T. J. BASSETT

Table 3.2 Bentley’s account for Florence Advance to £100.0.0 Sales (460 £412.8.0 author copies) Marryat’s Too Good for Paper £34.2.0 Total £412.8.0 Him (1865) Printing (500 £84.8.0 copies) Binding (500 £37.16.0 copies) Advertising £80.11.0 Returned copy £1.2.6 To balance £75.8.6 profit Total £412.8.0

Source Richard Bentley and Son Papers, 1806–1915, Rare Book and Manuscript Library, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, Bentley Archive microfilm, Part I, reel 16 seven areas: copyright, paper, printing (including composition), binding, advertising, sales, and publisher’s gross profit or loss. In the case of Mar- ryat’s novel, Bentley advanced the author £100 toward half-profits,12 pro- duced an edition of 500 copies for £156.6.0 (paper, printing, and bind- ing), and spent £80.11.0 on advertising. Between June and December, Bentley gave forty copies away to the author, legal deposit libraries, and reviewers, and then sold the remaining 460 copies for £412.8.0 (an aver- age of 17s 6d per copy or nearly 6s per volume)—an exceptionally good sale. At the end of the year, he retained no copies and calculated his gross profit as £75.8.6. It should be noted that this calculation of profit does not include Bentley’s overhead costs (e.g., staff and warehousing) nor his later rental of the copyright to Frederick Warne for a one-volume edi- tion three years later, for which Warne paid Bentley £20. Regardless, the account shows Bentley making a modest gross profit with the novel and a considerable six-month return on his investment of about 23%, with fur- ther profits to come (e.g., Warne’s payment or his own reprints) in the future. Table 3.3 lists average costs of production for 375-, 500-, 625-, 750-, 1000-, and 1500-copy editions, breaking down the costs of paper, print- ing and composition, binding, and advertising. For a 375-copy edition, the average production cost (including advertising but not copyright) was £136.8.6; for a 500-copy edition, £186.14.1; for a 625-copy edi- tion, £187.12.1; for a 750-copy edition, £253.18.7; for a 1000-copy edi- tion, £313.13.1; and for a 1500-copy edition, £401.16.6. The average

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 115

Table 3.3 Bentley’s average costs of production for three-volume novels, 1865–1870

375-copy 500-copy 625-copy 750-copy 1000-copy 1500-copy edition edition edition edition edition edition

Sample size n = 3 n = 31 n = 8 n = 11 n = 7 n = 2 Copyright 25.17.8 49.8.5 80.2.11 143.10.4 279.0.9 562.10.0 (£) Paper (£) 24.15.0 31.18.4 39.9.2 49.2.0 65.9.3 96.19.3 Composition 65.11.5 72.6.8 66.1.3 89.15.0 91.14.1 97.3.5 &printing (£) Binding (£) 21.14.6 27.17.0 30.6.8 39.6.0 58.12.0 102.1.10 Advertising 24.7.7 54.12.1 51.15.0 75.15.7 97.17.10 105.12.0 (£) Total 162.6.2 236.2.6 267.15.0 397.8.11 592.13.11 964.6.6 average cost (£) manufacturing cost per book (paper, printing, and binding) was 6s for a 375-copy edition, 5s 3d for a 500-copy edition, 4s 4d for a 625-copy edition, 4s 9d for a 750-copy edition, 4s 4d for a 1000-copy edition, and 3s 11d for a 1500-copy edition. Except for the 625-copy edition (see below), the average manufacturing costs per copy decrease as edition size increases due to economies of scale. The production costs for paper and binding show little variation, but the production costs for printing and composition show some variation over time. For 500-copy editions (the largest group), the cost for paper averaged £31.18.4 per title (with a standard deviation of about £2), rang- ing from £28 to £36 per title. There was little variation in this cost due to the uniform size of the format. The cost for binding averaged £27.17.0 per title (with a standard deviation of £5.13.1), ranging from £17.10.0 to £37.16.0 per title. The variation in this cost depended on whether Bentley bound all his printed copies: he typically bound two-thirds of the edition, binding the rest as needed (a common practice among publish- ers). The cost for printing and composition for a 500-copy edition aver- aged £72.6.8 per title (with a standard deviation of £18.0.11), ranging from £39 to £108.18.6 per title. These costs depended on the amount of type set and the number of sheets printed, which in turn depended on the length of the text of the novels, which (as Charles E. and Edward S. Lauterbach point out in their bibliographic analysis of the format) could

[email protected] 116 T. J. BASSETT vary considerably.13 However, whereas the costs of paper and binding did not change over the course of the six years, printing and composition become slightly less expensive: for the years 1865–1867, the average cost of printing and composition was £78.17.9 per title (n = 18), compared with £63.5.1 per title (n = 13) for the years 1868–1870—a savings of over £15 per title. What held for the 500-copy editions generally held for other edition sizes: little variation in paper and binding costs and a small reduction in printing and composition costs over the six years. Advertising costs also followed a clear pattern: Bentley generally spent more on advertising larger editions than smaller ones. Bentley routinely advertised his publications collectively (not individually) in weekly jour- nals (such as the Academy, Athenaeum), trade journals (such as Publishers’ Circular), and daily newspapers (such as the Times), as well as in pub- lisher’s catalogs bound with his books. For a 375-copy edition, he spent on average £24.7.7 for advertising; for a 500-copy edition, £54.12.1; for a 625-copy edition, £51.15.0; for a 750-copy edition, £75.15.7; for a 1000-copy edition, £97.17.10; and for a 1500-copy edition, £105.12.0. The accounts do not list how or where the advertising specifically was spent for each individual title so the advertising amounts attributed must be taken with some skepticism.14 Presumably, Bentley’s total advertising costs was somehow divided among the relevant titles. Except for the 625- copy edition (see below), Bentley spent £18 to £25 more on advertising a larger edition than a smaller one. In total, the average cost per book— including paper, printing and composition, binding, and advertising—was £0.7.3 for a 375-copy edition; £0.7.6 for a 500-copy edition; £0.6.0 for a 625-copy edition; £0.6.9 for a 750-copy edition; £0.6.3 for a 1000-copy edition; and £0.5.4 for a 1500-copy edition. In terms of costs of production and advertising, the 625-copy editions appear to be anomalies, costing Bentley less than 500-copy editions in printing and advertising. This difference may reflect the small sample size: Bentley only produced eight 625-copy editions compared with thirty-one 500-copy editions. More significant, Bentley only began producing 625- copy editions in 1868, before which he produced mainly 500- and 750- copy editions. On average, the paper and binding costs are in line with the other edition sizes, but the composition and printing of a 625-copy edition average about £66—on par with the 375-copy edition size and less than the other edition sizes—and the lower total production cost is due to that one factor. As mentioned above, Bentley paid less for printing

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 117 and composition toward the end of the 1860s, so what he formerly paid to print and compose a 500-copy edition would now pay for a 625-copy edition. Bentley also spent less, on average, advertising a 625-copy edi- tion (£51.15.0 per title) than a 500-copy edition (£54.12.1 per title), but the former figure includes the £26.15.0 spent on Alicia E. N. Little’s One Foot on Shore (1869), much less than the advertising budget for any other comparable title. The novel sold poorly and presumably for that reason Bentley stopped advertising it. Without Little’s novel, the average adver- tising on a 625-copy edition increases to £55.6.5 per title, which is much more in line with a 500-copy edition. Bentley appears to have advertised a 625-copy edition more like a 500-copy edition rather than something halfway between that and a 750-copy edition. Comparing the costs of an average 500-copy edition with the partic- ular example of Marryat’s TooGoodforHimreveals how costs might vary on an individual title, sometimes considerably. Costs for paper and printing depended almost entirely on the length of the book, hence the costs for Marryat’s novel were a bit higher than average (£118.10.0 versus £104.5.0). Binding costs were also higher in the case of Mar- ryat since Bentley ended up binding all 500 copies in the edition—ini- tially, he bound 350 copies then later the last 150 when needed. As for advertising, Bentley spent more on advertising Marryat than many of his other authors (£80.11.0 versus £54.12.1 on average)—presumably because he published three of her books in one year and was really push- ing her. The higher advertising seems justified, given the sales of Marryat’s novel, which, in spite of greater expenses, still made a nice gross profit of £75.8.6. The largest variable in Bentley’s production costs was copyright.15 His copyright agreements included outright sale of copyright (the most com- mon agreement), sale of copyright for an edition, half-profit agreements, and, in a handful of cases, no agreement at all.16 In the case of foreign works, Bentley paid either nothing or token amounts.17 For four novels— Annie Severin by Pauline Marie Craven [Mrs. Augustus Craven] (French), John Falk by Herman Ewald (German), The Guardian by Emilie Flygare- Carlen (Swedish), and The Romance of a Court by Luise Mühlbach (German)—Bentley made no agreements with the authors, hence they received no compensation for their copyright. For two other foreign nov- els, Bentley paid a small amount to the authors: £20 for The Country House on the Rhine by Berthold Auerbach (German) and ten guineas

[email protected] 118 T. J. BASSETT

(£10.10.0) for the “early sheets” of The Rivals by Carl Henrik Schar- ling (Danish).18 On the other hand, foreign novels did incur the added expense of translation, which ranged from £25 to £50 per novel—for instance, the £50 paid to Lady Fullerton to translate her friend Pauline Marie Craven’s novel. Not surprisingly, given the low costs for copyrights and translation, all of these books made a gross profit in 500-copy edi- tions for the publisher. Bentley, during this period, entered into twenty half-profit agreements. Often the bane of authors and publishers alike, these agreements went to first-time authors or better-known authors who may have requested them. The former included Catherine E. Spence for Mr. Hogarth’s Will (1865) and The Author’s Daughter (1868), as well as Florence Marryat for her first two novels Love’s Conflict (1865) and TooGoodforHim(1865). More established authors such as Elizabeth Eiloart and Hawley Smart also entered into half-profit agreements for their novels From Thistles— Grapes? (1870) and Breezie Langton (1869), respectively. In fact, the term “half-profits” did not always accurately describe the division of earnings between authors and publishers. For example, Spence’s Mr. Hogarth’s Will, published in a 500-copy edition, cost £153.7.0 to produce, sold 285 copies, and earned £255.5.6—for a gross profit of £101.18.6. How- ever, Spence received £37.14.2 as her share, whereas Bentley counted £68.15.10 as his profit—roughly a 35–65% split. Bentley’s calculation of his profit included the value of his remaining stock £4.11.6 (183 copies at 6d each), his comparable half-share £37.14.2 to match Spence, and an extra £26.10.2 that Bentley kept toward his other costs. The accounts do not say what the last amount covered, whether general overhead or the cost of copies given away. Gettmann, in his study of the Bentley papers, notes it was common for Bentley to be allowed 5 or 10% of the gross sale receipts as insurance for “bad debts” in half-profit agreements—though in none of the accounts examined here does the amount Bentley kept work out as a consistent percentage.19 There was a similar division of the profits for both Eiloart and Smart, in their cases closer to a 40/60% split between author and publisher. In the case of two other novels, the authors received no profits in the initial accounting—John Moore Capes’s Mosaic-Worker’s Daughter (1868) and Harry Child Williamson’s Cast for aCrown(1870)—though each received a small amount two years later. These figures suggest Bentley kept a certain reserve to cover his overhead costs before profits were divided with the author, ranging from £18 to £58 per book.

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 119

However, the most common copyright agreement between Bentley and his authors was outright sale of copyright. Of the sixty-six novels published in the late 1860s, Bentley purchased thirty-two titles outright from the authors for sums ranging from £20 to £630, the amount depending mainly on the initial size of the edition, the reputation of the author, and the anticipated demand for the novel. Thus, for a novel Bentley published in a 375-copy edition, the copyright was purchased for £20; for a 500-copy edition, the average purchase price was £78.5.0 (n = 14); for a 625-copy edition, £125 (n = 3); for a 750-copy edition, £164.6.8 (n = 7); for a 1000-copy edition, £316.13.4 (n = 3); and for one 1500-copy edition, £600. Beyond this, Bentley paid £262.10.0 (250 guineas) for Lady Fullerton’s Mrs. Gerald’s Niece (1869) published in a 1250-copy edition; £630 (600 guineas) for Ellen Wood’s Roland Yorke (1869) published in a 1625-copy edition; and £490 for Rhoda Broughton’s Red as a Rose is She (1870) published in a 2250-copy edition. Bentley naturally paid more for larger first-edition sizes, con- siderably more in the case of the gap between 750-copy and 1000-copy editions, in part because he expected to reap the rewards of subsequent cheap reprints. In fact, he subsequently issued 6s editions of four of the seven titles initially published in editions of more than 1000 copies. By owning the copyright, he retained all profits on these eventual reprints. Looking further into the numbers, for books published in 500- copy editions where authors sold their copyrights (the largest group of authors), Bentley’s payments for copyrights ranged from £50 to £150 (not including foreign authors): five authors received £50 per title, one author £60, one author £70, one author £75, three authors £100, and two authors £150. The variation in price depended on the previous sales record of the author. After Florence Marryat’s successful first novel, Love’s Conflict, earned her a little over £50 in a half-profit agreement, Bentley advanced her £100 toward the profits of her second novel and paid £150 for the rights to her third novel. (All three novels were published the same year in 500-copy editions.) Having proven her worth, she sold the copy- rights of two later novels for £200 each, The Confessions of Gerald Estcourt (1867) and Veronique (1869), which appeared in larger editions. In fact, she successfully published her first twelve three-volume novels with Bent- ley.20 Likewise, Bentley paid £50 each for the copyrights to two novels by John Berwick Harwood: The Odd Neighbours and Major Peter, both published in 1865. When both proved successful in 500-copy editions, Bentley bought the rights to his next four novels for over £100 each.

[email protected] 120 T. J. BASSETT

Only one of these four novels, Plain John Orpington (1866), sold poorly and lost money. Bentley bought the copyright for a specific edition (i.e., the three- volume edition) eight times during this period. In general, he limited these agreements to larger editions: 625 copies (n = 1), 700 copies (n = 1), 750 copies (n = 2), 1000 copies (n = 3), and 1500 copies (n = 1). For the copyrights to two 750-copy editions, Bentley paid £150 and £200—in both cases more than the average for a similarly sized edi- tion (see above). For the rights to 1000-copy editions, Bentley paid £250, £300, and £300—in all three cases about the same as the average for a similarly sized edition (see above). The authors who entered into these agreements with Bentley were by and large already successful writers with proven track records—Percy H. Fitzgerald, J. Sheridan Le Fanu, Lady Fullerton, Florence Marryat, John Saunders, and Ellen Wood—who may have been in a stronger bargaining position to retain ownership of their copyrights. Bentley, on his side, could predict (as much as any publisher could) high sales for these authors and their novels. Only in the case of Frederick Walpole’s May and December (1867)—published in a 750-copy edition—did he lose money (in that case, more than £138). Regardless of the type of agreement, Bentley on average paid about £26 for the copyright for a 375-copy edition (n = 3), £49 for a 500-copy edition (n = 31), £80 for a 625-copy edition (n = 8), £144 for a 750- copy edition (n = 11), £281 for a 1000-copy edition (n = 7), and £562 for a 1500-copy edition (n = 2) (see Table 3.3). Bentley reserved more lucrative contracts for authors who had proved successful with smaller editions: as with Marryat and Harwood, payments for copyrights progres- sively increased from novel to novel. The majority of his authors, however, never achieved these levels. The kind and amount of copyright payments could depend on the gender of the author—foreign women authors received nothing for their novels, whereas most foreign men authors received small sums. Bentley was more equitable in dealing with domestic authors: of the twenty titles bought through half-profits agreements, women wrote eleven and men wrote nine, and all the authors received comparable amounts depend- ing on sales. Of the thirty-two titles bought through sale of copyright, women wrote eighteen and men wrote fourteen. Of the fourteen novels published in 500-copy editions, women wrote six and averaged £80.16.8 per title, while men wrote eight and averaged £76.6.3 each. The lat- ter includes two foreign works authored by men who received modest

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 121 payments: £10.10.0 for one and £20 for the other. Taking them out, men averaged £83.6.8 for each 500-copy editions—comparable to what women authors received. For the seven titles published in 750-copy edi- tions, Mrs. Alexander received £75 for Which Shall it Be? (1866), Annie Edwards received £250 for Susan Fielding (1869), and Florence Mar- ryat received £200 for Confessions of Gerald Estcourt (1867), compared with Edward Creasy’s £200 for The Old Love and the New (1870), Percy Fitzgerald’s £105 (100 guineas) for Beauty Talbot (1870), Albany de Fonblanque’s £150 for Cut Adrift (1869), and John Harwood’s £150 for Miss Jane, the Bishop’s Daughter (1867). Keep in mind Bentley orig- inally intended Alexander’s novel to be published in a 500-copy edition, so the amounts here show women authors generally being paid more than the men authors for these edition sizes. By and large, Bentley did not underpay his women authors. If any- thing, they occupied the upper end of his pay scale. Of the twelve titles published in editions of 1000-copies or more, women wrote nine and averaged £413.6.8 per title, whereas men wrote three and aver- aged £246.18.6 per title. The five most lucrative contracts went to women: Ellen Wood received £600 for Lady Adelaide’s Oath (1867), £630 for Roland Yorke (1869), and £525 for Bessy Rane (1870); Annie Edwards received £400 for Steven Lawrence, Yeoman (1868); and Rhoda Broughton received £490 for Red as a Rose Is She (1870). Only J. Sheri- dan Le Fanu and Lady Fullerton came close: he received £300 each for Guy Deverell (1865) and ALostName(1868), and she received £300 for Constance Sherwood (1865). These authors either sold the copyright outright or for the edition, but Hawley Smart entered into a half-profit agreement for Breezie Langton (1869): published in a 1000-copy edition, it earned him about £141. Clearly, Bentley’s most important and best- paid authors were women. Few novels attained the success of Marryat’s TooGoodforHim,which sold out its entire 500-copy edition. During this period, a 375-copy edi- tion averaged sales of 263 copies (n = 3), a 500-copy edition averaged 360 copies (n = 31), a 625-copy edition averaged 424 copies (n = 8), a 750-copy edition averaged 593 copies (n = 11), a 1000-copy edition averaged 744 copies (n = 7), and a 1500-copy edition averaged 1441 copies (n = 2).21 As a percentage, Bentley on average sold about 70% of an edition. For the two largest editions Bentley produced, Wood’s Roland Yorke sold 1581 copies of its 1625-copy edition, and Broughton’s Red as a Rose Is She sold 1743 copies of its 2250-copy edition.22 In the case of

[email protected] 122 T. J. BASSETT

Wood’s novel, Bentley cleared nearly the whole print run with 97% of his copies sold. Per-copy prices varied. Though the “retail” price was £1.11.6 per set, Bentley initially sold most copies for 18s per set less discounts (i.e., the trade practice of selling twenty-five copies for the price of twenty-four copies in large orders) to circulating libraries. There were fewer “cash” sales, usually beginning at £1.2.6 per set (a slightly higher discount than the typical 25%). Up to forty “presentation” copies were given to the author, legal deposit libraries, and reviewers. Once the initial popularity waned, Bentley began lowering prices before remaindering the rest, some- times for mere shillings or pence per copy. But on average during these six years, each three-volume novel sold for a little over 16s per copy. Given these averages, Bentley’s business model for the three-volume novel settles into focus. For a 500-copy edition (n = 31), the costs of production (paper, composition and printing, and binding) averaged £132.2.0, the advertising averaged £54.12.1, and the copyright (regard- less of type of agreement) averaged £49.8.5—for a total average cost of £236.2.6. If Bentley sold copies for his average 16s per set, he only had to sell 295 copies of a 500-copy edition to break even. Given that his 500-copy editions averaged sales of 360 copies each, Bentley averaged about £61 gross profit for each novel. Granted, these numbers do not include overhead costs, but selling 295 out of 500 copies still represents a low threshold: on average, Bentley could sell less than 60% of the edi- tion before turning a gross profit. In reality, Bentley did much better than these averages indicate. Of the thirty-one novels published by Bent- ley during this six-year period in 500-copy editions, twenty-one titles sold more than 295 copies and twenty-nine titles made a gross profit. Only two novels led to a gross loss. Harwood’s Plain John Orpington (1866) sold 411 copies, but Bentley paid £150 for the copyright (the highest he ever paid for a 500-copy edition) and recorded a small gross loss of £7.17.4. Anne M. Carter Smith’s Work-a-Day Briers (1868) sold 264 copies, which led to a £22.18.0 gross loss (which Bentley eventu- ally cleared by remaindering the leftover copies a year later). In the case of Harwood, Bentley clearly overpaid for the copyright (perhaps to com- pensate the author for paying £50 each for his previous two profitable novels); in the case of Smith, the novel simply sold poorly. Regardless, the actual average gross profit on a 500-copy edition was £61.9.10, rang- ing from a loss of £22.18.0 to a profit of £136.19.8.

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 123

For a 625-copy edition (n = 8), the costs of production averaged £135.17.1, the advertising averaged £51.15.0, and the copyright (regard- less of type of agreement) averaged £80.2.11—for a total average cost of £267.15.0. If Bentley charged the average of 16s per set, he only had to sell 334 of 625 copies to break even. Bentley actually averaged sales of 424 for this print run. Though only four of the novels reached this sales mark, all eight made a gross profit, averaging about £66.13.9 each, ranging from £3.2.6 to £116.4.4. As seen above, the extra profits came from savings on costs: compared with his 500-copy editions, Bentley on average spent less on advertising and printing and composition for his 625-copy editions. For a 750-copy edition (n = 11), the costs of production averaged £178.3.0, advertising averaged £75.15.7, and copyright (regardless of type of agreement) averaged £143.10.4—for a total average cost of £397.8.11. At an average price of 16s per set, Bentley only had to sell 496 of 750 copies to break even. Given that he in fact averaged sales of 593 copies, Bentley should have averaged a gross profit for each novel. But only seven titles reached this sales threshold, and three novels failed utterly. Frederick Walpole’s May and September (1867) sold only 330 copies initially, and Bentley paid £200 for the copyright, leading to a gross loss of £138.11.4. He ended up remaindering 336 copies for the sum of £13.7.0 (about 10d a set) just to be clear of them. Similarly, Albany de Fonblanque’s Cut Adrift (1869) sold 434 copies initially, and Bentley paid £150 for the copyright, leading to a gross loss of £42.2.11. Later he sold off his remaining stock of 225 copies for £8. Bentley repeated his mistake with Edward Creasy’s The Old Love and the New (1870): Bent- ley paid £200 for the copyright and sold 422 copies, leading to a gross loss of £124.2.11. To add to his problems, he still had 250 unsold copies by 1872. The actual average gross profit on a 750-copy edition was a little over £39.13.10, ranging from a loss of £138.11.4 to a profit of £219.0.8.23 For a 1000-copy edition (n = 7), the costs of production averaged £215.15.3, advertising averaged £97.17.10, and copyright (regardless of type of agreement) averaged £279.0.9—for a total average cost of £592.13.11. At an average price of 16s per set, Bentley only had to sell 741 out of 1000 copies to break even. Given that his 1000-copy editions averaged sales of 744 copies each, Bentley should have broken even over- all. Five titles indeed reached this threshold and made a profit for Bent- ley, but two titles sold poorly and lost money. Le Fanu’s ALostName

[email protected] 124 T. J. BASSETT

(1868), coming off the successes of Uncle Silas (1864) and Guy Deverell (1865), only sold 422 copies and had a gross loss of £155. Annie Edward- s’s Steven Lawrence, Yeoman (1868) sold 634 copies and had a gross loss of £176.17.0. In both cases, the novels seemed safe bets given the past history of their authors. Of the five novels that made a gross profit, earn- ings ranged between £35 and £222. Regardless, the actual average gross profit on a 1000-copy edition was a little over £40, ranging between a loss of £176 and a profit of £222. Bentley’s most profitable novels were the four he published in editions of 1500 copies or more. Wood’s Lady Adelaide’s Oath (1867) and Bessie Rane (1870) both appeared in 1500-copy editions, both sold more than 1400 copies, and they earned gross profits of £158.2.8 and £234.16.1, respectively. Wood’s Roland Yorke (1869), the sequel to the popular novel The Channings (1862), sold 1581 of its 1625-copy edition and had a gross profit of £181.0.11. Bentley’s biggest success was Broughton’s Red as a Rose Is She (1870), which sold 1743 out of 2250 copies and produced an amazing gross profit of £569.19.5. Bentley capitalized on this initial success by producing 6s reprint editions of all four of these novels within a year—and except for the case of Bessie Rane, he owned the copyrights and retained these profits.24 Clearly, the three-volume novel was a profitable format for Bentley. During these six years, fully fifty-nine out of the sixty-six three-volume novels he produced made a gross profit—surely a testament to Bentley’s business acumen. But the majority of the novels did much better than just covering costs. Bentley’s average gross return on his investment was 24.8% for 500-copy editions, 23.1% for 625-copy editions, and 20.3% for 1500-copy editions.25 He did less well with edition sizes in between: an average gross return of 7.2% for 750-copy editions and 4.0% for 1000- copy editions. (Again, these figures do not reflect additional profits on subsequent editions.) Even before accounting for overhead costs—which in Bentley’s case were relatively low, since he contracted out most of his actual production—these figures represent a large average return on investment, usually realized within a year of publication. Finally, two further aspects of Bentley’s business should be consid- ered. Of the 66 three-volume titles Bentley published from 1865 to 1870, seventeen titles were serialized before publication (25.8%).26 This rate is somewhat higher than the overall serialization rate of the 1860s for multi-volume fiction of 23.3%. The vast majority were serialized in monthly magazines: five titles appeared in Temple Bar; three appeared in

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 125 the Catholic magazine the Month; three appeared in the Dublin Univer- sity Magazine; two in the Argosy; one in St. James’s Magazine; and one in Fraser’s Magazine. Only two titles appeared weekly, both in Chambers’s Edinburgh Journal. Clearly, the publisher felt no qualms about publish- ing in book format fiction already appearing before the public as serials. In fact, since Bentley bought Temple Bar from Ward and Lock in 1866, he himself serialized several of these titles. All five titles in Temple Bar were serialized after Bentley took over the magazine, which begins (not surprisingly) a strong connection between the magazine and the book publishing sides of the business: in all 48 multi-volume fiction titles would be both serialized in Temple Bar and published by Bentley from 1867 to 1894.27 Considering the serialized titles in Temple Bar, it is unclear from the accounts whether the contracts with the authors of these serialized titles included both the serial and book rights, but all five contracts were for outright sale and all five were published in large editions. Bentley seri- alized Wood’s Lady Adelaide’s Oath in Temple Bar (April 1866–March 1867), bought the copyright for £600, and made a £158.2.8 profit on an edition of 1500 copies. The next two titles fared less well. Bentley seri- alized Edwards’s Steven Lawrence, Yeoman from April 1867–May 1868, bought the copyright for £400, and lost £176.17.0 on an edition of 1000 copies. Bentley serialized Le Fanu’s ALostNamefrom May 1867–May 1868, bought the copyright for £300, and lost £155.0.0 on an edition of 1000 copies. Edwards’s next book did better: Bentley serialized Susan Fielding from December 1868–December 1869, bought the copyright for £250, and made £23.5.10 on an edition of 750 copies. Compared to Bentley’s treatment of Steven Lawrence, Yeoman, Bentley clearly reined back in this treatment of Susan Fielding in both contract and edition size. Even so, he essentially broke even. The last serialized Temple Bar titles proved to be the firm’s greatest success. Bentley serialized Broughton’s Red as a Rose is She from May 1869 to March 1870, bought the copy- right for £490, and made £569.19.5 on an edition of 2250 copies (by far his largest edition). So, judging by these five examples, serialization plus book publication appears to be a mixed experience with two succeeding, two failing, and one in between. As mentioned, especially in the case of purchased copyrights, Bentley could also produce subsequent cheap reprints for which he had two ongo- ing series: his Standard Novels and his Favourite Novels (for more pop- ular fare). Of the 66 three-volume novels Bentley published from 1865 to 1870, only sixteen were ever reprinted (24.2% of titles), nine of which

[email protected] 126 T. J. BASSETT appeared within about a year of the three-volume edition. Bentley issued half of the reprinted titles and Frederick Warne issued the eight Marryat titles under an agreement for £20 per title. It is unclear why Bentley did not reprint the Marryat titles himself—she was a popular author whose three-volume editions did very well. In any case, a title published by Bent- ley in three-volumes rarely went on to be reprinted, let alone by Bentley. Discounting the titles reprinted by Warne, Bentley during this period only reprinted one in five three-volume novels. Those he did reprint, nearly all appeared in 6s one-volume editions within a year of the three-volume edi- tion. For example, Wood’s Lady Adelaide’s Oath was published in three volumes in January 1867 (before its serialization was even complete) and sold 1423 copies of its 1500 copy print run. By July, Mudie’s Select Library advertised used copies for sale in the pages of the Athenaeum, so clearly the initial popularity of the novel had passed. In December, Bentley issued a 6s one-volume edition with two illustrations from the serialization in Temple Bar as part of his “Bentley’s Favourite Novels” (several of Wood’s novels already appeared in the series). Recalling the libraries’ ultimatum: one of their complaints was the rapidity of reprint- ing multi-volume fiction titles in cheaper editions. In this period, Bentley does not seem to be troubling the libraries with early reprints.

Richard Bentley and Son, 1885

As the accounts from 1865 to 1870 show, Bentley consistently made money publishing the three-volume novel—amazingly so considering only seven of the 66 titles lost money. But did the format remain prof- itable in subsequent years? After 1871, Richard Bentley’s son George ran the firm but they continued to be one of the most prolific publishers of multi-volume fiction despite increased competition from new publishers such as Hurst and Blackett, Tinsley Brothers, and F. V. White. The 1880s saw the height of overall multi-volume fiction production, both in raw numbers produced and market share of fiction. Here, two further years will be examined, 1885 and 1890. Bentley published seventeen three-volume novels in 1885: five men authors wrote five titles and 12 women authors wrote 12 titles (see Table 3.4). The predominance of women authors increases markedly compared to fifteen years earlier, but the 1880s generally saw women writing the majority of multi-volume fiction so Bentley’s proportion of

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 127 b b b a 103.2.3 − Profit or loss (£) (continued) (£) Sales Receipts Advertising (£) Binding (£) Printing (£) Paper (£) and translation (£) Agreement Copyright size 1885 750 Sale 125.0.0 40.6.3 78.5.6 45.14.5 111.3.5 728 557.0.0 156.10.5 1885 10001885 Sale 625 400.0.0 Sale 59.0.61885 88.14.2 100.0.0 650 59.10.8 32.15.111885 116.2.8 69.4.9 Sale 550 24.4.6 9201885 727.0.0 134.9.5 100.0.0 1125 Sale 3.12.0 356 30.18.9 257.12.4 Sale 81.11.3 50.0.0 32.8.0 26.12.6 250.0.0 105.7.6 56.2.0 58.4.5 541 24.4.6 83.10.0 410.0.0 82.3.10 69.1.5 59.14.6 128.15.11 376 265.15.5 972 757.0.0 26.12.7 167.8.3 Year Edition Three-volume novels published by Bentley, 1885 Rosa N. Carey For Lilias Annie Edwards AGirton Girl Author Title Mrs. Alexander A Second Life Fred Boyle A Good Hater Georgiana Craik Mrs. Hollyer Paul Cushing A Woman with a Secret Table 3.4

[email protected] 128 T. J. BASSETT b b 94.15.8 71.17.7 − Profit or loss (£) − (£) Sales Receipts Advertising (£) Binding (£) Printing (£) Paper (£) and translation (£) Agreement Copyright size 1885 6251885 Sale 750 105.0.0 Sale 33.6.0 100.0.0 88.7.0 35.14.0 39.15.0 66.17.6 130.19.4 44.9.7 583 100.16.10 441.1.7 679 43.14.3 529.0.0 181.2.1 1885 5001885 Sale 5001885 Sale 50.0.0 625 26.2.01885 Sale 40.0.0 61.14.3 1250 28.1.0 28.2.6 100.0.0 Sale 75.13.7 69.2.0 36.9.0 28.14.6 335 102.4.6 250.0.0 238.2.2 70.6.2 29.3.0 59.4.0 21.11.4 500 120.1.1 88.3.7 386.8.10 424 43.10.5 150.3.8 316.0.0 173.6.3 688 519.8.7 Year Edition (continued) Katherine Macquoid Louisa Margaret Majendie Sisters in Law Anne Elliot My Wife’s Niece Richard Ashe King A Coquette’s Conquest Author Title Emma Elliot Anthony Fairfax Eliza Lynn Linton The Autobiography of Christopher Kirkland Table 3.4

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 129 b b Profit or loss (£) (£) Sales Receipts Advertising (£) Binding (£) Printing (£) Paper (£) and translation (£) Agreement Copyright size 1885 550 Half-profit?1885 0.0.0 750 27.4.0 Sale 65.15.91885 27.0.0 1000 100.0.0 49.1.101885 Sale 39.8.1 875 353 79.11.0 260.15.5 250.0.0 91.13.10 50.0.61885 Sale 51.12.9 800 97.18.1 79.3.1 150.0.0 647 47.0.6 Sale 471.0.4 44.17.0 76.11.6 80.7.9 104.2.8 200.0.0 50.5.7 791 40.16.8 102.14.6 592.0.0 97.13.3 745 83.15.11 54.3.5 690.0.0 100.10.7 265.11.5 789 615.0.0 121.16.1 Year Edition The shilling and pence columns of sales are illegible, and hence receipts and profit of this title are off by one pound or less Bentley received £75 for the American rights; he gave £25 to the author. The shilling and pence columns of sales are unreadable, hence receipts and Reginald Grenville Murray The Duke’s Marriage Charlotte Riddell Mitre Court Author Title Isabella Mayo The Mystery of Allan Grale Florence Warden ADogwitha Bad Name Lewis Wingfield Barbara Philpot profit of this title is off by one pound or less a b

[email protected] 130 T. J. BASSETT women authors, though pronounced, may not be unusual. Also, com- pared with fifteen years earlier, he published more titles in the format and used larger and less uniform edition sizes: two 500-copy, two 550-copy, three 625-copy, one 650-copy, three 750-copy, one 800-copy, one 875- copy, two 1000-copy, one 1125-copy, and one 1250-copy editions. Gone are the 375-copy editions: 500-copy editions appear to be the new min- imum edition size. In addition, this one year saw four titles published in editions of 1000 or more copies, twice as many as a typical year in the 1860s. The increasing size of editions was not limited to this year alone as a cursory examination of edition sizes in the Bentley papers reveal— more evidence of the increased demand for multi-volume fiction in the 1880s. Table 3.5 lists the average costs of production for 500- or 550-, 625- or 650-, 750-, and 1000-copy editions, breaking down the costs of paper, composition and printing, binding, and advertising.28 For a 500- or 550- copy edition, the average production cost (including advertising but not copyright) was £186.1.9; for a 625- or 650-copy edition, £272.16.4; for a 750-copy edition, £263.8.4; and for a 1000-copy edition, £290.16.2. These average costs of production compare favorably with the averages from 1865 to 1870, all within £25, except for the 625-copy editions. In the late 1860s, Bentley averaged £187.12.1 for a 625-copy edition, over £100 less expensive than a similarly sized edition in 1885. The primary explanation for the difference lies in advertising costs: in 1885, these four titles averaged £122.14.4 each in advertising, a sum more than double

Table 3.5 Bentley’s average costs of production for three-volume novels, 1885

500- or 625- or 750-copy 1000-copy 550-copy 650-copy edition edition edition edition

Sample size n = 4 n = 4 n = 3 n = 2 Copyright (£) 35.0.0 101.5.0 108.6.8 325.0.0 Paper (£) 26.11.11 33.7.5 38.9.5 55.6.8 Composition 63.3.6 85.6.11 74.18.0 83.18.8 & printing (£) Binding (£) 27.0.0 31.7.8 46.14.10 53.5.7 Advertising (£) 69.6.4 122.14.4 103.6.1 98.5.3 Total average 221.1.9 374.1.4 371.15.0 615.16.2 cost (£)

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 131 the cost of advertising similarly sized editions in the 1860s and larger than the sums spent advertising other sized editions in 1885. The four authors of these titles—Fred Boyle, Georgiana Craik, Richard Ashe King, and Katherine S. Macquoid—do not suggest a particular reason for the excessive costs of advertising. Perhaps not surprisingly, two of the four titles lost money. Comparing individual costs between the late 1860s and 1885 reveal a few significant cost differences. On average, paper was less expensive in 1885 than in the 1860s, as much as £11 cheaper later in the century. Bentley benefited from the industrialization of papermaking documented in Alexis Weedon’s Victorian Publishing: The Economics of Book Production for a Mass Market (2003).29 Generally, composition and printing was less expensive, about £10 less per title, except for the 625-copy editions which cost about £20 more for composition and printing. Again, this may reflect the increasing mechanization of printing, though these particular books were likely still produced on hand presses. Average binding costs generally stay the same. However, the average cost of advertising increases signifi- cantly for all the edition sizes. As noted, the 625-copy editions averaged about £70 more in advertising in 1885, with 500-copy editions costing about £14 more, 750-copy editions costing £27 more, and 1000-copy editions costing the same. Thus, in 1885, production costs decreased but advertising increased which overall kept the average costs comparable to the 1860s. Bentley bought outright the copyright of sixteen of the seventeen three-volume novels he published in 1885. For one novel, Isabella Mayo’s The Mystery of Allan Grale, no payment to the author is recorded—this may have been a half-profit agreement (however, the book did make a profit of £91.13.10). In any case, this marks a significant change in con- tractual relations between the publisher and his authors from the 1860s where a little less than half of contracts were outright sale of copyright. In particular, Bentley eschews half-profit agreements for outright purchase of copyright for new authors or titles published in smaller editions—per- haps an acceptance of the inadequacy of such agreements. The sums paid by Bentley for copyrights (ignoring Mayo’s book) in 1885 range from £40 for Anne Elliot’s My Wife’s Niece to £400 for Mrs. Alexander’s A Second Life. For 500-copy editions, the average purchase price was £45 (n = 2); for a 550-copy edition, £50 (n = 1); for a 625-copy edition, £100 (n = 3); for a 650-copy edition, £100 (n = 1); for a 750-copy edition, £108.6.8 (n = 3); for a 800-copy edition, £200 (n = 1); for a 875-copy

[email protected] 132 T. J. BASSETT edition, £150 (n = 1); and for a 1000-copy edition, £325 (n = 2). Two titles appeared in larger edition for which Bentley paid £250 to Annie Edwards for A Girton Girl published in a 1125-copy edition and £250 to Eliza Linton for The Autobiography of Christopher Kirkland published in a 1250-copy edition. Compared to the years 1865–1870, the amounts Bentley pays for copyrights has declined, in some cases significantly, and have become more uniform. For books published in 500- or 550-copy editions, Bentley pays two authors £50 and one author £40, for an aver- age of £46.13.4. This is little more than half of the average payment for a copyright in the late 1860s of £78.5.0. The amounts paid for books published in 625- and 650-copy editions also decline from an average of £125 in the 1860s to £100 in 1885, and the amounts paid for books published in 750-copy editions declines from £164.6.8 in the 1860s to £108.6.8 in 1885. For the larger editions greater than 1000-copies, the payments are comparable to the past. Thus, the price Bentley paid for the copyright to a three-volume title becomes lower and more standardized at £50–£125 per title for the smaller editions and £250–£400 for larger editions. The coincidence of the lower copyright payments and an increase in titles by women authors may appear related. However, women authors remain Bentley’s highest paid authors with the five highest amounts going to Alexander (£400), Edwards (£250), Linton (£250), Charlotte Riddell (£250), and Florence Warden (£150). If anything, men authors received lower pay for the same work: of the three books published in 750- copy editions, the women authors Rosa N. Carey and Margaret Majendie received £125 and £100 respectively, and author Reginald Grenville Mur- ray received £100. A similar situation happens with the books published in 625-copy editions: women author Katherine S. Macquoid received £105 (100 guineas) whereas the men authors Fred Boyle and Richard Ashe King received £100 each. Tellingly, Macquoid was paid in guineas and the men pounds. So did the increased number of women authors lower the overall average amount paid for copyrights? From this data, no clear conclusion can be drawn that there is a causal relationship between the two facts. Overall, then, Bentley paid on average (including copyright) £221.1.9 for a title in a 500- or 550-copy edition (n = 4); £374.1.4 for a title in a 625- or 650-copy edition (n = 4); £371.15.0 for a title in a 750-copy edition (n = 3); and £615.16.2 for a title in a 1000-copy edition (n = 2). Except for the 625- or 650-copy edition which is significantly more

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 133 expensive on average, the average cost per edition has stayed largely the same or declined slightly compared to the 1860s. In nearly every case, Bentley successfully sold the majority of the copies printed. In 1885, sales for 500-copy editions averaged 417.5 copies (n = 2); 550-copy editions averaged 364.5 copies (n = 2); 625-copy editions averaged 454.3 copies (n = 3); 750-copy editions averaged 684.7 copies (n = 3); and 1000-copy editions averaged 855.5 copies (n = 2). For the two largest editions Bentley published, Edwards’s A Girton Girl sold 972 copies of its 1125-copy edition and Linton’s The Autobiography of Christopher Kirkland sold 688 copies of its 1250-copy edition. The lat- ter title was, without a doubt, Bentley’s biggest disappointment, barely selling half of its print run. His most successfully selling title was Anne Elliot’s My Wife’s Niece which sold all 500 copies. Generally, each three- volume novel sold for about 15s 6d per copy, a slight reduction from the prices in the 1860s. For the titles published in 1885, fourteen of the seventeen three- volume novels made a gross profit, comparable to his success in the late 1860s. The 500- and 550-copy editions averaged a gross profit of about £73 each, ranging from £21.11.4 to £150.3.8. The 625-copy editions did poorly: two titles made substantial losses of £71.17.7 and £103.2.3 and one title made a profit of £43.14.3, for an average loss of about £44 each. The 750-copy editions averaged a gross profit of about £147 each, rang- ing from £104.2.8 to £156.10.5. For the larger editions, the gross profits varied widely. The 1000-copy editions both made a gross profit, £3.12.0 and £83.15.11, respectively. Edwards’s A Girton Girl made a gross profit of £167.8.3 in an edition of 1125 copies but Linton’s The Autobiography of Christopher Kirkland made a gross loss of £94.15.8 in an edition of 1250 copies. The failure of the latter must have come as some surprise given Linton’s past record of success.30 Bentley most successful book in 1885 was Florence Warden’s A Dog with a Bad Name which sold 745 copies of its 875-copy edition and made a gross profit of £265.11.5. Bent- ley’s average gross return on investment was 30.3% for 500- and 550-copy editions; 39.5% for 750-copy editions; and 7.2% for 1000-copy editions. Bentley averaged a considerable loss on 625-copy editions this year. Gen- erally, the gross returns on investment compare favorably with those in the 1860s, even slightly better in some cases. Thus, Bentley continued to succeed with small editions of three-volume novels, at least in 1885. Finally, five of the seventeen were serialized before publication (29.4%), a rate in keeping with overall serialization rates of the 1880s. One title,

[email protected] 134 T. J. BASSETT

Fred Boyle’s A Good Hater, appeared in the provincial newspaper the Sheffield Independent weekly from 6 September 1884 to 4 January 1885 (perhaps through a syndication agreement). Another title, Florence War- den’s A Dog with a Bad Name, appeared in the penny newspaper the Family Herald from 21 June to 25 October 1884 under the title “The Iron Hand.” Both titles illustrate the narrow gap between “low” fiction of the penny press and the “respectable” fiction of the circulating library. Three titles were serialized in Bentley magazines: Edwards’s AGirton Girl in Temple Bar (January–December 1885), Mayo’s The Mystery of Allan Grale in the Argosy (January–December 1885), and Riddell’s Mitre Court in Temple Bar (January 1885–January 1886). (By this time, Bent- ley published The Argosy, edited by Ellen Wood.) The latter three titles all succeeded in three volumes. Bentley reprinted only two of the three-volume titles he published in 1885: Edwards’s A Girton Girl in a 6s one-volume edition in 1886 and Carey’s For Lilias in a 6s one-volume edition in 1892. Ward and Downey, under an arrangement with Bentley, reprinted two other titles, Macquoid’s Louisa and King’s A Coquette’s Conquest, in 6s one-volume editions a year later. Again, much like the 1860s, few of the three-volume titles enjoyed a later career in cheap editions.

Richard Bentley and Son, 1890

Five years later, nearing the moment of the libraries’ ultimatum, Bentley published eighteen three-volume novels: five men authors wrote five titles and 13 women authors wrote 13 titles (see Table 3.6). Again, Bentley shows a marked preference for women authors with the popular authors Rhoda Broughton, Carey, Marie Corelli, Adeline Sergeant, and Wood (now deceased) featuring titles that year. The editions sizes once again vary widely: five 550-copy, two 625-copy, one 675-copy, three 750-copy, two 875-copy, one 925-copy, one 1000-copy, one 1050-copy, one 1250- copy, and one 2000-copy editions. As in 1885, Bentley publishes editions in ten different sizes, with 550-copies being the new minimum size for an edition. Notably, he once again published four titles in large editions of 1000 or more copies. Table 3.7 lists the average costs of production for 550-, 625-, 750-, and 1000-copy editions, breaking down the costs of paper, composi- tion and printing, binding, and advertising. For a 550-copy edition, the average production cost (including advertising but not copyright)

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 135 ] a c b b b 50.2.4 112.3.2 − − [87.16.10 Profit or loss (£) (continued) (£) Sales Receipts Advertising (£) Binding (£) Printing (£) 54.3.4 86.10.0 76.18.1 105.11.0 986 764.7.0 241.4.7 Paper (£) + 25 25 150.0.0 + and translation (£) + royalty Agreement Copyright size 1890 2000 Sale1890 900.0.0 750 141.11.3 84.17.0 112.6.0 Sale 156.18.2 16601890 50.0.0 1283.9.3 550 39.3.41890 97.7.6 Sale 675 33.16.6 126.13.61890 35.10.0 Sale 446 925 25.7.3 296.18.6 Half 50.0.0 72.12.0 Profit 23.5.9 55.3.5 31.1.0 91.19.6 80.17.9 42.19.8 28.7.0 103.4.3 410 52.12.7 308.5.6 81.6.8 173.10.2 59.11.0 705 448 313.10.0 535.2.1 41.17.7 107.12.0 1890 1250 Sale 400.0.0 47.19.5 76.6.0 90.12.9 167.18.8 1082 832.12.0 49.15.2 1890 1050 Sale Year Edition Three-volume novels published by Bentley, 1890 Henry Erroll By Woman’s Favour Author Title Rhoda Broughton Alas! Helen Colvill Mr. Bryant’s Mistake Emma Elliott Audrey Hugh Farrie Acte Marie Corelli Wormwood R.N. Carey Lover or Friend? Table 3.6

[email protected] 136 T. J. BASSETT b b 14.4.9 − Profit or loss (£) (£) Sales Receipts Advertising (£) Binding (£) Printing (£) Paper (£) 50.0.0 28.4.0 82.4.6 32.0.2 95.10.3 564 418.11.0 130.12.1 and translation (£) + royalty Agreement Copyright size 1890 10001890 Sale 625 150.0.0 46.12.2 Sale1890 75.3.0 550 41.5.9 40.0.0 129.19.10 Sale 29.3.4 621 88.8.6 428.16.0 25.13.0 113.19.0 444 313.11 16.7.2 1890 5501890 Sale 6251890 50.0.0 Sale 550 28.15.0 100.0.0 61.1.3 Sale 30.18.10 34.7.6 78.10.6 30.7.4 81.11.6 50.0.0 137.13.2 493 28.6.8 623 353.19.3 87.11.9 481.19.11 33.1.6 98.4.0 98.10.1 84.0.6 475 357.18.10 74.18.5 Year Edition (continued) Author Title George Gissing The Emancipated Mary E. Mann One Another’s Burdens Catherine Martin An Australian Girl H.S. Merriman Suspense Emma Poynter The Failure of Elizabeth Adeline Sergeant Name and Fame Table 3.6

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 137 b 39.0.2 − Profit or loss (£) (£) Sales Receipts Advertising (£) Binding (£) Printing (£) 41.3.6 65.2.6 54.15.3 68.7.10 642 499.18.8 206.19.7 Paper (£) + 63.10.0 0.0.0 and translation (£) d Agreement Copyright size 1890 750 Sale1890 750 150.0.0 39.5.4 Sale 79.17.6 43.5.3 150.5.0 105.19.6 36.8.6 757 78.1.6 585.7.0 28.7.0 166.19.5 117.17.6 498 371.19.4 1890 550 Sale1890 875 40.0.0 None 26.6.10 76.4.3 71.3.4 143.4.2 473 362.17.9 5.19.2 1890 875 Sale 125.1.1 48.18.6 74.9.9 37.16.0 92.17.0 558 429.16.0 50.13.8 Year Edition The pence column of sales areBentley illegible, paid and £63.10.0 hence to receipts translate and this profit work of from this German. title The are author off received by nothing one shilling or less Bentley sold the American rights for £100 toBentley Lovell sold and the the English-language English-language rights rights for for £20 £100 to to Tauchnitz Tauchnitz eventually making this loss a profit of Author Title Constance Smith The Riddle of Lawrence Haviland Frances Trollope Madame Leroux John Leith Veitch A Daughter of the Pyramids Elizabeth Werner AHeavy Reckoning Ellen Wood The House of Halliwell £87.16.10 a b c d

[email protected] 138 T. J. BASSETT

Table 3.7 Bentley’s average costs of production for three-volume novels, 1890

550-copy 625-copy 750-copy 1000-copy edition edition edition edition

Sample size n = 5 n = 2 n = 3 n = 1 Copyright (£) 45.2.0 70.0.0 116.15.0 150.0.0 Paper (£) 27.7.11 30.1.1 38.5.9 46.12.2 Composition 75.18.9 83.9.6 85.2.2 75.3.0 & printing (£) Binding (£) 38.15.8 28.0.2 35.2.11 41.5.9 Advertising (£) 99.5.2 125.16.1 116.16.10 129.19.10 Total average 286.9.6 337.6.10 392.2.8 443.0.9 cost (£) was £241.7.6; for a 625-copy edition, £267.6.10; and for a 750-copy edition, £275.7.8. The production costs for the single 1000-copy edition was £293.0.9. These production costs are generally comparable to the costs in 1885 except for the 550-copy editions which cost about £55 more in 1890. Much of the difference comes from an increase spent on advertising: in 1890, Bentley spent about £30 more on average for each 550-copy edition. In general, all the editions saw an increase in the amount spent on advertising but the other costs, with some natural variation, remained fairly stable. Much as in 1885, Bentley bought outright the copyright of sixteen of the eighteen three-volume novels he published in 1890. For one novel, Hugh Farrie’s Acte, he made a half-profit agreement: the novel made a gross profit of £107.12.0 for Bentley in an edition of 925 copies and the author received £55.3.5. (Bentley sold the continental English-language rights to Tauchnitz for £20 which he split with Farrie and is reflected in his payment.) Another novel, Elizabeth Werner’s A Heavy Reckoning,had no agreement since the author was German—Bentley did pay £63.10.0 to translate the novel. Much like the 1860s copyrights of foreign works continued to be free for the taking. Bentley did make one innovation to his contracts: for two novels, Carey’s Lover or Friend? and Catherine Martin’s An Australian Girl, he bought the copyright and included a roy- alty clause. In these accounts, both authors eventually received royalties. Bentley paid Carey £150 on publication then £25 when sales reached 750 copies and another £25 when sales reached 850 copies (or 5s per copy), for a total of £200. Bentley paid Martin £50 on publication then £3.17.0

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 139 when the edition sold out, for a total of £53.17.0. The clauses follow a growing practice in late Victorian publishing to make compensation of authors more equitable to that of publishers. The sums paid by Bentley for copyrights (excluding Werner’s novel) in 1890 range from £35.10.0 for Emma Elliot’s Audrey to £900 for Rhoda Broughton’s Alas!.The latter amount eclipses the £600 Bentley paid Wood for Lady Adelaide’s Oath in 1867 and represents the maximum Bentley paid any author in the one hundred titles sampled for this chapter. For a 550-copy edition, the average purchase price was £45.2.0 (n = 5); for a 625-copy edition, £70 (n = 2); for a 750-copy edition, £116.15.0 (n = 3); and for a 875- copy edition, £125.1.1 (n = 1). Four titles appeared in larger editions: Bentley paid £150 to George Gissing for The Emancipated published in a 1000-copy edition; £200 (£150 plus £50 royalty) to Carey for Lover or Friend? published in a 1050-copy edition; £400 to Marie Corelli for Wormwood published in a 1250-copy edition; and £900 to Broughton for Alas! published in a 2000-copy edition. Compared to 1885, the amounts paid for the copyrights to the smaller editions remains fairly comparable. However, the amounts paid for the larger editions vary greatly. Whereas in the past Bentley usually paid £250–£400 for an edition of 1000 or more copies, in 1890 Bentley considerably underpays one author (Giss- ing) and substantially overpays another (Broughton). These examples are too few to form a pattern, but they do highlight the idiosyncrasy of the literary marketplace. Again, in keeping with the early periods examined, women authors once again remain Bentley’s highest paid authors: six of the seven highest contracts went to women authors. As with 1885, Bentley’s three-volume novels sold equally well in 1890. Sales for 550-copy editions averaged 483 copies (n = 5); 625-copy edi- tions averaged 533.5 copies (n = 2); 750-copy editions averaged 567 copies (n = 3); and 875-copy editions averaged 600 copies (n = 2). In two cases, sales exceeded the planned edition size (since printers often printed extra sheets as a precaution): Martin’s An Australian Girl sold 564 copies of its 550-copy edition and Smith’s The Riddle of Lawrence Haviland sold 757 copies of its 750-copy edition. For the four largest editions Bentley published, Gissing’s The Emancipated sold 621 copies of its 1000-copy edition; Carey’s Lover or Friend? sold 986 copies of its 1050-copy edition; Corelli’s Wormwood sold 1082 copies of its 1250- copy edition; and Broughton’s Alas! sold 1660 copies of its 2000-copy edition. Gissing’s novel made a small loss due to disappointing sales.31 Broughton’s novel carried a loss due to the huge contract before Bentley

[email protected] 140 T. J. BASSETT sold the American and continental rights. In 1890, Bentley’s most prof- itable three-volume novels were written by Carey (a profit of £241.4.7) and Werner (a profit of £206.19.7). Generally, each three-volume novel sold for between 14s and 16s per copy. Overall then, fourteen of the eighteen three-volume novels made a profit and one turned a loss into a profit with the sale of the American and continental rights. Thus, Bentley once again continued to succeed with the three-volume format. The 550-copy editions averaged a gross profit of about £74 each, ranging from £5.19.2 to £130.12.1. The 625- copy editions both made gross profits of £16.7.2 and £98.10.1, respec- tively. The 750-copy editions did poorly this year: two made losses of £39.0.2 and £50.2.4 and one made a profit of £166.19.5, for an aver- age gross profit of about £26 each. The 875-copy editions both made gross profits of £50.13.8 and £206.19.7, respectively. For the larger edi- tions, three of the four titles made gross profits. As mentioned, Gissing’s novel sold poorly and it made a gross loss of £14.4.9 in an edition of 1000 copies. Carey’s Lover or Friend? made a gross profit of £241.4.7 in an edition of 1050 copies (his highest grossing title of 1890). Corelli’s Wormwood made a gross profit of £49.15.2 in an edition of 1250 copies. Initially, Broughton’s Alas! made a gross loss of £112.3.2 in an edition of 2000 copies, but Bentley received £100 each from American publisher Lovell and publisher Tauchnitz for the rights—hence the loss became a gross profit of £87.16.10. Bentley’s average gross return on investment was 26.0% for 550-copy editions; 18.1% for 625-copy editions; 6.6% for 750-copy editions; and 38.4% for 875-copy editions. Much like the previ- ous years, 1890 proved another profitable year for Bentley and the three- volume novel. Finally, just three of the three-volume novels Bentley published this year were serialized before publication (16.7%), a lower number by almost half than in previous years. Broughton’s Alas! appeared in Temple Bar (January–December 1890), which may explain the higher contract if it included the serialization rights. Wood’s posthumous The House of Hal- liwell appeared in the Argosy (January–December 1890), a magazine still published by Bentley and now edited by Wood’s son Charles. Frances Trollope’s Madame Leroux appeared weekly in the Graphic (18 January– 12 July 1890). There is no reason to think the lower number of serial- ized titles is not just an aberration. However, Bentley reprinted more of the three-volume titles he published in 1890: Broughton’s Alas!,Corel- li’s Wormwood,andMartin’sAn Australian Girl in 1891; Carey’s Lover

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 141 or Friend? in 1893; Wood’s The House of Halliwell in 1896; and Far- rie’s Acte in 1897 (all in 6s one-volume editions). Lawrence and Bullen acquired Gissing’s copyrights and reprinted The Emancipated in a 6s one- volume edition in 1893. Thus, seven of the eighteen titles published this year had a later edition—a rate higher than in the past.

Conclusion

So how commercially safe was the three-volume novel? Bentley’s accounts during the period 1865–1870 show that gross profits on three-volume novels were fairly reliable though by no means guaranteed: even popular authors with past successes such as Le Fanu could fail spectacularly. Two decades later, in 1885 and 1890, Bentley continued to reliably make gross profits on the three-volume novel in small, high-priced editions. In fact, it is safe to say, as a publisher, Bentley made money on the multi-volume novel throughout the century. In particular, small editions of 500- or 550-copies did fairly well, averaging gross returns on investment of 24.8– 30.3% of the titles examined. Larger editions of 1000 copies or more very often equaled these returns. Of the 101 titles sampled here, 88 made a gross profit: the envy of any publisher then or now. How he did it also becomes fairly clear. Up to 1890, Bentley paid a little under £200 to produce a 500- or 550-copy edition (paper, com- position and printing, binding, and advertising) and sold most copies for 14–15s each. At those prices, selling half of an edition would just cover production costs. Bentley typically paid his authors £30–£50 for the copy- right for a 500- or 550-copy edition which selling another 40–70 copies would cover. With these regular production costs and routine authorial contracts, Bentley needed to sell just over 300 copies of a 500- or 550- copy edition to break even, which he easily did by having the circulating libraries ready to take regular orders. By purchasing the copyright from the author, a practice he adopted in most cases, the publisher held the possibility of future cheaper editions, though Bentley only reprinted one out of ten titles. What held for the smallest editions, generally held for the largest editions. As the experience of Florence Marryat shows, Bent- ley started new authors with less lucrative contracts (e.g., half-profit agree- ments) and smaller edition sizes, then increased both as success warranted. Thus, Bentley created a stable of reliable authors to fill his publishing lists: Broughton, Carey, Corelli, Edwards, Fullerton, Harwood, Le Fanu, Mar- ryat, and Wood all published multiple novels with Bentley. That most of

[email protected] 142 T. J. BASSETT the authors were women speak more to their popularity with readers than the rates he paid them. But was Bentley’s experience with the three-volume novel unique? Unfortunately, the records of many of the other largest producers of multi-volume fiction—in particular Hurst and Blackett, Tinsley Brothers, and T. Cautley Newby—do not survive. What records that do survive, however, correlate largely with Bentley’s experience. For instance, Tins- ley Brothers published Thomas Hardy’s first novel Desperate Remedies in three volumes in 1871 (see Table 3.8).32 The author contributed £75 toward publication, thereafter profits would be shared equally between author and publisher on an edition of 500 copies. The agreement, a vari- ation on a half-profit agreement, matches Bentley’s practice of offering half-profit contracts to new authors (something he did for 18 titles from 1865 to 1870), though he never asked for money from authors. Compar- ing the costs of production of Hardy’s novel with Bentley’s average costs of production from the same time (see Table 3.3) reveals almost identi- cal costs: Tinsley paid £30.9.0 for paper compared to Bentley’s average of £31.18.4; Tinsley paid £88.19.0 for composition and printing com- pared to Bentley’s average of £72.6.8; Tinsley paid £26.12.9 for bind- ing compared to Bentley’s average of £27.17.0; and Tinsley paid £48.4.9

Table 3.8 Tinsley Brothers’ account for Paper £30.9.0 Author (to £75.0.0 costs) Hardy’s Desperate Printing (500 £88.19.0 Sales (372) £238.10.8 Remedies (1871) copies) Binding (444 £26.12.9 Reviewers, copies) etc. (27) Advertising £48.4.9 On hand (101) Balance £119.5.2 Total £313.10.8 (profit) Total £313.10.8 To half £59.12.7 balance: author To half £59.12.7 balance: publisher

Source Richard Little Purdy, Thomas Hardy: A Bibliographical Study (Oxford University Press, 1954), pp. 4–5

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 143 for advertising compared to Bentley’s average of £54.12.1. In the case of composition and printing, Tinsley includes a £12.10.0 charge for “correc- tions”—without that overage, Tinsley’s printing cost was a more compa- rable £76.9.0. All told, Tinsley paid £194.5.6 to produce the book includ- ing advertising. Even without Hardy’s £75 contribution, the novel still would have made a gross profit of £44.5.2, much in keeping with Bent- ley’s returns on similar books. As it stood, Hardy did receive £59.12.7 back from the publisher making his first adventure in publishing a per- sonal loss of £15.7.5. Though an in-depth discussion is beyond the scope of the present chapter, Bentley’s experiences compare favorably with other publish- ers who have been the subjects of scholarly attention. However, many of these publishers did not come close to the production levels of Bentley. Gaye Tuchman, in her examination of gender in the Victorian literary marketplace Edging Women Out (1989), makes use of the surviv- ing records of Macmillan. As Chapter 2 illustrates and Tuchman argues, Macmillan did have a bias toward men authors, with men authoring over half of their multi-volume fiction titles. In particular, Tuchman compares the contracts of Margaret Oliphant and F. Marion Crawford. The for- mer published several three-volume novels with Macmillan and gener- ally received £300–£600 per copyright for editions of 1000 copies or more. Crawford also published several novels with Macmillan but received £1250–£3000 per copyright, though his contracts seem to include clauses for future editions and foreign rights.33 Regardless, Oliphant’s payments from Macmillan place her on par with Bentley’s better paid authors. David Finkelstein makes Oliphant a subject in his study of Blackwood: the Scot- tish publisher produced seven three-volume novels by Oliphant ranging in edition sizes of 788 copies to 1580 copies. All seven made a profit, ranging from £169.17.6 for The Duke’s Daughter to £846.3.5 for The Perpetual Curate.34 Again, these figures for Macmillan and Blackwood square with the experiences of Bentley. For publishers, then, the three-volume novel proved to be a reliable, though not foolproof, publishing format where small editions of less than 1000 copies could make modest profits.

[email protected] 144 T. J. BASSETT

Notes

1. “Trafficking in Literary Authority: Mudie’s Select Library and the Com- modification of the Victorian Novel,” Victorian Literature and Culture 34 (2006), pp. 1–25. 2. For a more complete history of Bentley, see Royal A. Gettmann, AVicto- rian Publisher: A Study of the Bentley Papers (Cambridge: Cambridge Uni- versity Press, 1960); Roger P. Wallins, “Richard Bentley,” in British Liter- ary Publishing Houses, 1820–1880, ed. Patricia J. Anderson and Jonathan Rose (Detroit: Gale, 1991), pp. 39–52; and Robert L. Patten, “Richard Bentley (1794–1871),” in the Oxford Dictionary of National Biography. 3. Accounts are found on the Bentley Archive microfilm, part I, in the Richard Bentley and Son Papers, 1806–1915, Rare Book and Manuscript Library, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign. 4. An examination of a handful of accounts of some two-volume title accounts show them in line with the three-volume title accounts. Gener- ally, in the case of Bentley, what holds for the three-volume format holds proportionally for the two-volume format. 5. “The Economics of the Victorian Three-Volume Novel,” Business Archives 41 (1976), p. 25. Sutherland’s article draws its conclusions about novel publishing from a handful of Bentley accounts. 6. Frederick Nesta, “The Myth of the ‘Triple-Headed Monster’: The Eco- nomics of the Three-Volume Novel,” Publishing History 61 (2007), pp. 47–69. Nesta draws his conclusions primarily from the publishing experiences of George Gissing in the 1880s and 1890s and sales figures (not publication accounts) of Smith, Elder novels from 1858 to 1865. 7. The history of this crisis is recounted in David Finkelstein, “‘The Secret’: British Publishers and Mudie’s Struggle for Economic Survival 1861–64,” Publishing History 34 (1993), pp. 21–50. 8. Wallins, op. cit., p. 51. 9. In comparison, Bentley produced only ten two-volume novels during the same period. He preferred three-volume novels over two- or one-volume novels and strongly encouraged his authors to produce them. See Wallins, “Richard Bentley.” 10. This accounts for all the three-volume novels published by Bentley during this period. 11. Gettmann uses this account as one of his examples, but his reporting of costs, advertising expenses, and total receipts contain transcription errors (Victorian Publisher, p. 126). 12. There is no record of any further payment to Marryat. 13. “The Nineteenth Century Three-Volume Novel,” Papers of the Biblio- graphical Society of America 51 (1957), pp. 263–302. 14. Andrew Nash, in his study of William Clark Russell, finds Bentley’s attributing of advertising costs to Russell’s accounts unusually high,

[email protected] 3 PUBLISHING THE THREE-VOLUME NOVEL … 145

involving multiple sums used to balance the accounts. In the Bentley accounts examined in this chapter, I found no such entries or practice being used here. See William Clark Russell and the Victorian Nautical Novel (London: Pickering & Chatto, 2014), p. 60. 15. Discussing the individual book contracts and their negotiations is beyond the scope of this chapter. Some works that discuss this aspect of Bentley’s business with his authors include Nancy Fix Anderson’s Woman Against Women in Victorian England: A Life of Eliza Lynn Linton (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1987); Graham Law and Andrew Maunder’s Wilkie Collins: A Literary Life (Palgrave Macmillan, 2008); Nash, ibid., pp. 60–63, in regard to William Clark Russell; and Solveig C. Robinson’s “Sir, It is an Outrage: George Bentley, Robert Black, and the Condition of the Mid-List Author in Victorian Britain,” Book History 10 (2007), pp. 131–68. 16. In the case of three novels, the agreement is unknown: Stephen Watson Fullom’s Time Will Tell (1868), Florence Marryat’s Nelly Brooke (1868), and Harry Child Williamson’s Cast for a Crown (1870). In the margins of Marryat’s account, there is a note suggesting the copyright was “free,” though why that was so is unknown. In a later addition to his account, Williamson was paid £18, suggesting the agreement may have been for half-profits. 17. These amounts are in line with the small fees Tauchnitz paid English authors for English-language rights on the continent. 18. The accounts do not reveal why these two foreign authors were paid and the other three were not, though gender may have been a consideration. 19. Gettmann, op. cit., p. 103. 20. Because he owned the copyrights to her novels, Bentley later sold the English-language rights to Tauchnitz and the rights for the one-volume editions to the publisher Warne. 21. In the accounts, Bentley only distinguishes sales as cash, “town,” and “country”—presumably the latter two categories refer to London-area and provincial circulating libraries and booksellers. 22. These figures only account for the initial sales in the original accounts. In some cases, Bentley warehoused copies and continued selling them for years. 23. The latter profit comes from Marryat’s Nelly Brooke (1868) for which Bentley has no record of paying anything for the copyright. 24. Of the sixty-six novels examined here, Bentley only reprinted eight titles in 6s. one-volume editions: Besides the four just mentioned, they were Alexander’s Which Shall It Be?, Harwood’s Lady Flavia, Le Fanu’s Guy Deverell,andSmart’sBreezie Langton. Bentley rented the one-volume rights of Marryat’s novels to Frederick Warne. For more on reprints of three-volume novels, see Chapter 4.

[email protected] 146 T. J. BASSETT

25. Return on investment is calculated by subtracting total costs from total receipts and dividing by total costs. 26. Two further titles were serialized after book publication: Auerbach and Marryat. 27. Keep in mind, Bentley had much experience with serializing fiction and owning magazines, notably Bentley’s Miscellany. 28. For convenience sake, similar edition sizes are grouped together. 29. In particular, Chapter 3, “Trends in Book Production Costs.” 30. As Nancy Fix Anderson’s biography of Linton makes clear, the subject matter of Linton’s novel was the primary reason for its failure with the public. See Woman Against Women in Victorian England: A Life of Eliza Lynn Linton (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1987), pp. 178–80. 31. Nesta, op. cit., uses the example of Gissing to show the unprofitability of the three-volume novel, but as this data shows, Gissing’s fate was an outlier. 32. Reproduced in Richard Little Purdy’s Thomas Hardy: A Bibliographical Study (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1954), pp. 4–5. Both Sutherland (in Victorian Novelists and Publishers) and Peter Newbolt (in William Tinsley, Speculative Publisher) discuss the same account. This, sadly, may be the only extant account surviving from Tinsley Brothers. 33. Tuchman, Edging Women Out (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1989), pp. 195–98. 34. The House of Blackwood (University Park: Pennsylvania State University Press, 2002), pp. 167–68.

[email protected] CHAPTER 4

Buying, Renting, and Selling the Multi-volume Novel: The Economics of W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library

As the previous chapters have shown, the overall production of new multi- volume novel titles generally increased as the century progressed (peaking in the 1880s) and the consistent profits from them by publishers contin- ued largely unabated (if Bentley’s long experience with the format can be considered as typical). This chapter turns to the business of the cir- culating libraries, the chief purchasers of multi-volume fiction, through an examination of the extant records of W. H. Smith and Son’s Sub- scription Library, the second largest circulating library during the Vic- torian period.1 By most accounts, both Mudie’s Select Library and W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library operated very successful book- renting and selling businesses during the period, each boasting thousands of subscribers and numerous branches throughout England. Yet, by their own collective admission in 1894, the three-volume novel hurt rather than helped their business in the later years of the nineteenth century. In particular, the library ultimatum jointly issued by Mudie and Smith sum- marizes their main complaints with the multi-volume novel format and will serve as the lens through which to examine the overall business of W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library and by extension Mudie’s Select Library. The chapter draws on previous research on W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library by Simon Eliot and Stephen Colclough. The former, in two articles in the 1980s, considers the practice of cheap reprints on

© The Author(s) 2020 147 T. J. Bassett, The Rise and Fall of the Victorian Three-Volume Novel, New Directions in Book History, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-030-31926-7_4

[email protected] 148 T. J. BASSETT

Mudie’s and Smith’s operations and examines the sale of used copies by Smith. Colclough, in one of his articles on W. H. Smith, traces the early years of W. H. Smith’s library from its start in 1860 to its maturity in the early 1870s. Rather than replicating the work of these two scholars, this chapter offers a synthesis, expansion, and refinement of their work by extending the economic analysis of W. H. Smith through the 1890s and by quantifying the extent and timing of cheap reprinting in light of the overall production of three-volume novels. Ultimately, the case study aims to analyze the overall business of W. H. Smith and Son’s library and to assess the rationale for the libraries’ turn against the three-volume novel based on the existing evidence. Circulating or subscription libraries—businesses that rented books to members who paid annual or per-book fees—have long existed in Great Britain. Beginning in the eighteenth century, many printers, publishers, booksellers, and stationers added book rental (whether per volume or through subscriptions) to their other money-making activities. The rela- tively high price of books and the growing demand for reading materials led to these more economical modes of distribution for readers. As Robin Alston enumerates, some one thousand subscription libraries existed up to and including 1850, with nearly every sizable town and city having one or more such business (not including various other kinds of libraries, pub- lic or private, which number in the ten thousand).2 Notable examples of early subscription libraries include the fashionable west end Hookham’s Circulating Library founded in 1764 by Thomas J. Hookham (father of the Romantic-era publisher) and the notorious Minerva Library founded by William Lane in 1775. The latter, in particular, became known for its fiction, especially the Gothic novel, many titles of which were even- tually published by Lane himself. With the economic turmoil brought on by the Napoleonic Wars, in particular the rise in prices for paper, subscription libraries became the chief means of accessing books grown more and more expensive during the Romantic period.3 Hence, circulat- ing libraries, by the early nineteenth century, had become so ubiquitous that Jane Austen makes several passing comments in her novels to their existence and necessity for her upper-middle-class characters. So, though sizable, Mudie’s and Smith’s libraries did not exist alone in the circulating library business. Scores, if not hundreds, of subscrip- tion libraries flourished throughout the Victorian period. Charles Edward Mudie originally a Bloomsbury stationer and bookseller added a cir- culating library business in 1842, later moving his “Select Library” to

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 149 larger premises in in 1852. Mudie’s Select Library even- tually served areas outside of London by establishing satellite libraries in Birmingham and Manchester and shipping books to the countryside and colonies. By all accounts, Mudie’s Select Library was the largest subscrip- tion library, enduring until the 1930s.4 W. H. Smith added a subscrip- tion library to its existing network of newsagents in 1860 with a London headquarters in The Strand. Effectively, Smith established a subscription library wherever they operated a railway newsstand utilizing their pre- existing locations and shipping network. Other smaller libraries existed in their shadows. In the London area, The Library Company (1862–1865) aimed to rival Mudie and Smith and enjoyed a brief existence before suc- cumbing to bankruptcy (publisher William Tinsley, for one, lost heav- ily on the venture). Other libraries included, for example: Cawthorn and Hutt’s British Library in Cockspur Street (1795–1914), Chiswick Library in the High Road, Chiswick (c.1870s–1880s), Day’s Library (later Rice’s Library) in Mount Street (1784–1957), Grosvenor Gallery Library in New (later South Molton Street) (1880–c.1906), Marshall’s British and Foreign Public Subscription Library on Edgware Road (c.1860s), Miles’s Library on Upper Street, (c.1860s–c.1890s), and Scholl’s Circulating Library on Kennington Road (c.1860s). Out- side of London, examples such as Lovejoy’s Library in Reading (1818– 1928), J. Needham’s Circulating Library in Gloucester (c.1850s), James A. Acock’s Subscription Circulating Library in Oxford (c.1870s), Bent- ley’s Library in Castle Cary, Somersetshire (c.1880s), Iredale’s Library in Torquay, Devonshire (1872–1921),5 George Smith’s Circulating Library in Pershore, Worcestershire (c.1890), and H. C. Copson’s Circulating Library in Lowesmoor, Worcestershire (c.1880s) give a sense of the range and variety of subscription libraries.6 Mudie’s offered a service to provide books to provincial libraries for a price—for instance, the labels for the Chiswick Library report “in connection with Mudie’s” suggesting one such partnership. In addition, many smaller libraries purchased the used copies from the larger libraries. Each of these libraries marked their books with printed labels—in the case of Mudie’s, distinctive bright yellow labels on the cover of each volume; in the case of Smith, more discreet purple labels on the (see Figs. 4.1 and 4.2, respectively). On the rare book market, it is not uncommon to find a nineteenth-century book with circulating library labels and some with multiple labels, one pasted on top of the other, as its ownership passed from library to library.

[email protected] 150 T. J. BASSETT

Fig. 4.1 Label for Mudie’s Select Library 1880

Fig. 4.2 Label for W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library 1879

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 151

Of all these circulating libraries, only the records of W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library survive. That they do is a testament to Smith’s success as a railway station newsstand vendor not to the library opera- tion—in fact, W. H. Smith bookstores continue to feature in nearly every airport and high street as of this writing. An examination of the records of Smith’s library operation should cast light on one of the chief pillars of the three-volume novel format.

The Operation of W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library The future W. H. Smith and Son business began in 1792 with Henry Walton Smith (1738–1792) and wife Anna Eastaugh opening a newsstand in Little Grosvenor Street, London. When Henry Walton Smith died later that same year, his wife carried on the business until their son William Henry Smith (1792–1865) (hereafter designated W. H. Smith I) took over the business under his own name in 1812, which by then included numerous newsstands in London. In 1846, his son William Henry Smith (1825–1891) (hereafter designated W. H. Smith II) joined his father and the business became known as W. H. Smith and Son. Two years later, the business bought a newsstand concession for the and expanded rapidly over the next decade including concessions for most of the major railway lines in the Great Britain and depots in Birmingham, Liverpool, and Manchester. To this existing network, W. H. Smith and Son added their subscription library in 1860. After the death of the W. H. Smith I, his son took over as sole director of the business. Later, the younger Smith used his position to enter politics, being first elected to parliament in 1868 and holding a number of offices including First Lord of the Admiralty, First Lord of the Treasury, and Leader of the House of Commons. (In the former office, W. S. Gilbert gently satirized Smith as the Rt. Hon. Sir Joseph Porter in H. M. S. Pinafore.) On his death in 1891, the business passed to his son William Frederick Danvers Smith (1868–1928). The business remained a family concern through much of the twentieth century. When W. H. Smith and Son added a circulating library to their already thriving railway newsstand operation in 1860, it was one part of a much larger business encompassing bookselling, newspaper deliv- ery, retail, printing, publishing, and wholesaling (among other activities). In this way, W. H. Smith and Son resembled most other proprietors of

[email protected] 152 T. J. BASSETT circulating libraries where book rental served as one aspect of a larger pre-existing business. The reasons for and the creation of W. H. Smith’s Subscription Library has until recently remained murky. The conventional story, as presented by Guinvere Griest, Charles Wilson, and others, holds that Smith reluctantly added a circulating library after negotiations with Mudie to supply stock to Smith’s bookstands fell through.7 Mudie’s did supply stock to other libraries, so the story has some plausibility. How- ever, as Colclough has found, there is no evidence to suggest so large a plan.8 Instead, Mudie and Smith initially agreed to jointly open a Midland Counties’ Branch of Mudie’s Select Library in Birmingham in November 1859, with Mudie supplying the stock from his London library and Smith providing the building (and presumably staff and shipping). But this more modest plan fell through at the last minute and Mudie went on to open his own branch of his Select Library in Birmingham in July 1860 shortly after Smith began his own circulating library in June 1860.9 From that moment on, the two librarians would be direct rivals in London and the provinces—where, according to anecdotal evidence at least, Mudie gen- erally dominated in the former and Smith generally prevailed in the latter. According to advertisements such as the one in the 7 August 1880 issue of the Athenaeum, W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library explained their library rates and procedures in contractual detail to poten- tial subscribers.10 Following the practice of Mudie’s Select Library, W. H. Smith and Son set their lowest annual subscription rates for London at one guinea (£1.1.0 or 21s) for one volume at a time—but they explic- itly state “Novels in more than one volume are not available for this class of subscription.” According to advertisements for Mudie’s Select Library, such as the one in the 5 July 1880 issue of the Athenaeum, Mudie did not place the same restriction on his subscribers.11 ForW.H.Smithand Son’s, the corresponding annual subscription rates for borrowing more volumes at a time were set at one and a half guineas (£1.11.6) for two volumes at a time (but “novels in more than two volumes are not available for this class of subscription”), two guineas (£2.2.0) for four volumes at a time, three guineas (£3.3.0) for eight volumes at a time, and five guineas (£5.5.0) for fifteen volumes at a time. Subscribers obtaining their books from a country bookstall (i.e., a railway station outside London) were lim- ited to fewer volumes at a time at the corresponding London subscription rates (e.g., two guineas for three volumes at a time rather than four in London), presumably to compensate for Smith’s shipping costs. At least for W. H. Smith subscribers at the lowest rates, readers could not borrow

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 153 a single volume of a multi-volume novel, read it, and return it for the next volume—a practice long assumed among Victorian library patrons by scholars (though subscribers to Mudie’s Select Library could do so freely). W. H. Smith compelled readers of multi-volume fiction, then, to subscribe to at least the two-guinea annual rate in order to borrow com- plete sets of a three-volume novel. In addition, much like Mudie’s Select Library, W. H. Smith offered rates for “country book clubs, reading soci- eties, etc.” for borrowing anywhere from 24 volumes at a time (£9.9.0 annually) to 84 volumes at a time (£32.15.0). Subscribers could commence their subscriptions at any time at any W. H. Smith branch (e.g., 186, Strand, London) or railway bookstall—of which there were 500 of the latter according to the 1880 advertisement. of subscription established the place of borrowing: as noted, “Subscribers can only change their Books at the Depôt where their names are registered” but “the Clerk in Charge will obtain from London any Work in the Library which Subscriber may desire to have” free of delivery charges to the subscriber. Though these requests may not have always been met, since “Messrs. W. H. Smith & Son beg to impress upon their Library Subscribers the fact that much disappointment and inconvenience would be avoided if they would, in all cases, give to the Clerk in Charge a List comprising at least twice as many titles of Works as they wish to exchange” (the emphasis in the original). In practice, subscribers could only exchange once per day with novels exchanged “only in unbroken and complete sets”—again, underlining how the library singled out multi- volume fiction. In light of these rules, to reiterate the constraints stated above, subscribers could not take out a volume at one bookstall, read it on their railway journey, and exchange it for another volume at a later station since exchanges could only be made at the place where the subscriber registered. As the advertisement points out, W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library “embraces all the most important Works of History, Biography, Travel, Fiction, Poetry, Science, and Theology, as well as the leading Mag- azines and Reviews.” Despite the perceived close connection between cir- culating libraries and multi-volume fiction, this serves as a reminder that the stock of most, if not all, circulating libraries extended well beyond fiction. Less than a handful of extant catalogues of W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library survive from the Victorian period, so only a rough estimate of fiction to nonfiction and multi-volume fiction titles to one-volume fiction titles can be determined.12 The 1885 Catalogue of

[email protected] 154 T. J. BASSETT

W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library contains 254 pages of titles, divided into two sections: “works of history, biography, travel, poetry, science, [and] theology” and “works of fiction.” The nonfiction listings occupy 162 pages with each book double listed under author and title, whereas the fiction listings occupy 92 pages with selected (but not all) authors (e.g., Austen and Dickens) receiving double listing. A rough cal- culation shows fiction titles made up over a third of the titles listed in the 1885 catalogue with 36.2% of pages listing fiction titles and 63.8% of pages listing nonfiction titles. (Of course, this catalogue does not tell us how many copies of each title W. H. Smith circulated.) In terms of fiction, the 1885 catalogue lists 3899 individual titles consisting of 3268 one-volume editions (83.8%), 200 two-volume editions (5.1%), 430 three-volume editions (11.0%), and 1 four-volume edition. In 1885, then, 16.2% of the fiction titles circulated by W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscrip- tion Library were in multi-volume editions. Multi-volume fiction titles accounted for 5.9% of all the titles listed in the 1885 catalogue—a size- able, but not overwhelming, number of titles. For comparison sake, dozens of catalogues for Mudie’s Select Library survive from the Victorian period. Simon Eliot examined twelve Mudie’s catalogues between 1857 and 1894 and finds the percentage of fiction titles increases from 24.8% of titles in 1857 up to 43.0% of titles in 1884 before declining to 36.3% of titles in 1894 (see Table 4.1).13 Not sur- prisingly, as we saw in Chapter 2, the years of the largest proportion of fiction titles in Mudie’s corresponds to the years of peak production of multi-volume fiction titles by publishers suggesting the library actively worked to keep up with new titles. As Eliot reminds us, the percentage of fiction titles do not reveal the actual number of copies purchased by Mudie’s Select Library, though Mudie typically bought 100–200 copies of a Bentley 500-copies edition of a three-volume novel. (Comparatively speaking, however, Smith usually bought fewer copies of each title.) Of the fiction in Mudie’s catalogue, Eliot finds multi-volume fiction titles made up 32.3% of fiction titles in 1857 rising to over fifty percent of fic- tion titles in the 1880s before declining to 40.8% of fiction titles in 1894. Thus, in the 1880s, Mudie’s not only carried comparatively more fiction but carried more multi-volume fiction titles than one-volume fiction titles. Comparing the one W. H. Smith and Son’s catalogue to the twelve Mudie’s catalogues examined by Eliot reveal Smith listed a comparable though overall smaller amount of fiction titles as Mudie: the former listed 36.2% in 1885 and the latter 43.0% in 1884. Hence, it is safe to say,

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 155

Table 4.1 Fiction holdings of Mudie’s Year Percentage of fiction Percentage of titles of all titles (%) multi-volume fiction Select Library, titles of all fiction 1857–1894 titles (%)

1857 24.8 32.3 1865 33.0 46.2 1869 34.4 54.8 1884 43.0 53.8 1889 42.6 52.6 1890 43.1 48.8 1891 43.2 47.8 1892 37.4 46.0 1893 37.1 41.8 1894 36.3 40.8

Source Simon Eliot, “Fiction and Non-fiction: One- and Three- Volume Novels in Some Mudie Catalogues, 1857–94,” Publishing History 66 (2009), pp. 31–47, and Simon Eliot (personal communication)

fiction occupied a large percentage of both libraries’ catalogues (and pre- sumably shelves) from the 1860s until the 1890s. The stark difference appears to be in the proportion of fiction titles in multi-volume editions. In the 1884 Mudie’s catalogue, over half of the fiction titles (53.8%) are in multi-volume editions (a proportion maintained in subsequent years) compared to a smaller 16.2% of fiction titles in the 1885 Smith catalogue. Based on only one catalogue, Smith’s listings may be unrepresentative. However, given that Smith typically bought fewer multi-volume fiction titles than Mudie and given the selection restraints placed on subscribers, the 1885 catalogue highlights the potentially different business practices of Smith compared to Mudie. A cursory examination of the multi-volume fiction titles listed in the 1885 Smith catalogue shows the vast majority are titles less than five years old, such as Mrs. Leith Adams’s Geoffery Stirling (3 vols., 1883), Hawley Smart’s From Post to Finish (3 vols., 1884), and Eleanor C. Price’s Gerald (3 vols., 1885). Older, and even some relatively recent, triple-deckers have been replaced with their cheap one-volume reprints, such as Mrs. G. L. Banks’s God’s Providence House (3 vols., 1865), Walter Besant’s The Golden Butterfly (3 vols., 1876), Mrs. Alexander’s The Freres (3 vols., 1883), and Benjamin L. Farjeon’s Great Porter Square (3 vols., 1884). As Eliot has shown, Mudie’s library often

[email protected] 156 T. J. BASSETT retained their multi-volume editions for an extended period, sometimes a decade or more. For instance, the 1884 Mudie catalogue lists 40 Mary Elizabeth Braddon titles, 7 in one volume and 33 in three volumes.14 Her earliest novel was published in 1862 and nearly all were reprinted in cheap one-volume editions often within a year of the three-volume edition— hence, Mudie deliberately kept circulating the older multi-volume stock in favor of newer one-volume copies. In comparison, the 1885 Smith cat- alogue lists 42 Braddon titles, 41 titles in one-volume editions and only one title in three volumes (the most recently published title, Wyllard’s Weird )—hence, Smith quickly replaced the three-deckers (even ones a scant year old) with their one-volume reprints. Whereas Mudie hung on to the original multi-volume copies of Braddon’s novels, Smith replaced the multi-volume copies with the reprints as soon as seemingly possible. So, though Mudie and Smith carried roughly similar proportions of fiction, Mudie appears to have retained more multi-volume editions in his stock than Smith judging by the two catalogues. In both cases, a cer- tain logic underpins their practices. For Mudie, the expensive editions represented a sunk cost—one either made up by circulating the copies he already bought or by selling them for large discounts. Unless the book needed to be replaced (e.g., through normal wear), Mudie preferred to keep an otherwise still serviceable book, even if it was in three volumes. Smith, on the other hand, replaced the expensive editions at the earliest opportunity—sometimes within the same year according to the 1885 cat- alogue—and retained only the multi-volume editions he required (e.g., new novels or non-reprinted titles). As we shall see, Smith profitably sold the old library stock. Two factors may have contributed to his haste to replace multi-volume editions with one-volume editions. First, as we saw above, subscribers at the lowest rates were not allowed to request multi- volume fiction titles. Potentially, Smith lost subscribers to Mudie’s or other libraries due to this policy, so the high proportion of one-volume fiction titles may have been aimed at these clients—that is, subscribers at the one guinea rate could borrow a complete and relatively recent novel, sometimes within a few months of its first edition. Second, and more importantly, Smith’s library itself paid to ship books to any railway news- stand where subscribers could receive them. Clearly, three octave volumes of a triple-decker represent three times the shipping cost as one octavo volume of a cheap reprint even at the reduced shipping rates enjoyed by Smith. Therein lies the primary difference between the operation of Mudie’s Select Library and W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library:

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 157

Mudie operated in central London and counted on subscribers receiving their books in person at his Oxford Street headquarters whereas Smith operated along a network of railway lines and needed to deliver books to them from one of his depots. Despite both being large circulating libraries, both Mudie’s Select Library and W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library employed differ- ent practices in running their operations, especially when it came to multi- volume fiction. Mudie appears to be more tolerant of the three-volume novel judging by his terms of subscription and his library holdings. Smith, on the other hand, singles out the three-volume novel in his terms of sub- scription and carries fewer multi-volume titles on his shelves. In practice, Smith bought fewer copies of a three-volume novel than Mudie which they circulated until the cheap reprint became available. Then they sold off the three-volume sets, often while the title still enjoyed some of its ini- tial popularity. The library’s handling of the multi-volume novel undoubt- edly contributed to Smith’s signing the 1894 library ultimatum which fatally wounded the three-volume novel.

The Accounts of W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library The discussion of the operation of W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscrip- tion Library contributes much to our understanding of how the busi- ness worked, especially as it relates to subscribers and multi-volume fic- tion. The accounts themselves reveal how successful the business became. Unlike Mudie’s Select Library, W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library operated as one department in a large multi-faceted business. At various times, the business of W. H. Smith encompassed newsstand, book- stand, advertising, book publishing, book retailing, and book wholesaling departments as well as a circulating library department. As one part of a larger business, the proprietors of the W. H. Smith’s circulating library may have condoned or accepted lower profits or losses from the libraries, though as we shall see the library department did turn a consistent, if modest, profit.15 As Eliot and others have pointed out, the circulating library’s largest expenses were stock purchased for circulation and general overheads (e.g., salaries, shipping, and storage) and their chief receivables were annual subscriptions and secondhand sales of old stock. W. H. Smith had the somewhat unique advantage of relying on in-house services to

[email protected] 158 T. J. BASSETT save costs: for example, their own printing department produced the cir- culating library’s catalogues and the company railway discounts (gained by their railway station concessions) applied to their library shipments. The largest advantage, though, was utilizing space in pre-existing railway newsstands for the branch libraries. First, a few words about the W. H. Smith Archive itself. The financial records that survive create a rather idiosyncratic collection encompass- ing account ledgers, correspondence, memorandum, newspaper clippings, personal papers, and other miscellaneous documents from the early nine- teenth century to the middle twentieth century. In particular, the surviv- ing financial records represent a small fraction of all those presumably cre- ated at the time: whereas end-of-year accounts generally survive, purchas- ing and subscription records are missing. Generally speaking, most day- to-day records do not survive. Hence, the discussion of the economics of W. H. Smith’s circulating library depends on these end-of-year accounts. To complicate matters even further, the archive lacks the accounts for the years 1868, 1869, 1870, 1875, and 1891 and the existing accounts utilize various and evolving methods of bookkeeping. Thus, making year-to-year or cross-period comparisons may be difficult, if not impossible. Colclough, in his article, chronicles the finances of the earliest years of W. H. Smith’s circulating library from 1860 to 1867 (see Table 4.2). In their first six months from June to December 1860, the start-up costs for W. H. Smith’s library were £3952.12.4 for stock and £571.12.2 for other expenses and their accounts receivable were £1986.10.9 in sub- scriptions and £423.3.2 in secondhand sales, culminating in an initial loss

Table 4.2 W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library accounts, 1860–1865

Year Purchases Expenses (£) Subscriptions Sales(£) Profitorloss (£) (£) (£)

1860 3952.12.4 571.12.2 1986.10.9 423.3.2 −2054.10.7 (6 months) 1861 9834.3.9 1401.13.2 7296.15.0 1466.3.0 −4527.9.6 1862 12,253.19.5 1963.6.10 10,139.5.3 3460.15.1 −5144.15.5 1863 11,370.1.1 1969.11.5 10,336.16.11 5308.9.4 −2839.1.8 1864 13,133.13.9 2273.19.9 10,556.18.5 6191.14.5 −1498.2.4 1865 16,818.7.7 2806.12.11 11,979.15.4 9417.11.0 1209.3.3

Source Stephen Colclough, “‘A Larger Outlay Than Any Return’: The Library of W. H. Smith and Son, 1860–1873,” Publishing History 54 (2003), pp. 80–81

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 159 of £2054.10.7.16 The next four years, 1861–1864, also witnessed library losses of £4527.9.6, £5144.15.5, £2839.1.8, and £1498.2.4, respectively, before posting their first profits of £1209.3.3 in 1865.17 Most, if not all, of these losses can be attributed to two factors: the large outlay in books needed to initially stock a large circulating library in London and dozens of railway bookstalls and the slow growth of the subscriber base. By 1866 and 1867, W. H. Smith’s circulating library posted profits of £3740.12.5 and £10,869.8.3, respectively—quite a remarkable growth in the span of eight years.18 During these same years, the library subscription income grew steadily from £7296.15.0 in 1861 (their first full year of operation) to £15,283.5.7 in 1867. Since the subscription rates remain unchanged throughout the nineteenth century (e.g., one guinea per year at the lowest rate), these increases can be almost entirely attributed to increases in the numbers of subscribers, the latter figure representing as many as 10,000 individual subscriptions even accounting for subscribers at the premium rates. The sales of secondhand books, the second main source of income for the library, also increased from £1466.3.0 in 1861 to £6191.14.5 in 1864 to £15,579.4.8 in 1867—where the latter figure is nearly £300 more than the library received in subscriptions that year. However, not all the sales were secondhand copies of previously circulated library books. As the accounts make explicit in 1866 and 1867, the library bought some books “for Reading” and others “for Sale”—hence, the figures conflate the sales of new and used books. This blurs the lines between departments in W. H. Smith overall business and the businesses of the individual book- stalls where customers could either buy books (new or used) or borrow books through a library subscription. In later years, the accounts separate the sales of new and used books into separate categories. In any case, as others have pointed out, W. H. Smith’s library depended significantly on (used) book sales to bolster the library’s bottom line. After a gap of three years where no accounts survive, the accounts for 1871–1874 show increasing volatility in the fortunes of the library busi- ness. By the early 1870s, the library slipped back into the red with losses of £870.12.6 in 1872 and £1150.17.3 in 1873.19 Colclough attributes these losses to cheap reprints appearing “only a few months” after the three-volume editions20—though as we will see below, this could not have been the case. Rather, comparing the accounts of 1867 and 1873, the more likely explanation is the large increases in expenses: Smith bought £30,722.2.0 books for circulation in 1873 compared to £16,342.0.3 in

[email protected] 160 T. J. BASSETT

1867. At the same time, general overhead leapt from £3606.13.8 in 1867 to £11,884.4.9 in 1873. Despite an increase of £8646.16.1 in subscrip- tion income in six years and an increase of £519.5.6 in secondhand sales, the circulating library lost money. Clearly, the secondhand sales cannot be blamed for the loss when the significant increases in expenses seems the more likely culprit. These years, in the late 1860s and early 1870s, saw Smith rapidly expanding the number of newsstands, going from 290 bookstalls in 1870 to 385 in 1874, an increase of nearly a third in four years. These new bookstalls, now branches of the circulating library, led to new stock purchases and larger overheads.21 After another gap in the accounts (the missing 1875 accounts), the W. H. Smith Archive contains uninterrupted and consistently-reported end of year accounts from 1876 to 1890. As we have seen in Chapter 2,these years correspond to the years of peak production of multi-volume novels and (as many presume) the significant rise of early reprinting. Table 4.3 gives the accounts simplified into seven expenses and receivables cate- gories: purchases of stock for circulation, salaries of library employees, station expenses, other costs (e.g., cartage, postage, printing), subscrip- tions, sales of secondhand books, and other income (e.g., catalogue adver- tising and sale of “sundries”). During these fifteen years, significantly, the circulating library reported a profit every year, ranging from a low of £581.9.10 in 1883 to a high of £4927.13.10 in 1877 and averag- ing close to £3000 per year. In particular, the annual profits fluctuate between £2000 and £4000 during the years 1876–1882, culminating in the low of £581 in 1883. Thereafter, the annual profits steadily rise to £3951.18.0 in 1890. Without a doubt, during these fifteen years at the peak of multi-volume fiction production, at least one circulating library consistently turned substantial profits. On the expense side, the purchase of books averages about £22,600 per year, ranging from a low of £21,625 in 1881 to a high of £23,967 in 1890. While the amount that W. H. Smith’s library spent on books did increase over the fifteen years, the increase was fairly modest: the library only spent about £1800 more on library books in 1890 than in 1876 which represents an 8.0% increase in that expenditure across this period. That increase is much less than the 28.4% increase in sub- scription income during the same period—an indication that the number of subscribers may not have been a large influence on purchases (i.e., total library purchases were not proportional to total library subscribers). The surviving archival records do not reveal what particular books the

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 161 Net profit/loss (£) (£) Sales (£) Other income (£) Other costs (£) Subscriptions Station expenses (£) (£) W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library accounts, 1876–1890 W. H. Smith Archive, Special Collections, University of Reading Year Purchases (£) Salaries 18761877 22,189.9.01878 22,315.19.51879 2219.8.5 21,802.8.9 2304.13.61880 22,164.13.3 2506.15.0 22,353.19.101881 2610.15.6 2657.16.6 N/A1882 N/A 21,625.7.111883 21,974.8.8 2656.2.11 N/A 6454.12.61884 N/A 23,534.5.5 2664.15.01885 9007.13.6 9108.17.8 21,996.5.9 6570.0.4 4053.1.101886 2806.6.0 22,030.19.6 10,176.0.6 6258.9.4 2899.10.6 25,361.13.111887 10,378.1.4 26,984.12.4 22,582.5.1 2982.9.0 3950.15.11 28,850.12.111888 6215.17.2 23,602.14.8 7104.14.8 6272.15.0 28,122.3.6 8518.5.10 3019.15.6 7806.13.51889 27,903.19.3 23,792.14.7 3327.14.0 4294.9.8 27,927.8.2 6675.3.81890 2671.1.4 6956.12.11 4409.11.3 23,313.0.5 7563.15.8 7029.11.9 3443.0.0 4621.10.10 3154.6.3 2919.6.10 23,967.11.6 7767.15.6 7204.5.3 3511.17.6 2583.17.7 27,828.7.3 2870.16.9 3539.17.0 28,084.6.0 4692.2.4 6667.16.5 28,288.2.6 1720.19.0 4654.6.11 4927.13.10 4057.2.6 2580.2.0 7505.1.10 7479.2.2 4433.12.1 6381.16.10 2290.19.8 7142.15.2 6820.13.4 4071.12.0 29,223.0.0 30,059.5.9 4922.9.4 2425.12.10 30,998.18.9 3472.18.7 5696.8.5 2320.8.6 4851.16.2 2821.6.2 6747.17.2 7131.17.3 31,039.19.10 2566.19.3 7457.3.5 8112.7.11 32,147.1.3 2889.17.9 32,577.4.8 2138.19.11 2754.9.9 581.9.10 2768.13.6 2910.11.11 7681.17.3 6997.6.8 2795.1.6 2344.12.3 3236.18.11 2656.9.8 3278.9.10 3293.0.6 3951.18.0 3271.12.2 Table 4.3 Source

[email protected] 162 T. J. BASSETT library purchased—whether fiction or nonfiction, multi-volume novels or single-volume novels—but these figures begin to cast serious doubt on the libraries’ claims that the increased production of three-volume novels necessarily led to higher expenditures on fiction and hence higher expen- ditures on library stock.22 Coincidently, however, the lowest library prof- its (£581 in 1883, down from £2567 the previous year) happen the same year publishers produced the highest number of new three-volume novel titles (206 titles, up from 173 titles the previous year). That year, W. H. Smith’s library spent £1560 more on books than the previous year—all other things being equal, buying fifty copies of 33 three-volume novel titles at (a generously discounted) 15s per set could easily account for the increased expenditure on books that year. The following year, 1884, the profits bounce back and the number of new three-volume novel titles drop back to 188 titles. But, again, there is no evidence that the three- volume novel itself is responsible for the lower profits that year in spite of appearances. Other than this speculative case, there is no strong correla- tion between W. H. Smith’s expenditure for library books and the number of new three-volume novel titles published annually. The purchase of new stock remains relatively constant as an expense even with the boom of multi-volume fiction titles in the 1880s. Besides a few existing library catalogues and secondhand sales cata- logues, the archive has little evidence of what stock the library maintained. Once, as part of the accounts for 1881 and 1882, W. H. Smith made some comparison between the two years of financial records.23 In it, they report the library owned 227,650 volumes in 1881 and 230,217 volumes in 1882 (an increase of 2567 volumes). Clearly, this calculation includes multiple copies of many titles, not just the number of titles carried. Of the volumes in stock, subscribers asked to borrow 47,954 volumes in 1881 and 47,568 volumes in 1882. Surprisingly, if these records are accurate, only about a fifth of the library’s stock actually circulated in these two years, fewer than 1000 volumes per week. As shown above, the 1885 Catalogue of W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library lists approxi- mately 11,000 titles so, if assuming only gradual changes in the stock, on average Smith owned about 20 copies of each title. The remaining expenses—staff salaries, station expenses, and other costs—generally increase at a higher rate than purchases during the fifteen-year period. The annual amount spent on salaries averages about £2877 per year and steadily rises from £2219.8.5 in 1876 to £3539.17.0 in 1890, a 59.5% increase in salary costs. Without further evidence, the

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 163 increase in all probability comes from adding new library branches (hence new employees) or paying existing employees higher wages or some com- bination of both. The former is probably the more likely explanation since W. H. Smith’s railway bookstall empire grew remarkably in the nineteenth century. As Charles Wilson reports, Smith operated 35 bookstalls in 1851, 385 bookstalls in 1874, 450 bookstalls in 1880, and 615 bookstalls in 1894.24 (One such list of bookstalls appears in the 1885 catalogue.) Sta- tion expenses and other costs (such as rent, materials, and postage) taken together also steadily rise from £9007.13.6 in 1876 to £12,078.5.3 in 1890, a 34.1% rise in these costs. Presumably, additional library branches necessitated larger station expenses or general increases in the cost of over- head items (e.g., postage) required larger expenses or both. So, whereas total expenses increased from 1876 to 1890, salaries, station expenses, and other costs contribute the most to these expenses, not the purchase of books for circulation: purchases rose by 8.0% during the period whereas salaries rose 59.5% and other costs rose 34.1%. It is safe to say that pur- chasing three-volume novels—or books in general—did not substantially affect the library’s increasing expenses. Accounts receivable include subscriptions, secondhand sales, and other income (from advertising income, for example). Income from subscrip- tions averages about £29,000 per year during this fifteen-year period, ranging from a low of £25,361.13.11 in 1876 to £32,577.4.8 in 1890. Generally, the income from subscriptions steadily rises from 1876 to 1890, increasing by 28.4% during the period. The accounts just once record the number of subscribers: the comparison between the 1881 and 1882 accounts mentioned above reports 12,298 subscriptions in 1881 and 12,199 subscriptions in 1882 which gives an average subscription rate of a little more than two guineas (£2.2.0) per subscription (which implies a large number of subscribers paid more than the minimum rate). By 1890, given these figures, it is safe to say that W. H. Smith’s library had at least fifteen thousand individual subscribers assuming a similar distribu- tion of enrollments. Compared to 1867, the library more than doubled its income from subscriptions by the late 1880s—since the subscription rates remained unchanged, the increase must be from primarily more individ- ual subscribers. During this period, subscription incomes always exceeded purchase of books expenses by £3000–£9000 per year and accounted for about three-quarters of overall library income. As noted above, whereas the total amount received from subscriptions rose by nearly thirty percent, the total amount spent on purchases of books for circulation increased

[email protected] 164 T. J. BASSETT by only 8.0%—hence income from subscriptions usually went toward expenses other than new stock. Whereas the income from subscriptions consistently increases during these fifteen years, the income from secondhand sales remains volatile. Sales of used stock average about £7400 per year, ranging from a low of £6747.17.2 in 1885 to a high of £8518.5.1 in 1877. Unlike the steady growth of other expenses and receivables, sales of secondhand books do not follow a general trend over the period. Instead, the income from sales ebbs and flows: for instance, one six-year period, from 1880 to 1885, sees sales slide from £7806.13.5 down to £6747.17.2 and the following three-year period, from 1886 to 1888, witnesses a rise up to £8112.7.1. As with purchases of books for circulation, there is no way to deter- mine what books were being sold, whether fiction or nonfiction or three- volume novels or one-volume novels.25 Without more information, it is impossible to say to what extent, if at all, the three-volume novel or their reprints influenced the secondhand sales of W. H. Smith’s subscription library. Regardless, the sales of old stock accounted for about 15–20% of the library’s income per year, a considerable revenue stream. Other income—including sales of advertising in the library catalogues and sales of other sundries—averages about £2800 per year from 1876 to 1890, ranging from a low of £2320.8.6 in 1883 to a high of £3293.0.6 in 1889. Though not on par with the income from subscriptions or sec- ondhand sales, this other income did provide a reliable contribution to the library’s income and accounts for about 6–9% of the library’s income per year. Similar to the income from sales, there is no general trend to the other income—it fluctuates from year to year. On average, during this fifteen-year period, the library spent £36,307 per year in expenses, of which £22,600 went to books for circulations (62.2%), £2877 went to salaries (7.9%), and £10,830 went to station and other expenses (29.8%). Hence, as we might expect, expenditures on stock took up the majority of costs with station expenses half as much, whereas labor costs were a relatively smaller expense. Compara- tively, on average, the library received £39,000 per year in income, of which £29,000 came from subscriptions (74.0%), £7400 came from sec- ondhand sales (18.9%), and £2800 came from other income (7.1%). Not to minimize the income from sales, but three times as much income comes from subscriptions than sales with other income contributing a rel- atively smaller amount. These averages correspond to an average annual library net profit of £2893 per year which gives an 8.0% net return on

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 165 investment on average per year—a return which most businesses would envy, then or now. However, as Table 4.4 shows, the net profits of the library pale in comparison to the overall net profits of W. H. Smith. Dur- ing this fifteen-year period, the library’s profits amount to 3.1% of the company’s annual total profits on average—once again, this underscores the small place the library occupied in the overall operation of W. H. Smith’s business. Thus, for the years 1876–1890, the accounts paint a rather consistent picture of W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library during the years of peak multi-volume novel production. While not a money-spinner or a large department in the overall operation, the library was consistently profitable, had a growing subscription base, and enjoyed substantial (if fluctuating) secondhand book sales. Judging by the amount spent on pur- chases of new circulating stock, W. H. Smith kept a rather strict limit on this particular expense, keeping it significantly below the income from subscriptions. As recorded, the accounts give little evidence that the three- volume novel itself negatively affected the library’s profits from 1876 to 1890. The following decade of the 1890s sees the decline and end of the multi-volume novel format and the death of W. H. Smith II, the prime

Table 4.4 W. H. Smith net profits, Year Net profits (£) Year Net profits (£) 1870–1892 1870 45,000 1885 99,000 1871 38,000 1886 96,000 1872 43,000 1887 102,000 1873 57,000 1888 123,000 1874 58,000 1889 136,000 1875 55,000 1890 131,000 1876 78,000 1891 130,000 1877 69,000 1892 162,000 1878 85,000 1879 95,000 1893/1894 157,000 1880 91,000 1894/1895 164,000 1881 86,000 1895/1896 149,000 1882 80,000 1896/1897 177,000 1883 100,000 1897/1898 159,000 1884 92,000 1898/1899 159,000

Source Charles Wilson, First with the News: The History of W. H. Smith 1792–1972 (New York: Doubleday, 1986), pp. 449–50

[email protected] 166 T. J. BASSETT initiator of their library. Due to the death of W. H. Smith on 6 October 1891, the accounts skip the year 1891 as the company moved though probate, including a valuation of the overall business. When the library accounts resume in 1892, the accounting methods change dramatically when an external accounting firm establishes a new and more standard- ized reporting regime.26 They divided the year 1892 into two accounts covering January to June and July to December whereas they covered the year 1893 in one partial account covering nine months from January to September. Thereafter, the annual accounts cover twelve-month periods from October to September. Because of these changes (some discussed in more detail below) exact comparisons between the accounts for the 1890s and earlier years may not be possible. Table 4.5 gives the library accounts from 1892 to 1898. For the sake of easier comparisons, the two accounts for 1892 have been combined and the account for 1893 has been proportionately adjusted from nine to twelve months. Other- wise, the accounts have been simplified to separate costs and receivables into seven categories: purchases of books for circulation, salaries, bookstall expenses, other costs (e.g., transportation, postage), subscriptions, sales of secondhand books, and other income (e.g., advertising, sundries). Comparing the accounts from the 1890s to the accounts from the 1880s shows a generally large increase in both other costs and other income. It is hard to believe that both increased so dramatically—the for- mer more than doubling and the latter growing by a factor of five—in the space of two years from 1890 to 1893. Instead, the new accountan- t’s methods, as part of more rigorous financial regime, now attributed to the libraries new costs and receivables while revising other categories. The primary changes include the addition of a valuation of the library stock to both the costs and the receivables (something ignored in the previous accounts)—in the case of the January to June 1892 account, the library stock is valued at £10,000. Under the new accounting, then, the appre- ciation or depreciation of the library stock now figure into the profit and loss calculations. Comparing the accounts for 1890 and the combined accounts for 1892 shows some of these changes more specifically. There is a general continuity in expenses and receivables with a few exceptions. Purchases of new books, salaries, bookstall expenses, other costs (less the valua- tion for stock), and subscriptions remain comparable whereas secondhand sales drop from £7681.17.3 in 1890 to £3725.3.2 in 1892 (a decrease of over fifty percent) and other income increases from £3278.9.10 in

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 167 160.10.9 − Net profit/loss (£) (£) Sales (£) Other income Subscriptions (£) Other costs (£) expenses (£) 26,699.4.1 3997.16.2 6349.16.2 16,514.10.9 32,761.7.8 3687.5.7 16,952.3.2 20,188.12.1 3549.13.7 6046.18.8 19,674.13.11 28,363.0.8 3449.16.9 21,194.13.3 3574.11.4 11,814.5.11 1896.13.1 3171.12.715,141.9.11 12,473.11.8 2662.5.2 15,282.0.4 4535.4.0 1955.2.1 14,735.15.5 15,411.18.7 21,272.5.6 3292.17.9 2587.7.7 15,895.19.11 2680.18.6 27,836.13.4 4412.8.528,018.6.11 4738.15.10 8876.8.5 9985.6.7 18,723.14.1 19,103.9.3 40,260.6.8 40,818.6.10 8826.16.0 9185.18.10 17,633.1.4 19,560.14.4 6870.19.9 7719.1.5 22,464.17.10 3916.18.624,480.17.11 6945.8.0 4123.8.9 17,234.19.9 7654.10.0 33,802.10.0 18,345.5.7 4275.11.11 36,416.19.2 19,518.6.1 5445.4.9 7034.4.2 18,889.7.7 6147.9.3 W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library accounts, 1892–1896 W. H. Smith Archive, Special Collections, University of Reading Year1892 (January–June)1892 11,973.5.4(July–December) 1892 Purchases (combined) (£) 1751.16.01893 Salaries(January–September) (£) 3021.0.4 Bookstall 1893 (adjusted 23,787.10.5 for 12,514.2.712 months) 1893–1894 15,899.12.2 3648.9.1(October–September) 1770.1.10 6192.12.11 15,021.13.6 24,987.14.3 3431.3.3 31,181.12.6 3725.3.2 30,433.12.1 6724.1.0 1897–1898 (October–September) 1894–1895 (October–September) 1895–1896 (October–September) 1896–1897 (October–September) Table 4.5 Source

[email protected] 168 T. J. BASSETT

1890 to £10,433.12.1 in 1892 (less the valuation for the library’s stock, £10,000). The sudden decrease in secondhand sales income may have several causes: first, sales may have actually substantially decreased; or sec- ond, the change in accounting regimes may have altered how second- hand sales were computed. There is more evidence for the latter view: for example, in the accounts for January to June 1892, the “Sales of Second Hand Books” income category is divided into two entries, £1770.1.10 for “bookstalls” and £2336.7.2 for “sundries.” Another separate category for “New Remainders” lists income of £960.6.0 for “profits.” Likewise, in the accounts for July to December 1892, “Sales of Second Hand Books” is divided into £1955.2.1 for “bookstalls” and £2946.14.4 for “sundries” with £907.18.5 from “New Remainders.” Clearly, from the evidence of these accounts, the library sold more than just secondhand books (the amounts listed as “bookstalls”) from their stock—the “sundries” (per- haps stationery?) and new remainders (uncirculated books bought by the library at steep discounts from the publishers). This underscores the fact that the new accountants’ methods differed from the previous accoun- tants’ methods where secondhand book and sundries income was not strictly separated. In addition, the new accountants now divide the income from sub- scriptions into two categories “bookstalls” and “sundries” whereas in the earlier accounts income from subscriptions was divided into “country” (referring to subscriptions sold at bookstalls) and “town” (referring to subscriptions sold in London). The meaning of the new accounts is not immediately clear—presumably the “bookstalls” subscription income is from actual subscriptions whereas the “sundries” income is from miscel- laneous income related to subscriptions (whatever that may be). Regardless, the accounts show an increase of profit from £3951.18.0 in 1890 to £6724.1.0 in 1892—an increase of 70.2% in the two years. Though some caution should be taken with comparing these two fig- ures given the changes in accounting methods. Furthermore, during the period from 1892 to 1898 (the year after the last multi-volume novel), the library reported net profits every year except for the year October 1893– September 1894 which reported a small loss of £160.10.9. Eliot, for one, notes that this loss relates to the libraries’ ultimatum and cites this figure as proof that the three-volume novel and early reprinting must have hurt W. H. Smith’s bottom line.27 Damning as this coincidence appears on its own, the true situation remains murky at best. The library had net profits

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 169 from 1876 to 1890 followed by a net profit of £6724.19.9 in January– December 1892 and a profit of £2680.18.6 in January–September 1893 (adjusting the latter figure for a twelve-month period gives an approxi- mate annual profit of £3574.11.4). So, the profits show a good deal of initial stability in the early 1890s, substantially increasing between 1890 and 1892 then halving the following year then culminating in a small loss in the fiscal year ending September 1894. Skipping the partial year accounts of 1893 and comparing the full year accounts of 1892 and 1893–1894 (both prepared under the new proce- dures), it becomes more apparent what factors contributed most to the library’s losses. First, W. H. Smith spent £23,787.10.5 on purchases of new stock in 1892 and £26,699.4.1 on purchases of new stock in October 1893–September 1894, an increase of over £2900. By 1894, according to Wilson, W. H. Smith operated 615 bookstalls, 165 more than in 1880, though it is unclear from the data at what pace Smith added new book- stalls.28 Other expenses only increased by modest amounts during the same period: salaries by about £350, bookstall expenses by about £150, and other costs by about £1500. Thus, Smith’s costs did increase. As we saw in the years 1876–1890, such large increases in purchases of new stock generally either do not occur or do not rise so sharply. The previous large jump in purchases—the £1560 increase between 1882 and 1883— corresponded to lower profits that year. Coincidently, the 1893–1894 accounts witness a repetition of past events. As for receivables, subscrip- tion income increased by about £1500, sales of secondhand books fell by a negligible £38, but other income declined by over £3400 between the 1892 and 1893–1894 accounts. Thus, the net loss in October 1893–September 1894 did not come from flagging secondhand sales which did not decrease by any substan- tial amount. Instead, declines in other incomes must be held to be pri- marily responsible. In particular, the library witnessed large decreases in income from “sundries,” both in the subscription and secondhand book sales categories. Comparatively, the library took in subscription sundries of £2369.6.10 in 1892 and of £1896.4.3 in October 1893–September 1894; and secondhand book sale sundries of £5283.1.6 in 1892 and of £1935.10.2 in October 1893–September 1894. Overall, the income from these two “sundries” categories decreased by £3820.13.11 in two years. Unfortunately, the record does not elaborate on these figures nor offer any explanation of why these sundries categories declined so much. But

[email protected] 170 T. J. BASSETT taken together, with increases in subscription income and stasis in second- hand sales, the large loss in other income erased any hope for a profitable year. Thus, in comparing the accounts from 1892 and October 1893– September 1894, the sudden losses at the end of 1894 after years of reg- ular profits can be primarily attributed to two factors: the increased spend- ing on new library purchases29 and the decreased income from the two “sundries” categories. The income from the sale of secondhand books, though flat, did not contribute significantly to the financial difficulties of the library that year. This is not to say the library benefited from the three-volume novel—by their own admission they did not—only that the accounts themselves do not necessarily support this assertion.30 As Table 4.5 shows, the four years after the ultimatum show the library profits rebounding significantly, averaging nearly £7000 per year from October 1894 to September 1898. In particular, during these four years, the library averaged £25,000 on new stock, increasing steadily from £22,464.17.10 in October 1894–September 1895 to £28,018.6.1 in October 1897–September 1898. At the same time, salaries aver- aged £4300 per year and bookstall expenses averaged £8400 (the lat- ter rose 43.8% over the four years). Income from subscriptions averaged over £37,000 per year, rising significantly from £33,802.10.0 in Octo- ber 1894–September 1895 to £40,818.6.1 in October 1897–September 1898 (a 20.8% increase in subscription income). But most surprisingly, income from the sale of secondhand books jumps remarkably during these four years from £4275.11.1 in October 1894–September 1895 to £9185.18.10 in October 1897–September 1898—an increase of 114.9%. Thus, by the late 1890s, the library department of W. H. Smith was more profitable than ever with healthy growth in subscriptions and steady sales of secondhand stock. Yet, to underscore the place of the library in the overall business, the large library profit of £7719.1.5 in October 1897– September 1898 still only represented 4.9% of W. H. Smith’s total profits of £159,000 that year.31 In assessing the financial health of W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library from their beginning in 1860 to the end of the three-volume novel in 1898, the financial records paint a portrait of a consistently prof- itable enterprise with a few bad (though not disastrous) years. The income from subscriptions continually increased, suggesting a growing subscriber base for the business that necessitated increasing expenses related to pur- chases, salaries, and bookstall expenses. Overall, the library experienced steady growth. In addition, Smith received a consistent income from the

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 171 sale of secondhand books. Many of these profitable years, especially 1876– 1890, correspond to the height of three-volume novel production. Yet the evidence from the accounts does not cast any light on the effect multi- volume fiction in particular had on the bottom line. Coincidentally, in the years 1894–1898, the increased profits of the library correspond to the decline (and end) of the three-volume novel, though that is hardly proof that multi-volume fiction “held back” the library. However, the accounts alone do not establish a causal relationship between the two events. In order to assess the connection between W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscrip- tion Library and the three-volume novel, we now turn to the ultimatum itself.

The Libraries’ Ultimatum of 1894 In the summer of 1894, Mudie’s Select Library and W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library agreed together to reexamine the financial relationship between themselves, the publishers, and their readers. The immediate cause of their prompting is unknown. However, in the case of W. H. Smith, the call may have several causes, including the recent death of W. H. Smith II in 1891, the subsequent valuation of the company due to probate, the desires of the new owner, the decline in library profits from 1892 to 1893, or some combination. The text of the letter dated 27 June 1894 addressed to an unidentified publisher reads:

Dear Sir, For some time past we have noted with concern a great and increasing demand, on the part of the Subscribers to our Library, for Novels in Sets of Two and Three Volumes. To meet their requisitions we are committed to an expenditure much out of proportion to the outlay for other kinds of literature. Most of the novels are ephemeral in their interest, and the few with an enduring character are published in cheap editions so soon after the first issue that the market we formerly had for the disposal of the surplus stock in sets is almost lost. You may conceive that this state of matters very seriously reduces the commercial value of a Subscription Library. We are, therefore, compelled to consider what means can be taken to improve this branch of our business. As a result of our deliberations we would submit for your favourable consideration:

[email protected] 172 T. J. BASSETT

1. That after the 31st December next the price of novels in sets shall not be more than 4/- per volume, less the discount now given, and with the odd copy as before. You will please observe that the date we name for the alteration of terms is fixed at six months from the end of this current month, in order that your arrangements may not be affected by the suggested alterations. 2. In respect to the issue of the cheaper editions and the loss to us of our market for the sale of the best and earlier editions of novels and other works, through their publication in a cheaper form before we have had an opportunity of selling the surplus stock, we propose that you be so good as to undertake that no work appear in a cheaper form from the original price until 12 months after the date of its first publication. Yours faithfully, W. H. Smith and Sons32

A few initial observations about this letter. First, according to W. H. Smith and Sons, subscribers themselves exhibit a “great and increasing demand” for multi-volume novels—a desire somewhat out of keeping with the con- ventional view of the three-volume novel as old fashioned or obsolete. The large number of titles produced in multiple volumes in the 1880s and 1890s seems to corroborate this view (as we saw in Chapter 2). Sec- ond, the impetus for the ultimatum rests squarely on financial consid- erations which can be reduced to two interconnected factors: that the library spends more on multi-volume fiction than other types of books and that the resale market for used multi-volume fiction suffers due to cheap reprints (especially the timing of their appearance). And third, in calling for lower prices on multi-volume fiction and longer delays in reprinting from the publishers, the libraries do not consider or offer to raise their subscription rates which remained fixed at one guinea per year for both Mudie’s and W. H. Smith, as it had been since their begin- nings.33 Effectively, their demands squarely place the blame of their finan- cial struggles on the shoulders of the publishers who supply the books rather than on their libraries who distribute them or the readers who borrow them. Notably, the libraries do not offer to change their own business practices—instead, they require the publishers to change theirs. But, as we have seen, W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library still remained profitable. Thus, it is worth evaluating each of these claims in more detail. As the accounts and catalogues of W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library show, the number of subscribers continued to grow throughout

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 173 the first three decades of existence. For instance, income from subscrip- tions rose from £25,361.13.11 in 1876 to £32,761.7.8 in 1894, which represents a potential increase of over 7000 subscribers at the lowest rates, many, if not most, of whom we assume desired current fiction. But Smith did not allow subscribers at the two lowest rates to borrow three-volume novels since multi-volume fiction needed to be borrowed in complete sets (unlike at Mudie’s Select Library). His policies in regard to three-volume novels creates a vexing situation: subscribers must pay more, on the one hand, to get a three-volume novel from the Smith’s library, but one set, on the other hand, only serves one subscriber at a time (rather than being divided among three individual subscribers). Thus, if true that subscribers produced a “great and increasing demand” for novels in multiple vol- umes, then Smith’s own subscription policies hindered the meeting of that demand at his library. This may explain the prevalence of one-volume reprints in W. H. Smith and Son’s catalogues: besides potentially saving on shipping to the country bookstalls, single volumes of current fiction could serve subscribers at the lower rates. Clearly, as the Bentley records show, multi-volume fiction often cost the libraries 14s–16s per set even with discounts. So, book for book, multi-volume fiction was by necessity more expensive to stock. Smith mitigated these costs in two ways. First, he generally bought fewer sets, maybe 50 or less, of each ordinary title.34 Thereby, he did not sink too much money in expensive books that may only circulate for a short time. In fact, if a report in the Bookman can be believed, both libraries had been further curtailing their purchases of multi-volume fiction in the years lead- ing up to the ultimatum.35 Also, as the 1885 catalogue shows, Smith sold the used three-volume novel when the cheap reprints became available, as the case of Braddon’s titles illustrate. On the surface, this appears to be a losing deal. However, take a hypothetical example: Smith buys a copy of a three-volume novel for 15s (a rather standard price), circulates the set for nine months “earning” up to 22s 6d in subscriptions,36 sells the used copy for 9s, and buys a one-volume reprint for under 6s. In this example, Smith makes about 10s 6d if the set circulates every day for nine months and breaks even if the set circulates every day for five months (ignor- ing the fraction of the costs associated with its storage and shipping). Moving forward, Smith has a book cheaper to store and ship. However, in practical terms, the hypothetical example suffers from over-optimistic assumptions, namely, the book circulates uninterruptedly (a fate usually limited to only the most popular titles) and sells after nine months (even

[email protected] 174 T. J. BASSETT competing with a cheap reprint). A failure in either seriously limits the potential income. In this context, the demands W. H. Smith makes an attempt to shore up his potential income stream from a three-volume novel at each point in its lifetime. First, the initial outlay would be 20% less expensive (i.e., 15s per set to 12s per set) thereby saving money upfront for the libraries. Second, the twelve-month delay in a cheap reprint would nearly guar- antee the libraries a one-year monopoly on a new three-volume novel title which would presumably extend the circulation of the title and its income making possibilities. Under the current system, the monopoly on new titles is variable: perversely, the monopoly is shorter for the most popular titles, the very titles of which the libraries buy the most sets and hope to circulate the longest, since publishers have an incentive to capi- talize on its popularity with a cheap reprint. Unpopular titles do not get reprints but rarely circulate for long. Third, the 12-month delay in a cheap reprint aims to create a window where the libraries can sell off stock with- out competition from a cheap reprint, say in month ten or eleven of the title’s lifetime, before the cheap reprints appear in month twelve. Thus, so much of the ultimatum focuses on the timing of the cheap reprints due to their influence on both circulation and resale incomes. Eliot’s article “The Three-Decker Novel and its First Cheap Reprint, 1862–94” (1985) was the first to examine in detail the rationale for the libraries’ demand about delaying cheap reprints.37 In it, he surveys the reprinting history of a handful of popular authors, in particular Braddon, Wood, Ouida, Trollope, and Besant, and finds a high degree of variability in both the price and timing of the first reprint after the three-volume edition. For instance, the first cheap reprints in Eliot’s survey ranged in price from 2s to 6s, with 3s 6d being a fairly common price. In addi- tion, reprinting a three-volume title within one year—sometimes within a few months—appears quite common among these popular authors and among nearly all publishers. Given these examples, Eliot concludes, “By the late eighties, with twenty-five years of substantial precedents behind it, premature issue of cheap reprints had become commonplace.”38 Yet, he ends with the same question as he started: if the rapid appearance of cheap reprints hurt the library business, then what was suddenly different about the 1890s? Given the long history of these publishers’ practices, what remains a mystery, however, is why the libraries waited so long to complain loudly enough to effect change? The reprinting practices of publisher Bentley

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 175 may suggest a rationale. As we saw in Chapter 3, Bentley only reprinted 16 of 66 three-volume titles (24.2%) from 1865 to 1870, but nine of which appeared within a year, the very practice decried by the libraries thirty years later. In 1885, Bentley reprinted 4 of 17 three-volume titles (23.5%), only one appeared within a year; in 1890, Bentley reprinted 7 of 18 three-volume titles (38.9%), three of which appeared within a year. Bentley, then, seems to confirm Eliot’s observations of rapid reprinting being a prevalent practice as early as the 1860s. But using At the Circu- lating Library, more accurate statistics can be generated to examine the practice of cheap reprinting of three-volume fiction. Table 4.6 gives the reprinting rates of ten sample years between 1870 and 1893, the years of peak multi-volume fiction production. Each three-volume title published was checked in The English Catalogue of Books and the Publishers’ Cir- cular to determine: first, if the title was ever reprinted in the nineteenth century; and second, if reprinted, when the first reprint appeared. Overall, the data show an increasing number of three-volume titles being reprinted over the course of twenty-five years: publishers reprinted fewer than 40% of three-volume fiction titles before 1880 whereas they reprinted more than half of titles after 1885. In particular, the late 1880s and early 1890s witnessed both an increase in the number of three-volume fiction titles published and also an increase in the number of them subsequently

Table 4.6 One-volume reprints of three-volume novels, 1870–1893

Year Number of Number of Number of % of titles %of Earliest three-volume titles titles reprinted reprinted reprint novel titles reprinted reprinted titles published within after reprinted 12 months 12 months within 12 months

1870 91 9 14 25.3 39.1 6 months 1873 114 18 23 36.0 43.9 5 months 1875 134 17 26 32.1 39.5 2 months 1878 119 18 26 37.0 40.9 3 months 1880 145 24 34 40.0 41.4 3 months 1883 159 42 38 50.3 52.5 3 months 1885 135 30 27 42.2 52.6 2 months 1888 104 23 31 51.9 42.6 1 month 1890 120 43 23 55.0 65.2 3 months 1893 133 52 16 51.1 76.5 2 months

[email protected] 176 T. J. BASSETT reprinted. Of the three-volume titles reprinted, relatively few appeared within one year of the expensive first edition in the 1870s: for instance, of the 134 three-volume titles published in 1875, 17 titles were reprinted within one year (39.5%) and 26 after one year (60.5%). In the 1880s, the situation shifted dramatically, with more reprints appearing with a year: for instance, in 1885, 30 three-volume titles were reprinted within one year (52.6%) and 27 titles after one year (47.4%). In the 1890s, the situation became even more pronounced: of the 120 three-volume titles published in 1890, 43 titles were reprinted within one year (65.2% of titles reprinted that year) and of the 133 three-volume titles published in 1893, 52 titles were reprinted within one year (76.5% of titles reprinted that year). So, yes, as Eliot observed, rapid reprinting was commonly done. However, what began as the exception largely became the rule by the 1890s. Between 1870 and 1893, more and more three-volume titles were being reprinted with over half of three-volume titles enjoying a second cheaper edition by the 1890s. But of those titles reprinted, more and more were reprinted within a year with over two-thirds of reprints appear- ing less than twelve months after the more expensive edition. Therein lies the answer to the mystery. In the 1870s, only around a third of three- volume titles were reprinted, fewer than half of which appeared within a year. The libraries may not have enjoyed this situation, but they could tol- erate it since the titles affected composed a small minority of titles, albeit the most popular. And possibly, maybe the large popularity of a Braddon or Ouida title could partially mitigate any potential loss in income from a cheap reprint six months after the expensive edition since subscribers still desired to read them through the library rather than purchase. But in the 1890s, the situation changed dramatically: a three-volume title being reprinted within a year was no longer a relative rarity but the new norm, with reprints coming as early as one or two months. Libraries no longer saw the most popular authors being rapidly reprinted, but the second- and third-tier authors as well. This, it seems, the libraries could no longer tolerate. In fact, W. H. Smith may have inadvertently encouraged cheap reprints since, as his extant catalogues show, he regularly replaced three- volume editions with one-volume editions when available. As this chapter shows, it is easy to argue that W. H. Smith never wanted three-volume novels in the first place given the parameters of his business (e.g., additional shipping costs). But in fact, the three-volume novel was already well established when his library business began, so it was a nec- essary format with which to deal if he hoped to succeed. In this regard,

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 177

W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library needed to follow Mudie’s Select Library’s lead. But by the late 1880s and early 1890s, multi-volume fiction became a smaller and smaller segment of the fiction marketplace, less than 20% of all new fiction titles. The rapid reprinting of three-volume novels in cheap editions only highlighted the artificiality—in both price and size—of the typical “library novel.” In spite of consistent library prof- its up to the time of the ultimatum, from the point of view of W. H. Smith and Son, the ultimatum must have been meant as an untenable set of demands to publishers to end the format.

Coda: Reactions to the Libraries’ Ultimatum The Publishers’ Circular published the letters from Mudie and W. H. Smith and Son in its 7 July 1894 issue. Over the next few months, reac- tions to the ultimatum came from various quarters. First, the Society of Authors, at a meeting of their council in July 1894, resolved “after tak- ing the opinions of several prominent novelists and other members of the society, and finding them almost unanimously opposed to the continu- ance of the three-volume system, considers that the disadvantages of that system to authors and to the public far outweigh its advantages; that for the convenience of the public, as well as for the widest possible circula- tion of a novel, it is desirable that the artificial form of edition produced for a small body of readers only be now abandoned; and that the whole of the reading public should be placed at the outset in possession of the work at a moderate price.”39 As the Times reports, a large majority of its council supported the resolution with only one unidentified novel- ist voting against. A leader in the Times a day later castigated the Soci- ety of Authors for telling publishers and libraries how to conduct their businesses.40 The leader writer gives a mild defense of the three-volume novel: as a product designed for the libraries, “one of its beauties is that it enables us to keep our shelves moderately clear of ephemeral literature. The imagination is appalled at the thought of what would be the result if the Society of Authors induced the public to buy their novels outright. The purchases of a few years would accumulate to such an extent that only an annual holocaust would save the library from becoming a dis- mal museum of books which no one would ever wish to read twice.” H. Rider Haggard, in a letter to the Times editor, ridicules this view and defends the inexpensive one-volume format, arguing “It is, therefore, to the advantage and wishes of the book buyer—not to those of the book

[email protected] 178 T. J. BASSETT borrower—that the author should look, and doubtless the book buyer is best served by the primary production of a novel at a nominal price.”41 As this exchange illustrates, authors, libraries, publishers, and readers held divergent views on the continuation of the three-volume novel. Most press commentators on the debate supported the end of the three-volume novel as a format, with reactions ranging from gleeful to resigned. A sardonic poem “The Old Three-Decker” by (who never attempted a three-volume novel himself) appeared in the Sat- urday Review:

Full thirty foot she towered from waterline to rail— It cost a watch to steer her and a week to shorten sail; But, spite all modern notions, I found her first and best— The only certain packet for the Islands of the Blest.42 and continues for another twelve quatrains. Like the ship described in the poem, the three-volume novel format deserved a dignified and overdue retirement. Kipling like many other members of the Society of Authors council such as Haggard and Anthony Hope saw little reason to continue a form from which they personally did not gain much benefit.43 Few publishers, in total, agreed to the libraries’ conditions. Most abandoned the format. One in particular, Sampson Low, heralded the publication of R. D. Blackmore’s Perlycross in one-volume at 6s as “The new departure in publishing novels.”44 Fewer people defended the multi-volume fiction format. Arthur Quiller-Couch (better known as “Q”) defended the long-form story which the three-volume novel afforded but qualifies: “No doubt the tradi- tion of three volumes has been partly responsible for thousands of foolish and inartistic novels. But… it is rash to lay much blame on the system” itself.45 A week later, the Saturday Review noted “several advantages” of the three-volume novel:

A volume of an ordinary three-volume novel is, physically speaking, incomparably the pleasantest thing to read that human ingenuity has yet invented. It is light to hold; the print is large and well placed; the paper, generally speaking, is extremely good, and the novel-reader, in fact, reads in the upmost luxury. Reviewers, who have to read much, well know the

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 179

difference in comfort between reading a novel in three volumes and read- ing the same novel in one, and the reader who reads for pleasure will instantly recognise it, too, if he thinks of it. And then comes, perhaps, the crowning luxury of all. When you have read the book somebody comes and fetches it away, and you need never see it again.46

The physical nature of the book, as a material object, deserved praise though the contents themselves received less comment. As this reviewer and the Times leader writer observed, the three-volume novel best served “ephemeral” literature, books read and forgotten and impractical to pur- chase. This latter view seemed to be the only real defense of the format: as one commentator put it, “the British public, with all its many exceptional virtues, is not a book-buying public. It devours fiction, but it cannot bear to pay a fair price for it.”47 The three-volume novel, for all its other faults they argued, enabled readers the luxury of not owning books. “People have become used to reading their books in this form,” as the Bookman added.48 That in itself seemed enough reason to continue the format. Finally, no one offered the libraries much sympathy in the debate. Though by their own admissions, the libraries were losing money—the Bookman reports “We know of one not insignificant concern of the kind where there was actually last year a considerable deficiency”49—most viewed the libraries as being hoist with their own petard as both the chief supporter and beneficiary of the three-volume system in the past. A paragraph in the Speaker chides, “Upon what pretext these wealthy and flourishing trading concerns are thus trying to increase their profits at the expense of authors and publishers, we do not pretend to know.”50 It casts the libraries as completely self-serving: first by profiting for years upon the three-volume novel system and now by trying to increase their profits at the expense of other players in the system. Later in the month, they continue this attack: both Mudie and Smith “are prosperous, both derive very large annual profits from the business they conduct. But, like meaner mortals, the Smiths and the Mudies are anxious that much should become more; and with a view to increasing their dividends they recently addressed a rather impertinent circular to the London publishers.”51 As Smith’s accounts show, this was largely true. Thus, the three-volume novel began its slow fade into history.

[email protected] 180 T. J. BASSETT

Notes

1. The records of Mudie’s Select Library, unfortunately, do not survive. Dozens, perhaps even hundreds, of other smaller circulating libraries existed in England during the nineteenth century. However, like Mudie’s, their records do not survive either. 2. Robin Alston, Library History Database. Unfortunately, since his death in 2013, the database has yet to find a new digital home. Comparatively speaking, until the twentieth century, public libraries spread unevenly through Great Britain and Ireland—see Alistair Black and Peter Hoare’s The Cambridge History of Libraries in Britain and Ireland, volume 3: (1850–2000) (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2006). 3. Lee Erickson in The Economy of Literary Form (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1996) bases his argument of the popularity of Romantic poetry over the novel based on these economic factors. 4. For more on the history of Mudie and his library, see Griest’s Mudie’s Circulating Library and the Victorian Novel (Bloomington: Indiana Uni- versity Press, 1970) and Finklestein’s “‘The Secret’: British Publishers and Mudie’s Struggle for Economic Survival 1861–64,” Publishing History 34 (1993), pp. 21–50. 5. According to a paragraph in the Publishers’ Circular (9 December 1893, p. 285), Iredale’s Library boasted 50,000 volumes and issued 400 books per day during the season. 6. This, admittedly eclectic, sample of libraries comes from an examination of existing library labels on a few dozen Victorian novels in the author’s possession. 7. Griest, op. cit., pp. 22–23 and Charles Wilson, First with the News: The History of W. H. Smith 1792–1972 (New York: Doubleday, 1986), pp. 355–73. 8. “‘A Larger Outlay Than Any Return’: The Library of W. H. Smith and Son, 1860–1873,” Publishing History 54 (2003), pp. 67–69. 9. Mudie would go to establish another branch in Manchester. 10. P. 192. The advertisements ran in several periodicals throughout the Vic- torian period and rarely varied in prices or rules. 11. P. 5. As with Smith’s advertisement, Mudie’s advertisements ran in several periodicals throughout the Victorian period and rarely varied in prices or rules. 12. The existing catalogues are housed in the John Johnson Collection, Bodleian Library, Oxford University (for 1872), Archive and Special Col- lections, University of Regina (for 1885), and Special Collections, Univer- sity of Leeds (for 1890). Only the 1885 catalogue was accessible to the author.

[email protected] 4 BUYING, RENTING, AND SELLING THE MULTI-VOLUME NOVEL … 181

13. “Fiction and Non-fiction: One- and Three-Volume Novels in Some Mudie Catalogues, 1857–94,” Publishing History 66 (2009), pp. 31–47. Profes- sor Eliot kindly shared additional unpublished data with the author. 14. Eliot, ibid., p. 41. 15. See Eliot, “Bookselling by the Backdoor: Circulating Libraries, Booksellers and Book Clubs 1876–1966,” in A Genius for Letters (New Castle, DE: Oak Knoll Press, 2005), p. 158 and Colclough, op. cit., p. 77. 16. Colclough, ibid., p. 80. Also, “Library Accounts, 1860–67,” WHS A102, W. H. Smith Archive, Special Collections, University of Reading. 17. Colclough, ibid., pp. 80–81. Debt carried over from the previous year contributed to current year expenses. Without accounting for this pre- existing debt, the library operation itself began turning profits earlier in 1863. 18. Colclough, ibid., p. 86. 19. Colclough, ibid., pp. 87–88. As Colclough points out, records for the late 1860s to early 1870s do not survive. 20. Colclough, ibid., p. 89. 21. Wilson, op. cit., p. 182. 22. Clearly, the relative proportion of purchases going to fiction versus non- fiction could have changed, but there is no evidence to assess this. 23. W. H. Smith Archive, Special Collections, University of Reading. 24. Wilson, op. cit., p. 182. 25. Some sales catalogues exist for W. H. Smith’s library which give author, title, and price information. However, there is no way to know if the advertised books sold or not. 26. As the accounts now record, the firm was Chatteris, Nichols and Co., Chartered Accountants, of 1, Queen Victoria Street, London. They remain the company’s accountants into the twentieth century. 27. See “Bookselling by the Backdoor,” p. 160. 28. Wilson, op. cit., p. 182. 29. The early 1890s saw a small increase in the number of multi-volume fiction titles produced. It is hard to see that as a cause for the substantially larger outlay on new stock. 30. The biggest difficulty, of course, is the changes in accounting practices between the 1880s and 1890s. To what extent were the new chartered accountants more exacting or accurate or independent? 31. Wilson, op. cit., p. 450. 32. W. H. Smith Archive, Special Collections, University of Reading. Both Mudie’s and Smith’s letters were published in the Publishers’ Circular (7 July 1894) and quoted in Griest, op. cit., pp. 171–72. 33. Over time, the subscription rates and the cost of books became relatively more affordable. According to the retail price index, one pound in 1860 had declined in value to 16s 6d in 1894, a decrease of 17.5% in relative retail value (MeasuringWorth.com).

[email protected] 182 T. J. BASSETT

34. For instance, recall, of Hardy’s Desperate Remedies (1872), Mudie bought 50 copies and Smith 42 copies. 35. “News Notes,” Bookman 35 (August 1894), p. 133. 36. The 42s annual rate is the lowest that allows for the borrowing of a three-volume novel. In London, at this rate, a subscriber could borrow four volumes, so a circulating volume “earns” about 1/3d per day in subscriptions. Over nine months, a circulating three-volume novel would earn 22s 6d at a penny per day. 37. Library 7 (1985), pp. 38–53. 38. Ibid., p. 51. 39. “The Three-Volume Novel,” Times (24 July 1894), p. 10. 40. “A Once Meek and Downtrodden Race,” Times (25 July 1894), p. 10. 41. “The Three-Volume Novel,” Times (27 July 1894), p. 11. 42. “The Old Three-Decker,” Saturday Review (14 July 1894), p. 44. 43. In his account of the end of the three-volume novel, Richard Menke gives a wonderful reading of Kipling’s poem, written with “a typical combina- tion of wry acceptance and unnerving percipience.” See “The End of the Three-Volume Novel System, 27 June 1894,” in BRANCH: Britain, Rep- resentation and Nineteenth-Century History, ed. Dino Franco Felluga. 44. Advertisement for Sampson Low, Athenaeum (1 September 1894), p. 300. 45. Arthur Quiller-Couch, “A Literary Causerie,” Speaker (21 July 1894), p. 77. 46. “The Three-Decker,” Saturday Review (28 July 1894), p. 93. 47. “The Fate of Three Volumes,” Speaker (28 July 1894), p. 98. 48. “News Notes,” Bookman 35 (August 1894), p. 134. 49. Ibid. 50. “Literature, Science, Etc.” Speaker (7 July 1894), p. 3. 51. “The Fate of Three Volumes,” Speaker (28 July 1894), p. 97.

[email protected] CHAPTER 5

De-monopolizing Literary Space: Alternatives to the Three-Volume Novel

When the libraries and publishers all but abandoned the multi-volume format for new fiction in 1894, they did not have to cast about long for a replacement since a commercially viable alternative always already existed in the one-volume novel priced somewhere between two and six shillings. As this chapter will show, the 6s one-volume novel as a format for new fiction developed unevenly in the 1880s and 1890s as the potential replacement for expensive editions but it did eventually prove itself as an economically viable means of selling new fiction. This is not to say new fiction never appeared in inexpensive one-volume editions, but such books generally occupied a place of lower prestige if not lower economic value in the literary marketplace such as juvenile (e.g., young adult) fiction, religious fiction, sentimental tales, and shilling shockers. (And libraries themselves, as shown by their catalogues, did buy some copies of these new one-volume titles.) In contrast, the multi-volume novel occu- pied a position combining both high cultural prestige and middle-class economic value in the Victorian literary marketplace. For all its faults and detractors, no other format offered a serious challenge to its cultural dom- inance until the 1880s when some authors and publishers began to make inroads against the cultural and economic strength of the library novel. Since the 1830s, Bentley and other publishers sold reprints of multi- volume titles in well-made octavo editions priced at 6s or below. These cheap reprints—“cheap” only in comparison with three-deckers—proved many middle-class readers would buy fiction at these prices; however,

© The Author(s) 2020 183 T. J. Bassett, The Rise and Fall of the Victorian Three-Volume Novel, New Directions in Book History, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-030-31926-7_5

[email protected] 184 T. J. BASSETT publishers never saw this marketplace success as a reason to abandon multi-volume editions for several reasons. First, as Chapter 3 well shows, major publishers such as Bentley consistently found the multi-volume novel a safe, profitable format where, at worst, titles paid for them- selves. In publishing, then as now, such financial safety would be hard to give up.1 Second, publishers viewed cheap reprints (and serializations) as an adjunct to the multi-volume novel rather than a replacement or rival (though the libraries themselves often did view these cheap reprints as rivals to their second-hand sales). The success or failure of a multi- volume edition with the libraries often determined the decision to issue a reprint; hence, the risk involved with the publication of a cheap reprint of a proven title was considerably less than the publication in one volume of an unproven title. For much of the nineteenth century, most publishers valued such steady-selling titles—e.g., the cheap reprints of Ellen Wood’s or Mary Elizabeth Braddon’s novels—over the gamble of a potential best seller. Hence, the smaller clientele of the circulating libraries served as the testing ground for fiction rather than the reading public at large. How- ever, as the data on reprints in Chapter 4 show, publishers did eventually attempt to have the best of both systems. As the rate at which multi- volume titles were reprinted increased and the time delay between the multi-volume editions and their one-volume reprints decreased, the lit- erary marketplace for new fiction was already approaching the modern system based on mass sales of modestly priced books. For instance, when Chatto & Windus published Frank Barrett’s sensational novel Between Life and Death in three volumes priced 31s 6d in February 1891 and in one volume priced 2s in June (less than four months later), the publisher clearly was trying to immediately capitalize on the title’s popularity rather than wait for potentially slower sales later that year or next. Arguably, Chatto & Windus could have bypassed the three-volume edition alto- gether since Barrett had already proved himself a popular author but such was the gravitational pull of the library edition both culturally and financially that the more expensive edition seemed desirable and necessary before a one-volume edition. In fact, as we have seen, Chatto & Windus themselves continued to publish multi-volume fiction several years after their publishing peers gave it up. In order for the one-volume format for new fiction to establish itself, several entrenched attitudes needed to be re-evaluated and altered by authors, publishers, and readers alike. First, authors needed some assur- ance that the one-volume novel offered similar financial and critical

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 185 returns as the three-volume novel. As Robert Louis Stevenson relates in his essay for My First Book (1894), he believed a novelist needed to write a triple-decker not a “boys’ book” in order to make a reputation (if not a living) in fiction, an attitude shared by many of his peers.2 As George Gissing called it, the “Procrustean system” of the library novel set the standard for fiction aimed at a middle-class audience to which all would-be authors needed to adhere.3 The one-volume novel only gained prestige through the often concerted work of authors, critics, editors, publishers, readers, and reviewers who made the literary case for titles appearing in one volume and denigrated the quality of titles aimed at the library audience. Much of this shift in attitude, as we shall see, rested on gendered arguments which presented the library novel as feminine and infantile in contrast to the new format as masculine and adult. Second, if library editions were to be avoided, publishers needed to develop ways to market and sell new fiction—especially titles by unfamiliar or unknown authors—directly to readers. Many individuals in and around the publish- ing world felt England’s readers were not book buyers, preferring to rent and return books to circulating libraries. Or, if readers did buy books, they only bought “classics” or books of proven or lasting quality, such as the cheap reprints.4 Whether this belief about readers had merit or not, few established publishers wished to test readers’ proclivity to buy new fiction priced at 6s or less. However, by the 1880s, newly established publish- ers such as J. W. Arrowsmith, John Lane, T. Fisher Unwin, and Henry Vizetelly made significant progress in the literary marketplace selling new fiction in inexpensive one-volume editions directly to readers. As smaller publishers, they generally shared a more entrepreneurial spirit and inde- pendence from the circulating library system than their more established peers who had a vested financial interest in maintaining the status quo.5 In particular, these four publishers pioneered the publisher’s series as a means of marketing new fiction to readers, an idea imitated by a dozen or more publishers who collectively produced scores of series during the last two decades of the nineteenth century. The sections that follow examine three moments which illustrate the rise of the one-volume novel in direct opposition to the three-volume novel: the publication of Stevenson’s Treasure Island and the rise of the “New Romance”; the anti-censorship crusade of George Moore and the debate over literary censorship; and the development of series publication by Arrowsmith and Unwin. This discussion is not meant to be a compre- hensive history of the rise of the one-volume format for new fiction but

[email protected] 186 T. J. BASSETT rather is meant to show how the attitudes toward the competing formats shifted to create a new advantageous position in opposition to the library novel in the literary field.

Robert Louis Stevenson and the New Romance

In the late 1880s, a literary debate about the relative merits of realism and romance took place in the periodical press instigated by the publication of Stevenson’s boys’ book Treasure Island (1883) and its imitators such as H. Rider Haggard’s King Solomon’s Mines (1885). A number of schol- ars have examined this debate from various critical perspectives,6 but few have explicitly connected the two genres to their distinctive publishing formats where novels of everyday life (“realism”) generally appeared in expensive three-volume editions for library readers and novels of adven- ture (“romance”) generally appeared in inexpensive one-volume editions for purchase. As we shall see, the publication of Stevenson’s fiction and his imitators served as a means for creating a new position in the liter- ary field both independent from and opposed to the circulating library system. Early in his career, Stevenson struggled to find a place in the profes- sion of letters. By 1881, he was a writer of some rising reputation: he had published articles in Cornhill Magazine (where he received the attention and patronage of Leslie Stephen), Macmillan’s Magazine,theNew Quar- terly Review,andTemple Bar; he had reviewed books and plays for the Academy; he had contributed short fiction to Cornhill and London7;he had written two travel books, An Inland Voyage (1878) and Travels with aDonkey(1879); and he had co-written a play, Deacon Brodie (privately printed 1880), with W. E. Henley. Another book, the essay collection Virginibus Puerisque, would be published later in 1880. Besides Stephen, an established editor, and Henley, a rising editor, Stevenson maintained friendships with a number of other important literary men in addition to joining a number of literary and social clubs. His friends appreciated the aesthetic nature of Stevenson’s work in ways that his father, Thomas Stevenson, did not. Stevenson’s father had encouraged his son to take up a profession like engineering or law (Louis was called to the bar but never practiced), and he took a dim view of his son’s ultimate choice of a literary career. But despite Stevenson’s improving literary reputation, his work was not financially successful. Whereas Henley supported himself by working

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 187 as an editor and journalist, Stevenson lived on money received from his father plus whatever little he made from his writing.8 This should have been enough to live on, “[i]f not so luxuriously as by other trades, then less luxuriously,” but the previous year, he had married the American divorcée, Fanny Osbourne.9 Along with her son Lloyd, they lived with the Stevenson family in Scotland before journeying to Davos, Switzerland, for Stevenson’s health. Stevenson’s health, always precarious, required much travel and many doctors. Added to these expenses, Stevenson and his new wife had difficulty controlling their expenses in London or Davos.10 Stevenson’s letters, filled with lists of expenses, requests for money to meet them (usually to his parents), and thank-you notes for checks, indicate a real anxiety about finances. Added to this anxiety, Stevenson suffered a severe writing block (partly mental and partly physical), so writing itself could provide no relief to their financial woes. By 1880, Stevenson had received less than £300 for all his works after a decade of authorship. All through the end of 1880 and into 1881, in Switzerland and later in Scotland, Stevenson cast about for some literary project: first, a book of Scottish history (planned, but never commenced); second, a scholarly study of Theophrastus’s Characters (suggested by fellow Davos inmate John Addington Symonds but never seriously undertaken); third, a book on the French Calvinist Camisards (planned but never commenced); and finally, a series of horror tales resulting in the stories “Thrawn Janet” and “The Merry Men.” Of these proposed and completed projects, only the last had any real chance of earning any money. The idea of writing more commercial works had crossed Stevenson’s mind earlier in his career: in addition to the idea of co-writing plays with Henley (who, unlike Steven- son, put a lot of faith in their potential for the London stage and hence money-making potential), Stevenson considered the novel. “Sooner or later,” Stevenson writes in later life, “somehow, anyhow, I was bound to write a novel,” but all of his attempts, from age fifteen to thirty-one, ended in failure.11 He continues,

By that time, I had written little books and little essays and short stories; and had got patted on the back and paid for them—though not enough to live upon. I had quite a reputation, I was the successful man; I passed my days in toil, the futility of which would sometimes make my cheek to burn—that I should spend a man’s energy upon this business, and yet could not earn a livelihood… (192–93)

[email protected] 188 T. J. BASSETT

Despite his reputation and critical success in the literary field, Steven- son still felt embarrassment in financial unsuccess in “this business.” Not surprisingly, Stevenson aimed at writing a three-volume novel due to its commercial and critical potential, but “it is the length that kills”—“I remember I used to look, in those days, upon every three-volume novel with a sort of veneration, as a feat—not possibly of literature—but at least of physical and moral endurance and the courage of Ajax” (193). Stevenson’s anxiety to write a three-volume novel represents the power- ful attractions of this mode of literary production to an up and coming author wishing to establish or extend his or her career. However determined, he was not to write a three-volume novel; instead, he would write a serial for a children’s magazine. The genesis of Treasure Island is quickly told: during a playtime with his step-son Lloyd in August 1881, Stevenson painted a map of an island “elaborately and ([he] thought) beautifully coloured; the shape of it took [his] fancy beyond expression; it contained harbours that pleased [him] like son- nets; and with the unconsciousness of the predestined, [he] ticketed [his] performance ‘Treasure Island.’”12 From this start, Stevenson produced a story around the map, writing a chapter each morning and reading the result each evening to his family audience of Lloyd, his wife, his par- ents, and anyone else visiting the house. One of these visitors, Alexander Hay Japp, offered to bring the early chapters to his friend James Hen- derson, the editor of Young Folks, who immediately agreed to run the novel as a serial in his magazine for £100. Treasure Island ran weekly from 1 October 1881 to 28 January 1882, under the pseudonym “Cap- tain George North.”13 Because Stevenson wished to retain the copyright of his work, he agreed to be paid on a column rate; hence, the completed serial brought only £34 7s. 6d., much lower than the anticipated £100, but still well remunerated for this type of literary work. The serial received a lukewarm reception from the readers of Young Folks.14 But the more important reaction was that of Stevenson’s literary friends in London: when the reports reached Stevenson of their scornful reactions, he replied angrily to Henley (March 1882):

To those who ask me (as you say they do) to do nothing but refined, high toned, bejay, bedam masterpieces, I will offer the following bargain: I agree to their proposal, if they give me £1000 a year, at which I value mon possible, and at the same time effect such a change in my nature that I shall be content to take it from them instead of earning it. If they cannot

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 189

manage these two trifling matters, by God, I’ll trouble them to hold their tongues and shut their jaw, by God. That kind of business commences to tickle me the wrong way. I will swallow no more of that gruel. Let them write their dam masterpieces for themselves, and let me alone. I don’t want to hear more of such effeminate, unjust, cultchaw, filthy, pragmatical, affected snot—and so you may inform the crew.15

Seemingly, the choice of writing a serial for a children’s magazine was swerving dangerously close to hackdom and threatened to dam- age Stevenson’s reputation with “the crew” of literary men in London. Stevenson’s bargain—masterpieces for £1000 a year—exposes two com- peting anxieties. On the one hand, the reaction of “the crew” angers Stevenson because of its expectation that Stevenson writes only master- pieces—works that have literary value in his narrow circle, but that do not have the commensurate economic value. On the other hand, Stevenson wants to earn a living from his profession—a professional goal of Steven- son’s—yet, at the time of the letter, Stevenson’s father was still largely subsidizing his son’s career. Closer to home, Stevenson’s wife, Fanny, also had her concerns about the work: “I don’t [like Treasure Island]. I liked the beginning, but after that the life seemed to go out of it, and it became tedious. Louis wants to publish it in book-form, under his own name, in order to get a better price for it. I am very noble about it, and don’t like Louis’ name to go before the public with any but the best work.”16 In spite of her and her husband’s spendthrift ways, she herself was still more concerned about Stevenson’s literary reputation than his income. The concerns of Fanny and “the crew” had some justification. In the 1860s, boys’ books had become a notable segment of publishing, best represented by the prolific author R. M. Ballantyne who wrote some sixty titles such as The Coral Island: A Tale of the Pacific Ocean (1858) and The Gorilla Hunters: A Tale of the Wild of Africa (1861).17 In the next decade, G. A. Henty also made a career with boys’ books beginning with Out on the Pampas (1870) and The Young Franc-Tireurs (1871), even- tually specializing in historical tales aimed at adolescent readers. As these titles make obvious, this type of fiction combined adventure, exotic set- tings, and masculine ethos. But as fiction aimed at a juvenile audience, these works often featured formulaic plots, stereotypical characters, and direct prose.18 A handful of publishers, such as Blackie, Nelson and Son, and James Nisbet, successfully specialized in works aimed a juvenile audi- ence where such books often served as gifts or school prizes with visually

[email protected] 190 T. J. BASSETT distinctive bright covers and illustrations. But the literary and financial value of such work for authors rarely reached the levels attained by fiction aimed at middle-class adult readers: the leading reviews and monthly mag- azines ignored or cursorily noticed such works, often judging them on moralistic rather than literary grounds (i.e., whether the book was appro- priate for young readers). That Stevenson would seemingly align himself with this type of literary production for mercenary reasons (at least on the surface) would fly in the face of all those who took an interest in his career as a serious writer. Nearly two years later, after being lightly revised by Stevenson, Trea- sure Island appeared as a 5s one-volume novel published by Cassell in November 1883. Henley, a one-time Cassell editor, convinced the pub- lisher to take Stevenson’s novel for which Cassell paid £100 against a 10% royalty, a generous offer, and a sum Stevenson enthused over.19 Accord- ing to David Angus, Stevenson deliberately changed the text to appeal to an older audience, including a prefatory poem “To the Hesitating Pur- chaser,” and the changes subtly affected its reception.20 Though the serial version had been a literary embarrassment, the one-volume version had the opposite effect mainly due to the concerted efforts of Henley who took it upon himself to push the novel as a serious, adult book. Many of the reviewers, marshaled by Henley himself, rallied behind the book: “[Andrew] Lang is after it for the [Pall Mall Gazette]; I for the [Saturday Review]; a friend for the ‘Academy’; [James] Runciman for the ‘Stan- dard’. I think it will hit.”21 Uninfluenced by Henley, The Athenaeum reviewed Treasure Island along with other juvenile titles, including Hen- ty’s By Sheer Pluck and John C. Hutcheson’s Picked Up at Sea, together as “Christmas Books” clearly making no significant distinction between the titles.22 (The title “Christmas Books” in the reviews was often used to denote juvenile or children’s books as opposed to the reviews of adult fare taken individually or collectively as “New Novels.”) But the reviews organized by Henley worked to differentiate Stevenson’s novel from those of Ballantyne, Henty, and Hutcheson. Under “Gift-Books,” The Academy reviewed Treasure Island with nearly a whole column where another dozen other titles, including Henty’s With Clive in India,were given much more cursory notice.23 The reviewer, one of Henley’s friends according to his letter, points out that Stevenson’s novel “is calculated to fascinate the old boy as well as the young,” an observation that the other

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 191

Henley-organized reviews echo. Henley’s review of the novel in The Sat- urday Review garners individual attention among other reviews of a his- tory of Troy, a history of oak woodworking, and a historical three-volume novel by Lewis Wingfield and argues that

Primarily it is a book for boys, with a boy-hero and a string of wonderful adventures. But it is a book for boys which will be delightful to all grown men who have the sentiment of treasure-hunting and are touched with the true spirit of the Spanish Main.24

Andrew Lang’s review in The Pall Mall Gazette alsoappearsasastand- alone review and makes a similar argument:

A book for boys which can keep hardened and elderly reviewers in a state of pleasing excitement and attention is evidently no common Christmas book…. Certainly he has contributed more to the diversion of one critic than all the serious and laborious novelists of the year have done.25

The cultural work of these reviews intends to elevate Stevenson’s novel above the mass of boys’ books and to encourage adult (male) readers based on the nostalgia for historical and nautical novels by the likes of .26 Tentatively, in Henley’s and Lang’s reviews, Stevenson’s novels occupy a new position in the literary field some- where between boys’ books and novels for adults. The precariousness of this position is noted by Lang himself: he ends his review with “After this romance for boys [Stevenson] must give us a novel for men and women,”27 an acknowledgment that a book like Treasure Island,what- ever its merits, was not to be repeated. The review in the Graphic says much the same thing: “Yet we want no more boys’ books from Mr. Stevenson. We want him to employ his unique gifts in the high- est department of literature now open to him—contemporary fiction” by which the reviewer clearly meant the three-volume novel.28 This concerted effort by Henley and his friends to push Stevenson’s novel clearly worked. It was by far Stevenson’s most financially successful book to date and, with sales remaining steady over time, royalties contin- ued to accrue. By 1886, Treasure Island had sold nearly 12,000 copies.29 Its success prompted Stevenson to repeat the experiment with a string of boys’ books aimed equally at adult readers and Stevenson would never attempt or write a three-volume novel. Likewise, his publisher Cassell

[email protected] 192 T. J. BASSETT developed a successful line of juvenile books on the heels of Treasure Island, utilizing advertising to expand the market for these books beyond juvenile readers.30 Other publishers followed suit: in particular, Longman, who occasionally published multi-volume novels throughout the century, turned to one-volume novels in earnest in the 1880s, publishing works by Stevenson, H. Rider Haggard, and Andrew Lang. Anecdotes abound that Stevenson’s readership extended well beyond boys. For instance, Haggard recounts, “as it happened, I read in one of the weekly papers a notice of Stevenson’s ‘Treasure Island’ so laudatory that I procured and stud- ied that work, and was impelled by its perusal to try to write a book for boys” which turned out to be King Solomon’s Mines (1885).31 Hag- gard’s novel sold 31,000 copies in its first year, and he followed it with a stream of similar books such as She (1887), books much more successful than the two triple-deckers that started his career. Arthur Quiller-Couch (better known under his pseudonym “Q”) likewise recounts, “I had… no thought of [writing a book]. The desire, at least, was awakened by ‘Trea- sure Island’… That is just the truth of it. I began as a pupil and imitator of Mr. Stevenson.”32 Q’s first book was the successful Stevensonian romance Dead Man’s Rock (1887) published by Cassell. The successful romances of Stevenson, Haggard, and Q published by Cassell and Longman con- solidated the position marked out by Treasure Island: critically acclaimed fiction offered in 5s one-volume editions. Few purchasers hesitated to buy these books. Henley’s work to push Stevenson’s novel may be seen as simply a per- sonal intervention on behalf of his friend, one Henley felt obligated to make in order to save Stevenson’s literary reputation. Stevenson himself offered an appreciation of historical and nautical tales of his childhood in his essay “A Gossip on Romance” which appeared in the inaugural issue of Longman’s Magazine (November 1882) a full year before the book edition of Treasure Island.33 His chief criticisms of contemporary fiction—its lack of imagination and incident—anticipate the more strident defense of romance led by Haggard and Lang a few years after the pub- lication of Stevenson’s romances and their imitators.34 Their arguments share a common logic: the new romance stands in marked opposition to the domestic realism which dominated fiction in the 1880s. According to Haggard’s essay “About Fiction” appearing in the February 1887 Con- temporary Review, “most of this crude mass of fiction [published each year] is worthless. If three-fourths of it were never put into print the

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 193 world would scarcely lose a single valuable idea, aspiration, or amuse- ment”; he continued by noting that “the publication of inferior fiction can, in short, be of no advantage to any one, except perhaps the propri- etors of circulating libraries.”35 He especially criticizes the typical English novel for its reliance on “the test as to whether or not it is suitable read- ing for a girl of sixteen” and charges that “the ordinary popular English novel represents life as it is considered desirable that schoolgirls should suppose it to be” (177). (As we shall see later, there is some truth to this observation.) Opposed to this restriction institutionalized by the libraries, romance offers a realm of freedom: “There are still subjects that may be handled there if the man can be found bold enough to handle them” (180; emphasis in original). Haggard sees the typical English novel as decidedly feminine, especially in its audience (schoolgirls), distribution (circulating libraries), and content (“utterly false as a picture of life”), and the romance as masculine in authorship, production, and audience. Without a doubt, as Wendy Roberta Katz notes, Haggard’s essay is largely a self-serving exercise intended to increase the literary value of these for- merly boys’ books at the expense of the dominant mode of literary pro- duction.36 Lang, in his essay from the November 1887 Contemporary Review, takes a more moderate approach: “a new Battle of the Books is being fought, and the books are the books of the circulating library,” he says.37 Continuing the metaphor of battle, Lang describes fiction as “a shield with two sides, the silver and the golden: the study of manners and of character, on one hand; on the other, the description of adventure, the delight of romantic narrative” (684). In assessing the debate, he acknowl- edges the personal preferences of readers: though he himself does not enjoy realist fiction, he does not deny that preference to anyone else. He characterizes the Realistic school as “the unrelentingly minute portraiture of modern life and analysis of modern character, [and] the unrelenting exclusion of exciting events and engaging narrative” (688).38 The “mod- ern romances of adventure” represented by Stevenson’s and Haggard’s boys’ books appeal to the “old barbarian under our clothes” through their use of exciting incident (690). Unlike Realism, Romance has no school because “Romance bloweth where she listeth” (691). In his choice of examples, Lang clearly associates realism with domestic novels and romance with boys’ books. Not surprisingly, at the conclusion, Lang sides with Romance.

[email protected] 194 T. J. BASSETT

In Sexual Anarchy: Gender and Culture at the Fin de Siècle (1990), Elaine Showalter argues that the violence of this male reaction to “real- ism” resulted from “the matriarchal legacy of George Eliot”: male authors reacted to the increasing number of women authors and journalists in the literary marketplace; male authors reacted psychologically to the strong mother figure of Eliot by appropriating women’s power of procreation and creation; and male critics and authors felt the need to remake the high Victorian novel in masculine terms.39 Hence, the advocacy of romance “was a men’s literary revolution intended to reclaim the kingdom of the English novel for male writers, male readers, and men’s stories” (79). The “male quest romance” represents a psychological “yearning for escape from a confining society, rigidly structured in terms of gender, class, and race, to a mythologized place elsewhere where men can be freed from the constraints of Victorian morality” (81). But I would go further than Showalter. What Showalter identifies as a narrative frame structure of “a male narrator tell[ing] the story to an implied male reader or to a male audience” in these male quest romances (82) also becomes inscribed in the material form of the romance—one-volume novels written for and available to men outside of the circulating library system.40 Though libraries bought these one-volume novels and women did read them, the publication of the new Romance served as a powerful symbol if not sign of the decline of the multi-volume novel. The “story of female exclusion so central to the genre” is a double exclusion, both literary and material: women are presented as external to both the narratives and their mode of literary production and consumption. As Chapter 2 showed, women authors were responsible for a large majority of the multi-volume novels appearing in the 1880s. Clearly, then, men authors, such as Stevenson and Haggard, shift to the new one-volume mode of literary production and leave women authors behind to write multi-volume library novels. By the 1890s, the new romance showed that readers were willing to buy new fiction rather than rely solely on the libraries for their reading material. As Chapter 2 showed, women authors wrote increasingly more three-volume fiction than men authors, so Haggard’s and Lang’s char- acterization of the library novel may have some basis in fact. In addi- tion, commentators anecdotally noted women made up the bulk of the libraries’ clientele. So tellingly, it was men authors—Stevenson, Haggard, Kipling, and Conrad—who first broke free from the three-volume novel and library system.

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 195

George Moore and Literary Censorship

Whereas Stevenson struggled to write a three-volume novel, George Moore wrote one in less than a year. However, his vexing experience surrounding its publication and distribution by Mudie’s Select Library led him to champion the one-volume format for new fiction as a means of combating literary censorship. In this regard, Moore’s adoption of the one-volume novel was a more intentional plan than Stevenson’s use of the format. Moore’s crusade was part of a larger debate over the merits of literary realism in the 1880s that directly or indirectly blamed the three-volume novel format and circulating libraries for impeding the development of British fiction as compared to its continental peers such as France. As many authors and readers observed over the years, the purchasing power of the libraries exerted control well beyond the physical format of the novel by imposing a strict code of middle-class values on authors and publishers. As evidenced by the word “select” in the name of his library, Mudie exercised caution in circulating any novel deemed of questionable morality or poor taste, and his purchasing or rejecting a novel could make or break any author, especially those who pushed the boundaries in their depictions of sexual relationships. Hence, authors and publishers acquiesced, sometimes grudgingly, sometimes happily, to the demands of the libraries. Moore mounted a determined attack against this literary control by issuing a series of polemics and by advocating the one-volume format for new fiction. His experiences and ultimate failure illustrate the complex formulation of late Victorian literary censorship. He rightly recognized the part the libraries played in controlling the distribution of literature, and thus, he believed censorship itself could be effectively removed by eliminating the library system itself. However, the transition from the expensive three-volume novel to the less expensive one-volume novel led instead to reformulation of the structures of cen- sorship corresponding to the new mode of literary production. In fixating overly on the institution of the library and the person of Charles Edward Mudie, Moore ignored the array of other cultural forces able, and ulti- mately willing, once the influence of the libraries waned, to take over the function of policing access to the realistic fiction that Moore championed. In 1882, living in London, Moore finished writing his first novel, A Modern Lover. Moore, an Irish landowner who had spent his formative

[email protected] 196 T. J. BASSETT years in the cafés of Paris among impressionist painters and naturalist writ- ers, returned to England in order to make a name for himself in litera- ture, and he naturally turned to the three-volume novel. He showed his debt to French fiction (especially the work of Honoré Balzac and Gus- tave Flaubert) in his novel’s depiction of the second-rate artist and cad Lewis Seymour, who metamorphoses from a poverty-stricken painter to a successful society painter through the sacrifices of three women. The first, Gwynnie Lloyd, is a poor, religious-minded, working-class girl who shares the same lodging house with Seymour; she poses nude for Sey- mour’s much-needed commission after he threatens to commit suicide otherwise. She is so embarrassed at the results (he has painted her exactly, including her face), she runs away. As a result of this painting of Venus, Seymour meets the second woman, Mrs. Bentham, a rich heiress sepa- rated from her cruel husband. Seymour decorates her country house and attempts (unsuccessfully) to seduce her. She, nonetheless, takes a sympa- thetic and maternal interest in the young painter, introduces him to her wide circle of friends, and finances his further studies in Paris. The third woman, the beautiful Lady Helen Trevor, he marries and through her connections makes a career as a successful society painter and (eventu- ally) a member of the Royal Academy. Although the book was initially rejected by Bentley, William Tinsley of Tinsley Brothers agreed to publish the novel for a £40 guarantee against losses, which Moore, in his eager- ness to see print, grudgingly accepted. The novel was published in three volumes at 31s 6d in June 1883. In later years, Moore gave numerous, sometimes contradictory, accounts of the events following publication.41 The novel garnered favor- able reviews, all of which recognized the talent of the new author while at the same time noticing the dangerous French influences in the novel, which they universally deplored. Typical of the reaction, the conservative Athenæum states, “For a man who has evidently read a great many French novels, and who has an inclination toward naturalist literature and impres- sionist art, Mr. Moore is not at all shocking”—a rather tempered compli- ment, but one absolving Moore of writing a morally suspect book.42 After reading a long and positive review in the Spectator (18 August 1883), Moore brought a copy to his publisher “with the intention of hearten- ing” him,

But [Tinsley] seemed lost in despondency of all shapes and sizes as he sat at his bureau, and waving aside the review as something of no importance

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 197

he told me that Mudie had taken only fifty copies and Smith twenty- five, which meant that sooner or later he would call upon me to pay my debt. … “Mr. Tinsley,” I said, “I suppose you have read the reviews of A Modern Lover, every one of which is complimentary?” and I handed him the two-column article that The Spectator had printed that week and tried to persuade him that it would save the book. But he answered with truth that no number of articles could save a three-volume novel if the libraries did not subscribe freely and circulate it.43

From Tinsley’s office in Catherine Street, Moore went directly to Mudie’s library in Oxford Street. Confronting the aging librarian personally, Moore explained his visit and demanded to know why Mudie’s had taken only fifty copies and why Mudie’s refused to circulate his novel. “Your book,” Mudie replied,

was considered immoral. Two ladies from the country wrote to me object- ing to that scene where the girl sat to the artist as a model for Venus. After that I naturally refused to circulate your book, unless any customer said he wanted particularly to read Mr. Moore’s novel.44

Though Moore argued that the novel received reviews clearing it of immorality (even the scene in question was cited for its tact in one review), the librarian remained unmoved: “I saw the review in the Spec- tator, but I must consult the wishes of my clients,” he answered. The interview ended with Moore melodramatically declaring, “I will wreck this big house of yours, Mr. Mudie! … My next novel will be issued at a popular price. … I will appeal to the public.”45 The treatment of Moore by the libraries was certainly not new. Other novelists’ books had been “shelved” before and others not purchased at all, for instance, ’s The Ordeal of Richard Feverel (1859). And other novelists and reviewers had publically attacked the censorship of the libraries and its effects on literature before.46 But in order to under- stand fully Moore’s battle, we must examine the degree and types of cen- sorship practiced during the Victorian period regarding representations of sexual morality. There are two complementary ways to view this. One narrative views the issue in negative terms: censorship and in particular obscenity laws restrict or prohibit the literary expression of human sex- uality. Hence, these critics cast the struggle largely in terms of authors battling against a range of impersonal forces (religious, political, or legal) in order to give voice to a truthful expression of human sexuality. The

[email protected] 198 T. J. BASSETT comprehensive treatment of British censorship by Donald Thomas, A Long Time Burning (1969), largely follows this narrative course. Like- wise, most critics view Moore’s history as that of the transgressive author opposing the repressive censorship of the circulating libraries, a view that Moore himself—as his own first critic and historian—cultivated. A second narrative of censorship examines the specific practices associated with it. Regarding obscenity law in particular, historians Ian Hunter, David Saun- ders, and Dugald Williamson have shown that the law

cannot be understood as fundamentally repressive or censorious. Particular acts of restriction form part of a jurisdiction of those channels—differen- tiated by age, gender, class and culture—through which the literature of erotic formation circulates. These acts signal a larger strategy that is dis- tributive rather than repressive.47

These critics offer another history of the censorship of representations of sexuality as a history of the particular forms of institutional arrange- ments, infra-legal fields of knowledge, ethical practices, and governmental measures that make the policing of obscenity intelligible to its contempo- raries.48 In this way, censorship is seen as a historically specific practice ranging from religious, legal, or governmental controls to informal sys- tems to literacy itself. This view discounts the idea of a “true” human sexuality possible to express, since what constitutes sexuality depends on the particular moment. Following on the work of Hunter, Saunders, and Williamson, this section argues that literary censorship, as a distributive practice, must be discussed in terms of the modes of literary production available at the time, the specific practices of censorship associated with these modes, and the way these practices control how reading matter is disseminated. During the nineteenth century in Britain, there was an increase in the freedom of the press and a corresponding decline in formal politi- cal and religious censorship via the law.49 This freedom affected not only nonfictional texts but fiction as well. The law provided a new treatment of obscenity with the passing of the Obscene Publications Act of 1857 sponsored by Lord Campbell (hence its alternate name as Lord Camp- bell’s Act). The statute aimed at the illicit pornography industry and gave greater power to magistrates and justices of the peace to issue search war- rants and to seize materials. During the debate of the bill, other MPs raised the question of the law’s possible use against literary works, but

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 199

Campbell assured them that literary works in general were not the target of the law. As written, the law intended to target only a small, narrowly defined mode of literary production: the pornography trade centered in London. The law did not even define the offense it charged its agents to prosecute (clearly relying on the target implied by the act), and only a court ruling by Lord Justice Cockburn in Regina v. Hicklin (1868) eleven years later gave a satisfactory definition:

I think the test of obscenity is this: whether the tendency of the matter charged as obscenity is to deprave and corrupt those whose minds are open to such immoral influences, and into whose hands a publication of this sort may fall.50

This definition establishes two key criteria. First, the definition sets a stan- dard of offense because the obscenity must be capable of offending a mind “open to such immoral influence”—presumably the young and innocent (the so-called young girl standard). Second, the definition calls for an accounting of the context of publication since the offense depends on the possibility of the obscenity falling into the hands of someone “open to such immoral influences.” Lord Campbell’s Act and Hicklin codify both the underlying ideology of literary censorship and its existence as specific practices within the lit- erary modes of production. First, women and the young, because of their perceived lack of education, discernment, and experience, were thought “open to such immoral influence,” according to prevailing beliefs. The woman reader, like the young reader, was assumed to be sexually inno- cent, but this innocence was never secure and was in constant danger of being corrupted or undermined by outside forces such as novels. Hence, women were to be protected from all sexual matters and knowledge since Victorian domestic ideology demanded sexual innocence and purity. (Many late Victorian authors attacked this sexual double standard, espe- cially Sarah Grand in her novel The Heavenly Twins [1893].) Society, for the most part, equated the woman reader with the young reader—neither had the ability to understand or resist immoral forces—hence, the “young girl” standard specified both an age and a gender.51 Second, the law gives great consideration to the mode of literary production involved in dis- tributing the alleged obscenity. The law could make distinctions between formats—such as medical describing anatomy and one-penny pamphlets providing selected excerpts from medical texts. The

[email protected] 200 T. J. BASSETT had a lesser likelihood of reaching a large audience because of its price, language (especially its use of medical discourse or Latin or both), and small editions. The pamphlet, however, had the greater likelihood of falling into the wrong hands because of its low price, large number of copies, and method of distribution. Thus, in policing obscenity, format (language, price, and edition size) and distribution made a significant dif- ference in applying the obscenity laws. In addition to stereotypical ideas about age and gender, the law betrayed certain class prejudices as well: the lower-class readers lacked the sophistication of their upper-class peers.52 But despite these new laws and definitions, Victorian prosecutors made remarkably little use of obscenity laws until the late 1880s. Instead, the circulating libraries, especially the two largest, Mudie’s Select Library and W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library, exer- cised a powerful but informal control over the fictional representations of sexual morality. The former enterprise carried novels from the start, but the choice was tempered by the adjective “select.” The religious- minded Mudie agreed with the low reputation afforded the novel in the early part of the century, but the businessman Mudie recognized the necessity of carrying novels for the financial success of his library. There- fore, Mudie screened novels for their moral content, and the Mudie label would act as a de facto seal of approval, serving as a major selling point for the library.53 Mudie’s primary argument for his censorious actions rested mainly on his middle-class patrons who shared his belief in pro- tecting women and the young from sexual matters. At least from Mudie’s point of view, few of his customers complained and many appreciated his selection (though there is no way to determine how his customers exactly felt about his decisions). Also, as many anecdotes relate, women consti- tuted the majority of the library’s users and an especially large part of the audience for novels. As a businessman, Mudie served his paying cus- tomers before publishers, authors, or “literature.” Thus, Mudie carefully avoided any book that could harm the reputation of his business: often he or his readers would vet the novels, and sometimes the complaint of a single subscriber could pull a novel from the shelves, as with Moore’s first novel. This censorship was not absolute—Mudie’s public did tolerate some level of moral laxity (i.e., sensation fiction),54 and some removed books did eventually (and quietly) return to the shelves and circulation (e.g., the works of Meredith). But in general, most subscribers consid- ered the novel from Mudie’s safe for family consumption. With the large success of Mudie’s, other libraries naturally followed suit, and if one library shelved or refused to take a book, the others would

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 201 likely do so also. This censorship at the primary point of distribution worked backward to influence the chain of production. Publishers, know- ing that the libraries bought the bulk of a three-volume printing, hesitated to publish any book that the libraries might refuse to buy, refuse to cir- culate, or return after complaints. In turn, authors, either by choice or by necessity, accommodated their works to their publishers’ and libraries’ requirements. Over the course of the century, the libraries refused a num- ber of novels and quietly shelved many more, but how many novels died unborn is impossible to determine.55 What becomes clear, then, is that the libraries did not by themselves impose a moral yardstick but instead complied with what many of their middle-class clients desired. In the case of Victorian England, the ideology of women’s sexual innocence required the control of obscene literature, and given the peculiar three-volume novel system, the circulating libraries became the unofficial censor.56 But this censorship did not go unnoticed. Authors and publishers complained about the tyrannical power of the cir- culating libraries to make or break a book by either placing or not placing a large order. Some authors and publishers—mostly authors—decried the moral standard represented by the figure of the young girl as the pre- sumed reader, as Dickens does famously in Our Mutual Friend (1865). And critics complained of the libraries’ effects on literary quality, since the limited and homogeneous audience demanded “lighter” fare such as melodrama, sentimentalism, or sensationalism. Still, the vast majority of novelists accepted these strictures as the price of doing business, and the system persisted through the collusion of the authors, publishers, libraries, and readers. Moore’s attack on the libraries would follow a simple strategy. Inspired by Zola and the example of French naturalistic fiction, Moore’s follow-up to A Modern Lover would be a well-written but thoroughly naturalistic work sure to be rejected by the libraries, and it would be published in a cheap one-volume format for which he found the sympathetic publisher Henry Vizetelly. The inexpensive format was Moore’s attempt to “appeal to the public.” Moore would then follow publication with a literary debate in the press on the subject of library censorship including Moore’s letters to various periodicals and his pamphlet Literature at Nurse, or Circulating Morals. Moore’s argument would be to show, first, how the circulating libraries hurt the English novel by forbidding the truth- ful depiction of adult subject matter and, second, how the circulating

[email protected] 202 T. J. BASSETT libraries are the real purveyors of immorality by their emphasis on “un- truthful” sentimental and sensational fiction. Ultimately, as biographer Adrian Frazier observes, Moore’s strategy depended heavily on gender considerations, as he aimed to pit liberal, male-oriented weekly reviews against conservative, female-oriented publishers and libraries.57 Moore’s second novel, A Mummer’s Wife, was published in November 1884 in one volume priced at 6s, and as planned, the libraries immedi- ately refused to stock the novel. The novel tells the story of Kate Ede, a seamstress living in the northern pottery town of Hanley, who is married to an asthmatic draper, Ralph Ede. Kate and her invalid husband live with her mother-in-law, Mrs. Ede, a devout Evangelical Christian. Kate’s life of toil changes when the family rents the spare room to the manager of an opera bouffe, Dick Lennox. Kate romanticizes the actor, he easily seduces her, and they elope. At first, the acting company’s easy ways alarm Kate, but she and Dick soon establish domestic harmony despite their transient existence. After Ralph divorces her, Kate and Dick marry, but then the fortunes of the company take a turn for the worse, and the company dis- bands. Kate and Dick have a baby, and, in response to what would now be termed post-partum depression, Kate’s doctor prescribes as stimulant small doses of brandy to which Kate becomes addicted. Her alcoholism becomes so acute the sickly baby dies from neglect during one of Kate’s alcohol-induced blackouts. Kate’s life with Dick proves to be no solution to her need for love, and she turns even more to drink to assuage the guilt brought on by her Evangelical upbringing. Eventually, Kate’s collapse is absolute: abandoned by Lennox, Kate dies in a London slum from her alcoholism. The main argument of the novel is to show the danger of indis- criminate reading of sentimental romance (facilitated by the circulating libraries and periodical serializations) on an under-educated woman reader. As a number of critics have pointed out, not only does the novel have certain affinities with the naturalism of Zola (especially the alcoholism of L’Assommoir [1877]), but the novel also draws its situation from Gustave Flaubert’s Madame Bovary (1857) and Mary Elizabeth Braddon’s The Doctor’s Wife (1864)—the latter being Braddon’s version of Flaubert’s novel in which her heroine rejects the advances of a would- be lover.58 Like Madame Bovary, Kate reads sentimental novels and is imaginatively affected by them. Her “one strong characteristic” was that she was “dreamy, not to say imaginative.”59 The narrator chronicles her

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 203

“sentimental education” beginning in childhood as she passed from “au- thors who deal exclusively with knights, princesses, and kings, to those who interest themselves in the love fortunes of doctors and curates,” especially one favorite novel about a “beautiful young woman [who read Byron and Shelley and] … was married to a very tiresome country doctor”—roughly the plot of Braddon’s novel (38). Her reading “fulfills the need for imaginative and emotional release” by appealing only to her emotions,60 but “with marriage her reading ceased, and the scrapbook [of poetry] was left to sleep at the bottom of an old trunk” (40) as her new husband replaces her reading. However, the arrival of their boarder Dick Lennox and her curiosity about his bohemian lifestyle reawaken Kate’s interest in her sentimental reading, and she idealizes the healthy and friendly actor who is every- thing her husband is not. As the narrator says, “By the well-known ways, the dog comes back to his kennel, the sheep to the fold, the horse to the stable, … even so did Kate return to her sentimental self” during the period between Dick’s visits to Hanley (86), and she secretly retrieves her scrapbook and novels from her trunk—“she anticipated hours of delight in tracing resemblances between herself and the lady who used to read Byron and Shelley to her aristocratic lover” (91). Encouraged by her read- ing, Kate sees herself as a novel heroine and her life as the plot of a novel, which leads her to elope with Dick. Against Kate’s fantasy, Moore continually juxtaposes stark reality, which Kate cannot accommodate to her fantasy. On the train taking the eloping Kate and Dick from Hanley, she thinks that “she had done what she had so often read of in novels [i.e., running away from her hus- band], but somehow it did not seem at all the same thing. This was a startling discovery to make, and Kate tried to think how in her case the ideal did not correspond with the reality” (146–47). However, despite her attempt to reconcile “visions of slim lords, and clinging Lady Clares” to “a damp, faded room, with stiff mahogany furniture,” the narrator makes clear that “of the secret of her disappointment [Kate] was nearly unconscious” (147). Later in the novel, Kate attempts to explain her life to the acting company’s conductor: “It would [she says] make the most wonderful story-book ever written,” but in recounting her story, “it was necessary to employ many words and many circumlocutions of phrase to tell” of her seduction (177–78). Once again, Kate cannot clearly draw the distinction between the world of her novels and her world.

[email protected] 204 T. J. BASSETT

Throughout the novel, Moore strongly associates reading sentimental fiction with intoxication, especially alcohol.61 Early in her life, Kate “con- sidered [the time spent with her romance-telling caretaker] quite deli- cious, and her childish brain was thus early intoxicated with sentiment” (38; emphasis added). Later in the novel, after Kate becomes a confirmed alcoholic, her drinking and fiction reading become entwined: one time “[a] new novel was bought, a fresh bill run up at the grocer’s [for alco- hol], and the mornings were passed in a state of torpor” (270–71), and another time “she bought a supply of her favourite fiction, and with a bottle under her shawl and a bundle of Family Heralds [a sentimental newspaper] in her hand she returned home” (289). During one partic- ular scene early in the novel, Kate’s reading approximates the effect of a drug or sex:

It appeared to her that she could not go on fast enough [in her reading]; a flow of gladness had rushed to her head until she wished and longed to scream forth her delight. Her emotion gained upon her until it became quite hysterical. (90)

After a few minutes, “her passion subsided.” Ultimately, the denizens of the London slum where Kate lives and dies nickname the drunken women “Sentimental Kate” because she constantly retells her “troubles” to the women and sings the sentimental songs she learned as an actress or read in the Family Herald (347). In focusing on the case of Kate Ede, Moore aims to show the corrupt- ing influence of even “safe” library and serialized fiction, and the reader must directly relate Kate’s horrific death from alcoholism to her life-long reading of sentimental novels—in the context of Moore’s novel, one drug gives way to another. Likewise, the novel condemns much of Kate’s life (her reading, her dissatisfaction with her husband, her elopement, and her alcoholism), and she suffers the conventional bad end because of it. Moore offers his own novel as an antidote to the sentimental novel— as Kate observes, she replicates many of the same events that take place in her sentimental novels. However, the effect is not the same. Whereas Kate expects a world of romantic fantasy, she finds to her surprise a sor- did reality which she herself is unable to reconcile with her expectations. Early in the novel, the narrator explains why this is so when he compares the “woman of the world” to the “woman of the people.” The former shows signs of intellectual advancement since “her taste changes… just

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 205 as the epicure in his progress from one dish to another demands higher seasoning and stranger delicacies” (86). However, the latter shows signs of stagnation or even regression since

she never learns to judge, to discriminate. … She is as incapable at thirty as at twenty to distinguish between the false and the true;—apparently even less so, for if experience has influenced her taste at all, it has rendered it more childish and ignorant. … (87)

In the woman of the people, the “critical sense” (as Moore calls it) weak- ens by reading library fiction; in the woman of the world, the “critical sense” strengthens by reading more challenging books. The narrator, and presumably the reader, realizes Kate’s mistake because of their own “crit- ical sense.” Moore leaves no illusions in his treatment of these events— attempting to imitate the events of sentimental fiction leads to disillusion- ment and destruction. The novel incorporates another negative perspective on Kate’s reading: the view of Evangelicals, represented by Kate’s mother and her mother- in-law. Kate’s mother reacts adversely to her novel reading: she thought it “a sinful waste of time, not to speak of the way it turned people’s heads from God” (39). Mrs. Ede echoes these concerns even more force- fully. One day when she finds Kate perusing the books in her trunk, Kate offers the defense, “What harm can they do me?” To which Mrs. Ede replies, “I have found them nothing but vain accounts of the world and its worldliness. I did not read far, but what I saw was a lot of excusing of women who could not love their husbands, and much sighing after riches and pleasure” (92). The strict religious view condemns novels for their morally suspect depiction of life and their waste of time. Moore’s fic- tional depiction of the “British Matron” (see below) in Mrs. Ede may be a veiled caricature of Mudie himself, especially his religious and censorious attitudes. Strangely, however, Mrs. Ede’s views correspond well with those of the narrator—given the chance, both would act to ban such fiction alto- gether, though for different reasons: the religious view denounces all fic- tions as false and time-wasting, but the elitist view aims to replace simplis- tic, sentimental fictions with more challenging, realistic fictions. However, both views rest on the same assumption: that women and young read- ers are weak-minded and more open to “corrupting” influences. Moore does not seriously challenge this assumption; though he acknowledges

[email protected] 206 T. J. BASSETT the existence of “women of the world,” the vast majority are “women of the people.” By simply reversing which type of book is dangerous (sen- timental fiction instead of realistic fiction), Moore does not question the ideological foundations of this stereotype. In a novel meant to combat library censorship, Moore largely accepts the underlying rationale for the censorship of fiction. After the success of Moore’s novel, which garnered both positive reviews and good sales, Moore followed six months later with a pamphlet Literature at Nurse, or Circulating Morals (1885). In the interim, Moore wroteanopenlettertothePall Mall Gazette (December 1884) stating his case against Mudie’s, which the pamphlet elaborates.62 If A Mummer’s Wife depicted the effect of library novels on women, then Literature at Nurse would examine the novels themselves. Here, Moore wished to “ex- amine the clothing of some of the dolls passed by our virtuous librarian as being decently attired, and to see for myself if there be not an excit- ing bit of bosom exhibited here and a naughty view of an ankle shown there; to assure myself, in fact, if all the frocks are modestly set as straight as the title Select Library would lead us to expect.”63 Moore’s method follows from his French models: looking at his own novel and three oth- ers by Mrs. Campbell Praed, W. H. Mallock, and Robert Buchanan, he “summarizes their plots, quotes the lurid scenes, then raises a shocked eyebrow.”64 His goal, as he says, “is to prove how absurd and how futile is the censorship which a mere tradesman assumes to exercise over the literature of the nineteenth century, and how he overrules the decisions of the entire English press” (17). In Literature at Nurse,asinA Mummer’s Wife, Moore fails to address the underlying ideological causes of censorship and instead focuses on the figure of Mudie in a series of ad hominem attacks meant to bait him:

It is, however, certain that you [Mudie] are popularly believed to be an old woman; and assuming you to be the British Matron I would suggest, should this pamphlet cause you any annoyance, that you write to The Times proving that the books I have quoted from are harmless, and differ nowise from your ordinary circulating corals whereon young ladies are supposed to cut their flirtation teeth. (16)

Moore, in a discussion about the abuses of Mudie’s monopoly, continues the feminine metaphor:

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 207

That [literature] of which [Mudie] approves is fed with gold; that from which he turns the breast dies like a vagrant’s child; while in and out of his voluminous skirts run a motley and monstrous progeny, a callow, a whining, a puking brood of bastard bantlings, a race of Aztecs that disgrace the intelligence of the English nation. (18)

In a like way, Mudie’s customers are also depicted as primarily female— Mudie’s books are “scattered through every drawing-room in the king- dom, to be in rocking-chairs fingered and fondled by the ‘young person’ until she longs for some newer fashion in literary frills and furbelows” (18–19). The success of literature depends on the “suffrage of young women” and the “paradise of the English novelist is in the school-room: he is read there or nowhere” (19). The lack of a true literary realism in the English novel results because the “British mamma is determined that her daughter shall know nothing of life until she is married; at all events, that if she should learn anything, there should be no proof of her knowledge lying about the place—a book would be a proof” (20–21). The danger to young women, according to Moore, is not the “close analysis of a pas- sion” but the “romantic story, the action of which is laid outside the limits of her experience. … [This] is the book that more often than any other leads to sin; it teaches the reader to look to a false ideal, and gives her— for men have ceased to read novels in England—erroneous and superficial notions of the value of life and love” (22). As in his novel, Moore laments the lack of development of the “critical sense” and reinforces the notion that women are more susceptible to corrupting influence. In a naturalistic way, then, “the struggle for existence [in literature], therefore, no longer exist[s]” since a “librarian rules the roost” by enforc- ing the same standard on all. Moore asks for a middle way: “to write as grown-up men and women talk of life’s passions and duties” (21):

all I ask is that some means may be devised by which the novelist will be allowed to describe the moral and religious feeling of his day as he perceives it to exist, and to be forced no longer to write with a view of helping parents and guardians to bring up their charges in all the traditional beliefs. (21)

This cannot be accomplished under the current system, because “the pro- prietors of the large circulating libraries exact that books shall be issued at extravagant prices” of 31s. 6d., hence “putting it out of the power of the general public to become purchasers, and effectively frustrating the

[email protected] 208 T. J. BASSETT right of [readers] to choose for themselves” (3). Though his own novel was published at 6s in boards, Moore advocates that novels be sold for half-a-crown (2s. 6d.) in paper covers. For a time, Moore’s strategy worked: a number of mostly male authors, including George Gissing, responded to his letter in the Pall Mall Gazette to register their own complaints against library censorship. Vizetelly used A Mummer’s Wife and a reprint of A Modern Lover as the foundation of a series of 6s one-volume novels called “Vizetelly’s One-Volume Novels.” And, as the culmination of the experiment, Moore convinced Vizetelly to publish English translations of Zola’s novels, previously available only in French-language editions. But by fixating on the libraries and Mudie as the center of literary censorship, Moore, perhaps willfully, ignored the underlying cause of library censorship: the domestic ideology of sexual purity held by a significant group of the libraries’ subscribers and adhered to by the public at large.65 Moore failed to anticipate that the one-volume system advocated by Moore and Vizetelly could not by itself affect a fun- damental change in this belief system. The change in the mode of liter- ary production—from the three-volume format favored by the libraries to the one-volume format—forced a corresponding change in the struc- ture of censorship from an informal system exercised by the libraries to a formal system policed by the courts.66 The history of Vizetelly, as the first English publisher prosecuted for obscenity, illustrates how the new censorship practices developed in response to the new mode of literary production. Born in 1820, the son and grandson of printers and members of the Stationers’ Company, Henry Vizetelly began his career in publishing as an engraver and, rising to some prominence, began an association with journalism, first through the Illustrated London News as an engraver, and then in succession with the Pictorial Times,theIllustrated Times,and the Welcome Guest as a proprietor.67 In 1865, he sold his interests in his newspapers and became the Paris correspondent of the Illustrated Lon- don Times, a position he held for the next seven years. While in France, he became a considerable authority on wines (he wrote a number of books on the subject) and gained a knowledge of French literature. Resigning his post and returning to England, he set up as a publisher in London. Inspired, no doubt, by his years in Paris, he specialized in publishing cheap one-volume novels, especially translations of French authors such as Flaubert and Maupassant, translations of Russian authors such as Tolstoy and Dostoyevsky, and sensational works by Sala and Grenville Murray. In

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 209

1884, spurred by his new author Moore, Vizetelly also began publish- ing Zola’s novels in translation—Ernest Vizetelly, Henry’s son, translated most of the eighteen Zola novels eventually published by the firm. As he later noted, his translations did involve some cutting and “toning” of the material.68 Nevertheless, Vizetelly, in his advertising, drew attention to the “daring and risqué nature” of his publications by using the connota- tive adjectives of “French,” “realistic,” and “unexpurgated,” as in “Zola’s Realistic Novels” or “Vizetelly’s Popular French Novels.”69 The success of both Moore’s and Zola’s works published in inexpensive one-volume editions by Vizetelly did not go unnoticed—in fact, its very success made it a target.70 The National Vigilance Association (NVA), founded in 1885, began a campaign, in the words of Ernest Vizetelly, “for the purpose of protecting boys and girls against what was called ‘perni- cious literature’” that eventually focused on the publisher of Zola.71 The trouble began when the editor of the Pall Mall Gazette, an ally of the NVA, asked Vizetelly for sales information: he boasted of selling about a thousand copies of Zola’s works a week (at the time, he had eighteen Zola titles in print). Afterward, Zola and his publisher were denounced in the House of Commons and in the press, and the NVA issued a sum- mons against Vizetelly in August 1888 for publishing three novels by Zola. The summons and trial focused only on the English-language edi- tions; publishers of French-language editions were never prosecuted— another example of how format matters as much as content.Atthetrial in October, the prosecution began reading extracts of the translations to the jury, who became visibly troubled, and the defense quickly capitulated by changing its plea from not guilty to guilty. Vizetelly was fined £100. However, according to Ernest Vizetelly, the question of selling Zola’s works remained unresolved: could abridged versions of the novels still be sold? Vizetelly evidently thought so, and the NVA summoned Vizetelly again. At the May 1889 trial, the defense once again entered a guilty plea (the reason remains unclear), and the elderly Vizetelly was fined £200 and committed to three months in prison, which broke the health of the seventy-nine-year-old publisher. The publishing firm of Vizetelly ended. Moore did what he could for his friend and publisher by issuing articles and letters to the press in his defense. Though never summoned himself, Moore, according to his biographer Frazier, “was marked out as a man of criminal association.”72 In his attack on the censorship of the library sys- tem, Moore made a number of misjudgments. First, in his novel and pam- phlet, he shared the underlying assumption about the corrupting nature

[email protected] 210 T. J. BASSETT of literature on women, albeit focusing on sentimental novels rather than naturalistic novels. Though readers could be taught to discern, most never had the means or opportunity. Second, Moore focused his attention com- pletely on one man, Mudie, whom he felt represented the length and breadth of censorship. Though the circulating libraries, and Mudie him- self, played a key role in controlling the distribution of literature, they were only the most visible part of a larger social policing mechanism. As evidenced by the creation of the NVA and reinvigoration of legal means for prosecuting obscene publications, the desire of at least a segment of the public to censor literature did not disappear with the libraries and the expensive three-volume novel; instead, censorship adapted to the new mode of literary production centered on the cheap one-volume novel. The trial and conviction of an otherwise respectable literary publisher captured the attention of other publishers. Under the library system, most publishers provided acceptable materials because they had an economic interest to do so. However, as the power of the libraries waned, publishers now feared a lawsuit since they had personal legal liability for their publi- cations. As Peter Keating sums up the trials, Vizetelly’s “crime against morality was that the books he published were translations, relatively cheap, and unabridged”—signaling that his choice of format contributed to his prosecution as much as anything else.73 As such, Vizetelly’s publica- tion fell outside the censoring power of the libraries but not the notice of the public. Opponents turned to the courts as a new and necessary means to control the distribution of “obscene” literature once policed by trades- men like Mudie. The courts and the NVA kept up a tenacious pressure on libraries, booksellers, and publishers well into the twentieth century, ending only in the 1960s with the successful defense of the publication of D. H. Lawrence’s Lady Chatterley’s Lover.

J. W. Arrowsmith, T. Fisher Unwin, and Series Publication

Vizetelly found much success with series publication, especially his One- Volume Novels series which included 32 volumes from 1884 to 1889.74 The majority of the volumes were new fictional works or the first English translations of foreign works by the likes of Alphonse Daudet, Fyodor Dostoyevsky, Pierre Loti, Georges Ohnet, and . Four works by George Moore appeared in the series: A Mummer’s Wife (volume 3,

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 211

1884), A Drama in Muslin (volume 15, 1886), A Mere Accident (vol- ume 26, 1887), and Spring Days (volume 29, 1888). As the title of the series makes plain, Vizetelly’s One-Volume Novels series aimed to be a direct alternative to the three-volume novel by offering substantial (real- ist) fiction at reasonable prices, most priced at 6s or less. But Vizetelly was not the only publisher issuing new fiction in inexpensive series. In the late Victorian period, several publishers began using series to issue new, not reprinted, titles to the public. Table 5.1 lists several such series from the last three decades of the century. The development of these series for new fiction both created and demonstrated a large market for new fiction among middle-class readers. Two publishers in particular pioneered the series as a viable marketing strategy for bookselling outside of the library system: the Bristol-based publisher J. W. Arrowsmith and the London- based publisher T. Fisher Unwin. Their example inspired numerous other publishers such as John Lane to create their own series and their collective success helped to hasten the end of the three-volume novel. The idea of series publication was not a late Victorian innovation. As Michael Sadleir shows, series publication began in earnest in the early nineteenth century with Robert Cadell’s Author’s Edition of the Waver- ley Novels in 1829 which appeared as 5s monthly volumes of reprinted material.75 Several publishers attempted to follow this model of issuing cheaper editions of previously published fiction and nonfiction, such as Archibald Constable’s Miscellany, John Murray’s Family Library, Long- man’s Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopaedia, and Colburn and Bentley’s The National Library. The latter served as the impetus for one of the longest- lasting and most influential series in the Victorian period, Colburn and Bentley’s Standard Novels series. Beginning with James Fennimore Coop- er’s The Pilot in 1831, the original series ran for 127 volumes into the 1850s priced at 6s. Bentley took over sole publishing of the series after the publishing partnership broke up in 1832, and he followed the initial series with several others. What differentiated Bentley’s series from others was the attractive cloth bindings, relatively affordable price, and contem- porary titles, with many featured titles less than five years old. Eventually, as Sadleir describes, “the idea of using the series for reissues of contempo- rary best-sellers took hold of the publishers and proved its value… [and] it represented… the first sustained attempt by a publisher to exploit a cheaper market for his successful novels.”76 Without much doubt, Bent- ley and his imitators set the standard for the cheap 6s reprint of the three- volume novel that persisted throughout the nineteenth century.

[email protected] 212 T. J. BASSETT (1896) (1896) (1906) (1901) (1897) (1862) (1896) (1879) (1903) (1889) (1896) (1896) (1897) (1896) (1898) (1890) (1896) (1894) A Noble Haul The Mighty Atom Brenda’s Experiment Blow Hot, Blow Cold Mrs. Martin’s Company Clothes Maketh Man, and Other A Constant Woman Maria and I A Man with a Maid The Rival Actresses Impertinent Dialogues Between the Dog and the Wolf Penelope Brandling WhichIsAbsurd Angela’s Lover A Gentleman’s Gentleman My Brother Sea, Camp, and Stage A Deliverance (1906) Stories (1892) (1894) (1892) (1889) (1896) (1887) (1862) (1894) (1895) (1894) (1890) (1896) (1884) (1895) (1877) (1894) (1884) (1878) (1893) Geist - The World Is Round The Zeit The Burning Mist Blue Bell The Family Credit The Ironmaster Tryphena in Love The Shifting of the Fire Dora Thorne Dead Man’s Dollars Keynotes The Parasite ThreeMeninaBoat Called Back Mademoiselle Ixe Joanna Traill, Spinster Pierrot! A Story The Upper Berth Punchinello’s Romance Family Herald William StevensArrowsmith 190 T. Fisher Unwin 95 Innes 55 Heinemann 8 John Lane 20 4 c a f Late-Victorian publishers’ series featuring new fiction b d e Two of the volumes were reprints,Two and of fifteen the volumes volumes were were nonfiction cheap reprints Heinemann attempted to revive the series in late 1899 Most, if not all, of theseUnwin volumes unsuccessfully were attempted originally to serialized revive in the the series in 1903 Little Novels T. Fisher Unwin 11 Pierrot’s Library Zeit-Geist Library Hutchinson 7 Unknown Authors’ Series Jarrold 3 Iris Series J. M. Dent 10 Blue Bell Series Marcus Ward 14 Bristol Library One-Volume Novels Vizetelly 32 Family Story-Teller Keynotes John Lane 34 Pseudonym Library 3/6 Series Arrowsmith 42 NameShilling Volume Library Ward and Lock Publisher 28 No. of volumes First title Last title Two Shilling Series Arrowsmith 8 Independent Novel Series T. Fisher Unwin 13 Acme Library Archibald Constable 11 Scarlet Novels Pioneer Series Autonym Library T. Fisher Unwin 18 Lane intended three further volumes according to his advertisements but instead ended the series Table 5.1 a b c d e f

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 213

In the 1850s, Routledge began his Railway Library which contained reprinted works in cheap 1s editions with Cooper’s The Pilot (volume 1, 1849). The illustrated, often garishly, board covers and yellow bindings gave the volumes a distinctive look and a nickname as “yellowbacks.” As the name of the series connotes, the success of the series coincided with the railway boom in England: in particular, W. H. Smith’s bookstalls sold thousands of copies of these cheap books to travelers looking for dis- traction during their journeys. Routledge’s business success depended on buying or leasing the copyrights to older titles and utilizing mass pro- duction techniques which contributed to lowering the costs. Eventually, the series ran to 1277 volumes and ended in 1898. Several publishers imitated Routledge’s formula with similar success. Even W. H. Smith and Son themselves eventually doubly capitalized on series publication by qui- etly buying copyrights and renting them to Chapman and Hall for their Select Library of Fiction series. However, before the 1880s, nearly all publisher series of fiction fea- tured reprinted titles rather than new titles. The first explanation lies in the safety of offering fiction of proven popularity to the public over the risk involved with selling untried authors and titles. In this way, the economically safe multi-volume library editions served as a test market— those titles that succeeded with the circulating libraries and their read- ers had potential to live on indefinitely as cheap reprints. Second, the economic costs associated with publishing reprints were lower due to the reduced expenditure in copyrights. As with Bentley, most publish- ers bought their copyrights from authors and hence could reprint titles at will with no further payments to authors, or alternatively publishers featured older material in the public domain such as eighteenth-century novels. Third, authors and publishers viewed the expensive multi-volume library editions as more prestigious and thus eschewed the cheaper for- mats if possible. Last, by the mid-Victorian period, the costs associated with book production—paper, composition, printing, binding, and distri- bution—had dramatically decreased largely due to mechanization. While the three-volume novel mainly remained a hand-press production, the yellowback and cheap reprint became a mass-produced commodity. Prior to the 1880s, a few publishers attempted to use series to publish new fiction titles. Ward and Lock’s The Shilling Volume Library serves as an early example. Begun in 1862 with Westland Marston’s The Family Credit, the publisher cited the repeal of the paper duty as the instigating factor in starting their series of new fiction.77 Ambitiously, Ward and

[email protected] 214 T. J. BASSETT

Lock aimed to publish three titles a month, but the series ended within a year after 28 titles. William Stevens, the publisher of the penny news- paper the Family Herald, began the Family Story-Teller series to reprint popular serializations from his periodical beginning with Charlotte M. Brame’s Dora Thorne (1877). Volumes in the series appeared in cloth- covered boards priced at 1s. Both the Family Herald and the Family Story-Teller featured sentimental and sensational fiction aimed primarily at women readers despite the inclusion of “family” in both titles. As such, the novels garnered little critical praise as George Moore’s attitude toward such fiction illustrates. The series ran to several hundred titles by the twentieth century with many of the titles written by anonymous or pseudonymous authors.78 Because many, if not all, of the titles in the Family Story-Teller series originally appeared in the Family Herald, Stevens knew the material would succeed in a cheap format and, because he owned the copyright to most of his serials, Stevens reaped potentially large returns from their re-publication in book format. (Recall, as well, two-dozen Family Herald serials appeared in three-volume editions.) The Irish publisher Marcus Ward, perhaps in imitation of Stevens, began a short-lived Blue Bell Series with Mary Bramston’s Blue Bell (1878). According to their advertisement,

The ‘Blue-bell’ Series has been undertaken by the Authors and Publishers with a view to issue, at regular periodical intervals, original illustrated Tales of a high class, carefully printed on good paper, and neatly bound, at a price within the reach of all classes. Under the system now in vogue, Novels are first published in three volumes, at half-a-guinea a volume, nearly a prohibitive price to ordinary readers, who resort to the Circulating Library for the loan of works they are unwilling to purchase… The Publishers of the ‘Blue-bell’ Series are confident that they are supplying a public want in furnishing original light reading of a healthy character and good tone at a very low price, and they hope that the ‘Blue-bell’ stories may supplant much of the objectionable fiction which is now so extensively circulated and read.79

Self-consciously, Ward positioned his series in direct opposition to the library novel: the volumes appeared with decorative bindings and illus- trations for 2s and featured recognizably popular authors such as Mrs. Riddell and Sarah Tytler. Likewise, the contents of Ward’s series would “supplant much of the objectionable fiction” in the libraries—presumably

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 215 a reference to the sensation fiction still popular with readers.80 Despite these attentions, the Blue Bell Series survived to only fourteen volumes. The Bristol printer-publisher J. W. Arrowsmith, however, showed how successful series publication for new fiction could become. Arrowsmith was the son of Isaac Arrowsmith who published the Worcester Chronicle before moving to Bristol to partner with printer H. C. Evans in 1854.81 That partnership dissolved in 1857 and Isaac Arrowsmith began publish- ing on his own account at 11 Quay Street, Bristol. Most of his production was aimed at the local west country market, such as their series of railway time tables, though they did print jobs for larger London-based publishers such as Longmans. James William Arrowsmith joined his father’s firm in 1862 and took over the business in 1871 after his father’s death. During these years, printing and bookselling remained the central occupations of the business with publishing merely a sideline, producing mostly works of local interest. But by the early 1880s, J. W. Arrowsmith desired to expand his publishing business into general literature. Arrowsmith invited twelve friends, including Amelia B. Edwards and John Aldington Symonds, to dinner and asked each to contribute an item to a proposed Christmas annual called Thirteen at Dinner and What Came of It: Being Arrow- smith’s Christmas Annual 1881. The project appeared with illustrations in paper covers priced at 1s but failed to sell, despite enlisting London- based publisher Griffith and Farran as agents to distribute the annual more widely. The following year, he paid the well-known Irish author May Crommelin to write a novella Brown-Eyes for the 1882 annual. This annual also failed to make any impact with readers. However, the 1883 annual became an unexpected success.82 For it, Arrowsmith enlisted his friend Frederick J. Fargus to write a novella for his annual. Fargus, the son of a Bristol auctioneer, had contributed a story to the 1881 annual under the pseudonym “Hugh Conway” and had achieved some success writing stories and poems for the periodi- cal press, but he originally declined to contribute to Arrowsmith’s 1883 annual. However, pressed for money, he agreed to write a short novel (his first) for £80 which he produced in the space of six weeks from Febru- ary to March.83 Untitled by Fargus, Arrowsmith dubbed the sensational novel Called Back. The plot involves murder and European revolution- aries: Gilbert Vaughan, an independently wealthy young man, is struck blind due to cataracts. One evening after dark, he goes for a walk in front of his London boarding house but becomes lost. Thinking he has found his house, he enters with his key only to realize he has made a mistake.

[email protected] 216 T. J. BASSETT

In the house, he hears a woman singing then overhears two men argu- ing. Before he can leave, a man is murdered. Captured by three men, Vaughan despairs for his own life. However, convinced of their captive’s blindness, they drug and leave Vaughan in a gutter rather than kill him. Returned home, no one believes his story thinking Vaughan was intox- icated. After a successful operation, his sight is restored. Several years pass. While traveling in Italy, Vaughan sees a beautiful woman and falls in love. Unable to find her again in Italy, he returns to London where he happens to see her again. By renting rooms in the same house, he gets to know the beautiful but inordinately shy Pauline March. He asks her guardian Dr. Ceneri for her hand in marriage, but he makes sev- eral conditions: first, she has no money of her own, and second, her past remains a secret. Vaughan accepts these conditions. After his marriage, Vaughan realizes his wife’s shyness is actually a psychological condition caused by a great shock leaving her mind vacant. A fight with an acquain- tance of Ceneri, the Italian revolutionary Macari, causes Pauline to sleep- walk to the very house where the murders occurred—hers was the voice Vaughan heard singing. Vaughan confronts Macari who smugly admits the murdered man was Pauline’s lover. A distraught Vaughan searches for Ceneri who, in the meantime, has been sentenced to twenty years in Siberia for his revolutionary activities. Vaughan undergoes the harrowing journey to find Ceneri in a Siberian prison. Found, the man confesses all: during a meeting between the revolutionaries, Macari murdered Pauline’s brother because he insulted the low-bred Italian. The shock of witnessing the crime affected Pauline’s mind. Vaughan returns to England. When Pauline’s mind improves, Vaughan offers to annul their marriage which she tearfully rejects and the two live happily ever after. At first, this third annual fared the same as the previous two: Grif- fith and Farran received their consignment in October, distributed review copies, and offered it for sale to the trade. By the end of the year, most copies remained unsold until a fortuitous review by Henry Labouchere in Truth appeared at the beginning of the new year:

Who Arrowsmith is and who Hugh Conway is I do not know, nor had I ever heard of the Christmas Annual of the former, or of the latter as a writer of fiction; but, a week or two ago, a friend of mine said to me, “Buy Arrowsmith’s Christmas Annual, if you want to read one of the best stories that have appeared for many a year.” A few days ago, I happened to be at the Waterloo Station waiting for a train. I remembered the advice,

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 217

and asked the clerk at the bookstall for the Annual. He handed it to me, and remarked, “They say the story is very good, but this is only the third copy I have sold.” It was so foggy that I could not read it in the train as I had intended, so I put the book into my pocket. About 2 that night, it occurred to me that it was nearing the hour when decent, quiet people go to bed. I saw the Annual staring me in the face, and took it up. Well, not until 4.30 did I get to bed. By that time I had finished the story. Had I not, I should have gone on reading. I agree with my friend—nay, I go further than him, and say that Wilkie Collins never penned a more enthralling story. I am in despair at thinking that I have read it. Those who have not, have a pleasure to look forward to. They have two or three hours of real good sensationalism, admirably written, before them, at the small cost of sixpence. In the meantime, I can only hope that Mr. Hugh Conway will soon be good enough to write another story—a better one of its kind than “Called Back,” however, neither he nor any one else could write. I only ask that it should be one-half as good.84

Thereafter, the initial 6000 copies sold quickly followed by another 4000 copies printed in January 1884.85 Before his untimely death in 1885, Far- gus would go on to write the Christmas annuals for 1884–1885, the nov- els Dark Days and Slings and Arrows, respectively. Thereafter, Arrowsmith attracted a number of well-known authors to write his Christmas annual: for instance, Wilkie Collins (1886), Walter Besant (1887–1890), Ben- jamin L. Farjeon (1891), (1892), Anthony Hope (1894), and H. Rider Haggard (1896). The success of the third Christmas annual and its successors embold- ened the provincial publisher to produce books on a larger scale, and for this purpose, he used series publication. On 2 February 1884, Arrow- smith advertised a new edition of Called Back as the first volume of Arrowsmith’s Bristol Library priced at 1s in cardboard covers and 1s 6d in brown cloth: 4000 more copies of “the book of the season” were avail- able in London, Bristol, and “at all Railway Bookstalls.”86 The publisher sold another 200,000 or so copies of the novel by the end of the year and hence secured a favorable launch to his new series. It is unclear what inspired Arrowsmith to publish his fiction in the form of a series, though he must have had popular reprint series such as Routledge’s Railway Library in mind. The name itself “Arrowsmith’s Bristol Library” empha- sizes his position as a provincial publisher outside of the trade center of London and as such keeps his outsider status before the reading public. The second volume in the series was Crommelin’s Brown-Eyes (published

[email protected] 218 T. J. BASSETT

1884), and the third volume was Fargus’s Dark Days (published 1885), so initially, at least, Arrowsmith appears to have considered the series as book format reprints of his Christmas annuals. However beginning with the fourth volume Sir Edward J. Reed’s Fort Munster, M.P. (published in February 1885), Arrowsmith’s Bristol Library began including primar- ily new works of fiction unconnected with the annuals. The sixth vol- ume, F. Anstey’s The Tinted Venus (1885), confirmed the success of the venture when all initial 20,000 copies sold on the day of publication in June 1885.87 Arrowsmith bound many of the volumes in drab brown cloth before switching to bright scarlet cloth in the late 1880s for the remaining volumes of the series. Also, beginning with the fourth volume, Arrowsmith switched to wholesaler and publisher Simpkin, Marshall as their London agents. Thereafter, the series ran to 90 volumes by the end of 1901 and includes all but two of the Christmas annuals (1881 and 1901). Besides two reprinted novels (volumes 5 and 22) and fifteen non- fictional works, the remaining 73 volumes featured new fiction by estab- lished and new authors such as Grant Allen, Robert Buchanan, Andrew Lang, and John Strange Winter (the pseudonym of Henrietta Stannard) in addition to the Christmas annual authors. The series offered several advantages to publishers in marketing new one-volume fiction to the public. The series name acts as a group descrip- tion and, like an author’s name, allows “one to group together a certain number of texts, define them, differentiate them from and contrast them to other” texts.88 The name itself serves as a guarantee of uniformity (e.g., Bentley’s Standard Library), quality (e.g., Cassell’s Silver Library), for- mat (e.g., Vizetelly’s One-Volume Novels), price (e.g., Arrowsmith’s Two- Shilling Library), or utility (e.g., Routledge’s Railway Library), with the further guarantee of continuity (the ever-expanding collection or library). Often, the format visually and physically reinforces the descriptive mean- ing of the series name: Routledge’s Railway Library’s distinctive yellow covers or Arrowsmith’s use of numbers on the spines. The common series name and format imply to the public an internal similarity in terms of narrative genre, narrative style, or length, even though most of the vol- umes are written by different authors. Hence, the series name takes on a descriptive power beyond, sometimes, the name of the individual author or the publisher. In this way, the series name creates an ongoing adver- tisement: conveniently for the publisher, the cost of advertising is spread out over the whole series of titles rather than the individual titles; hence,

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 219 the majority of a publisher’s time and money could go toward advanc- ing the series’ name instead of the costly, temporary measures to advance each individual title. For instance, an advertisement for volume 24, Joseph Hatton’s The Mystery (1887), begins “New Volume of Arrow- smith’s Bristol Library” before listing any information about the author or title.89 Eventually, the publisher’s advertisements in each volume would include a numbered list of titles and authors in the series which eventually spanned two pages. Arrowsmith initiated two further series in the 1880s: the Two-Shilling Series and the 3/6 Series. As their names connote, these series primar- ily differentiated themselves from the Bristol Library by doubling and tripling the price, respectively. The Two-Shilling Series began with a reprint of May Crommelin’s Dead Men’s Dollars in August 1888, first published by Arrowsmith in one-volume priced at 5s the previous year. As the publishing history of this title shows, Arrowsmith attempted to sell fiction at higher prices outside of series, but generally gave up after their handful of attempts failed. The Two-Shilling Series featured seven more volumes of new fiction but never achieved the interest generated by its predecessor, ending after two years with Edgar Lee’s Maria and I (volume 8, 1890). However, Arrowsmith’s 3/6 Series attained much greater success and rivaled the Bristol Library. Much like the earlier series, Arrowsmith’s 3/6 Series benefited from an early popular success: Jerome K. Jerome’s Three Men in a Boat: (To Say Nothing of the Dog) (1889). Jerome, the author of the humorous essays The Idle Thoughts of an Idle Fellow (1886) and other minor works, immediately hit upon Arrowsmith because of the latter’s success with Anstey’s The Tinted Venus. In a letter dated 24 February 1889, Jerome approached the publisher:

I am now running in Home Chimes a series of entirely humorous papers entitled Three Men in a Boat (To say nothing of the Dog) a book I have great hopes of, seeing how it has gone in the Mag: and for which I wish to find a good publisher. It is, I hope, humorous—about size of Vice Versa [Anstey’s first novel]—would sell for 3/6—Would you care to entertain it.90

[email protected] 220 T. J. BASSETT

Initially, Arrowsmith intended to include Jerome’s book in his Bristol Library, “It would of course be a shilling book, at least that is my idea: if it should happen to ‘catch on’ it ought to run up to a big edition and if it should go to 30,000 [copies] you would receive £250” at Arrowsmith’s usual royalty of 2d per copy sold.91 Jerome resisted,

But I don’t like the 1/- edition, at least not to begin with. I doesn’t give a proper profit to either Publisher or Author. Another thing is I am better known to the say, 3/6 public than I am to the 1/-. The 1/- public only take a book that is a rage, a 3/6 public know an author and look for him. I’m sure we could get a good sale at 3/6, and then come down to a 1/- issue after. The 2 classes of buyers are so distinct.92

As his support, Jerome again cited the success of Anstey’s humorous novel Vice Versa: Or, a Lesson to Fathers published in a 6s one-volume edition by Smith, Elder in 1882 that went through nineteen printings in the first year. Arrowsmith needed no more persuasion, settling on a 7d royalty per 3/6 copy sold and agreeing to secure an illustrator for the book. The pub- lisher, perhaps seeing an opportunity to replace the failed Two-Shilling Library, used Jerome’s novel to launch his 3/6 Series bound in scarlet cloth. Three Men on a Boat was an immediate success going through three editions in as many weeks in September 1889. Jerome published two further titles in the new series: The Diary of a Pilgrimage (volume 3, 1891) whose first printing consisted of 30,000 copies and Three Men on the Bummel (volume 36, 1900) the sequel to Three Men in a Boat. The series ran to 42 volumes by 1901 supported in large part by a hand- ful of other popular successes: namely George and Weedon Grosssmith’s The Diary of a Nobody (volume 11, 1892) and Anthony Hope’s The Pris- oner of Zenda (volume 18, 1894). The latter title and its sequel published by Arrowsmith as a 6s edition in 1898 made the author and publisher a small fortune alone. As the example of Jerome shows, the success of these series, once they are properly established, attract prospective authors who offer up their manuscripts as potential volumes in the series. As Jerome writes in one of his letters to Arrowsmith, “I am anxious to bring it [Three Men on a Boat] out through you as I know yours is for energy and push—I suppose the leading firm now,” no doubt recognizing Arrowsmith’s ability to sell thousands of copies of new fiction compared to the more conservative

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 221

London publishers still reliant on the circulating libraries.93 Hope, like- wise, saw Arrowsmith’s 3/6 Series as the ideal vehicle for his Ruritanian romance which sold some 12,000 copies in its first six months. So despite being a provincial publisher, Arrowsmith could attract and keep literary talent through his use of series publication alone. In the early 1890s, series publication for new fiction underwent another transformation and became more prevalent in the literary market- place. Whereas the names of publishers’ series in the 1880s emphasized price or format, as in the cases of Arrowsmith’s 3/6 Series and Vizetelly’s One-Volume Novels, to differentiate themselves from the library novel, the names of publishers’ series in the 1890s emphasized theme or con- tent, as in the cases of T. Fisher Unwin’s Pseudonym Library and John Lane’s Keynotes, to perhaps differentiate themselves from other series rather than the library novel. Unwin best represents this shift as one of the first London-based publishers to attempt series publication for new fiction. Thomas Fisher Unwin began his publishing company at the age of thirty-four when he bought Marshall Japp and Co. for £1000 in 1882, setting up shop in Paternoster Square, London.94 By all accounts an imposing figure and an excellent salesman, Unwin was a member of a dis- tinguished printing family, and he learned the publishing trade by working as a traveler for Jackson Walford and Hodder (the forerunner of Hodder and Stoughton). He commenced publishing in his own right with the continuation of the popular Half-Holiday Handbooks (8 volumes, 1881– 1883) begun by Japp and the creation of the Lives Worth Living series (6 volumes, 1883–1887) with reprints of copyrights owned by Japp. In fiction, Unwin initially attempted to produce multi-volume novels for the libraries beginning with Sir Thomas Wemyss Reid’s Gladys Fane (2 vol- umes, 1883), and he would ultimately produce 19 two-volume and 9 three-volume titles from 1883 to 1895. However, none of these authors ranked very highly and none of the titles made much mark with the pub- lic. As a new publisher of fiction like Arrowsmith, Unwin lacked the pres- tige, connections, and capital to woo established authors to his publishing house. Hence, by economic necessity, Unwin focused on works of liter- ary merit by new or unknown authors, because “he always believed that such books would make their way in the end, even if the author were unknown.”95 Lacking the literary acumen needed to ferret out new talent him- self, Unwin enlisted the services of a publisher’s reader and had the good fortune to hire Edward Garnett in 1887. Unwin originally hired

[email protected] 222 T. J. BASSETT this nineteen-year-old son of the chief librarian to wrap parcels, but when the young man inexplicably stepped out of a coach and four to report for duty on his first day, Unwin thought the original job beneath him. Instead, Unwin put Garnett to work reading manuscripts for 10s per week, a job temperamentally and intellectually suited to the young Garnett, and he would later go on to become one of the most influential editors of his time. As one of his biographers notes, Garnett’s reports combined close analysis, confidence in his judgments, and com- mercial instincts, and he especially admired individuality, originality, and veracity in the manuscripts he read.96 However, such manuscripts were not necessarily commercially viable, so he and Unwin needed to find a way to publish and market them. Probably based on Unwin’s early experience with series and the exam- ples of Arrowsmith and Vizetelly, Garnett and Unwin created a number of fiction series to sell fiction by new or unrecognized authors to the public. Their first, longest-running, and most famous series was the Pseudonym Library, which marked Unwin’s successful entry into the fiction market.97 As a condition of inclusion, Unwin required all of the authors, whether new or already established, to adopt a pseudonym which would serve as an overall marketing strategy in selling the volumes. In addition, the books were published in an odd, rectangular shape (7 inches by 3.5 inches), shaped to fit into a woman’s reticule or a man’s coat pocket, and covered in either yellowish paper or buff-colored cloth. Inside the covers, the text was handsomely spaced on the page with wide margins and generous lead- ing. The front cover carried the name of the author and the title, and the back cover showed the publisher’s stylized monogram. Priced at 1s 6d in the paper covers or 2s in the cloth covers, Garnett pressed the com- pany travelers to place them especially with railway vendors.98 As with Arrowsmith, the price and format aimed to compete favorably with cheap reprints in the growing number of retail outlets for inexpensive books, such as the ubiquitous newsstand. The series succeeded remarkably well: the first entry was Mademoiselle Ixe (1890) by Lanoe Falconer, the first attempt at fiction by Mary Eliz- abeth Hawker. Several publishers turned the manuscript down because of its short length (i.e., not long enough for a full octavo volume let alone a multi-volume edition) before Garnett “recognized the intense vitality of its character-drawing, and would not risk injuring it by having it lengthened.”99 In starting the series with Mademoiselle Ixe, Unwin published a novel with two false names on its cover: first, the series name

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 223 identifies the author’s name as a pseudonym, and second, the novel’s narrative reveals the governess’s name (Mademoiselle Ixe) as an alias. Much like Conway’s Called Back, the novel contains a highly sensational plot involving Russian anarchists. The Merrington family hires a new governess, Mademoiselle Ixe, a mysterious foreign woman recommended by Mrs. Merrington’s sister. The Merringtons’ eldest daughter, Evelyn, becomes fascinated with the governess and attempts without success to learn the woman’s story. A number of events related to the governess enliven Evelyn’s otherwise dull country life: a mysterious letter, its “thin envelope… covered with foreign and English postmarks,” arrives; the governess’s intense interest in the neighboring house and a prospective visit by a Russian Count; her machinations to convince the Merringtons to host a dance for the neighbors and the Count; and her reaction to meeting the Count during a walk. At the dance, as Evelyn leads Mademoiselle Ixe downstairs to dinner, they meet the Count and the governess shoots and seriously wounds him. In the ensuing chaos, Evelyn hears the story of the governess’s membership in a revolutionary cell and helps the governess escape the law. Years later, after Evelyn has married, she receives a letter dated from a Russian prison written in blood which congratulates her on her wedding. The letter is signed simply “x.” The novel sold well and underwent several re-printings in its first year. Hawker went on to write another volume in the Pseudonym Library, The Hôtel d’Angleterre and Other Stories (volume 6, 1891). Other names appearing in the series included a few already established authors such as Ralph Iron (Olive Schreiner), Ouida (Marie Louise de la Ramée), and Rita (Eliza M. Booth); a number of foreign authors in translation such as George Drosines, Ignatz Nikolaevich Potapenko, and Ilsa Frapen (Ilsa Lévien Akanian)100; and many more new or lesser-known authors such as John Oliver Hobbes (Pearl M. T. Craigie), Ganconagh (W. B. Yeats), Vernon Lee (Violet Paget), and Tom Cobbleigh (Walter Raymond). As this list of authors illustrates, the requirement to take a pseudonym rested more lightly on authors such as Ouida who already had a long list of titles under her pen name than John Oliver Hobbes who had to create a pen name for herself.101 Unwin, then, did not limit themselves to only new authors. The name and format of the series created a uniform product that Unwin could easily market through advertisements such as one that appeared in the Academy proclaiming “The Pseudonym Library. Two New Volumes” which emphasized the continuing series over the individ- ual titles.102 In 1893, Unwin commissioned Aubrey Beardsley to design

[email protected] 224 T. J. BASSETT a poster for the Pseudonym and Autonym Libraries: in it, the text adver- tising the series names, publisher, and price overshadows the listing of the individual titles.103 (One could argue they need not be listed at all.) The first volumes of the series garnered positive reviews, most of which focused on the series format and appearance rather than the individual novels themselves. The Saturday Review, for example, said, Mademoiselle Ixe

surprises and interests by itself before a word of it is read. It is tall, it is slen- der, it is bright yellow, it is the first volume of the “Pseudonym Library.” It is a most delightful book to hold, being light, and the high narrow col- umn of type recommends itself most agreeably to reading. Lanoe Falconer, the name given on the title-page as the author’s, is, it is to be supposed, pseudonymous.104

Here, the physical format of the novel takes precedence, especially its shape and color (evocative of the yellowback novel), given as signs of its readability. The adjectives used imply smallness and effervescence: slen- der, light, high, and narrow (this review implying the three-volume novel was heavy, thick, and not given to readability). Another reviewer of the first volume, writing for the Athenaeum, concurs: “if the text were far less interesting than it is, one could always derive a certain comfort and plea- sure from the handling of so dainty a little volume.”105 Two reviewers of later volumes found the format less pleasant: the Academy thought “the form of the volumes in the ‘Pseudonym Library’… is intended to attract attention by its oddity and ugliness”106 and the Westminster Review observed, “Though the queer little volumes of the Pseudonym Library certainly ‘put themselves in the trick of singularity,’ which in our eyes is far from being a recommendation, yet, it must be allowed, they generally contain something worth reading, and sometimes something really original.”107 Later, one reviewer remarks of the tenth volume: “The ‘Pseudonym Library’ has made so good a reputation for itself that one assumes the presence of some merit in every volume appearing in it”—a strong indication that the overall marketing or branding of the series was working.108 The Pseudonym Library eventually ran to 52 volumes from 1890 to 1896.109 The series name of the Pseudonym Library, then, defined a recog- nizable product in the eyes of readers and reviewers, in both form and content. But in this case, the series name also dictated a condition for

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 225 inclusion: the use of a pseudonym by the author. At first blush, the established value of the series name ironically juxtaposes with the seem- ingly negligible value of the author’s name—being both unknown to the public and acknowledged as false. However, in the Pseudonym Library, the series name and the author’s name combine to produce, as Gerard Genette calls it, the pseudonym effect: the combination of mystery, desire, and authorial representation formed in the public mind once the use of a pseudonym has been revealed.110 In most cases, unless the use of a pseudonym is obvious (e.g., “Boz”), the effect of using a false name is no different than that of a real name until the act is revealed through some extra-textual means (e.g., publicity or celebrity). But inclusion in the Pseudonym Library instantly discloses the act of taking a pseudonym as part of its text and calculatingly produces the pseudonym effect in an effort to actively shape the readers’ responses to the authors and series. In this way, Unwin and the Pseudonym Library utilize a more complex marketing strategy than that of Arrowsmith’s Bristol Library or earlier series: the series name becomes an overarching theme or metaphor rather than just a description of its format. By calling the series the Pseudonym Library and requiring its authors to take pseudonyms, Garnett and Unwin established a sense of mystery beyond that of using unknown authors. The audience would naturally speculate about the authors: was the author male or female? Was the author famous under his or her real name? Would the identity of an author ever be revealed? When would the identity of the author be revealed? In many cases, the reviewers of Pseudonym Library volumes searched for clues in the texts for the identities of the authors. Many reviewers because of, or in spite of, the pseudonyms ques- tioned the gender of the author.111 One reviewer of the tenth volume, John Sherman, and Dhoya by Ganconagh (W. B. Yeats), stated confi- dently (and erroneously) based on the text, “The author… is evidently a lady who does not believe in the ‘mystery of the sex.’”112 Reviewers less frequently questioned the authors’ nationality because the texts’ sub- ject matter, setting, or the use of translators (listed on the title pages) often answered such questions. One reviewer of Amaryllis by εωργιoξ ρoσιυξ (George Drosines) remarked,

There is no word of preface to show that the novel has been translated from the modern Greek, and yet it is almost impossible to believe that it was not written by a Greek, and, originally, in the Greek language. Nor, for the matter of that does the name ρoσιυξ sound altogether unfamiliar

[email protected] 226 T. J. BASSETT

as that of a Greek author. But, however that may be, whether the novel is really the work of an Englishman writing under a pseudonym or a transla- tion from a Greek author, there is no doubt as to the charm of the story itself, which fully comes up to the standard which this series has so far maintained.113

Most often, however, the pseudonyms led reviewers to questions about the authors’ possible professional or amateur status. A reviewer of Gen- tleman Upcott’s Daughter by Tom Cobbleigh (Walter Raymond) rightly asked, “Is some old friend of standing and repute masquerading as Tom Cobbleigh, some tale-writer long assured of success, trying his fortune anew under this undignified name, for the fun of the thing, or to reviv- ify old sensations? [The novel] may be the work of a new hand, but the new hand has learnt his craft well somewhere.”114 (Raymond had indeed already published two novels under his own name.) Alternately, a reviewer of Green Tea: A Love Story by V. Schallenberger (Vesta S. Simmons) saw “A certain feebleness of construction and tendency to lay stress on unim- portant matters [which] appear to indicate a prentice hand at authorship; but… the story … shows plenty of promise for the future of its writer.”115 But these reviews only confirm the success of the enterprise: the series name created a mystery around each title which allowed Unwin to mar- ket new fiction by new authors to readers now willing to pay for books. Based on its success, Unwin created several subsequent series, both fiction and nonfiction, but none matched the success of the Pseudonym Library: for example, the Adventure Series for travel works, the Cameo Series for new poetry, the Children’s Library for fairy tales, Climber’s Guides for mountaineers, the Mermaid Series for early modern drama, and the Story of the Nations for history. For fiction, Unwin began the Independent Novel Series with Ford H. Hueffer’s The Shifting of the Fire (1892). Several foreign works in translation appeared in this series, but it faded away after thirteen volumes due in part to its lack of identity: as the Publishers’ Circular remarked in a review of second volume, “Why these novels are independent, and of what they are independent, is not quite clear.”116 The Autonym Library, created in direct contradistinction to the Pseudonym Library, featured authors using their legal names. Pub- lished in the same format and price, the series commenced with F. Marion Crawford’s The Upper Berth (1894) and included recognizable late Vic- torian authors such as Robert Buchanan, S. R. Crockett, George Gissing, Margaret Hungerford, W. E. Norris, and Margaret Oliphant. Because of

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 227 its authors, the series fared better running to 18 volumes over two years. Another fiction series, the Little Novels, fared much the same, running for eleven volumes in 1896–1897. With the visible successes of Arrowsmith and Unwin with series pub- lication, other publishers began issuing series of new fiction in the 1890s (see Table 5.1). John Lane and Elkin Mathews commenced their famous Keynotes Series after the success of the initial volume Keynotes (1893) by George Egerton (Mary Chavelilta Bright). Much like the Pseudonym Library, the Keynotes Series utilized a distinctive format (including a cover designed by Beardsley) and emphasized avant-garde fiction.117 The series soon garnered a reputation for provocative fiction, especially with the New Woman works by Egerton and Grant Allen. The latter author’s The Woman Who Did (volume 8, 1895) became a best seller and assured the success of the series which eventually ran to 34 volumes from 1893 to 1898. Much like Unwin, Lane would begin a number of other series, including Pierrot’s Library (4 volumes, 1896) for fiction, but none approached the success of the Keynotes Series. In another notable example, William Heinemann consciously imitated Lane’s series with his Pioneer Series by starting off with the New Woman novel Joanna Traill, Spinster (1894) by Annie E. Holdsworth and running for twenty vol- umes. Other lesser examples include the Acme Library by Archibald Con- stable (11 volumes, 1894–1896), the Unknown Authors’ Series by Jarrold (3 volumes, 1894–1896), and the Zeit-Geist Library by Hutchinson (7 volumes, 1895–1896). As these examples show, new or relatively small publishers were overwhelmingly responsible for the publisher series of new fiction in the 1880s and 1890s: for instance, Hutchinson began in 1887, Heinemann in 1890, and Archibald Constable in 1893.118 Clearly, as the names of the series connote, these new publishers willingly pub- lished fiction outside of the usual library market in both format and con- tent. Like Arrowsmith and Unwin, these new publishers recognized a new mass market for fiction aimed at a middle-class audience, a market that extended well beyond the circulating libraries. Not coincidently, the flurry of publisher series came to an end at roughly the same time as the three-volume novel. None of the publishers listed above, with the exception of perhaps Heinemann and Hutchinson, depended significantly on the multi-volume novel format for their fiction, so by the time the two libraries issued their ultimatum in mid-1894, these publishers quickly gave up the expensive format. However, series of new fiction had already proven a large market existed for moderately priced

[email protected] 228 T. J. BASSETT

fiction by new authors. The primary function of the series, to convince readers to buy new fiction, ceased to be needed now that all new fiction appeared in less expensive one-volume editions.

Conclusion

As Chapter 2 showed, the share of multi-volume fiction in the overall fic- tion marketplace declined substantially from 58.5% of new fiction titles in 1883 to 19.2% of new fiction titles in 1890—a decline of over two- thirds. The data show that the number of multi-volume titles remained fairly constant in the 1880s and early 1890s, but the rapid increase of new titles published in one-volume editions greatly outpaced the more expensive editions. Clearly, then, a growing market existed not only to read books, but also to buy them in inexpensive one-volume editions. Though other factors clearly played a role—such as increases in literacy, leisure, and disposable income—the examples of authors and publishers in this chapter show how books could be marketed to those readers out- side of the usual channels of the circulating library. All three instances of boys’ books, literary realism, and publisher series consciously positioned themselves in opposition to the library novel in format, content, and audi- ence. The success of novels such as Stevenson’s Treasure Island, Moore’s A Mummer’s Wife, and Jerome’s Three Men in a Boat paved the way for the 6s one-volume novel as the replacement to the 31s 6d three-volume novel.

Notes

1. In fact, in order to maintain the library monopoly, publishers such as Bentley routinely priced new (not reprint) one-volume fiction at 10s 6d before 1880. Throughout the nineteenth century, circulating libraries were the largest purchasers of fiction, in both one- and multi-volume editions. 2. My First Book, ed. Jerome K. Jerome (London: Chatto & Windus, 1894), pp. 297–98. 3. New Grub Street, ed. Stephen Arata (Peterborough: Broadview Press, 2008), p. 189. 4. This largely echoes Lee Erickson’s argument for the “marginal utility” of literature in The Economy of Literary Form (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1996).

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 229

5. As David Finkelstein discovered, in the 1850s the major publish- ers, such as Bentley and Blackwood, invested in Mudie’s in order to keep the library in business. See “‘The Secret’: British Publishers and Mudie’s Struggle for Economic Survival 1861–64,” Publishing History 34 (1993), pp. 21–50. 6. For instance, Chapter 4 of Feltes’s Literary Capital and the Late Victo- rian Novel (Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1993); Chapter 6 of Keating’s The Haunted Study (New York: Fortana Press, 1989); and Chapter 5 of Showalter’s Sexual Anarchy (New York: Viking, 1990). 7. These stories were later collected in the two-volume collection New Ara- bian Nights published by Chatto & Windus in 1882 for 12s. 8. Thomas Stevenson eventually settled £250 a year on his son after his marriage. However, in reality, Louis’s father gave his son double this sum on average. Stevenson always regretted his dependence on his father’s money. 9. Robert Louis Stevenson, “The Morality of the Profession of Letters,” Fortnightly Review 157 (April 1881), p. 519. 10. Their trip began with a £46 hotel bill in London. “Neither of them was careful with money and both could be cheerfully profligate” (Jenni Calder, Robert Louis Stevenson: A Life Study [New York: Oxford Univer- sity Press, 1980], p. 156). 11. “My First Book” reprinted in Treasure Island (New York: Oxford Uni- versity Press, 1985), pp. 192–200. All subsequent references will be in text. Stevenson’s essay originally appeared in The Idler (August 1894) and was reprinted in My First Book, ed. Jerome K. Jerome (London: Chatto & Windus, 1894). 12. Ibid., p. 194. 13. There is some question as to who initiated the pseudonym, Stevenson or Henderson. J. C. Furnas, in his biography, sees the act as Stevenson’s “professional caution” (Voyage to Windward: The Life of Robert Louis Stevenson [New York: Sloane, 1951], p. 197). However, Jason A. Pierce argues, based on examining the chronology of printing and correspon- dence between Stevenson and Henderson, that Henderson may actu- ally have come up with “Captain George North.” See Jason A. Pierce, “The Belle Lettrist and the People’s Publisher: Or, the Context of Trea- sure Island’s First-Form Publication,” Victorian Periodicals Review 31 (1998), pp. 356–68. 14. Pierce, op. cit., p. 363. 15. The Letters of Robert Louis Stevenson, ed. Bradford A. Booth and Ernest Mehew (vol. 3; New Haven: Yale University Press, 1994), pp. 293–94. 16. Quoted in Robert Louis Stevenson: The Critical Heritage, ed. Paul Maixner (London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1981), pp. 15–16.

[email protected] 230 T. J. BASSETT

17. The rise of boys’ books one-volume editions largely corresponds to the decline of historical and nautical fiction in three-volume editions as noted in Chapter 1. 18. Though evidence exists that many adults also read these books. 19. Simon Nowell-Smith, The House of Cassell 1848–1958 (London: Cassell, 1958), pp. 132–35. 20. “Youth on the Prow: The First Publication of Treasure Island,” Studies in Scottish Literature 25 (1990), pp. 83–99. 21. Quoted in The Critical Heritage,op.cit.,p.16. 22. “Christmas Books,” Athenaeum (1 December 1883), p. 700. The review is attributed to Arthur John Butler. 23. “Gift-Books,” Academy (1 December 1883), pp. 362–63. 24. “Treasure Island,” Saturday Review (8 December 1883), p. 737. 25. “Treasure Island,” Pall Mall Gazette (15 December 1883), p. 4. 26. Recall, the historical and nautical fiction of Marryat and his peers fre- quently appeared in multi-volume editions. By the time of Stevenson’s career, it was rarely published in this form, with William Clark Russell as the rare exception. See Andrew Nash, William Clark Russell and the Victorian Nautical Novel (London: Pickering & Chatto, 2014). 27. Op. cit., p. 5. 28. Graphic (15 December 1883), p. 599. 29. Simon Nowell-Smith, The House of Cassell 1848–1958, op. cit., p. 130ff. At a 10% royalty on 5s, these sales represent about £300 for the author. 30. Anna Vaninskaya makes this argument in “The Late-Victorian Romance Revival: A Generic Excursus,” English Literature in Transition, 1880– 1920 51.1 (2008), pp. 57–79. 31. The Days of My Life (vol. 1; London: Longman, 1926), p. 148. 32. My First Book, op. cit., p. 271. 33. “A Gossip on Romance,” Longman’s Magazine (November 1882), pp. 69–79. 34. In response to Haggard’s and Lang’s articles discussed below, several other essays appeared in the periodical press in support of or in opposi- tion to the new romance practiced by Stevenson et al. 35. H. Rider Haggard, “About Fiction,” Contemporary Review 51 (February 1887), p. 172. All subsequent references will be in text. 36. Rider Haggard and the Fiction of Empire: A Critical Study of British Imperial Fiction (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1987), pp. 36–37. 37. Andrew Lang, “Realism and Romance,” Contemporary Review 52 (November 1887), p. 683. All subsequent references will be in text. 38. Lang, in his argument, seems to willfully ignore the “exciting events” of sensation fiction. 39. Elaine Showalter, Sexual Anarchy: Gender and Culture at the Fin de Siècle, op. cit., pp. 76–79.

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 231

40. It perhaps goes without saying, but the libraries did buy numerous copies of these romances and women did read them also. However, the over- whelming number of these novels was purchased by individuals. 41. See the following accounts by George Moore, “A New Censorship of Literature,” Pall Mall Gazette (10 December 1884), pp. 1–2; Literature at Nurse, or Circulating Morals (London: Vizetelly, 1885); and “Apolo- gia Pro Scriptis Meis,” in Lewis Seymour and Some Women (New York: Boni & Liveright, 1922), pp. i–xxxiii. 42. Other reviews appeared in the St. James’s Gazette, Academy,and Spectator. 43. “Apologia,” op. cit., pp. xvi–xvii. 44. “The New Censorship of Literature,” p. 30. 45. “Apologia,” op. cit., p. xvii. 46. For instance, a recent chapter compares the reactions of Moore and Ouida to literary censorship: Jane Jordan’s “‘Literature at Nurse’: George Moore, Ouida, and Fin-de-siècle Literary Censorship,” in George Moore: Influence and Collaboration, ed. Ann Heilmann and Mark Llewellyn (Wilmington: University of Delaware Press, 2014), pp. 69–82. 47. On Pornography: Literature, Sexuality and Obscenity Law (New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1993), p. 52. 48. Ibid., p. 58. 49. What follows is based on Donald Thomas’s A Long Time Burning: The History of Literary Censorship in England (New York: Praeger, 1969) and Samuel Hynes’s The Edwardian Turn of Mind (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1968). 50. Quoted in Samuel Hynes, The Edwardian Turn of Mind, ibid., p. 256. 51. As the previous section showed, Haggard and Lang argued as much in their attacks on domestic realism. 52. Jerome McGann discusses the first publication of Byron’s Don Juan as another example of censorship based solely on format in The Beauty of Inflections: Literary Investigations in Historical Method and Theory (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1985), pp. 111–32. 53. Guinevere L. Griest, Mudie’s Circulating Library and the Victorian Novel (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1970), p. 18. 54. As Stephen Colclough persuasively argues in his essay “New Innova- tions in Audience Control: The Select Library and Sensation,” Mudie was far from consistent in applying any moral yardstick to the fiction he circulated as illustrated by the sensation fiction titles in his inventory. In Matthew Bradley and Juliet John, eds., Reading and the Victorians (London: Routledge, 2016), pp. 31–46. 55. One example comes to mind: early in his career, George Gissing wrote a novel tentatively title Mrs. Grundy’s Enemies. Bentley, clearly anticipat- ing the libraries’ reaction, refused to publish it without major changes

[email protected] 232 T. J. BASSETT

and Gissing eventually destroyed the manuscript (Gettmann, A Victorian Publisher [Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1960], p. 120). 56. In a like way, periodicals also exercised an informal censorship regime, arguably one more restrictive than that of book publishing. For instance, the Graphic excised several passages of Thomas Hardy’s Tess of the D’Urbervilles which were restored in the first book edition, a three- volume novel carried without objection by the circulating libraries. 57. George Moore, 1852–1933 (New Haven: Yale University Press, 2000), p. 115. 58. See Walter D. Ferguson’s The Influence of Flaubert on George Moore (Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1934); C. Heywood’s “Flaubert, Miss Braddon, and George Moore,” Comparative Literature 12 (1960), pp. 151–58; and Judith Mitchell’s “A New Perspective: Nat- uralism in George Moore’s A Mummer’s Wife,” Victorian Newsletter 71 (1987), pp. 20–27. 59. George Moore, A Mummer’s Wife (London: Vizetelly, 1885), p. 58. All subsequent references will be in text. 60. Richard Cave, A Study of the Novels of George Moore (Gerrards Cross: Colin Smythe, 1978), p. 42. 61. Anthony Farrow, George Moore (Boston: Twayne, 1978), p. 48. 62. Both the letter and the pamphlet also, conveniently, served as advertising for Moore’s novels. In fact, the pamphlet, published by Vizetelly, carried advertisements of Moore’s novels inside the covers. 63. Literature at Nurse, or Circulating Morals, op. cit., p. 5. All subsequent references will be in text. 64. Frazier, op. cit., p. 128. 65. Sadly, there is a lack of empirical evidence to measure how far and how deeply such beliefs were held by the Victorians, whether publicly or pri- vately, though it was a commonplace belief that it was wide spread. 66. As Nicola Wilson shows, circulating libraries continued to exercise cen- sorship well into the twentieth century. See “Circulating Morals (1900– 1915),” in Prudes on the Prowl: Fiction and Obscenity in England, 1850 to the Present Day, ed. David Bradshaw and Rachel Potter (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2013), pp. 52–70. 67. I have based what follows primarily on the following: Henry Vizetel- ly’s Glances Back Through Seventy Years: Autobiographical and Other Reminiscences (2 vols.; London: Kegan Paul, 1893); “Henry Vizetelly (1820–1894),” Oxford Dictionary of National Biography; and Ernest A. Vizetelly’s Émile Zola: Novelist and Reformer: An Account of His Life and Work (London: John Lane, 1904). Chapter 9 of the latter work (written by Henry’s son) gives a detailed account of Vizetelly’s life, con- nection with Zola, and his trials. For another more detailed account, see Katherine Mullin’s “Pernicious Literature: Vigilance in the Age of Zola

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 233

(1886–1899),” in Prudes on the Prowl: Fiction and Obscenity in England, 1850 to the Present Day, ed. David Bradshaw and Rachel Potter (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2013), pp. 30–51. 68. Ernest A. Vizetelly, op. cit., p. 254. 69. Keating, op. cit., p. 247. 70. A more detailed history of the National Vigilance Society and Vizetelly’s trials can be found in Hynes, op. cit., Chapter 8; and Keating, op. cit., Chapter 4. 71. Vizetelly, op. cit., p. 257. 72. Frazier, op. cit., p. 175. 73. Keating, op. cit., p. 247. 74. The series included perhaps more titles, but the details are lost amidst the collapse of Vizetelly’s business. 75. Michael Sadleir, “Bentley’s Standard Novel Series: It’s History and Achievement,” Colophon 10 (1932), pp. 45–60. 76. Ibid., pp. 50–51. 77. Advertisement in Westland Marston’s The Family Credit (London: Ward and Lock, 1862). 78. See the listing in Graham Law’s Charlotte M. Brame (1836–1884): Towards a Primary Bibliography (Brisbane: University of Queensland, 2011). 79. Advertisement in Mary Bramston’s Blue Bell (London: Marcus Ward, 1878), p. i. 80. See Colclough, op. cit. 81. The history of Arrowsmith is told in R. H. Brown, Arrowsmith: 1854– 1954 (Bristol: Arrowsmith, 1955); John R. Turner, “J. W. Arrowsmith,” The Dictionary of Literary Biography (vol. 106; Detroit: Gale, 1991), pp. 11–14; and W. Topp, Victorian Yellowbacks and , 1849–1905 (vol. 8; Denver: Hermitage Antiquarian Bookshop, 2005). 82. The story of Called Back has been oft told: my account draws primarily on Arrowsmith’s preface to the 6d edition of the novel published in 1898 and Charles Welsh’s article “How ‘Called Back’ Came to Be Written,” in Literary Collector (October 1900), pp. 24–25. 83. There is some confusion about the payment to Fargus: Arrowsmith in his preface states the original agreement was for £80 outright; the author of Fargus’s Oxford Dictionary of National Biography entry states £150 for an edition of 10,000 copies plus a royalty. In either case, Arrowsmith generously canceled the original agreement after the novel’s runaway success and paid Fargus a royalty. 84. (3 January 1884), p. 5. 85. Topp, op. cit., p. 217. 86. Advertisement for Arrowsmith, Athenaeum 2936 (2 February 1884), p. 166.

[email protected] 234 T. J. BASSETT

87. Topp, op. cit., p. 219. This followed the popular success of Anstey’s Vice Versa published by Smith, Elder in 1882. 88. Michel Foucault, “What Is an Author?” in Language, Counter-Memory, Practice, trans. Donald F. Bouchard and Sherry Simon (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1977), p. 24. 89. Advertisement for Arrowsmith, Athenaeum 3124 (10 September 1887), p. 352. 90. Quoted in Joseph Connolly, Jerome K. Jerome: A Critical Biography (London: Orbis Publishing, 1982), p. 70. 91. Ibid, p. 71. 92. Ibid, p. 72. 93. Ibid, p. 73. 94. Details about the history of T. Fisher Unwin come from Patricia Ander- son and Jonathan Rose, eds., British Literary Publishing Houses, 1820– 1880, Dictionary of Literary Biography 106 (Detroit: Gale, 1991), pp. 304–11. 95. Philip Unwin, The Publishing Unwins (London: Heinemann, 1972), p. 44. 96. George Jefferson, Edward Garnett: A Life in Literature (London: Jonathan Cape, 1982), p. 42. 97. Other works on the Pseudonym Library include my own earlier work “T. Fisher Unwin’s Pseudonym Library: Literary Marketing and Autho- rial Identity” which takes a more theoretical approach to the pseudonym effect (English Literature in Transition, 1880–1920 47 [2004], pp. 143– 60); Rachel Sagner Buurma’s “Individuality, Corporate Authority and the Archive: The Production of Authorship in the Late-Victorian Eng- land” which discusses the collectivizing effect of the series on its authors (Victorian Studies 50 [2007], pp. 15–42); and Frederick Nesta’s “The Series as Commodity: Marketing T. Fisher Unwin’s Pseudonym and Autonym Libraries” which complements my discussion of series mar- keting (The Culture of the Publisher’s Series, Vol. I: Authors, Publishers and the Shaping of Taste, ed. John Spiers [London: Palgrave Macmillan, 2011], pp. 171–87). 98. Carolyn G. Heilbrum, The Garnett Family (New York: Macmillan, 1961), p. 71. 99. Evelyne March Phillipps, “Lanoe Falconer,” Cornhill Magazine 32 (February 1912), p. 233. 100. Here, Garnett used his connections with the sizable Russian expatri- ate community in London. Garnett’s wife, Constance Black Garnett, would go on to become a well-known translator of Russian fiction. Some foreign authors did not use true pseudonyms—instead, their names appeared typeset in the Greek or Cyrillic alphabets.

[email protected] 5 DE-MONOPOLIZING LITERARY SPACE … 235

101. See Bassett, op. cit., for a discussion of the psychological effect using a pseudonym had for John Oliver Hobbes (Pearl M. T. Craigie). 102. Advertisement for T. Fisher Unwin, Academy 1017 (31 October 1891), p. 392. 103. Reprinted in Brian Reade, Aubrey Beardsley (New York: Viking, 1967), p. 296. 104. “Novels,” Saturday Review 70 (8 November 1890), p. 534. 105. “Novels of the Week,” Athenaeum 3289 (8 November 1890), p. 622. 106. Review of The Story of Eleanor Lambert by Magdelen Brooke, Academy 981 (21 February 1891), p. 183. 107. “Contemporary Literature,” Westminster Review 137 (1892), pp. 224– 25. 108. Review of John Sherman, and Dhoya by Gonconagh, Academy 1027 (9 January 1892), p. 35. 109. Unwin attempted to re-start the series in 1903 but gave it up after three titles. 110. Gerard Genette, Paratexts: Thresholds of Interpretation (New York: Cam- bridge University Press, 1997), pp. 48–51. 111. Of the known identities, the eleven male authors either took male pseudonyms (seven), used initials (one), or wrote their names in foreign alphabets (Greek or Russian characters) (three). The twenty-six female authors either took male pseudonyms (seven), took female pseudonyms (thirteen), or took gender-neutral pseudonyms (six). 112. L. F. A., “A Causerie,” Illustrated London News 99 (21 November 1891), p. 667. 113. “Novels of the Week,” Athenaeum 3320 (13 June 1891), p. 762. 114. Review of Gentleman Upcott’s Daughter by Tom Cobbleigh, Bookman (December 1892), p. 90. 115. “Novels of the Week,” Athenaeum 3359 (12 March 1892), p. 339. 116. Review of A Phantom from the East by Pierre Loti, Publishers’ Circular 1378 (26 November 1892), p. 631. 117. Based on the notoriety of its authors and publisher, the Keynotes Series, of all the late Victorian fiction series, has garnered the most attention. See, for instance, Wendell V. Harris’s “John Lane’s Keynotes Series and the Fiction of the 1890’s,” PMLA 83 (1968), pp. 1407–13; James G. Nelson’s The Early Nineties: A View from the Bodley Head (Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1971); Margaret D. Stetz’s “Sex, Lies, and Printed Cloth: Bookselling at the Bodley Head in the Eighteen-Nineties,” Victorian Studies 35 (1991), pp. 71–86; and Kirsten MacLeod’s Fictions of British Decadence: High Art, Popular Writing, and the Fin de Siècle (New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2006). 118. Though the latter came from a long publishing family and was the grand- son of the Scottish publisher of the same name.

[email protected] Bibliography

Archival Sources

Catalogue of W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library (1885), Archive and Special Collections, University of Regina, Canada. Richard Bentley and Son Papers, 1806–1915, Rare Book and Manuscript Library, University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, USA. W. H. Smith Archive, Special Collections, University of Reading, UK.

Digital Sources

Alston, Robin. Library History Database [currently, no fixed web address]. Bassett, Troy J. At the Circulating Library: A Database of Victorian Fiction, 1837–1901. Victorian Research Web. 2019. www.victorianresearch.org/atcl. British Library Newspapers. Gale Cengage Learning. 2016. The British Newspaper Archive. Findmypast. 2019. www.britishnewspaperarchive. co.uk. British Periodicals. ProQuest. 2019. Ebbes, Verena, et al. The English Novel, 1830–1836: A Bibliographical Survey of Fiction Published in the British Isles. 2016. http://www.romtext.org.uk/ resources/english-novel-1830-36/. Garside, Peter, et al. British Fiction 1800–1829: A Database of Production, Cir- culation and Reception. 2004. http://www.british-fiction.cf.ac.uk. Léger-St-Jean, Marie. Price One Penny: Cheap Literature, 1837–1860. 2018. http://www.priceonepenny.info.

© The Editor(s) (if applicable) and The Author(s), under exclusive 237 license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2020 T. J. Bassett, The Rise and Fall of the Victorian Three-Volume Novel, New Directions in Book History, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-030-31926-7

[email protected] 238 BIBLIOGRAPHY

Nineteenth-Century UK Periodicals. Gale Cengage Learning. 2016. Oxford Dictionary of National Biography. Oxford University Press. 2019. Times Digital Archive. Gale Cengage Learning. 2019. Welsh Newspapers Online. National Library of Wales. newspapers.library.wales.

Primary Sources

A.,L.F.“ACauserie.”Illustrated London News 99 (21 November 1891): 667. Advertisement for Arrowsmith. Athenaeum 2936 (2 February 1884): 166. Advertisement for Arrowsmith. Athenaeum 3124 (10 September 1887): 352. Advertisement for Mudie’s Select Library. Athenaeum 2749 (3 July 1880): 5. Advertisement for Sampson Low. Athenaeum 3488 (1 September 1894): 300. Advertisement for T. Fisher Unwin. Academy 1017 (31 October 1891): 392. Advertisement for W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Library. Athenaeum 2754 (7 August 1880): 192. Arrowsmith,J.W.“Preface.”Called Back by Hugh Conway. Bristol: Arrowsmith, 1898. Bentley, Richard and Son. A List of the Principal Publications Issued from New Burlington Street. 8 volumes. London: Bentley, 1893–1920. “Book Notes.” Bookman 35 (August 1894): 133. Bramston, Mary. Blue Bell. London: Marcus Ward, 1878. “Christmas Books.” Athenaeum 2927 (1 December 1883): 700. “Contemporary Literature.” Westminster Review 137 (1892): 224–25. Conway, Hugh [Frederick J. Fargus]. Called Back. Bristol: Arrowsmith, 1884. The English Catalogue of Books. 7 volumes. London: Sampson Low, 1863–1906. Falconer, Lanoe [Mary Elizabeth Hawker]. Mademoiselle Ixe. London: T. Fisher Unwin, 1890. “The Fate of Three Volumes.” Speaker (28 July 1894): 97–98. “Gift-Books.” Academy (1 December 1883): 362–63. Gissing, George. New Grub Street. Ed. Stephen Arata. Peterborough: Broadview Press, 2008. Haggard, H. Rider. “About Fiction.” Contemporary Review 51 (February 1887): 172. Haggard, H. Rider. The Days of My Life. 2 volumes. London: Longman, 1926. Haggard, H. Rider. “The Three-Volume Novel.” Times (27 July 1894): 11. “Iredale’s Library.” Publishers’ Circular (9 December 1893): 285. Jerome, Jerome K., ed. My First Book. London: Chatto & Windus, 1894. Labouchere, Henry. Rev. of Called Back. Truth (3 January 1884): 5. Lang, Andrew. “Realism and Romance.” Contemporary Review 52 (November 1887): 683. “Literature, Science, Etc.” Speaker (7 July 1894): 3. Marston, Westland. The Family Credit. London: Ward & Lock, 1862.

[email protected] BIBLIOGRAPHY 239

Moore, George. “Apologia Pro Scriptus Meis.” Lewis Seymour and Some Women. New York: Boni & Liveright, 1922. i–xxxiii. Moore, George. Literature at Nurse, or Circulating Morals. London: Vizetelly, 1885. Moore, George. A Modern Lover. 3 volumes. London: Tinsley Brother, 1883. Moore, George. A Mummer’s Wife. London: Vizetelly, 1884. Moore, George. “The New Censorship of Literature.” Pall Mall Gazette (10 December 1884): 1–2. “News Notes.” Bookman 35 (August 1894): 133–34. “Novels.” Saturday Review 70 (8 November 1890): 534. “Novels of the Week.” Athenaeum 3289 (8 November 1890): 622. “Novels of the Week.” Athenaeum 3320 (13 June 1891): 762. “Novels of the Week.” Athenaeum 3359 (12 March 1892): 339. “Novels of the Week.” Athenaeum 2906 (7 July 1883): 13. “The Old Three-Decker.” Saturday Review (14 July 1894): 44. “A Once Meek and Downtrodden Race.” Times (25 July 1894): 10. Quiller-Couch, Arthur. “A Literary Causerie.” Speaker (21 July 1894): 77. Rev. of Gentleman Upcott’s Daughter by Tom Cobbleigh. Bookman (December 1892): 90. Rev. of John Sherman, and Dhoya by Gonconagh. Academy 1027 (9 January 1892): 35. Rev. of The Loyalist’s Daughter. United Service Magazine (May 1867): 123. Rev. of A Modern Lover by George Moore. Spectator (18 August 1883): 1069. Rev. of A Phantom from the East by Pierre Loti. Publishers’ Circular 1378 (26 November 1892): 631. Rev. of The Story of Eleanor Lambert by Magdalen Brooke. Academy 981 (21 February 1891): 183. Rev. of Treasure Island by Robert Louis Stevenson. Graphic (15 December 1883): 59. Stevenson, Robert Louis. “A Gossip on Romance.” Longman’s Magazine 1 (November 1882): 69–79. Stevenson, Robert Louis. The Letters of Robert Louis Stevenson. Volume 3. Eds. Bradford A. Booth and Ernest Mehew. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1994. Stevenson, Robert Louis. “The Morality of the Profession of Letters.” Fortnightly Review 157 (April 1881): 513–20. Stevenson, Robert Louis. Treasure Island. New York: Oxford University Press, 1985. “The Three-Decker.” Saturday Review (28 July 1894): 93. “The Three-Volume Novel.” Times (24 July 1894): 10. “Treasure Island.” Pall Mall Gazette (15 December 1883): 4.

[email protected] 240 BIBLIOGRAPHY

“Treasure Island.” Saturday Review (8 December 1883): 737. Vizetelly, Henry. Glances Back Through Seventy Years: Autobiographical and Other Reminiscences. 2 volumes. London: Kegan Paul, 1893.

Secondary Sources

Adburgham, Alison. Silver Fork Society: Fashionable Life and Literature from 1814 to 1840. London: Constable, 1983. Altick, Richard D. The English Common Reader. Columbus: Ohio University Press, 1959. Anderson, Nancy Fix. Woman Against Women in Victorian England: A Life of Eliza Lynn Linton. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1987. Anderson, Patricia, and Jonathan Rose, eds. British Literary Publishing Houses, 1820–1880. Dictionary of Literary Biography. Volume 106. Detroit: Gale, 1991. Argus, David. “Youth on the Prow: The First Publication of Treasure Island.” Studies in Scottish Literature 25 (1990): 83–99. Bassett, Troy J. “T. Fisher Unwin’s Pseudonym Library: Literary Marketing and Authorial Identity.” English Literature in Transition, 1880–1920 47 (2004): 143–60. Black, Alistair, and Peter Hoare. The Cambridge History of Libraries in Britain and Ireland. Volume 3 (1850–2000). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2006. Block, Andrew. The English Novel, 1740–1850. 1939. Reprinted edition. London: Dawsons, 1961. Boase, Frederick. Modern English Biography. 6 volumes. London: Frank Cass, 1965. Buurma, Rachel Sagner. “Individuality, Corporate Authority and the Archive: The Production of Authorship in the Late-Victorian England.” Victorian Studies 50 (2007): 15–42. Brown, R. H. Arrowsmith: 1854–1954. Bristol: Arrowsmith, 1955. Calder, Jenni. Robert Louis Stevenson: A Life Study. New York: Oxford University Press, 1980. Cave, Richard. A Study of the Novels of George Moore. Gerrards Cross: Colin Smythe, 1978. Clarke, John Stock. Margaret Oliphant: A Bibliography. Brisbane: University of Queensland, 1986. Colclough, Stephen. “‘A Larger Outlay Than Any Return’: The Library of W. H. Smith and Son, 1860–1873.” Publishing History 54 (2003): 67–93. Colclough, Stephen. “New Innovations in Audience Control: The Select Library and Sensation.” Reading and the Victorians. Eds. Matthew Bradley and Juliet John. London: Routledge, 2016. 31–46.

[email protected] BIBLIOGRAPHY 241

Colclough, Stephen. “Station to Station: The LNWR and the Emergence of the Railway Bookstall, 1840–1875.” Printing Places: Locations of Book Produc- tion and Distribution Since 1500. Eds. John Hinks and Catherine Armstrong. , DE: Oak Knoll Press, 2005. 169–84. Connolly, Joseph. Jerome K Jerome: A Critical Biography. London: Orbis Pub- lishing, 1982. Eliot, Simon. “Bookselling by the Backdoor: Circulating Libraries, Booksellers and Book Clubs 1876–1966.” A Genius for Letters. Eds. Robin Myers and Michael Harris. Newcastle upon Tyne, DE: Oak Knoll Press, 1995. 145–66. Eliot, Simon. “Fiction and Non-fiction: One- and Three-Volume Novels in Some Mudie Catalogues, 1857–94.” Publishing History 66 (2009): 31–47. Eliot, Simon. Some Patterns and Trends in British Publishing 1800–1919. Lon- don: Bibliographical Society, 1994. Eliot, Simon. “The Three-Decker Novel and Its First Cheap Reprint, 1862–94.” Library 7 (1985): 38–53. Engar, Ann W. “The Minerva Press.” The British Literary Book Trade, 1700–1820. Eds. J. K. Bracken and Joel Silver. Detroit: Gale Research, 1995. 191–97. Erickson, Lee. The Economy of Literary Form: English Literature and the Indus- trialization of Publishing, 1800–1850. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1996. Ewing, Douglas C. “The Three-Volume Novel.” Papers of the Bibliographical Society of America 61.3 (1967): 201–7. Farrow, Anthony. George Moore. Boston: Twayne, 1978. Feltes,N.N.Literary Capital and the Late Victorian Novel. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1993. Feltes, N. N. Modes of Production of Victorian Novels. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1986. Ferguson, Walter D. The Influence of Flaubert on George Moore. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1934. Finkelstein, David. The House of Blackwood: Author-Publisher Relations in the Victorian Era. University Park: Pennsylvania State University Press, 2002. Finkelstein, David. “‘The Secret’: British Publishers and Mudie’s Struggle for Economic Survival 1861–64.” Publishing History 34 (1993): 21–50. Foucault, Michel. “What Is an Author?” Language, Counter-Memory, Practice. Trans. Donald F. Bouchard and Sherry Simon. Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1977. Frazier, Adrian. George Moore, 1852–1933. New Haven: Yale University Press, 2000. Frost, Simon R. The Business of the Novel: Economics, Aesthetics and the Case of Middlemarch. London: Pickering & Chatto, 2012. Furnas,J.C.Voyage to Windward: The Life of Robert Louis Stevenson. New York: Sloane, 1951.

[email protected] 242 BIBLIOGRAPHY

Garside, Peter, and Rainer Schöwerling. The English Novel 1770–1829. Volume II: 1800–1829. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2000. Genette, Gerard. Paratexts: Thresholds of Interpretation. New York: Cambridge University Press, 1997. Gettmann, Royal. A Victorian Publisher: A Study of the Bentley Papers. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1960. Griest, Guinevere L. Mudie’s Circulating Library and the Victorian Novel. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1970. Harris, Margaret. A Checklist of the “Three-Decker” Collection in the Fisher Library, University of Sydney. Sydney: University of Sydney, 1980. Harris, Wendall V. “John Lane’s Keynotes Series and the Fiction of the 1890’s.” Publications of the Modern Language Association of America 83 (1968): 1407– 13. Heilbrun, Carolyn G. The Garnett Family. New York: Macmillan, 1961. Heywood, C. “Flaubert, Miss Braddon, and George Moore.” Comparative Lit- erature 12 (1960): 151–58. Houghton, Walter E., et al. The Wellesley Index to Victorian Periodicals, 1824– 1900. 5 volumes. Toronto: University of Toronto, 1966–1989. Howsam, Leslie. Kegan Paul: A Victorian Imprint. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1999. Hynes, Samuel. The Edwardian Turn of Mind. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1968. Jefferson, George. Edward Garnett: A Life in Literature. London: Jonathan Cape, 1982. Jordan, Jane. “‘Literature at Nurse’: George Moore, Ouida, and Fin-de-siècle Literary Censorship.” George Moore: Influence and Collaboration. Eds. Ann Heilmann and Mark Llewellyn. Wilmington: University of Delaware Press, 2014. 69–82. Judd, Catherine A. “Male Pseudonyms and Female Authority in Victorian Eng- land.” Literature in the Marketplace: Nineteenth-Century British Publishing and Reading Practices. Eds. John O. Jordan and Robert L. Patten. Cam- bridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995. 250–68. Katz, Wendy Roberta. Rider Haggard and the Fiction of Empire: A Critical Study of British Imperial Fiction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1987. Keating, Peter. The Haunted Study: A Social History of the English Novel 1875– 1914. New York: Fontana Press, 1989. King, Andrew. “‘Literature of the Kitchen’: Cheap Serial Fiction of the 1840s and 1850s.” A Companion to Sensation Fiction. Ed. Pamela K. Gilbert. New York: Wiley-Blackwell, 2011. 38–53. Lauterbach, Charles E., and Edward S. Lauterbach. “The Nineteenth Century Three-Volume Novel.” Papers of the Bibliographical Society of America 51.4 (1957): 263–302.

[email protected] BIBLIOGRAPHY 243

Law, Graham, et. al. Charlotte M. Brame (1836–1884): Towards a Primary Bib- liography. Brisbane: University of Queensland, 2011. Law, Graham. “‘Nothing but a Newspaper’: The Contested Space of Serial Fic- tion in the 1840s Press.” Encounters in the Victorian Press: Editors, Authors, Readers. Eds. Laurel Brake and Julie F. Codell. New York: Palgrave Macmil- lan, 2005. 29–49. Law, Graham. Serializing Fiction in the Victorian Press. New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2000. Law, Graham, and Andrew Maunder. Wilkie Collins: A Literary Life. Palgrave Macmillan, 2008. Law, Graham, and Robert L. Patten. “The Serial Revolution.” The Cambridge History of the Book in Britain. Volume 6: 1830–1914. Ed. David McKitterick. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2009. 144–71. Loeber, Rolf, and Magda Loeber. A Guide to Irish Fiction 1650–1900. Dublin: Four Courts Press, 2006. Macdonald, Peter D. British Literary Culture and Publishing Practice, 1880– 1914. London: Cambridge University Press, 1997. MacLeod, Kirsten. Fictions of British Decadence: High Art, Popular Writing, and the Fin de Siècle. New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2006. Madden, R. R. The Literary Life and Correspondence of the Countess of Blessington. 2 volumes. London: Newby, 1855. Maixner, Paul, ed. Robert Louis Stevenson: The Critical Heritage. London: Rout- ledge & Kegan Paul, 1981. McGann, Jerome. The Beauty of Inflections: Literary Investigations in Historical Method and Theory. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1985. Menke, Richard. “The End of the Three-Volume Novel System, 27 June 1894.” BRANCH: Britain, Representation and Nineteenth-Century History. Ed. Dino Franco Felluga. Extension of Romanticism and Victorianism on the Net. 2013. Millgate, Jane. “Making It New: Scott, Constable, Ballantyne, and the Publica- tion of Ivanhoe.” Studies in English Literature 34 (1994): 795–811. Mitchell, Judith. “A New Perspective: Naturalism in George Moore’s AMum- mer’s Wife.” Victorian Newsletter 71 (1987): 20–27. Moretti, Franco. Atlas of the European Novel, 1800–1900. London: Verso, 1998. Morgan, Charles. The House of Macmillan, 1843–1943. London: Macmillan, 1943. Mullin, Katherine. “Pernicious Literature: Vigilance in the Age of Zola (1886– 1899).” Prudes on the Prowl: Fiction and Obscenity in England, 1850 to the Present Day. Eds. David Bradshaw and Rachel Potter. Oxford: Oxford Uni- versity Press, 2013. 30–51. Nash, Andrew. William Clark Russell and the Victorian Nautical Novel. London: Pickering & Chatto, 2014.

[email protected] 244 BIBLIOGRAPHY

Nelson, James G. The Early Nineties: A View from the Bodley Head. Boston: Harvard University Press, 1971. Nesta, Frederick. “The Myth of the ‘Triple-Headed Monster’: The Economics of the Three-Volume Novel.” Publishing History 61 (2007): 47–69. Nesta, Frederick. “The Series as Commodity: Marketing T. Fisher Unwin’s Pseudonym and Autonym Libraries.” The Culture of the Publisher’s Series, Vol- ume I: Authors, Publishers and the Shaping of Taste. Ed. John Spiers. London: Palgrave Macmillan, 2011. 171–87. Newbolt, Peter. G. A. Henty 1832–1902: A Bibliographic Study.NewYork:Scolar Press, 1996. Newbolt, Peter. William Tinsley, Speculative Publisher. Burlington, VT: Ashgate, 2001. Nowell-Smith, Simon. The House of Cassell 1848–1958. London: Cassell, 1958. Patten, Robert L. “Richard Bentley (1794–1871).” Oxford Dictionary of National Biography. Peterson, Linda H. Becoming a Woman of Letters: Myths of Authorship and Facts of the Victorian Market. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2009. Phegley, Jennifer. Educating the Proper Woman Reader: Victorian Family Literary Magazines and the Cultural Health of the Nation. Columbus: Ohio State University Press, 2004. Phillipps, Evelyne March. “Lanoe Falconer.” Cornhill Magazine 32 (February 1912): 231–44. Pierce, Jason A. “The Belle Lettrist and the People’s Publisher; Or, The Context of Treasure Island’s First-Form Publication.” Victorian Periodicals Review 31 (1998): 356–68. Purdy, Richard Little. Thomas Hardy: A Bibliographical Study. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1954. Raven, James, and Antonia Forster. The English Novel 1770–1829. Volume I: 1770–1799. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2000. Reade, Brian. Aubrey Beardsley. New York: Viking, 1967. Roberts, Lewis. “Trafficking in Literary Authority: Mudie’s Select Library and the Commodification of the Victorian Novel.” Victorian Literature and Cul- ture 34 (2006): 1–25. Robinson, Solveig C. “Sir, It Is an Outrage: George Bentley, Robert Black, and the Condition of the Mid-List Author in Victorian Britain.” Book History 10 (2007): 131–168. Sadleir, Michael. “Bentley’s Standard Novel Series: It’s History and Achieve- ment.” Colophon 10 (1932): 45–60. Sadleir, Michael. XIX Century Fiction: A Bibliographical Record Based on His Own Collection. 2 volumes. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1951. Saunders, David, and Dugald Williamson. On Pornography: Literature, Sexuality and Obscenity Law. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1993.

[email protected] BIBLIOGRAPHY 245

Showalter, Elaine. A Literature of their Own: British Women Novelists from Brontë to Lessing. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1977. Showalter, Elaine. Sexual Anarchy: Gender and Culture at the Fin de Siècle.New York: Viking, 1990. Stetz, Margaret D. “Sex, Lies, and Printed Cloth: Bookselling at the Bodley Head in the Eighteen-Nineties.” Victorian Studies 35 (1991): 71–86. Stewart, R. W. Benjamin Disraeli: A List of Writings by Him. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1972. Sutherland, John. “The Economics of the Victorian Three-Volume Novel.” Busi- ness Archives 41 (1976): 25–30. Sutherland, John. “The Fiction Earning Patterns of Thackeray, Dickens, George Eliot and Trollope.” Browning Institute Studies 7 (1979): 71–92. Sutherland, John. The Life of Walter Scott: A Critical Biography. Oxford: Black- well, 1995. Sutherland, John. “Publishing History: A Hole in the Centre of Literary Sociol- ogy.” Critical Inquiry 14.3 (1988): 574–89. Sutherland, John. The Stanford Companion to Victorian Fiction. Stanford: Stan- ford University Press, 1989. Sutherland, John. Victorian Fiction: Writers, Publishers, Readers. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1995. Sutherland, John. Victorian Novelists and Publishers. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1976. Thomas, Donald. A Long Time Burning: The History of Literary Censorship in England. New York: Praeger, 1969. Tillotson, Kathleen. Novels of the Eighteen Forties. London: Oxford University Press, 1954. Todd, William B., and Ann Bowden. Sir Walter Scott: A Bibliographical History 1796–1832. Newcastle upon Tyne, DE: Oak Knoll Press, 1998. Topp, Charles W. Victorian Yellowbacks and Paperbacks, 1849–1905. Volume 8. Denver, CO: Hermitage Antiquarian Bookshop, 2005. Tredrey, F. D. The House of Blackwood, 1804–1954. Edinburgh: Blackwood, 1954. Tuchman, Gaye, and Nina E. Fortin. Edging Women Out: Victorian Novelists, Publishers and Social Change. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1989. Turner, John R. “J. W. Arrowsmith.” The Dictionary of Literary Biography.Vol- ume 106. Eds. Patricia Anderson and Jonathan Rose. Detroit: Gale, 1991. 11–14. Unwin, Philip. The Publishing Unwins. London: Heinemann, 1972. Vaninskaya, Anna. “The Late-Victorian Romance Revival: A Generic Excursus.” English Literature in Transition, 1880–1920 51.1 (2008): 57–79. Vann, J. Don. Victorian Novels in Serial. New York: Modern Language Associa- tion, 1985.

[email protected] 246 BIBLIOGRAPHY

Vizetelly, Ernest A. Émile Zola: Novelist and Reformer: An Account of His Life and Work. London: John Lane, 1904. Wallins, Roger P. “Richard Bentley.” British Literary Publishing Houses, 1820– 1880. Eds. Patricia J. Anderson and Jonathan Rose. Detroit: Gale, 1991. 39– 52. Weedon, Alexis. Victorian Publishing: The Economics of Book Production for a Mass Market. Burlington, VT: Ashgate, 2003. Welsh, Charles. “How ‘Called Back’ Came to be Written.” Literary Collector (October 1900): 24–25. Wilson, Charles. First with the News: The History of W. H. Smith 1792–1972.New York: Doubleday, 1986. Wilson, Nicola. “Circulating Morals (1900–1915).” Prudes on the Prowl: Fiction and Obscenity in England, 1850 to the Present Day. Eds. David Bradshaw and Rachel Potter. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2013. 52–70. Wolff, Robert Lee. Nineteenth-Century Fiction: A Bibliographical Catalogue Based on the Collection Formed by Robert Lee Wolff. 5 volumes. New York: Garland Publishing, 1981–1986.

[email protected] Index

A Arrowsmith, James William, 14, 185, Academy, 116, 186, 190, 223, 224 211, 215 Acme Library, 212, 227 Arrowsmith’s Bristol Library, 14, 212, Adams and Francis, 37 217–220, 225 Adams, Bertha [Mrs. Leith], 155 Arrowsmith’s 3/6 Series, 212, Adventure Series, 226 219–221 Aimard, Gustave, 64 Arrowsmith’s Two-Shilling Library, Ainsworth’s Magazine, 75, 95 212, 218–220 Ainsworth, William Henry, 6, 42, 92 Asmodeus, 65 Alexander, Mrs., 42, 51, 65, 104, Athenaeum, 116, 126, 152, 190, 224 121, 127, 131, 155 Auerbach, Berthold, 117 Allen, Grant, 50, 218, 227 Austen, Jane, 2, 8, 148, 154 Allen, W.H., 65 Autonym Library, 212, 226 All the Year Round, 78, 82, 83, 85, 86, 88, 93 Alston, Robin, 148, 180 B Angus, David, 190 Ballantyne, R.M., 189, 190 Anstey, F., 218–220, 234 Balzac, Honoré, 196 Archibald Constable’s Miscellany, 211 Banks, Isabella, 105 Argosy, 81, 86, 87, 90, 92, 125, 134, Barrett, Frank, 65, 92, 184 140 Beale, Anne, 50, 51, 109 Arnold, Edward, 65 Beardsley, Aubrey, 223, 227 Arrowsmith, Isaac, 215 Belgravia, 81, 85, 86, 90, 92

© The Editor(s) (if applicable) and The Author(s), under exclusive 247 license to Springer Nature Switzerland AG 2020 T. J. Bassett, The Rise and Fall of the Victorian Three-Volume Novel, New Directions in Book History, https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-030-31926-7

[email protected] 248 INDEX

Bentley and Son, 126, 134 Burney, Frances, 2 Bentley, George, 5, 67 Bushby, Mrs., 55 Bentley, Richard, 5, 13, 21, 55–61, 68, 101, 102, 114 C Bentley’s Favourite Novels, 125, 126 Cadell, Robert, 211 Bentley’s Library, 149 Caine, Hall, 66 Bentley’s Miscellany, 78, 81, 85, 87, Cambridge University Library, 23 91, 104, 146 Cameo Series, 226 Bentley’s Standard Novels, 211, 233 Capes, John Moore, 108, 118 Besant, Walter, 42, 43, 87, 92, 155, Cardiff Times, 83, 86, 87, 93 174, 217 Cardiff Weekly Mail, 86, 93 Blackett, Henry, 62 Carey, Rosa N., 127, 132, 134, 135, Blackett, Spencer, 65 138–141 Blackie, 189 Carlén, Emilie Flygare-, 21, 54, 55 Blackmore, R.D., 178 Carleton, William, 50, 62 Black, William, 42, 43, 50, 51, 84, 92 Cassell, 30, 65, 82, 190–192, 218, Blackwood and Sons, 56 230 Blackwood’s Edinburgh Magazine, Cassell’s Illustrated Family Paper, 81 37–39, 78, 81, 85, 87, 91 Cassell’s Magazine, 82, 83, 93 Blackwood, William, 56 Cassell’s Saturday Journal, 93 Block, Andrew, 20 Cawthorn and Hutt’s British Library, Blue Bell Series, 212, 214, 215 149 Boase, Frederic, 22 Censorship, 185, 195, 197–201, 206, Bodleian Library, 20, 180 208–210, 231, 232 Bolton Weekly Journal, 83, 86, 87, 93 Chambers’s Edinburgh Journal, 81, Bookman, 173, 179, 235 86, 93, 125 Booksellers’ Question of 1852, 7 Chamier, Frederick, 62 Bow Bells, 75 Chapman and Hall, 6, 39, 56–61, Boyle, Fred, 127, 131, 132, 134 63–65, 68, 88, 213 Bradbury and Evans, 56, 63 Chatto and Windus, 27, 56, 57, 60, Braddon, Mary Elizabeth, 10, 12, 61, 64–69, 88, 184, 228, 229 41–43, 64, 75, 84, 87, 92, 96, Cheap reprint, 4, 10, 14, 102, 156, 173, 174, 176, 184, 202, 119, 125, 147, 156, 157, 159, 203, 232 172–174, 176, 183–185, 212, Brame, Charlotte M., 214, 233 213, 222 Bramston, Mary, 214, 233 Cheeseman, Clara, 50 British Library, 20, 22, 23 Chetwynd, Julia Bosville, 50, 75 Brontë, Charlotte, 1, 11, 40 Children’s Library, 226 Broughton, Rhoda, 6, 12, 97, 103, Chiswick Library, 149 104, 111, 113, 119, 121, 124, Circulating libraries, 1, 4, 8–10, 13, 125, 134, 135, 139–141 17, 26, 31, 38, 67, 70, 75, 82, Buchanan, Robert, 51, 206, 218, 226 84, 101, 102, 122, 141, 145,

[email protected] INDEX 249

147–149, 151–153, 157–160, Day’s Library, 149 180, 181, 184, 185, 193, 195, Dickens, Charles, 1, 6, 7, 9, 40, 75, 198, 200–202, 207, 210, 213, 84, 93 221, 227, 228, 232 Dickens, Charles, Jr., 16, 88, 93 City of London Publishing Company, Digby, Long, 65 55, 65 Dillwyn, Amy, 50 Clarke, John Stock, 22 Disraeli, Benjamin, 62 Climber’s Guides, 226 Dostoyevsky, Fyodor, 208 Colburn, Henry, 36, 56–59, 61, 62, Doudney, Sarah, 65 68, 102, 211 Doyle, Arthur Conan, 217 Colclough, Stephen, 10, 13, 17, 18, Drosines, George, 223, 225 147, 148, 152, 158, 159, 181, Dublin University Magazine, 83, 85, 231, 233 86, 91, 95, 125 Collins, Charles James, 64 Collins, Wilkie, 42, 63, 84, 87, 92, 217 E Conrad, Joseph, 194 Eastaugh, Anna, 151 Constable, Archibald I, 2 East Lynne, 43, 74, 104 Constable, Archibald II, 212, 227 Eden, Remington and Co., 64 Contemporary Review, 192, 193, 230 Edwards, Amelia B., 215 Cooper, James Fenimore, 21, 53, 54, Edwards, Annie, 109, 121, 124, 132 62, 211 Egerton, George, 227 Corelli, Marie, 134, 135, 139–141 Eiloart, Elizabeth, 112, 118 Cornhill Magazine, 78, 81, 85, 86, Eliot, George, 1, 33, 40, 56, 70, 84, 88, 92, 104, 186, 234 194 Countess of Blessington, 36, 70 Eliot, Simon, 9, 17, 28, 31, 96, 147, Coustillas, Pierre, 11 154 Craik, Georgiana, 127, 131 Elliot, Anne, 131, 133 Craven, Pauline Marie, 117, 118 Elliot, Emma, 128, 135, 139 Crawford, F. Marion, 42, 53, 54, 143, Ellis, Sarah Stickney, 94 226 English Catalogue of Books (ECB), 21, Creasy, Edward, 112, 121, 123 22, 32, 175 Crockett, S.R., 226 Erickson, Lee, 8, 17, 69, 180, 228 Crommelin, May, 51, 215, 217, 219 Evans, H.C., 215 Curry, William J., 21 Ewald, Herman, 109, 113, 117

D Daniel Deronda, 38, 39, 84 F Daniel, Elizabeth, 42, 43 Family Herald, 81, 82, 85, 86, 93, Daniel, Robert Mackenzie, 43, 62 134, 204, 212, 214 Daudet, Alphonse, 210 Family Library, 211 Day, Lal Behari, 53 Family Story-Teller, 212, 214

[email protected] 250 INDEX

Fargus, Frederick J., 215, 217, 218, Good Words, 85, 86, 92 233 Google Books, 22 Farjeon, Benjamin L., 51, 92, 155, Gore, Catherine, 42, 43, 62 217 Gothic novel, 148 Farrie, Hugh, 135, 138, 141 Grand, Sarah, 199 Feltes, N.N., 7, 17, 229 Grant, James, 36, 42, 51 Fenn, George Manville, 42, 92 Graphic, 40, 82, 83, 85, 86, 93, 140, Fielding, Henry, 2 191, 230, 232 Finkelstein, David, 10, 11, 17, 97, 98, Grey, Catherine Maria, 62 143, 144, 229 Griest, Guinevere L., 5, 6, 9, 10, 16, Fitzgerald, Percy H., 51, 104, 106, 97, 99, 103, 152, 180, 181, 231 110, 112, 120, 121 Griffith and Farran, 65, 215, 216 Flaubert, Gustave, 196, 202 Grossmith, George, 220 Fonblanque, Albany de, 121, 123 Grossmith, Weedon, 220 Forrester, Mrs., 41 Grosvenor Gallery Library, 149 Forster, Antonia, 15, 19, 96 Guy Mannering, 3 Fortnightly Review, 92 Four-volume novel, 3, 6, 20, 33, 36–40, 70, 101 H Frapen, Ilsa, 223 Haggard, H. Rider, 14, 50, 177, 178, Fraser, Augusta Zelia, 50 186, 192–194, 217, 230 Fraser, John Baillie, 36 Half-Holiday Handbooks, 221 Fraser’s Magazine, 83, 91, 125 Haliburton, Thomas Chandler, 36 Frazier, Adrian, 202, 209, 232, 233 Hardy, Thomas, 1, 142, 143, 182, Fullerton, Lady, 110, 118–121 232 Harris, Margaret, 22 Harte, Bret, 53–55 G Harvard University Library, 20 Garnett, Edward, 221, 222, 225, 234 Harwood, John Berwick, 104–107, Garside, Peter, 2, 15, 19, 56, 96–98 119, 121, 145 Genette, Gerard, 225, 235 Hatton, Anne Julia Kemble, 33 Gentleman’s Magazine, 102 Hatton, Joseph, 219 George Smith’s Circulating Library, HathiTrust Digital Library, 22 149 Hawker, Mary Elizabeth, 222, 223 Gerald Fitzgerald, 33 Hawthorne, Julian, 54, 55 Gettmann, Royal, 5, 6, 12, 13, 16, Hay, Mary Cecil, 82 99, 103, 118, 144, 145, 232 H.C.Copson’s Circulating Library, Gilbert, W.S., 151 149 Gissing, Algernon, 27, 66 Heinemann, William, 8, 61, 65, 66, Gissing, George, 11, 94, 136, 212, 227, 234 139–141, 144, 185, 208, 226, Henley, W.E., 14, 186–188, 190–192 231 Henty, G.A., 3, 27, 67, 99, 189, 190

[email protected] INDEX 251

Hermit, The, 21 James, Elizabeth, 11 Historical novel, 36, 37, 50, 62 James, G.P.R., 41, 42, 62, 95 History of the Book, 6, 9 James, Henry, 53 H. M. S. Pinafore, 151 Japp, Alexander Hay, 188 Hobbes, John Oliver, 223, 235 Jarrold, 212, 227 Hodder and Stoughton, 221 Jenkins, John Edward, 84 Holdsworth, Annie E., 227 Jerome, Jerome K., 219, 220, 228, Home Chimes, 219 229, 234 Hookham’s Circulating Library, 148 Jewsbury, Geraldine, 87 Hookham, Thomas J., 148 J. Needham’s Circulating Library, 149 Hope, Anthony, 178, 217, 220 Johnston, Grace Keith, 27, 51 Household Words, 78, 81, 85 Jordan, John O., 11, 98 Houstoun, Matilda, 42, 43, 95 Howsam, Leslie, 11, 97 Hueffer, Ford H., 226 K Hugo, Victor, 38, 40, 54, 70 Katz, Wendy Roberta, 193 Hungerford, Margaret, 42, 43, 51, Keating, Peter, 210, 233 92, 226 Kenilworth, 2, 3, 16 Hunter, Ian, 198 Keynotes Series, 227, 235 Hurst and Blackett, 10, 15, 56, 57, King, Andrew, 75 59–69, 85, 88, 95, 101, 126, King, Henry S., 11, 38, 60, 64 142 King, Richard Ashe, 131, 132 Hurst, Daniel, 62 Kingsley, Henry, 51 Hutcheson, John C., 190 Kingsley, Charles, 6 Hutchinson, 27, 61, 65, 66, 212, 227 Kipling, Rudyard, 178, 182, 194

I L Illustrated London News, 81, 85, 86, Labouchere, Henry, 216 93, 208, 235 Lady’s Pictorial, 83 Illustrated London Times, 208 Lancashire Evening Post, 83, 86 Illustrated Times, 208 Lane, John, 185, 211, 212, 221, 227, Independent Novel Series, 212, 226 232, 235 Indiana University, 23 Lane, William, 33, 148 Ingelow, Jean, 38, 39, 70 Lang, Andrew, 14, 190–192, 218, Iredale’s Library, 149, 180 230 Isbister, William, 55 Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopaedia, 211 Lauterbach, Charles E., 4, 115 Lauterbach, Edward S., 4, 115 J Law, Graham, 11, 23, 69, 99, 145, Jackson Walford and Hodder, 221 233 James A. Acock’s Subscription Lawrence and Bullen, 65, 141 Circulating Library, 149 Lawrence, D.H., 210

[email protected] 252 INDEX

Lea and Blanchard, 21 Macmillan, 6, 16, 39, 56, 57, 60, 61, Lee, Edgar, 219 63, 65, 67–69, 88, 96, 102, 143, Lee, Vernon, 223 234 Le Fanu, J. Sheridan, 41, 51, 92, 103, Macmillan’s Magazine, 81, 88, 92, 105, 107, 109, 120, 121 186 Leicester Chronicle, 87, 93 Macquoid, Katherine S., 42, 128, Leisure Hour, 93 131, 132 Leng, William, 83, 87 Majendie, Margaret, 128, 132 Lever, Charles, 51, 62 Mallock, W.H., 206 Lewes, George Henry, 38 Manchester Weekly Times, 83, 86, 87, Leys, John Kirkwood, 27 93 Libraries’ Ultimatum of 1894, 171 Mandal, Anthony, 12, 19 Library Company Limited, 103 Marryat, Florence, 41, 42, 92, 104– Library of Congress, 20 107, 109, 112, 114, 118–121, Library of Trinity College Dublin, 20 141, 145 Linton, Eliza Lynn, 132 Marryat, Frederick, 191 Little, Alicia E.N., 117 Marshall Japp and Co., 221 Little Novels, 212, 227 Marshall’s British and Foreign Public Lives Worth Living, 221 Subscription Library, 149 Marston, Westland, 213, 233 Loeber, Magda, 22 Martin, Catherine, 136, 138 Loeber, Rolf, 22 Mathews, Elkin, 227 London Journal, 75, 81, 86, 93 Maunder, Andrew, 11, 145 London [magazine], 186 Maupassant, Guy de, 208 London Society, 85, 86, 92 Maxwell, John, 57, 59, 63–65, 68 Longman, 6, 10, 56–58, 61–63, 65, Mayo, Isabella, 129, 131, 134 68, 69, 95, 192, 211, 215 McGauran, 40 Longman’s Magazine, 92, 192, 230 Meeker, Mrs. Ogden, 37 Lord Campbell, 198 Meredith, George, 197 Lord Justice Cockburn, 199 Mermaid Series, 226 Loti, Pierre, 210, 235 Methuen, 61, 65, 66 Lovejoy’s Library, 149 Middlemarch, 17, 33, 38, 39, 84, 97 Low, Sampson, 32, 56, 57, 59–61, Miles’s Library, 149 63–65, 68, 178, 182 Minerva Library, 148 Lucas, Reginald, 41 Minerva Press, 3, 33, 97 Lytton, Edward Bulwer, 37, 70 Monthly Packet, 39, 92 Lytton, Rosina Bulwer, 50 Month [magazine], 125 Moore, George, 4, 14, 185, 195, 231, 232 M Moretti, Franco, 55 MacDonald, George, 51, 64, 92 Mortimer, John, 58, 62, 99 Mackenzie, Henry, 2 Moxon, Edward, 58, 62

[email protected] INDEX 253

Mudie, Arthur, 5 Oliphant, Laurence, 84 Mudie, Charles Edward, 5, 148, 195 Oliphant, Margaret, 1, 11, 12, 41, 42, Mudie’s Select Library, 1, 6, 10, 14, 51, 90, 92, 143, 226 15, 18, 101, 126, 144, 147, 149, Once a Week, 37, 78, 82, 85, 86, 93 152–157, 171, 173, 177, 180, Osbourne, Fanny, 187 195, 200 Osbourne, Lloyd, 187 Mühlbach, Luise, 107, 113, 117 Osgood, McIlvaine, 65 Murray, John, 10, 61, 211 Ouida, 6, 9, 10, 12, 174, 176, 223, Murray, Reginald Grenville, 129, 132 231 Oxford Dictionary of National N Biography, 22, 40, 144, 232, 233 Nash, Andrew, 11, 98, 144, 230 Oxford World’s Classics, 43 National Library, 20, 211 National Library of Scotland, 23 National Vigilance Association (NVA), P 209, 210 Naturalism, 202, 232 Pall Mall Gazette, 190, 191, 206, Nautical novel, 48, 191 208, 209, 230, 231 Nelson and Son, 189 Papers of the Bibliographical Society of Nesta, Frederick, 103, 144, 234 America, 4, 15, 144 Net Book system, 31 Parker, John W., 32, 59 Newbolt, Peter, 11 Part issue, 84, 94 Newby, T. Cautley, 21, 37, 56–59, Patten, Robert L., 9, 11, 69, 98, 144 61–63, 68, 95, 97, 142 Paul, Kegan, 64, 97, 229, 232 Newcastle Weekly Courant, 83, 86, 93 Payn, James, 42, 90, 92 New Grub Street, 11, 94, 228 Penguin Classics, 43 Newman, A.K., 33, 58, 61 Peterson, Linda H., 11, 98 New Monthly Magazine, 74, 78, 81, Phegley, Jennifer, 81 83, 85, 86, 91, 95 Philpots, J.C., 27 New Romance, 14, 185, 194 Pickering, Ellen, 62 New Woman, 227 Pictorial Times, 208 Nisbet, James, 189 Pierrot’s Library, 212, 227 Norris, W.E., 42, 92, 226 Pioneer Series, 212, 227 Notley, Frances E.M., 82 Potapenko, Ignatz Nikolaevich, 223 Nottinghamshire Guardian, 83, 86, 87, 93 Praed, Rosa Campbell, 50, 51, 206 Price, Eleanor C., 155 Pseudonym Library, 14, 212, O 221–227, 234 Obscene Publications Act of 1857, Publishers’ Circular, 9, 21, 28, 29, 198 116, 175, 177, 180, 181, 226, Ohnet, Georges, 210 235

[email protected] 254 INDEX

Q Schöwerling, Rainer, 2, 19, 56 Queen, 83 Schreiner, Olive, 50, 52, 223 Queen’s Cup, The, 4, 27, 66, 67 Scott, Sir Walter, 2, 95 Quiller-Couch, Arthur, 178, 182, 192 Select Library of Fiction, 213 Quiver, 74, 82 Sensation novel, 41, 43, 49, 64, 95 Sergeant, Adeline, 42, 82, 134, 136 Sheffield Daily Telegraph, 83, 86, 87, R 93 Railway Library, 213, 217, 218 Sheffield Independent, 83, 86, 87, 93, Randolph, Catherine, 51 134 Raven, James, 15, 19, 96 Sheffield Weekly Independent, 87 Raymond, Walter, 223, 226 Reade, Charles, 37, 70 Sheffield Weekly Telegraph, 87 Reed, Sir Edward J., 218 Shilling Library, 212, 213 Regina v. Hicklin, 199 Shillingsburg, Peter L., 11 Reid, Mayne, 51, 53, 54 Showalter, Elaine, 98, 194, 230 Reid, Sir Thomas Wemyss, 221 Silver-fork novel, 36 Rice’s Library, 149 Silver Library, 218 Richardson, Samuel, 2 Simmons, Vesta S., 226 Riddell, Charlotte, 11, 42, 43, 51, Simpkin, Marshall, 218 129, 132 Skeet, C.J., 57, 59, 63, 68 Rita, 82, 223 Smart, Hawley, 42, 43, 111, 118, Roberts, Lewis, 18, 101 121, 155 Robinson, F.W., 41–43, 63, 82, 92 Smith, Anne M. Carter, 122 Routledge, 59, 213, 217, 218 Smith, Elder, 6, 7, 10, 56–61, 63, 65, Runciman, James, 190 66, 68, 81, 88, 95, 104, 144, Russell, Dora, 87, 92 220, 234 Russell, William Clark, 42, 92, 98, Smith, Henry Walton, 151 144, 145, 230 Smythies’s Harriet Maria, 82 Smith, William Frederick Danvers, 151 S Smith, William Henry I, 151 Sadleir, Michael, 20, 211, 233 Sala, George Augustus, 208 Smith, William Henry II, 151, 165, Saturday Review, 178, 182, 190, 191, 166, 171 224, 230, 235 Society of Authors, 177, 178 Saunders and Otley, 32, 57–59, Sonnenschein, Swan, 57, 65, 68 61–63, 68 Spectator, 196, 197, 231 Saunders, David, 198 Spence, Catherine E., 98, 106, 109, Saunders, John, 110, 120 118 Scharling, Carl Henrik, 111, 118 Standard Novels, 102, 125 Scholar of Bygate, The, 27, 66 Stationers’ Company, 208 Scholl’s Circulating Library, 149 Stephenson, Eliza Tabor, 41, 42, 63

[email protected] INDEX 255

Stevenson, Robert Louis, 14, 185, Tinsley’s Magazine, 81, 92 229 Tinsley, William, 64 Stevenson, Thomas, 186 Tolstoy, Leo, 210 Stevens, William, 214 Treasure Island, 14, 185, 186, Stewart, R.W., 22 188–192, 228–230 St. James’s Magazine, 125 Trischler, 65 Story of the Nations, 226 Trollope, Anthony, 1, 39, 40, 42, 43, St. Paul’s Magazine, 38 70, 82, 91, 92, 94 Sunday Times, 36, 75, 80, 83 Trollope, Fanny, 43, 62, 78, 94 Surtees, Robert Smith, 62 Trollope, Frances, 42, 140 Sutherland, John, 3, 6, 16, 20, 56, Trübner, Nicholas, 37 103 Truth, 216 Symonds, John Addington, 187, 215 Tuchman, Gaye, 49, 98, 143, 146 Two-volume novel, 3, 12, 27, 32, 36, 40, 41, 65, 66, 70, 101, 144 T Tytler, Sarah, 214 Temple Bar, 75, 81, 85–87, 92, 104, 124–126, 134, 140, 186 Tennyson, Alfred Lord, 38 U Thackeray, William Makepeace, 1, 40, Unknown Authors’ Series, 212, 227 80, 94, 98 Unwin, T. Fisher, 14, 30, 65, 95, Thomas, Annie, 41, 42, 64, 92 185, 211, 212, 221, 234, 235 Thomas, Donald, 198, 231 Thomson, Katharine, 62 Three-volume novel, 1–10, 12–17, V 27, 28, 31, 32, 36, 40, 41, Vann, J. Don, 23 49, 50, 65–67, 69, 70, 81, 82, Vizetelly, Ernest, 209, 233 85, 96, 101–105, 115, 119, Vizetelly, Henry, 14, 98, 185, 201, 122, 124–127, 130, 131, 133, 208, 209, 232 134, 138–144, 146–148, 151, Vizetelly’s One-Volume Novels, 208, 153, 154, 157, 162–165, 168, 211, 218, 221 170–174, 176–179, 181, 182, 185, 188, 191, 194–197, 201, 210, 211, 213, 224, 227, 228, W 232 Wallins, Roger P., 104 Tillotsons Fiction Bureau, 83 Walpole, Frederick, 108, 120, 123 Tillotson, W.F., 87 Ward and Downey, 57, 60, 61, Times, 116, 177, 179, 182, 206 64–66, 68, 134 Times Digital Archive, 23 Ward and Lock, 125, 212–214, 233 Tinsley Brothers, 56, 57, 59, 60, Warden, Florence, 129, 132–134 63–65, 68, 75, 81, 88, 95, 126, Ward, Marcus, 212, 214, 233 142, 146, 196 Ward, Robert Plumer, 36 Tinsley, Samuel, 57, 60, 64, 68, 231 Warne, Frederick, 114, 126

[email protected] 256 INDEX

Waverley Novels, 3, 211 Wolff, Robert Lee, 20 Weedon, Alexis, 9, 131 Wood, Ellen [Mrs. Henry Wood], 12, Welcome Guest, 208 43, 92, 119–121, 184 Werner, Elizabeth, 54, 137, 138 Worcester Chronicle, 215 Westminster Review, 224, 235 World, 83 White, F.V., 56, 57, 60, 61, 64–69, 95, 126 Whittaker, 58, 61 Y W. H. Smith and Son’s Subscription Yeats, William Butler, 223, 225 Library, 1, 10, 13, 147, 151–154, Yellowbacks, 213 156–158, 161, 162, 165, 167, Yonge, Charlotte M., 39, 42, 70, 92 170–172, 177 York Herald, 83, 87, 93 Williamson, Dugald, 198 Young Folks, 188 Williamson, Harry Child, 113, 118, 145 Wilson, Charles, 152, 163, 180 Z Wingfield, Lewis, 129, 191 Zeit-Geist Library, 212, 227 Winter, John Strange, 218 Zola, Emile, 202, 208, 209, 232

[email protected]